Company Law

For optimal readability, we highly recommend downloading the document PDF, which you can do below.

Document Information:

  • Year:
  • Country: Liechtenstein
  • Language: English
  • Document Type: Domestic Law or Regulation
  • Topic:

LIECHTENSTEIN COMPANY
LAW
THE PREVALENT REVISED SECTIONS FROM
THE PERSONEN- UND GESELLSCHAFTSRECHT
ALSO RELEVANT LAWS ISSUED
SINCE PUBLICATION OF THE FIRST EDITION
COMPILED AND TRANSLATED
BY BRYAN JEEVES OBE

– I–
LIECHTENSTEIN COMPANY LAW

Respectfully dedicated
to H.S.H. The Reigning Prince Hans-Adam II
of Liechtenstein
and the Princely Liechtenstein Government
– II–

LIECHTENSTEIN COMPANY
LAW
THE PREVALENT REVISED SECTIONS FROM
THE PERSONEN- UND GESELLSCHAFTSRECHT
ALSO RELEVANT LAWS ISSUED
SINCE PUBLICATION OF THE FIRST EDITION
COMPILED AND TRANSLATED
BY BRYAN JEEVES OBE
LIECHTENSTEIN VERLAG VADUZ – III–

Die Deutsche Bibliothek – CIP-Einheitsaufnahme
Liechtenstein company law:translation from the PGR update 1999 /
Bryan Jeeves. – 2. Aufl. – Vaduz: Liechtenstein-Verlag, 1999
ISBN 3-85789-902-6
© 1999 Liechtenstein Verlag AG, Vaduz
2nd Edition– 1999
Alle Rechte, auch die des auszugsweisen Nachdruckes, der fotomechani-
schen Wiedergabe, der Foto- und Mikrokopie vorbehalten.
All rights reserved. No reproduction or transmissions by electronic or
mechanical means and no photocopies permitted.
Satz und Druck: Gutenberg AG, Schaan
Printed in the Principality of Liechtenstein
ISBN 3-85789-902-6
– IV–

Index
Vorwort 1999VII
Preface 1999IX
Liechtenstein Company Law
– Table of Contents1
– General Provisions17
– The Company Limited By Shares103
– The Establishments153
– The Foundations163
– The Trusts in General173
– The Trust Enterprise (The Business Trust)195
– Business Accountancy307
Law on Banks and Finance Companies321
Law on the Supervision of Insurance Undertakings347
Law on Investment Undertakings387
Law on professional due diligence in the acceptance of assets417
Law on the Provision, Control and Distrubution
of the Prospectus to be published on the Occasion
of the Public Offer of Securities 429
Glossarium – Glossary443
Curriculum vitae Bryan Jeeves453 – V–

– VI–

Vorwort 1999
Diese Zweitausgabe wird aus zweierlei Gründen veröffentlicht.
Erstens hat der Verleger – da die erste Ausgabe erfreulicherweise
komplettt vergriffen ist – angesichts der diesbezüglich fehlenden
englischen Literatur kontinuierlich dazu gedrängt. Zweitens hat
Liechtenstein seine Gesetzgebung mit neuen Gesetzen über Versi-
cherungsunternehmen, Banken und Finanzgesellschaften, Invest-
mentunternehmen sowie über die beruflichen Sorgfaltspflichten,
die in diese Zweitausgabe einbezogen wurden, erheblich erweitert.
Seit der Erstausgabe in 1992 hat sich in Liechtenstein viel ereignet.
Liechtensteins Beitritt zum EWR wird wahrscheinlich als das
wichtigste Ereignis in dieser Zeitspanne in die Geschichte eingehen.
Wie David Davis MP PC, der damalige Europa-Minister der bri-
tischen Regierung, treffend formulierte, «vereinigt Liechtenstein
das Beste von beiden Welten, die EWR-Mitgliedschaft und fort-
bestehende Vorteile aus der Zollunion mit der Schweiz.»
Die seitens des Regierenden Fürsten und der Regierung bei der
Förderung von Liechtensteins Beitritt zum EWR gezeigte Führung
und Weitsicht finden ihre Bestätigung in allem, was seitdem ge-
schehen ist. Daher widme ich – wie bereits die Erstausgabe – auch
dieses Buch Seiner Durchlaucht sowie der Landesregierung. Durch
ihre stets nach vorn gerichtete Politik ist Liechtensteins Position im
neuen Jahrtausend garantiert.
Die zweite durchschlagende Änderung in Liechtenstein ist die Bil-
dung einer Einparteien-Regierung erstmals seit dem Zweiten Welt-
krieg. Ich kann den Mut der beteiligten politischen Parteien – in
der Regierung wie auch in der Opposition – für diesen Schritt nur
bewundern, der grossartig den wahren demokratischen Status von
Liechtenstein bestätigt. Liechtenstein ist trotz seiner unbedeuten-
den geographischen Grösse zweifellos ein völlig unabhängiges
Land im wahrsten Sinne des Wortes mit einer vielerseits begehrten
Infrastruktur geworden.
Last but not least war diese Neuauflage nur durch die ausgezeich-
nete Teamarbeit unter Leitung von Frederick Hilton und mit der
Unterstützung von Christopher Salt möglich – ein Team, das unse- – VII–

re herausragende Stellung als Übersetzungsfirma in Liechtenstein
gewährleistet hat, seitdem ich 1979 der erste ordnungsgemäss zuge-
lassene Übersetzer wurde.
Bryan Jeeves OBE, FinstD – VIII–

Preface 1999
This second edition has been published for two reasons. Happily the
first edition has been completely sold out and the lack of English li-
terature on the subject has led to continuing requests from the Pu-
blisher. Secondly, Liechtenstein has greatly expanded its legislation
with new laws on insurance companies, banks, finance and invest-
ment entities, as well as due diligence, which are now included in
this second edition.
Since the first edition was published during 1992 much has happen-
ed in Liechtenstein. Probably history will show Liechtenstein’s joi-
ning the EEA as the most important event during this period of
time. As the then European Minister of the UK Government, the
Rt. Hon. David Davis MP PC quite rightly said, “Liechtenstein
has the best of both worlds, EEA membership and continuing
advantages from the Customs Treaty with Switzerland”.
The leadership and foresight shown by the Reigning Prince and the
Government in promoting Liechtenstein’s entry into the EEA have
been confirmed by all that has happened since then. Therefore, I
again dedicate this book to His Serene Highness, as was the case
with the first edition, as well as the Government of the country.
They continue to move forward assuring Liechtenstein’s position in
the new millennium.
The second sweeping change in Liechtenstein is the forming of a
single party Government for the first time since the Second World
War. I have nothing but admiration for the courage of the political
parties involved, both in Government and Opposition for this step,
which admirably confirms the true democratic status of Liechten-
stein. Liechtenstein, despite its lack of geographic size, has unques-
tionably become a fully independent country in the true sense of
that word, with an infrastructure coveted by many.
Last but not least, this new edition has only been made possible by
a magnificent team effort led by Frederick Hilton, ably supported
by Christopher Salt, a team that has ensured our prominence as a
translation firm in Liechtenstein, since becoming the first duly ad-
mitted translator in 1979.
Bryan Jeeves OBE, FinstD – IX–

– 1–
Art.
Table of Contents
Extracts from the Liechtenstein Law on Companies
Second Part
The Legal Entities
(Juridical Persons)
Third Title
General Provisions
Art.
A.Legal Personality
I.Preconditions
1. Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
2. Purpose and object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
II.Absence of the same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
III.Legal capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
IV.Capacity to act and for tortious liability
1. Precondition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
2. Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111–112
V.Domicile and legal venue
1. Domicile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
2. Legal venue, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
VI.Protection of personality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
B.Formation
I.Articles
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
2. Relationship to the law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
II.Entry in the Public Register
1. Notification to the Register office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
2. Registration of branch establishments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
3. Amendments and dissolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
III.Number of members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
IV.Minimum capital resources or
minimum own assets and the like . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
C.Termination
I.Reasons for dissolution
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
2. On grounds of unlawfulness or immorality
of the purpose etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
3. On grounds of important defects in
the articles (voidability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125–128

II.Application of assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
III.Liquidation
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
2. The state of liquidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
3. Liquidators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132–134
4. Liquidation activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135–138
5. Supplementary liquidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
6. Alienation of the assets as a whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
IV.Assertion of claims against a dissolved legal entity . . . . . . . .141
V.The keeping of business records and business papers . . . . . .142
VI.Take-over by the community
1. By acquisition of the shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
2. Take-over of the assets and liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145
VII.Continuation of a dissolved legal entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
D.Membership
I.Joining
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
2. Rescission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
II.Membership shares
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
2. Securities concerning membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
3. Personal participation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
4. Several participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
5. Trust certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 154
III.Established and other rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
IV.Liability and liability to effect further contributions
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
2. The contribution procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157–164
V.Default in the performance in kind, exclusion
of the settlement, of the right of retention, etc. . . . . . . . . . . .165
E.Governing bodies
I.Supreme body
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
2. Convocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168
3. Participation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
4. Authority and passing of resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . .170–177
5. Rescission of resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178–179
II.Administration
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180–180a
2. Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181–183
3. Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184–189
4. Appointment of a legal advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190, 191
III.Audit authority
1. Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
2. Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193,194
3. Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195–197
– 2–
Art.

4. Other provisions of the articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
5. Supervisory board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
IV.Other bodies and applicable law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
V.Termination and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
F.Clearing System
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
II.Annual balance-sheet regulations
1. Date of balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
2. Balance sheet principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204–206
3. Publication of the annual balance sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
4. Duty to disclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208, 209
III.Official audit
1. Precondition and appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
2. Position of the auditors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
3. Treatment of the auditors’ report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
4. Costs and compensation for loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
G.Socio-political rights to shares and profit
I.Working shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
II.Welfare funds
1. Preconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
2. Structure and dissolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
III.Other profit participation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
H.Responsibility
I.In the case of companies with legal personality and
legal entities on the same footing
1. Kind of liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
2. Cases of liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219–221
3. Liability claim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222–225
4. Nature of liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
5. Proceedings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
II.In the case of other legal entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
J.Participation of legal entities under public law
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
II.Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
K.Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
L.International law
I.Foreign or domestic legal entities and applicable law . . . . . .232
II.Transfer of a legal entity
1. Transfer of the legal entity from abroad to Liechtenstein .233
2. Transfer of the legal entity from Liechtenstein
to another State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
III.Legal capacity and capacity to act
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
2. Branch establishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
3. Protection of the personality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
4. Protection of name and style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237a
– 3–
Art.

5. Restriction of the authority to represent . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237b
6. Liability for foreign legal entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237c
7. Claims from the public issue ef equities and bonds . . . . . .237d
8. Restriction of mortmain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
IV.Legal representative
1. Obligation to appoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
2. Registration in the Public Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
3. Legal power of agency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
4. Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
5. Cancelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
M.Reservation and scope of application
I.Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
II.Scope of validity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Fourth Title
Second Section
The Company Limited by Shares
A.General provisions
I.Definition
1. In the case of fixed shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
2. In the case of non par value shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
II.Share
1. Type of shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
2. Division, consolidation and change of
shares or units of shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
3. Reduction of the nominal value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
4. The amount of the share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
5. Share certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267–271
6. Workers’ shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272–278
III.Articles
1. Legally required content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
2. Provisions to be drawn up if necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
B.Formation
I.Successive formation
1. Formation requirements in general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
2. Cancelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Subscription and paying in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
3. Constitutive resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
4. Procedure relating to capital invested,
acquisitions and founders’ preference rights . . . . . . .285–287
II.Simultaneous formation
1. Formation of the company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
2. Blocking the shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
– 4–
Art.

III.Registration of the company
1. Notification of registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
2. Registration and publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
C.Protection of the nominal capital and the shareholders
I.Protection of vested rights
1. Protection of the individual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
2. Requirement of the specially conditioned
majority of the general meeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
II.Business expansion, business contraction and merger . . . . . .294
III.Issuance of new shares
1. General prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
2. As counter-performance for payment in kind and rights .296
3. Issuance without payment in cash or kind . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
4. Cancelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
IV.Issue of preference shares
1. Authority to issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
2. Passing of resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
3. Status of preference shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
V.The issuance of bonus shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
VI.Subscription right and obligation to subscribe . . . . . . . . . . . .303
VII.The issuance of dividend right certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
VIII.Documentation and registration of article amendments . . . .305
IX.Acquisition of the company’s own shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
D.Shareholders rights and duties
I.Shares of profit and liquidation proceeds
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
2. Method of calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
II.Reserve fund
1. Reserve fund required by law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
2. Reserve fund provided in the articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
3. Relationship of the profit share to the reserve assets . . . . .311
III.Dividends, building interest, directors’ remuneration, etc.
1. Dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
2. Building interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
3. Management fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
4. Other claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
IV.Statute of limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
V.The shareholders’ liability
1. Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
2. Additional contributory shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 319
3. Consequences of undue delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 321
VI.Legal relationship of the shareholders
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
2. In the case of bearer shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323–326
3. In the case of registered shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327–330
VII.Declaration that shares are not fully paid up . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
– 5–
Art.

VIII.Personal membership rights
1. Participation in the general meeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332, 333
2. The right to vote at the general meeting . . . . . . . . . . .334, 335
3. The shareholders’ right of verification . . . . . . . . . . .336, 337
E.Governing bodies
I.General meeting
1. Powers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
2. Convening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
3. The passing of resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
II.Board of directors
1. Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
2. Deposition of shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342, 343
3. Board of directors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344–349
III.Audit authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
F.Merger
I.Take-over of one limited company by another . . . . . . . . . . .351
II.Merging of several limited companies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
III.Take-over by a partnership limited by shares . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
G.Transfer to the community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
H.Repayment and other reductions of the nominal capital
I.Resolution to repay and reduce, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
II.Repayment of capital with reservation of return payment . .356
III.Consolidation and reduction of the number of shares . . . . .357
IV.Amortisation
1. Preconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
2. Redemption and drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
3. Issue of bonus shares by drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
J.Limited companies with variable invested capital
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
II.Maximum and minimum nominal capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
III.Reduction
1. Precondition and procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
2. Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
IV.Mandatory reserve fund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
V.Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
VI.Registration in the Public Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
– 6–
Art.

Fifth Title
The Establishments and Foundations
First Section
The Establishments
A.Concept and definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
B.Formation
I.Founder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
II.Articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
III.Entry in the Establishment Register
1. Registration on the Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
2. Entry and publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
IV.Establishment fund, liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
V.Establishment shares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
C.Founder’s rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
D.Contestation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
E.Governing bodies
I.Supreme body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
II.Establishment administration and audit authority . . . . . . . . .544
F.Legal relationship of the founder and the beneficiaries to the
establishment, between themselves and towards third parties
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
II.Non-withdrawability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
III.Determination of assets and profits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
IV.Liability of the establishment, limited liability or
liability to make further contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
G.Amendment of articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
H.Dissolution, merger and conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
J.Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Second Section
The Foundations
A.Definition and delimitation
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
II.Ecclesiastical and family foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
III.Deposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
B.Formation
I.Foundation deed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
II.Entry on the Foundation Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
III.Existence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
IV.Donation of assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
V.Revocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
VI.Contestation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
– 7–
Art.

C.Governing bodies
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
II.Order of the Supervising Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
D.Liability and exclusion of enforcement, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
E.Supervision
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
II.Amendment
1. Concerning the governing bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
2. Concerning the purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
F.Family foundations, ecclesiastical foundations and similar . . . . . .567
G.Cancellation
I.By operation of law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
II.Right of action and deregistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
III.Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Fifteenth Title
The Individually Owned Enterprise with Limited Liability
(repealed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .834 to 896a
Sixteenth Title
The Trusts
First Section
The Trusts in General
A.Definition
I.The trust relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .897
II.The implied trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .898
B.Creation and termination of the trust
I.Creation
1. Trust instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .899
2. Registration on public registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .900–902
3. Notification of appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .903
4. Judicial and public trustee and legal representative . .904, 905
II.Termination
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .906
2. Grounds for termination relating to the settlor . . . . . . . . .907
3. Termination relating to the trustee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .908, 909
C.Terms and effect of the trust relationship
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .910
II.The trust property
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .911
2. Specific trust property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .912
– 8–
Art.

3. Authorised trust investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .913
4. Execution and bankruptcy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .914–916
III.Rights and duties of the settlor
1. Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .917
2. Duties and other function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .918
IV.Rights and duties of the trustee
1. Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .919–921
2. Duties of the trustee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .922–925
3. Reference, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .926
V.Position of the beneficiary
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .927
2. Trust certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .928
D.Supervision and other measures concerning trusts . . . . . . . . . . . . .929
E.International law and trusts under foreign law
I.International law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .930
II.Trusts under foreign law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .931
F.Professional trustee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .932
Second Section
The Trust Enterprise
(The Business Trust)
Art. 932a
A. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .§§
I.Special trusts
1.Definition
a.Trust enterprise without and with legal personality . . . .1
b.With divisions, trust funds or similar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2.Purpose or object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
II.Other fiduciary undertakings (repealed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
III.Reference, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
IV.Relationship of law and trust instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
B.Existence
I.Trust register
1.Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
2.The absence of these . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
3.Trust articles
a.Necessary content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
b.Further statements and implementing provisions . . . . .10
4.Formation in the absence of the settlor
a.In general
aa.After the death of the settlor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
bb.Upon the termination of companies or legal entities12
cc.Legal power of authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
b. Formation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
– 9–
Art.

II.Application, entry and notification or advertisement
1. Obligation, right and content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2. Amendments and other declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
C.Termination (dissolution and cancellation)
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
II.Bankruptcy or administration proceedings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
III.Liquidation
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2. Liquidators, time limit and public notice to creditors . . . .20
3. Distribution of assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
D.Trust fund
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
II.Securities in particular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
III.Liability and default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
E.Trust assets
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
II.Segregation and distribution of assets and yield
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
2. Gradual distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
III.Administration of assets
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
2. Alienation and charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
3. Claim for surrender and enrichment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
4. Assets investment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
IV.Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
V. Reserve fund and other reserves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
VI.Accountancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
F.Rescission and right of redemption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
G.Liability for the obligations of the trust enterprise
I.By operation of the law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
II.By operation of the trust instrument
and other transaction
1. Extension of liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
2. Restriction of liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
H.Participants
I.Common provisions
1. Kinds and regulation of the legal position . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
2. Rights and duties in particular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3. Governing bodies
a. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
b. Resolutions and membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
c.Supervisory trust body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
4. Statutory limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
5. Legal venue, court of arbitration, and
procedural position of participants
a. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
– 10–
§§

b. Procedural position of participants
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
bb.Virtual representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
6. Position of the sued party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
II.Settlor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
III.Trustee
1. Appointment, removal, notice, etc.
a.In general
aa.In the case of trust enterprises without divisions . .50
bb.With divisions and in the case of several trusts . . . .51
b.Appointment
aa.Right to appoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
bb.Choice and duty to disclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
c.Removal
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
bb.In the case of security deposit by third parties . . . .55
d.Termination
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
bb.Meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
e.Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
f.Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
aa.For those appointed, removed, giving notice
termination, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
bb.In the case of default, or non-exercise of the right or
the obligation to appoint, remove, propose or similar 60
2. Organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
3. Trust management
a.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
b.Position of trustees not engaged in
the conduct of business . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
c.Regulations (internal regulations)
and transfer of management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
d.Duty to be loyal
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
bb.Personal interest
aaa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
bbb.Acquisition of trust property and
beneficial rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
cc.Obligation to disclose
aaa.To beneficiaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
bbb. To co-trustees, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
e.Trust powers
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
bb.Claims for compensation and trustee fees
aaa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
bbb. Assertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
– 11–
§§

4.Trust power
a.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
b.Appointment of representatives by the Register Office74
c.Minimum trust authority and minimum representative
authority by operation of law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
d.Signature rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
e.Evidence of authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
IV.Trust beneficiaries
1.Beneficial interest in general
a.Kinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
b.Legal nature of the beneficial interest, etc. . . . . . . . . . . .79
c.Acquisition and loss (existence and loss)
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
bb.Gratuitous beneficial interest and
socio-political beneficial interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
cc.Special skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
dd.Convertible creditor and beneficiary rights . . . . . . .83
ee.Notice of termination, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
ff.Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
gg. Revocation
aaa.On grounds of unworthiness of trust . . . . . . . .86
bbb. For other reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
ccc.Application of revocation and reference . . . . .88
hh.Failure to fulfil the duty to support . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
ii.Division and consolidation
aaa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
bbb. Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
kk.Statute of limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
ll.Redemption sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
d.Rights and obligations arising
from the beneficial interest
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
bb.Distribution of beneficial interest
and substitute claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
cc.Undue delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
dd.Death and right of redemption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
ee.Assertion of rights
aaa.Beneficiaries’ rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
bbb. Rights of the trust enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
ccc.In the case of an organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
ddd. Exceptions, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
e.Register of beneficiaries
aa.Obligation to keep a register and examination . . . .102
bb.Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
cc.Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
– 12–
§§

2.Designation of the beneficiaries
a.In the case of no directive or inadequate directive
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
bb.Interpretation rule, etc.
aaa. With regard to the beneficiaries . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
bbb. Concerning the beneficial interest shares . . . . .107
b.Special system of succession in the
case of family trust enterprises
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
bb.Interpretation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
cc.In the case of several family trusts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
c.Right of nomination and right of conferment
(patronage of beneficial interest)
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
bb.Public announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
cc.Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
d.Security documents conerning the trust
beneficial interest
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
bb.Registration in the Trust Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
cc.Consequences of an irregular issuance . . . . . . . . . . .116
dd.Form and content
aaa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
bbb. Special data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
3.Tracing of beneficiaries
a.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
b.Content of the summons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
c.Statement of forfeiture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
4.Alienation, charge and transfer
a.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
b.When other assent is needed and its substitution . . . . .123
5.Organisational matters
a.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
b.Consultation
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
bb.In the case of special types of
entitlements or obligations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
cc.Deposited proposals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
c.Family resolutions
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
bb.Convening, submission to Trust Register, etc. . . . . .129
cc.Right of participation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
dd.Public citation proceedings (official tracing) . . . . . .131
ee.Passing and approval of the resolutions . . . . . . . . . .132
d. Involuntary co-operative society . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
– 13–
§§

V.Creditors of the participants
1.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
2.Creditors of the settlors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
3.Creditors of the Beneficiaries
a.Non-withdrawability (protective trust)
aa.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
bb.Special cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
b.Withdrawability
aa.Possession of beneficial interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
bb.Reversionary interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
c.Right of entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
J.Responsibility
I.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
II.Trustee responsibility
1.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
2.Special cases of liability
a.In the case of co-trustees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
b.In the case of succeeding
and resigning trustees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
III.Responsibilities of the beneficiaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
IV.Responsibilities of third parties as
constructive trustees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
V.Release from responsibility
1. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
2. Statute of limitations
a.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
b.In the case of rights of recourse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
VI.Securing and preventive measures
1.Directive of the Register Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
2.Liability insurance and right of refusal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
3.Periodical auditing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
4.Lodging of security, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
K.Official supervisory and auditing trust office
I.Official supervisory trust office
1.Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
2.Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
3.Rights and duties
a.In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
b.Relationship to the other trustees
aa. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
bb.Participation in the appointment
of trustees, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
cc.Regarding trust assets and yield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
4. Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
– 14–
§§

II.Official audit
1. Appointment and removal of auditors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
2. Rights and duties
a. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
b. Audit report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
3. Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
L.Amendment of the trust instrument, conversion and merger
I.Amendment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
II.Conversion and merger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
III.Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
IV.Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
V.Withdrawal of approval and declaration of nullity . . . . . . . .169
M.International law and trust enterprises subject to foreign law, etc.170
Twentieth Title
Business Accountancy
Art.
A.Observance of accounting regulations
I. In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1045
II.Beginning and end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1046–1046
A
B.Rules concerning inventory and balance sheet
I.Duty to prepare inventory and balance sheet
1.Opening inventory and balance sheet,
annual inventory and balance sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1047
2. Description of opening inventory
and annual inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1048
3. Fixed dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1049
4. Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1050
II.Balance sheet principles for the annual balance sheet
1. Completeness of the annual balance sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . .1051
2. Individual items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1052–1059
III.Winding up balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1060
IV.Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1061
C.In general
I.External form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1062
II.Obligation to preserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1063
II.Obligation to declare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1063A
III.Obligation to submit, law of evidence and
exclusion of levy of execution and writ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1064
IV.Duty of disclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1065
D.International law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1066
Right of appeal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1067
– 15–
§§

– 17 –
Second Part
The Legal Entities
(Juridical Persons)
Third Title
General Provisions
Art. 106
The incorporated associations of persons (corporate bodies
or corporations) and the establishments including foundations
which are devoted to a specific object or purpose and are in-
dependent shall acquire the right of legal personality through
registration in the Public Register (incorporation), that is, in the
absence of deviating provisions of law, even if the preconditions
of entry did not in fact, exist, subject to the procedure of voida-
bility.
Registration is not required for the corporate bodies and es-
tablishments under public law, for the societies which do not
pursue an economic object such as that which exists in the opera-
tion of a business which pursues commercial objects, for ecclesi-
astical foundations, for family foundations and where the law
provides an exception otherwise.
Art. 107
Associations of persons and fund donations whose economic
objects are the conduct of trade, the manufacture of goods or the
conduct of other commercial business may, insofar as the law
does not allow an exception, only acquire the right of legal per-
sonality as companies with legal personality (company limited by
shares, partnership limited by shares, Anteilsgesellschaft
1), private
company limited by shares, registered cooperative society, regis-
tered mutual insurance association or registered relief fund) or as

1) See Art. 375.
A. Legal Person-
ality
I. Preconditions
1. Re
gistration
2. Purpose and
ob
ject

– 18 –
an establishment and where the legal personality has not been
acquired and the preconditions for another form of legal entity do
not exist shall be subject to the provisions concerning the unreg-
istered partnership.
Companies with legal personality and establishments may also
be formed for the pursuit of objects which are other than com-
mercial.
Where the law refers to legal entities which are regarded as equal
in status to companies with legal personality, all other legal enti-
ties whose main object is to undertake commercial activities shall,
in the absence of legal provisions to the contrary, be deemed to be
included with these. In particular, investment and administration
of assets or the holding of participations or other rights are not
commercial activities unless the type and size of the undertaking
render necessary the facilities of a commercial business and or-
derly accounting.
1)
Otherwise, the objects of the business may be all kinds of
transactions for economic or other purposes and the articles may
cite these, in general or in particular.
Associations of persons and establishments, including foun-
dations whose objects are immoral or unlawful, may not, by vir-
tue of the law, acquire the right of legal personality.
Art. 108
In the event that action is undertaken on behalf of a legal en-
tity without or prior to the said legal entity having acquired legal
personality, liability shall rest with the persons that have
so acted in particular founders or persons that have already
been designated as bodies or the participants who pass resolutions
at assemblies, pursuant to the provisions concerning the unregis-
tered partnership and subject to the right of recourse against the
persons otherwise participating.
A person who has not acted personally shall be liable only if
according to the circumstances it must be assumed that that per-
son granted an agent authority to act.

1) Art. 107 par. 3, second sentence inserted by the law of 15 april, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
II. Absence of the
same

– 19 –
Those persons, who as a result of their acts, with or without
the power of agency, have become unrestrictedly liable, may be
released from this liability by the legal entity within three months
of it acquiring legal personality, provided the obligation entered
into by the person acting was expressly on behalf of the legal
entity to be formed and the said legal entity appears competent to
assume its undertaking pursuant to the law or the articles and to
acquire this legal personality.
After assuming this legal personality, only the legal entity shall
be liable to the creditors, subject, however, to the special provi-
sions concerning contributions in kind and acquisitions in kind
and concerning tortious acts.
Where assets are transferred to a person for the purpose of
forming a legal entity, the said person is in doubt subject to the
provisions concerning the implied
1) trust relationship.
Art. 109
The legal entities are by virtue of the law eligible for all
rights in the same manner as natural persons, in particular, prop-
erty rights, the right to the use of a name or the right of honour,
the rights of membership, of participation in firms and all obliga-
tions insofar as these rights or obligations do not have the natural
circumstances or characteristics of man, such as sex, age, relation-
ship by blood, as a necessary precondition.
With this restriction, the provisions which apply to natural
persons are therefore also applicable to legal entities.
Within this intendment, the legal entities may, through their
governing bodies appointed to represent or their representa-tives,
under their name or under their firm’s name, appear before all
court and administrative authorities and in all proceedings as
party, intervener, the person summoned, participant or in a simi-
lar capacity for their rights and effect entries in public registers
such as Land Register, Public Register, Patents Register and the
like and demand the protection of the law.

1) See annotation 3) to Art. 898.
III. Le gal ca pacit y

– 20 –
By the virtue of the law, each member may, if necessary, at his own
expense, appear as intervener, participant or as a summoned person for
one of the parties at the legal entity’s law cases. Where, however,
the law acknowledges member minorities as parties, only mem-
bers belonging to this minority may intervene in a dispute of the
minority.
Art. 110
The legal personalities are capable of acting as soon as the in-
dispensable bodies required for this pursuant to the law and the
articles have been appointed.
The internal regulations (by-articles), the memorandum of as-
sociation, the formation deed (foundation deed) and the like shall,
within this intendment, also be valid as articles, insofar as a devia-
tion does not ensue from the individual provisions.
Art. 111
Natural persons, legal entities and firms may be appointed as
members of a body.
The bodies are appointed to carry out the legal entity’s wishes
and intentions.
They commit the legal entity, without regard to their compe-
tence and subject to the right of recourse against the suspected
party and to the special provisions concerning the liability of the
principal by virtue of the law, not only by the conclusion of legal
transactions but also by their conduct, insofar as this constitutes
the undertaking of their representational activity or took place on
the occasion of and when the opportunity was presented by the
representational activity.
Within the limits of their legal capacity and their capacity to
act, the legal entities are responsible, moreover, subject to a possi-
ble right of recourse against the suspected parties, for criminally
tortious acts which a body or another representative appointed
pursuant to the articles has committed in the exercise of their
representational activity.
IV. Capacity to act
and for torti-
ous liability
1. Precondition
2. Activity
a. In
general

– 21 –
Where a legal entity or firm is a governing body or a represen-
tative of another legal entity, the represented legal entity or firm
shall be directly entitled and committed as the result of the repre-
sentational activities of their bodies and persons entitled to repre-
sent, subject to a possible right of recourse against the suspected
parties.
The persons acting are, moreover, personally responsible for
their inadmissible, culpable conduct and, if the preconditions of
the foregoing paragraph are applicable, the legal entity or firm
entitled to represent is also responsible.
Art. 112
Where the law or the articles do not determine to the contrary,
the subject of the resolution shall be stated when a multiple-
member body is convened.
In the absence of other provisions, the resolutions of a multi-
ple-member body shall be validly passed by a simple majority of
the countable votes.
Countable votes shall be deemed to be those which in individ-
ual cases are represented and have taken part in the voting and are
not excluded from the right to vote.
Where the law or the articles do not determine to the contrary,
resolutions of the bodies may also be passed by written assent to a
motion put forward (resolution by circular letter) if a member of
the body does not demand verbal deliberation.
Art. 113
Where their articles do not determine to the contrary, the
domicile of the legal entities shall be situated at that place where
their administrative activities are centred, subject to the provisions
concerning domicile in the international relationship. By virtue of
the law, the domicile of the legal entity is placed, under private
law, in the same category as the residences of private individuals.
In addition to their domiciles, legal entities may have one or
several branch establishments.
b. Passing of
resolutions
V. Domicile and
legal venue
1. Domicile

– 22 –
Art. 114
Subject to special legal provisions, the competent courts and
administrative authorities for legal entities shall be those which
have jurisdiction at the legal entities’ place of domicile.
For disputes between a legal entity and the members of the le-
gal entity from within the membership and for creditors’ claims
arising from the responsibility or because of dissolution or the
like, the legal venue by virtue of the law shall be, insofar as the
law does not provide an exception as, for instance, in the case of
legal entities subject to foreign law, the court having jurisdiction
at the place of domicile of the legal entity, even if in addition a
court of arbitration is provided in the articles.
Foreign legal entities owning a branch establishment in
Liechtenstein may be held responsible by virtue of the law for all
claims at the place of this branch establishment and a special
bankruptcy procedure (branch bankruptcy) may be executed for
the branch establishment.
1)
For litigation arising from accountability, the Liechtenstein
judge shall be competent in all cases where it is a question of
a domestic legal entity or a branch establishment or when the
defendant has a domicile or registered office in Liechtenstein.
1)
Art. 115
Legal entities enjoy the same protection of personality as natu-
ral persons insofar as a curtailment does not emanate from the
restriction of their legal capacity and their capacity to act or from
the nature of the relationships.
In particular, they are protected in their right to the name, the
company name, marks, honour, the inviolability of letters, busi-
ness and other secrecy worthy of protection.
Where a legal entity conducts a firm, the firm’s admissibility
and change of name shall conform with company law and the
otherwise valid legal regulations or as laid down in the articles.
The change of name of a legal entity not entered in the Public
Register shall conform analogously with the provisions drawn up

1) Para. 3 and 4 inserted by the law dated 30. October 1996, LGBl. 1997, No. 19.
1. Legal venue,
etc.
VI. Protection of
personalit y

– 23 –
for the firm name without, however, any obligation to register
insofar as the articles do not determine to the contrary, subject to
the prohibition concerning unfair competition.
Art. 116
Insofar as the law does not determine to the contrary,
written or otherwise produced articles shall be required for the
formation of a legal entity.
Where a public notarised deed is prescribed by law for the
articles, this shall apply only with respect to the content of the
articles necessary on the occasion of the formation of the legal
entity. The written form (internal regulations) shall be sufficient
for all other provisions.
Where the law does not allow an exception, the legal entity
must be designated in the articles as an association, a company
limited by shares, a partnership limited by shares, an Anteils-
gesellschaft
1), a private company limited by shares, a registered
co-operative society, a registered mutual insurance association or
a registered relief fund, an establishment or a foundation.
Insofar as a corporate body institution is necessary or in-
tended, this must be set forth in the articles in a manner which is
in conformity with the law and the intention of the participants to
possess the legal personality must be made evident in a satisfac-
tory manner.
Where, apart from the case of the assembly of the supreme
body, a public notarised deed is prescribed for the articles, the
founders or members may also give their assent by signature at
various recordings and authentications which may take place at
different times and places.
The articles and their amendments shall in all cases be signed
by a founder or a member if there is no provision for exceptions
such as in the case of associations, co-operative societies or gen-
eral associations.

1) See Art. 375.
B. Formation
I. Articles
1. In
general

– 24 –
Art. 117
In the absence of mandatory provisions of the law and pro-
vided the articles do not lay down supplementary provisions re-
lating to the legal entity concerning, particularly, the governing
bodies, the relationship of the legal entites between themselves,
towards their members or third parties, the provisions of the law
which are not mandatory shall be applicable supplementally.
Provisions whose application is mandatory, either by virtue of
the law or otherwise, cannot be amended by the articles.
Apart from the fact that legal personality is acquired by entry
in the Public Register, even if the actual preconditions for this did
not exist, the defectiveness of a provision which conflicts with the
law is cured by registration only where provision is made for this.
Art. 118
Where entry in the Public Register is necessary in order to ac-
quire legal personality or such entry is demanded voluntarily, it
shall ensue at the domicile of the legal entity and the articles shall
be deposited for safe keeping in the Register Office files, with
details of the recordable facts or relationships and of the persons
who comprise the bodies of the administration and, if necessary,
the audit authority.
Notification to the Public Register shall be the responsibility
of the administration or the persons particularly entrusted there-
with at the time of formation.
Art. 119
Where in addition to its head office (domicile) a company with
legal personality has branch establishments such as a place of
business, a branch office with a degree of independence, which are
not merely agencies, they shall also be entered in the Public Reg-
ister at their actual places, with a reference to the entry of the
head office.
The notification shall ensue with the enclosure of an extract
from the Register or the like on behalf of the administration from
the persons entitled to represent pursuant to the articles.
2. Relationship to
the law
II. Entry in the
Public Register
1. Notification to
the Register
Office
2. Registration of
branch estab-
lishments

– 25 –
Where another legal entity conducts for its purpose a business
which pursues commercial objects, the said legal entity shall be
required to register its branch establishments.
Art. 120
Like the formation, every amendment to the articles, every
change in the appointments to the bodies which are required to be
stated at the time of registration and the dissolution must be re-
ported to the Public Register insofar as a duty to report exists or
an entry was demanded voluntarily and is admissible.
The same procedure shall be followed by the persons entitled
to sign for amendments to the articles as for the original articles if
they are changed. Publication of the amendment shall take place
only insofar as provisions contained in earlier announcements are
thereby changed.
Amendments and the dissolution shall be effective towards
bona fide third parties only from the time of registration and,
where applicable, of publication.
Where the amendment does not concern the points stated at
the time of the first notification, it shall be sufficient if the entry
refers to the document submitted to the Public Register or to the
declaration delivered concerning the amendment.
Art. 121
When a corporate body is formed, at least sufficient members
must be present in order to set up the administrative bodies inso-
far as the law does not permit an exception.
Where the number of members subsequently falls below the
minimum number, the dissolution of the corporate body shall not
ensue automatically as a consequence thereof.
Where, however, this state continues, so that as a consequence
the directives required by law or the articles can no longer be
issued for more than one year, the court, at the request of a mem-
ber or a creditor, unsatisfied or threatened with damages and
losses, shall, in extrajudicial proceedings, following the possible
hearing of participants, allow a reasonable period of time for the
3. Amendments
and dissolution
III. Number of
members

– 26 –
restoration of the lawful state and, if this does not occur, declare
by means of a ruling pursuant to the court’s legal force, the cor-
porate body to be dissolved.
Art. 122
In the case of a limited company (Aktiengesellschaft) and
other legal entities whose capital is divided into shares, the mini-
mum capital or minimum assets must be at least SFr. 50’000.–, and
in the case of the private company limited by shares (Gesellschaft
mit beschränkter Haftung) and legal entities whose capital is not
divided into shares, at least SFr. 30’000.–
1)
Minimum capital and minimum assets must be fully paid up or
contributed.
2)
If the mimimum own capital (minimum own assets) falls be-
low the prescribed sum, members or creditors may apply to the
court in extrajudicial proceedings for the dissolution of the com-
pany if there are important reasons for this or if the necessary
number of members is lacking.
Where the law refers to own capital, this is to be undertstood
as a numerical sum expressed in terms of money and where the
law refers to own assets as assets consisting of any property or
rights which are usually estimated in terms of money solely for
balance sheet or other purposes.
The provisions of this articles may be applied correspondingly
to the minimum sum or the minimum quota of a share.
To safeguard the acquisition of landed property and rights
entered in the Land Register, a note can be made in the Land
Register in favour of the legal entity.
If the minimum own capital (minimum own assets) falls below
the prescribed sum, members or creditors may apply to the court
in extra-judicial proceedings for the dissolution of the company if
there are important reasons for this or if the necessary number of
members is lacking.

1) Art. 122 para. 1, amended by the laws dated 21 December, 1954, LGBl. 1955, No.
2, and 4 June, 1963, No. 17, in the version of the law dated 11 July, 1974, LGBl.
1974, No. 51.
2) Art. 122 para. 2, amended by the law dated 21 December, 1954, LGBl. 1955, No.
2, in the version of the law dated 4 June, 1963, LGBl. 1963, No. 17.
IV. Minimum capi-
tal resources or
minimum own
assets and the
like

– 27 –
Where the law refers to own capital, this is to be understood as
a numerical sum expressed in terms of money and where the law
refers to own assets as assets consisting of any property or rights
which are usually estimated in terms of money solely for balance
sheet or other purposes.
The provisions of these articles may be applied correspon-
dingly to the minimum sum or the minimum quota of a share.
To safeguard the acquisition of landed property and rights
entered in the Land Register, a note may be made in the Land
Register in favour of the legal entity being formed.
Art. 123
The legal entities shall be dissolved:
1. pursuant to the law or the articles,
2. by resolution of the supreme body which, in the absence of
other provisions in the articles, shall be passed by two-thirds
of the votes as determined pursuant to the following subpara-
graph and concerning which, where the law makes additional
provision, a public document shall be drawn up,
3. by court judgment, where dissolution is demanded by a
wholly liable member, for important reasons related to the le-
gal entity, or by members who represent at least one-tenth of
the capital resources or the own assets (non-prescribed mone-
tary capital expressed in figures) of the legal entity or, where
such is not present, by at least one-tenth of the members in
order to avoid impending heavy damages and losses, after
making prior provision for possible losses. Instead of redemp-
tion, however, the judge may order other measures, such as
dissolution, the exclusion of the plaintiff members, under ob-
servance of the provisions concerning the reduction of the
capital resources, the sale of the membership shares in favour
of the plaintiff members and the appointment of an adminis-
trator,
4. by opening bankruptcy proceedings on grounds of insolvency
or over-indebtedness, insofar as the law does not determine
otherwise.
C. Termination
I. Reasons for
dissolution
1. In
general

– 28 –
The provisions concerning the lodging of security, the con-
solidation of several actions, the effect of the judgment and com-
pensation in the case of actions on grounds of voidability or the
rescission of resolutions of the supreme body shall be applied
analogously to the petition for judicial dissolution pursuant to
subparagraph 3.
Where a legal entity is dissolved for other reasons as, for ex-
ample, on grounds of notice to terminate by members or third
parties, pursuant to reservations in the articles, the provisions
concerning liquidation shall also be applicable, provided the law
does not determine otherwise.
In the event of the tacit continuation of a legal entity beyond
the time determined in the articles, one of the minority quoted in
the first paragraph under subparagraph 3, except for this right
being otherwise forfeited, may demand dissolution within six
months of the expiration, insofar as its redemption or exclusion
does not ensue at the discretion of the judge, under observance of
possible provisions concerning the reduction of capital resources.
Art. 124
Where the purpose or object of a legal entity is unlawful or
immoral, the legal capacity shall be taken away and dissolution
shall ensue without compensation
1. pursuant to administrative court action by the representative
of public law,
2. pursuant to the action of a participant or the representative of
public law in the due course of the law.
The directive for precautionary measures remains reserved in
every case, such as the suspension of the course of business, the
appointment of a sequestrator and the announcement of the said
sequestrator’s appointment, the seizure of books and documents,
assets and the like before the final ruling by the Government in
the application of administrative compulsion or, at the wish of the
applicant, by the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice in ex-
trajudicial proceedings.
2. On grounds of
unlawfulness
or immorality
of the purpose,
etc.

– 29 –
Where cancellation proceedings against a legal entity are
pending before one authority, cancellation proceedings may not
be initiated before another authority and if cancellation procee-
dings are pending before both simultaneously, the final decision
shall be made by the administrative court.
The dissolution action in the case of legal entities entered in
the Public Register may, upon application or ex officio, be anno-
tated in the Public Register, before or during the dispute, until the
case is finally closed.
As soon as the decision has become final and absolute, the
judge shall communicate with the Registrar ex officio for the
purpose of making an annotation. After liquidation has been car-
ried out, the entry shall be deleted automatically.
The foregoing provisions shall also be applicable where, be-
cause of its purposes or objects or means, a legal entity is a threat
to the security of the State.
Art. 125
Should the original or amended articles not contain the provi-
sions designated by the law as essential or should these be contra-
dicted by an instruction laid down in regulations, voidability
proceedings may be initiated insofar as the form, the defect in a
provision concerning notification to the members or third parties,
or the minimum number of members are not involved.
Every member of a legal entity and/or every other person in a
legal entity entitled to vote, the administration or the audit
authority may, through the Registrar, in extrajudicial proceed-
ings, after the legal entity’s bodies authoried to represent or also,
possibly, a legal advisor specially appointed by the Registrar have
ben granted a hearing, cause a reasonable period of time to be set,
amounting to not less than three months’duration from the date
of service, extendable if necessary, for the legal entity’s competent
body to remove the defect and if the said defect is not removed
within the set period of time, to effect dissolution by means of
legal action.
The legal entity may, through its competent bodies, at any
time, even during voidability proceedings, up to the time of final
3. On grounds of
important de-
fects in the
articles (void-
ability)
a. In
general

– 30 –
and conclusive decision, cure the defect by removal. If, however,
this cure is not effected until after the expiration of the period of
time mentioned in the previous paragraph, the legal entity shall
pay all the costs accruing to the opposing parties, notwithstanding
the legal entity’s right of recourse to the offenders.
In all cases the legal entity shall retain the right of legal per-
sonality up to the termination of its liquidation, which shall ensue
pursuant to the other provisions of this law, with reservation of
bankruptcy.
This shall apply particularly with respect to the position of
possible members and third parties.
Action can no longer be taken after the expiration of five years
from the drawing up of a provision designated as essential.
Art. 126
The action for voidability shall be taken against the legal entity
which is represented by the administration or by the possible
audit authority if the administration brings an action. If, however,
not only the members of the administration but also those of the
audit authority bring an action or if an audit authority does not
exist and another representative for the legal entity is not present,
the court, pursuant to the provisions of the code of procedure,
shall appoint a legal adviser for the proceedings.
Several actions shall be combined for simultaneous hearing
and judgment. The initiation of the action as well as the time of
the hearing itself may be published at the discretion of the court;
publication may also ensue in the manner determined in the arti-
cles for notices and, if such a provision is lacking, in the journals
intended for the publication of official notices and shall be anno-
tated ex officio in the Public Register.
Upon application by the legal entity, the court may order, be-
cause of the disadvantage threatening the legal entity, that the
plaintiff shall lodge a judicial bond which shall be determined at
the court’s absolute discretion. Otherwise, the provisions of the
Code of Civil Procedure concerning the judicial bond for the
costs of an action shall be applied analogously to the performance
and compensation of the said judicial bond.
b. Voidability
action

– 31 –
Conversely, the court may postpone in proceedings by official
order the excution of the contested provision if a threatening,
irretrievable disadvantage to the legal entity can be established by
preponderant evidence.
Any member of the legal entity or any other person in the le-
gal entity entitled to vote may join the proceedings as an inter-
vening party, on one side or the other, at the expense of the said
intervening party.
Art. 127
Upon receipt of information or of his own accord, the Regist-
rar may, ex officio, under the same preconditions as those obtain-
ing in the care of voidability action, order in extrajudicial pro-
ceedings, the cancellation of the legal entity without com-
pensation.
The Registrar shall first of all fix a reasonable period of time,
which shall amount to at least three months and may be extended
for important reasons, for the legal entity to submit a written or
minuted verbal statement and, pursuant to the factual situation,
remove the defect. The Registrar shall order the annotation of the
voidability proceedings in the Public Register if the legal entity is
entered therein.
Should the defect not be removed and a statement not be sub-
mitted and if meanwhile an action for voidability has not been
finally and conclusively decided, the informer and the legal entity
shall be summoned to a hearing to discuss the defects and a deci-
sion shall be made concerning dissolution.
Otherwise, the provisions relating to voidability shall be applied
analogously with respect to the proceedings and the decision.
Art. 128
Depending upon whether the decision pronounces or dis-
misses voidability, the effect of the decision shall operate for or
against all members and bodies of a legal entity, regardless of
whether they took part in the proceedings or not.
c. Proceedings ex
officio
d. Effect and
res
ponsibilit y

– 32 –
In the case of legal entities entered in the Public Register, the
decision pronouncing dissolution shall, provided he did not initi-
ate this, be communicated, ex officio or upon application, to the
Registrar for the purpose of entry and publication, insofar as the
entered provision was published.
If intent or gross negligence is involved the plaintiffs or in-
formers shall be liable to the legal entity, without restriction,
jointly and severally, pursuant to the provisions concerning tor-
tious acts, for all damages and losses arising from unfounded ac-
tion or information, insofar as the informer is not the representa-
tive of public law or insofar as another line of action does not
exist ex officio.
Art. 129
Unless the law, the articles or the competent bodies determine
to the contrary, the assets of a legal entity which is cancelled shall
devolve upon the state which, as universal successor, shall be li-
able for the indebtedness solely to the extent of the assets taken
over and in the same way as the bona fide owner.
Pursuant to the provisions concerning the implied
1 trust rela-
tionship, the application of the assets shall correspond as closely
as possible to the existing purpose and the former participants in
the cancelled legal entity may demand the said application
through administrative channels.
Where a legal entity is judicially cancelled because immoral or
unlawful purposes have been pursued, the assets, after liquidation
has been officially implemented, shall devolve upon the State for
discretional utilization, even though provisions determine other-
wise.
Art. 130
Insofar as the law does not determine to the contrary, the dis-
solution of a legal entity for reasons other than bankruptcy shall
result in the legal entity’s liquidation.
Where a domestic branch establishment of a foreign company
with legal personality is closed down, liquidation shall be imple-
mented in the same way as when a domestic company with legal

1) See annotation 3, Art. 898
II. Application of
assets
III. Liquidation
1. In
general

– 33 –
personality is liquidated, unless the Public Register Office allows
exceptions.
1)
Insofar as assets are present after the conclusion of the bank-
ruptcy of a legal entity, they shall also be liquidated, unless it is
resolved to continue the legal entity.
The procedure in the case of the liquidation of the assets of the
legal entity shall be pursuant to the following provisions, where
special provisions have not been drawn up for individual legal
entities or their application is partly excluded as in the case of asso-
ciations or foundations which are not entered in the Public Register
or where an obligation to keep books or account is lacking.
Where during the liquidation proceedings it is established that
the assets do not cover the liabilities towards third parties, the
liquidators shall suspend their activity and give notice to the court
for the purpose of initiating bankruptcy proceedings.
In the event that the application does not issue from all the
liquidators, the court, before initiating bankruptcy proceedings,
shall hear the members of the administration as well as the other
liquidators and if they are not of the same opinion, shall initiate
bankruptcy proceedings only if it is convinced of the over-
indebtedness.
Insofar as the law or the articles do not determine to the con-
trary, a legal entity may, with the assent of all members, without
being wound up, be converted into another legal entity or com-
pany with company name and in all cases the rights of third par-
ties which existed up to the time of conversion shall remain re-
served.
Art. 131
Where legal entities go into liquidation, they shall retain their
legal personality and use their existing company name, with the
unabbreviated subjoinder “in liquidation” until the liquidation is
implemented, towards third parties and among the possible mem-
bers.
Legal action may be taken against them under their existing
company name and execution may be demanded against them as

1) Art. 130 para. 1a inserted by the Law dated 10 April, 1928, concerning the Trust
Enterprise, LGBl. 1928, No. 6.
2. The state of
li quidation

– 34 –
long as, in the case of a legal entity entered in the Public Register,
the subjoinder “in liquidation” is not entered in the Public Reg-
ister, even, that is, if they have added the said subjoinder to their
signature on the filed documents.
The bodies of the legal entity, with the exception of the ad-
ministration whose powers as a body pass to the liquidation of-
fice, shall have the same powers during the state of liquidation as
before liquidation, with the restriction, however, effective by
virtue of the law, to acts such as those which, by their nature, may
be justified by the purpose of the liquidation.
An acquisition of membership shall no longer take place, how-
ever. The members shall nevertheless remain committed to the
performances, also during the liquidation, as, for example, to the
payment of membership shares which are not fully paid up, of
further contributions and the like which, by virtue of their pur-
pose, appear to be recurrently executable for the duration and the
state of liquidation and inasmuch as they serve to satisfy the
creditors or for adjustment between the members.
Art. 132
Liquidators of the legal entity are the members who manage and
represent, insofar as the liquidation is not transferred to other per-
sons, in the articles or by resolution of the supreme body.
The power of agency of such liquidators may be extended, re-
stricted or withdrawn by the supreme body or, if important rea-
sons exist, upon application by a member or other participant
and, in the case of legal entities without members, by the Regis-
trar in extrajudicial proceedings.
Instead of this, the Registrar may, upon application by the
creditors who represent at least one-third of all uncovered credit
balances, by representatives of professional organisations or the
Chamber of Commerce or, for important reasons, by members,
also order an official liquidation and have it implemented, under
his supervision or under that of a committee of creditors to be
appointed and subject to the appropriate provisions concerning
liquidation.
In the case of official liquidation, the court may order the dis-
continuance of all executions pending against the legal entity.
3. Liquidators
a. Due appoint-
ment and re-
moval

– 35 –
The provisions concerning the liquidators shall be applicable
analogously to the substitute liquidators.
Art. 133
Where the liquidators are not designated in the manner stated
or where the legal entity is cancelled because of the pursuit of
unlawful or immoral objects, they shall be nominated by the
Registrar in extrajudicial proceedings and in this case may be
removed only by the judge.
The registration of the official appointment or removal of
liquidators shall ensue ex officio.
In the case of bankruptcy, the trusteeship in bankruptcy shall
attend to the liquidation pursuant to the law relating to bank-
ruptcy. However, the bodies including possible liquidators of a
legal entity, insofar as dispositions concerning components of the
total assets are not involved, shall have the same status as before
the adjudication of bankruptcy.
In relation to the trusteeship in bankruptcy, the liquidators
shall have the status of a natural person as a bankrupt.
Art. 134
The provisions concerning the obligation to register, the notifi-
cation and the rights and obligations of the liquidators, which are
drawn up with respect to the general partnership, shall also be ap-
plicable to the legal entity, subject to the following provisions and
in the opinion that the notifications for the purpose of registration
in the Public Register shall ensue through the administration.
Every change in the appointment of liquidators and the termi-
nation of their power of agency shall be notified through the ad-
ministration.
Where the law does not determine to the contrary, the provi-
sions which apply to the administration shall also apply to the
liquidators, except however, the restraint of competition.
Liquidators who violate or neglect the obligations with which
they are charged pursuant to the law or the articles shall, after
dissolution of the legal entity, be responsible to the legal entity, at
all events to the members and the creditors of the dissolved legal
entity, for the damages and losses which have arisen, without
b. Official ap-
pointment and
status in bank-
ru
ptcy
c. Obligations
and responsibi-
lit
y

– 36 –
restriction, jointly and severally, in the same way as the bodies of
the legal entity.
Unless otherwise determined, the liquidators shall act collec-
tively and take decisions with a simple majority of votes.
Art. 135
Upon taking up office, the liquidators shall draw up a wind-
ing-up balance, in the preparation of which the administration
shall assist and make available all relevant records and business
papers.
The creditors who are known from the business records or in
other ways, whose abode can be ascertained, shall be requested by
special notification in this connection to register their claims;
notification to the unknown creditors for the purpose of regis-
tering claims shall be by public announcement in the journals
provided pursuant to regulations for announcements to third
parties and, in the absence of such a provision, in the journals
intended for official announcements, insofar as the Registrar in
extrajudicial proceedings does not permit any other kind of re-
quest or insofar as all creditors give their assent to such a request.
Simultaneously, they may petition the court for the discon-
tinuance of all executions.
At the request of the liquidators, the Registrar may, for im-
portant reasons, in extrajudicial proceedings, release the liquida-
tors from their obligation to notify and request the creditors to
register their claims, in which case the six-months’ waiting period
shall commence on the day the disslution was announced by the
Registrar.
The request pursuant to the foregoing paragraphs shall also be
made in the case of domiciliary undertakings.
Art. 136
The liquidators shall conclude current business, satisfy, as far
as the assets allow, the legal entity’s liabilities pursuant to the
provisions of the bankruptcy law concerning the ranking of
claims and realise the assets and, insofar as they are necessary in
order to cover the liabilities, collect the members’ performances
which are still outstanding.
4. Liquidation
activity
a. Drawing up of
the balance
sheet
b. Procedure

– 37 –
In the realisation of the assets, real estate or analogous rights
may, with the assent of the supreme body or another body em-
powered pursuant to regulations, also be disposed of by private
contract.
A balance sheet showing the net position on the assets and li-
abilities of the legal entity in liquidation shall be drawn up annu-
ally. During the liquidation, however, income may not be distrib-
uted and donations may not be made to the reserve fund.
Monies received, which are not necessary for the payment of
creditors, may be deposited at the Landesbank (the state savings
and loan bank) or, for important reasons, also in other ways or,
with the consent of the court in extrajudicial proceedings, the
monies may be applied for part payments.
Art. 137
Where known creditors have omitted to register, the amount
of their claims shall either be deposited judicially or paid out to
them without notification.
Likewise, an appropriate amount shall be deposited for the le-
gal entity’s obligations which are suspended and not yet due as
well as for the litigant obligations, insofar as the distribution of
the legal entity’s assets does not remain suspended until the legal
entity is disposed of or the creditors are provided with security
which is of the same standard as judicial deposition.
Where important reasons exist, a committee of creditors may,
upon the application of creditors, be appointed for the supervi-
sion of the liquidators and for the purpose of accelerating the
liquidation. The said committee of creditors shall be appointed by
a simple majority of the votes represented at a creditors’ meeting
convened under the chairmanship of the court and shall support
and supervise the liquidators and shall exclusively validate respon-
sibility towards the liquidators.
Art. 138
After the debts have been repaid, the assets of a dissolved legal
entity shall, where the members are entitled to certain shares and
insofar as they and not the legal entity itself are entitled to these
c. Safeguards for
creditors
d. Distribution of
the assets and
dere
gistration

– 38 –
and it has not been determined otherwise, be distributed among
the members in proportion to the amounts paid in on these
shares, but otherwise in case of doubt, per capita.
Distribution shall not be effected before six months have ex-
pired, calculated from the day on which dissolution was an-
nounced for the third time in the public journals intended for this
purpose, with the request to register claims or, insofar as
exceptions are not allowed, distribution shall ensue pursuant to
the Registrar’s order in extrajudicial proceedings.
A distribution before the expiration of these six months may
be allowed by the Registrar in extrajudicial proceedings where,
pursuant to the existing circumstances, danger to the creditors is
completely excluded.
After the termination of their activity, the liquidators shall ap-
ply to the Public Register for deregistration.
Deregistration may ensue already before the expiration of the
six-month ban.
Where the articles or the competent body do not determine to
the contrary, the liquidators, after the termination of the liquida-
tion, shall call the supreme body, insofar as such a body exists, for
the purpose of approving the final account and releasing the liq-
uidators. Where the resolution to release is unreasonably refused,
the liquidators may have the release determined by way of action
taken against the legal entity.
Art. 139
Where after the dissolution and its entry in the Public Register
it is found that there are further assets which are subject to distri-
bution, the Court of Justice shall, upon the application of partici-
pants such as members, creditors or ex officio, in extrajudicial
proceedings, undertake the distribution of the assets through
officially appointed liquidators, in order of rank pursuant to
bankruptcy law.
This provision shall apply analogously where a legal entity has
been dissolved as the result of bankruptcy and the supreme body
omitted to appoint special liquidators or it is resolved that the
legal entity shall continue.
5. Supplement-
ar y liquidation

– 39 –
Where undistributed assets of the legal entity still exist, a
creditor, insofar as he seeks his satisfaction solely from these,
cannot be opposed by the period of prescription (statute of limi-
tations) which commenced after distribution.
Art. 140
In the absence of a deviating provision in the articles, the as-
sets may, pursuant to the provisions concerning a resolution to
dissolve, be transferred as a whole and the resolution shall result
in the dissolution of the legal entity, insofar as this has not already
been resolved or the alienating transfer of the entire assets ensues
in order to pay off creditors.
In the absence of any other legal disposition, the contract of
alienation shall require the simple written form and the transfer of
the assets to the acquiring party shall be executed pursuant to the
provisions applicable to the transfer of the individual asset com-
ponents.
The provisions concerning liquidation shall be applicable in
the sense that the liquidators shall also be empowered to under-
take those transactions and lawful acts necessitated by the re-
solved alienation. However, the transfer of the assets to the
transferee shall ensue solely subject to the observance of the pro-
visions drawn up for the distribution of the assets among the
members.
Art. 141
Where a legal claim is asserted against a deregistered or other-
wise terminated legal entity as the result, for example, of pro-
ceedings being reopened or of an action for annulment, the court,
upon application by the participants, shall appoint a legal adviser
for the dissolved legal entity, who shall represent the participants
in the proceedings. The provisions concerning the administrator
ad litem (Prozesspfleger) shall apply analogously with regard to
the legal adviser’s costs.
The appropriate provisions relating to liability shall be reser-
ved for the liability concerning the unjustified withdrawal of
liquidation shares.
6. Alienation of
the assets as a
whole
IV. Assertion of
claims against a
dissolved legal
entit
y

– 40 –
Where successors in title or other persons (firms, legal entities)
incur liability for the debts of the legal entity deregistered in the
Public Register and the period of prescription has not com-
menced, they may be held responsible as joint litigants in addition
to the legal entity or separately, individually or together, subject
to their liability.
Art. 142
The business records and business papers of a company with
legal personality which has been wound up, or of a legal entity on
the same footing shall, at the expense of the total assets, following
the liquidators’ application, be deposited for safe keeping in a
place to be determined by the Register Authority for a period of
ten years and after the expiration of this period shall be used at
the discretion of the Register Authority.
Where a legal entity is wound up as the result of bankruptcy,
the trusteeship in bankruptcy shall, at the expense of the total
assets, issue the directive concerning storage.
Any person able to substantiate a legitimate interest by prima
facia evidence may be empowered by the Court of Justice in ex-
trajudicial proceedings to examine the said business records and
business papers as, for example, former members, successors in
title or creditors.
Art. 143
Where a commune (state or communes) has acquired the –
entire membership shares of a legal entity, such as shares and
shares in a co-operative society, the winding up of the legal entity
may be dropped even when the commune remains the sole mem-
ber of the legal entity without, however, the legal entity losing the
nature of a legal entity pursuant to private law.
The commune or the persons designated by it may then exer-
cise the functions of the entity’s various bodies.
In the case of the dissolution of the legal entity, the liquidation
may proceed in such a manner that the commune declares its
readiness to enter into all the obligations of the legal entity.
The provisions concerning the one-man legal entity remain re-
served.
V. The keeping of
business re-
cords and busi-
ness
papers
VI. Take-over by
the community
1. By acquisition
of the shares

– 41 –
Art. 144
Where a commune has taken over the assets of a legal entity in
their entirety, with assets and liabilities, only the commune shall
be liable towards the legal entity’s creditors after the assets have
been transferred.
Where, however, the members of a legal entity are not person-
ally liable for the legal entity’s indebtedness, the commune’s li-
ability when taking over shall, in the absence of any other provi-
sion, be limited to the assets taken over.
In the event that an entry in the Public Register ensues, the le-
gal entity’s liabilities shall be transferred to the commune ten days
after the publication of the take-over entry in the Public Register,
but otherwise immediately after the take-over.
The formation of a one-man legal entity is reserved.
Art. 145
The possibly necessary registration shall ensue jointly through
the competent representative of the commune and the legal entity
and the take-over agreement shall be enclosed.
The entry and publication may not ensue until after the liqui-
dation of the legal entity has been entered in the Public Register.
The implementation of the liquidation may be agreed in such a
manner that the commune pays out to the legal entity in liquida-
tion or its members either a certain sum or the surplus balance-
sheet assets from the legal entity’s assets.
Art. 146
Where a legal entity has been dissolved for the purpose of al-
ienating its assets as a whole, for the purpose of conversion into
another legal entity or by resolution of the competent body, the
body competent to dissolve the legal entity may, if the intended
purpose can no longer be achieved or is no longer envisaged and
distribution of the assets has not yet commenced, with the major-
ity required to amend the articles, resolve that the legal entity
shall continue to exist.
The same shall apply in the case where the legal entity is dis-
solved by the adjudication of bankruptcy, but the bankruptcy is
2. Take-over of
the assets and
liabilities
a. Effects
b. Procedure
VII. Continuation
of a dissolved
le
gal entit y

– 42 –
cancelled following the conclusion of a settlement agreement or
upon application by the trusteeship in bankruptcy, the com-
munity of creditors or the bankrupt or for another reason, insofar
as the capital or assets necessary for continuation pursuant to the
law are still available.
If the legal entity is entered in the Public Register, the body
committed to or responsible for applying for registration shall
also apply for the registration of the continued existence.
Art. 147
Except for the tacit condition of materialisation, the declara-
tion to join a legal entity with shares, as a member or otherwise to
participate in its assets, must be worded unconditionally, it shall
not contain any conditions, but a date shall be stated determining
the period for which the subscription or other declaration shall
remain binding.
The formalities for the acquisition of membership shall also
apply with respect to the preliminary agreements concerning this.
Conditional declarations may be taken into consideration at
the time membership is established only insofar as other binding
declarations concerning enrolment or participation exist in the
event of the non-occurrence of the condition.
Where the period of validity of a binding declaration of mem-
bership of a legal entity in the process of formation is not deter-
mined and is not established by the circumstances, the validity of
the declaration shall be limited to a period of six months.
Where in the law or the articles mention is made of the mem-
bers, membership of the legal entity shall be inferred and not that
of a body forming a board unless, in an individual case the intent
is different.
Art. 148
Unless the law determines to the countrary, a member’s decla-
ration of membership, after the legal entity has come into exis-
tence, by subscribing to shares and the like, cannot be contested
by a member on grounds of deficiency of intention (mistake,
deceit, the creation of fear) or by a creditor or heir on grounds of
discrimination. This also applies to the articles.
D. Membership
I. Joining
1. In
general
2. Rescission

– 43 –
Damage claims against those who are to blame for the defi-
ciency of intention, also the right of execution and other means of
rescission provided by law are reserved.
Art. 149
Where the law or the articles do not determine to the contrary,
legal entities may grant their members share rights for which, in
the absence of any other rule, the valid provisions for the cooper-
ative society shares of registered co-operative societies shall be
applicable with regard to rights and obligations in particular.
Where the law or the articles do not determine to the contrary,
the membership shall be indivisible, alienable and inheritable,
The transfer of the membership and the creation of a restricted
right in rem assigned to this shall ensue by written agreement
insofar as no securities exist concerning the membership and the
articles do not set up any aggravating provisions such as, particu-
larly, a right of pre-emption or the assent of governing bodies or
members.
To be valid in the event of the bankruptcy of a member, the
transfer, insofar as an order concerning the bankrupt’s estate is
contained therein, shall be subject to the consent of the trustee-
ship in bankruptcy.
Where doubt exists, the distribution of profit shall be in rela-
tion to a member’s payment of assets on membership shares.
Where the law dose not determine otherwise, legal entities
may issue dividend right certificates, with or without member-
ship, and the provisions concerning dividend right certificates
shall be applicable to these where a membership is not combined
therewith; otherwise, however, the provisions concerning divi-
dend shares relating to companies limited by shares shall be ap-
plied analogously.
The appointment of trusts with or without the issuance of
trust certificates relating to shares in the profit, liquidation sur-
plus and the like and the transmission of membership by virtue of
the law, are reserved.
II. Membership
shares
1. In
general

– 44 –
Art. 150
Securities concerning membership may be issued only insofar
as the law expressly allows this.
Where securities are issued in violation of this provision or
before the acquisition of legal personality, they shall be null and
void and the issuer and, insofar as they are to blame, the other
participants shall be liable to the bearers, without restriction,
jointly and severally for all the loss caused by the issuance, not-
withstanding the obligations and privileges resulting from joining
or possible subscription.
The provisions concerning shares as securities, in particular
those concerning the share certificate shall be supplementally
applicable to the other membership securities.
Art. 151
In the absence of other provisions of the law or the articles, a
legal entity may only acquire or take in pledge personal participa-
tions pursuant to the provisions concerning the acquisition of
own shares.
Furthermore, a legal entity may not appoint any trustees for
the participations owned by the legal entity for the purpose of
circumventing the law or the articles.
Where a legal reserve fund is prescribed, the fund may be in-
vested in the legal entity’s own participations, wholly or partly,
only with the assent of the Registrar.
The remaining provisions concerning the legal entity’s own
participations are reserved.
Art. 152
A membership participation to which several members are un-
dividedly entitled shall be represented by them jointly in law and
with respect to obligation.
If there has not been a dispute between them regarding the
membership participation, they shall be liable, jointly and sever-
ally, to the legal entity for the performances related to the mem-
bership participation.
Several members shall appoint a joint representative.
2. Securities con-
cerning mem-
bershi
p
3. Personal parti-
ci pation
4. Several partici-
pants

– 45 –
In the event that they fail to appoint a representative and to
notify the legal entity concerning this, expressions of intent may
be given to another member and the judge may appoint a joint
representative in extrajudicial proceedings.
Art. 153
Provided the articles do not determine to the contrary, mem-
bers with proprietary membership shares may appoint an actual
trust pursuant to the relevant provisions and, accordingly, trans-
fer to the trustee the shares for the restricted or unrestricted exer-
cise of the personal (territorial) rights arising from the member-
ship, in particular, the right to vote, under reservation of the pro-
prietary rights and obligations arising from the membership.
In the absence of other provisions in the trust deed, the trustee
shall deposit with the legal entity the securities handed over to
him against the delivery of trust certificates which shall be trans-
ferable in the same way as membership securities or in another
way in favour of the members (settlors).
Trust certificates having the characteristics of securities and
relating to proprietary claims arising from the membership may,
provided the articles do not forbid it, be issued by a member as
trustee or by a specially appointed trustee, even if the membership
is not connected with a security or is indivisible.
Art. 154
Insofar as there are no deviations resulting from the issuance
of several certificates for one membership or otherwise, the trust
certificate shall state the powers of the trust body from which the
performances relating to law of property and deriving from the
membership can be obtained and, furthermore, shall have the
same content as the deposited securities concerning membership.
By operation of the law, the deposited securities shall remain
non-transferable until trust certificates have been issued for them.
If, contrary to this provision, they are issued, the issuer and, inso-
far as blame attaches to them, the other participants shall be liable
to the bearer, without restriction, jointly and severally, for all loss
caused.
5. Trust certifi-
cates
a. In
general
b. Form and effect

– 46 –
The members are in the same position as other members with
regard to the obligation to the legal entity to perform; on the
other hand, in the absence of other provisions in the trust deed,
only the trustee can assert the rights arising from the membership
or cause them to be asserted by others.
Where a trust exists, the assertion of claims arising from the
membership in the case of execution against the member or if the
said member is bankrupt is admissible only pursuant to the provi-
sions concerning the trust.
The creation of other trusts is reserved.
Art. 155
Established rights to which the members as such are entitled
may not be taken away from them or restricted without their
assent, not even by amendment of the articles, insofar as not all
equally entitled members are affected in the same way by the
deprivation or the restriction.
Insofar as the law or the articles do not determine to the con-
trary, where a member withdraws or is excluded without the legal
entity being dissolved and this member has a claim relating to
dissolution, settlement or similar, the determination of this claim
shall ensue on the basis of a liquidation balance drawn up for this
purpose whereby, however, the legal reserves shall be entered on
the liability side of this balance.
By operation of the law, each member shall be entitled to in-
spect and copy the articles and, where they are duplicated, to
obtain a copy in return for a reasonable payment.
Art. 156
Insofar as the law does not determine or allow any other ac-
tion and in the latter case this is stipulated in the articles, only the
assets of a legal entity are available for the said legal entity’s
creditors.
A liability or liability to effect further contributions on the
part of the individual members may therefore be determined in
the articles only where the law allows this and a joint and several
liability exists for them only where the law or the articles make
such provisions.
III. Established
and other
ri
ghts
IV. Liability and
liability to ef-
fect further
contributions
1. In
general

– 47 –
In the absence of other provisions, its assertion shall ensue by
way of the contribution procedure.
Where shares of the legal entity are held by the said legal en-
tity, liability and the liability to effect further contributions shall
be dormant for the duration of the possession, but so, too, shall a
possible option right to acquire new shares and in the absence of
other provisions in the articles the said option right shall be gov-
erned by the provisions relating to this as drawn up for companies
limited by shares.
Art. 157
Insofar as it might not be possible to satisfy the creditors in
bankruptcy owing to their claims to the assets of the legal entity
existing at the time of the adjudication of bankruptcy having to be
taken into account at the time of the later final distribution in
bankruptcy proceedings, members with liability or liability to
effect further contributions shall be liable to effect contributions
to the bankrupt’s estate in order to cover the deficiency pursuant
to the bankruptcy winding-up balance, namely, in the absence of
any other provision laid down in regulations, in proportion to the
sums involved in the liability or the further contributions where
limited liability or liability to effect further contributions is in-
volved, but otherwise per capita (contributed assets).
Where individual members, including the withdrawn members
liable to contribution pursuant to the law or the articles, are inca-
pable of effecting contributions owing, for example, to insolvency
or other reasons, these contributions shall be spread over the re-
maining members, insofar as this is not opposed by limited liabil-
ity or liability to effect further contributions.
After the creditors have been satisfied, voluntary payments,
made by the members in excess of the contributions owed purs-
uant to the foregoing provisions, shall be refunded right away
to the said members from the contributions and, if necessary, may
be asserted by means of a calculation of additional contributions.
Insofar as the preconditions exist under which a member as
creditor in bankruptcy may claim satisfaction on grounds of a
claim arising out of the contributions, a member may set off
against the contributions a claim on the legal entity.
2. The contribu-
tion procedure
a. In
general

– 48 –
Where, pursuant to individual provisions of this law, the con-
tribution procedure is applicable outside the bankruptcy pro-
ceedings, the administration and/or the liquidators shall take the
place of the trusteeship in bankruptcy on the understanding that
the powers and obligations to which they are otherwise entitled
pursuant to the provisions concerning the contribution procedure
shall be dropped.
Art. 158
Immediately following the adjudication of bankruptcy, the
trusteeship in bankruptcy shall compute, based on the winding-
up balance which has been produced, the contributions to be
effected by the members by way of advances in order to cover the
deficit shown in the balance sheet and in this case the various con-
ditions relating to liability and liability to effect further contribu-
tions where groups of members are involved, as, for example,in
the case of mixed cooperative societies, shall be taken into consid-
eration.
All members, with name (firm’s name) and domicile, shall be
quoted in the computation together with the contributions allot-
ted to them and the extent of the contributions shall be assessed in
such a manner that a deficiency in the total amount to be covered,
resulting from a predictable inability on the part of individual
members to effect contributions, regardless of whether it is de-
termined judicially or not, shall not occur.
Art. 159
Upon petition of the trusteeship in bankruptcy, the Court of
Justice, in expedited extrajudicial proceedings, shall declare by
adjudication, which is no longer voidable by litigation, the com-
putation to be enforceable by execution.
For this purpose, the court shall immediately order a public
court hearing for the purpose of explaining the computation to
the participants. To this court hearing shall be summoned the
members quoted in the computation and/or their successors in
title, the members of the administration and/or the liquidation
b. Computation
of advances
aa. In
general
bb. Writ of execu-
tion

– 49 –
authority, the audit authority if applicable, the trusteeship in
bankruptcy and, in the event that the community of creditors has
appointed a committee of creditors or similar, these members also
and these shall be heard briefly, without evidence actually being
taken.
It shall be stated in the public announcement and in the sum-
monses that the computation shall be accessible for examination at the
court registry one week before the court hearing.
The court shall adjudicate concerning the objections raised,
correct the computation if necessary or order it to be corrected
and finally rule that the computation is enforceable by execution.
At the same hearing or at a court hearing ordered specially,
pursuant to the second paragraph, to which those who partici-
pated in the first hearing may be summoned orally, the adjudica-
tion shall pronounce and simultaneously explain that the compu-
tation, with the adjudication declaring enforcement by execution
which shall not be served, shall be accessible at the court registry
for examination by the participants.
Art. 160
After the computation has been declared enforceable by exe-
cution, the trusteeship in bankruptcy shall collect the contribu-
tions from the members without delay.
The enforcement of execution against a member shall ensue
pursuant to the existing applicable provisions by reason of a copy
of the adjudication to enforce by execution which shall be served
upon the member together with an excerpt from the computation
from which at least the total deficit, the name (the name of the
firm) of the member and the amount allocated to the said member
shall be evident.
The forms of legal redress, such as actions, complaints and the
like, against an enforceable title, to which the member as debtor
in the execution proceedings is entitled, shall remain unaffected.
The collected contributions shall be deposited at the Landes-
bank or at another place to be determined by the trusteeship in
bankruptcy or the committee of creditors.
cc. Execution

– 50 –
Art. 161
Each member and/or the member’s successor in title may
challenge by way of action against the trusteeship in bankruptcy
the computation declared enforceable by execution and the adju-
dication, with the petition to rescind the computation of con-
tributions and the adjudication enforceable by execution against
the said member because, for example, the said member is no
longer a member, the computation does not conform with the
legal provisions or the provisions laid down in regulations or the
winding-up balance is incorrect or because not contributions, but
other payments are demanded, and the like.
The rescission shall take place only within the strict time limit
of one month from the pronouncement of the adjudication and
only insofar as the plaintiff asserted the grounds for rescission at
the time of the court hearing concerning the declaration of en-
forceability by execution or, through no fault of his, the plaintiff
was unable to assert by action in court because, for example, the
grounds did not come into being until after the hearing or of ig-
norance of the law.
The oral hearing in the proceedings to rescind shall not take
place before the expiration of the strict time limit and several
actions for rescission shall be combined for simultaneous hearing
and adjudication.
Upon petition and against the possible deposit of a security,
concerning which the provisions relating to the safeguarding of
the costs of an action shall be applied analogously, the court may,
during the litigation, suspend the execution or direct that en-
forcement measures be rescinded.
The final and conclusive judgment shall be effective for and
against all members liable to pay contributions, regardless of
whether they appeared in the proceedings as intervening parties
or not.
After the expiration of the unused strict time limit of one
month, membership for the members entered in the members’
register shall be deemed to be finally and conclusively determined
for the contribution procedure.
dd. Action in res-
cission

– 51 –
Art. 162
Insofar as the total amount to be covered is not achieved ow-
ing to the inability of individual members to effect contributions
or pursuant to the judgment pronounced in an action to rescind
or for other reasons the computation is required to be amended,
the trusteeship in bankruptcy may draw up a supplementary
computation.
If necessary, the drawing up of the supplementary computa-
tion shall be repeated.
The foregoing provisions concerning the computation of ad-
vances, the writ of execution, the execution and the action to
rescind shall be applicable to the supplementary computation.
Art. 163
As soon as the final distribution, pursuant to the provisions of
the bankruptcy law, is commenced, the trusteeship in bankruptcy
shall determine as a supplement to and correction of the advance
computation and of the supplementary computation, handed
down to the said trusteeship in bankruptcy, how much in contri-
butions, pursuant to the valid provisions, still has to be effected
by the members including the costs of the bankruptcy and contri-
bution proceedings, insofar as the members, possibly as the result
of proceedings concerning advance payments, have not already
been held liable to the limit of their liability or liability to effect
further contributions.
The last paragraph of the previous article shall be applicable to
the computation of the further contributions, on the under-
standing that contributions shall not be apportioned to the mem-
bers whose inability to effect contributions becomes evident.
Apart from the other assertion, right of recourse by virtue of
membership, arising from the liability or the liability to effect
further contributions, may also be asserted by means of computa-
tion of further contributions.
Art. 164
After the possibly necessary computation of further contri-
butions has been declared enforceable by execution, but otherwise
after the computation of advances, the trusteeship in bankruptcy
ee. Supplemen-
tary computa-
tion
c. Computation
of further con-
tributions
d. Distribution of
the contributed
assets

– 52 –
shall immediately distribute to the creditors, by way of subse-
quent distributions and pursuant to the provisions of the law
concerning bankruptcy, the existing balance of contributions and
whenever a sufficient amount has been received from the con-
tributions still to be collected.
Apart from the dividends in bankruptcy allocated to the
claims designated pursuant to the bankruptcy law which are to be
retained, the shares allocated to claims which were contested by
the trustees in bankruptcy or the liquidators in the proceedings
concerning the claims of the creditors in bankruptcy shall be re-
tained.
It is left to the creditor in bankruptcy to eliminate, with effect
for the contributed assets, the administration’s and/or the liqui-
dators’ protest against the legal entity, by bringing action against
the legal entity within a period of one months since the contesta-
tion. However, insofar as the protest is declared finally and con-
clusively well founded the shares are free to be distributed be-
tween the other creditors of the assets paid in as additional capital.
The creditors and the trusteeship in bankruptcy not taking ac-
tion may intervene in a dispute concerning the protest.
Where voluntary payments by the members or third parties do
not have to be reimbursed beforehand, the surpluses not required
for paying off creditors shall be repaid to the members by the
trustees in bankruptcy in proportion to the amount of contribu-
tions effected.
Art. 165
In the absence of other directives, the provisions of the code of
obligations concerning the consequences of default shall be ap-
plied in general to default in the case of performances in kind by
the membership as, for example, in the case of subscriptions in
kind or other additional performances which do not consist of
money and a liability exists solely for the person who has under-
taken to perform in such a manner.
For the subscription in kind subscribed to the capital resources
or own assets, the legal entity, after its formation, may, by virtue
of the warranty, on grounds of defects pursuant to the principles
of the contract of purchase, claim a right to a reduction and com-
V. Default in the
performance
in kind, exclu-
sion of the sett-
lement, of the
right of reten-
tion, etc.

– 53 –
pensation for damages, but not rescission and, if the subscription
is quite worthless, claim that the subscription be effected in
money.
An offset or a right of retention on an object belonging to the
legal entity cannot be asserted against a claim by the legal entity
arising from the obligation of a member to pay on capital shares
or from any other obligation as a member to contribute or liabil-
ity to make further contributions.
The objection that a counter-performance is possibly unful-
filled cannot be raised where another performance in the form of
a subscription in kind is legally due.
Where bodies are to blame for delaying or preventing the
withdrawal of a member and the member suffers loss in conse-
quence, the members of the body concerned shall be liable in the
first place and the legal entity subsidiarily.
Art. 166
In the case of legal entities with membership, the meeting of
the members shall be the supreme body insofar as the law or the
articles do not determine otherwise, as in the case of delegate
meetings, the passing of resolutions by circular letter and similar.
The articles may transfer the authority of the meeting of
members, completely or partly, to a committee comprised of
members or non-members or to a council of members which is
elected by the entirety of the members at the members’ meeting
or at the section or department meetings provided in the articles,
which are separated locally according to professional or other
aspects (representative constitution).
Where there is no provision to the contrary or nothing ensues
by virtue of the nature of the matter, the same conditions as those
applicable for the meeting of members, including minority rights,
shall be applicable for these committee or section or department
meetings.
In the case of legal entities without members which have a su-
preme body, the provisions analogously applicable to the latter
shall be those drawn up for the supreme body in the case of cor-
porations unless otherwise provided.
E. Governing
bodies
I. Supreme body
1. In
general

– 54 –
Art. 167
The supreme body shall be convened by the administration
(chairman), the liquidators or, by virtue of the law, by the repre-
sentatives of the loan creditors or other bodies authorised pursu-
ant to the articles, or their individual members or third parties
and, for the duration of bankruptcy proceedings, also by the
trusteeship in bankruptcy as frequently as required by law or the
articles or as necessary in the interest of the legal entity. In the
event of undue delay causing risk, the audit authority may also
summon the supreme body.
In the case of companies with legal personality and the legal
entities granted the same status as such companies, the supreme
authority shall be called at least once each year, insofar as in the
case of legal entities with less than twenty members each resolu-
tion is not passed by way of circular letter or insofar as the articles
do not expressly determine the ordinary meeting of the supreme
authority once and for all with respect to time, place and the
statement of agenda.
Where the law does not determine otherwise, the form of con-
vocation, whether orally, in writing or by public announcement,
may be determined in more detail in the articles and these should
state the place, time and purpose of the meeting in detail when it
is intended to amend the articles, particularly the essential content
of the amendments. Where, however, the law or the articles do
not determine otherwise, each meeting shall be announced at the
domicile at least one week in advance in the journals intended for
public announcements.
With the exception of the resolution concerning the chair-
manship and the keeping of minutes, the motion proposed at the
meeting of the supreme authority to call an extraordinary meeting
and the instituting of an examination of the management and the
appointment of those commissioned to undertake this, resolutions
may not be passed concerning subjects whose deliberation has not
been announced in the manner required by law or the articles
(agenda).
Prior announcement is not required for the proposal of mo-
tions and for deliberations concerning which resolutions will not
be passed.
2. Convocation
a. In general

– 55 –
Should all members or representatives be assembled and no
entitled person objects, they may, without observing the other-
wise prescribed formalities for convening constitute an assembly
of the supreme authority and within the same lawfully confer and
pass resolutions concerning subjects within their competency
(universal meeting).
Art. 168
Convocation of the members’ meeting shall ensue if demanded
by the representatives of at least one-tenth of the countable votes;
if less than thirty countable votes are present, when demanded by
at least three votes with statement of purpose submitted in a peti-
tion signed by the petitioners.
Should the competent body unreasonably deny this demand,
the convocation may ensue upon petition of the members entitled
to vote and, after the hearing of the members of the adminis-
tration, by the Registrar in extrajudicial proceedings with the
simultaneous appointment of a chairman and, moreover, com-
pensation may be claimed against the suspected bodies on
grounds of their contractual relationship, possibly pursuant to the
provisions concerning tortious acts.
Art. 169
In the absence of provisions to the contrary, members or other
persons entitled to vote may be represented by such or by third
parties with written authoriation.
The legal representatives, the representatives as laid down in
regulations and those representing a firm who represent those
persons of a legal entity who are incapable of acting must be al-
lowed to participate in negotiations and the passing of resolutions
without special powers of agency, even if the articles do not allow
representation or only by others entitled to vote.
Those incapable of acting as, for example, drunken persons,
may be excluded from the meeting.
If they are not members of the legal entity the members of the
audit authority may participate in an advisory capacity.
b. Minority
ri ghts
3. Partici
pation

– 56 –
Within the scope of the law, the articles may determine to
what extent non-members such as bond holders and the like are
authorised to participate in the deliberations and voting.
A register (attendance list) signed by the chairman shall be
kept of the participants who attended or who were represented at
the meeting of the supreme body of a company with legal person-
ality and of the votes they cast. The said register shall be displayed
during the meeting.
Art. 170
Unless the law or the articles determine to the contrary, the
supreme body shall be entitled to those powers which are drawn
up for registered cooperative societies; in particular, it shall super-
vise the activity of other bodies and rule on the competence of the
bodies.
Voting may take place either at the meeting or, where notarial
anthentication is not prescribed for the resolutions, without a
meeting, by means of ballot boxes or, in the case of legal entities
with less than twenty members, in such a manner that instead of
the meeting of the supreme body, the expressly formulated reso-
lutions are sent by registered letter to the persons entitled to vote
and the minimum number of persons entitled to vote, necessary
for the passing of a resolution, return their written assent.
The provisions applicable to the voting shall also apply to the
ballot.
Pursuant to the provisions concerning minority rights, a mi-
nority may demand, by means of a signed petition to be submit-
ted to the administration or the body otherwise summoned at
least five days before the meeting is due to take place, that speci-
fied subjects be placed on the agenda for discussion and the pass-
ing of resolutions.
Where the laws or the articles do not determine otherwise, the
rules concerning parliamentary negotiations shall be applicable
for the chairing of the meeting, the deliberation and the passing of
resolutions.
4. Authority and
passing of
resolutions
a. In
general

– 57 –
Art. 171
Unless the articles determine to the contrary, a member
elected by the meeting shall preside over the meeting on each
occassion.
It shall be incumbent upon the administration to ensure that
minutes of the meeting are kept and these shall report briefly but
in sufficient detail on the deliberations, resolutions and votes. The
administration shall also give the necessary instructions concern-
ing the formalities for voting and the determination of voting
rights.
In the absence of any other rule determined by the articles or
the meeting, the minutes of the meeting shall be kept by a mem-
ber and signed by the chairman of the meeting and the keeper of
the minutes.
Each person entitled to vote shall be allowed during business
hours to examine the minutes and, upon demand, obtain a copy of
same.
Art. 172
In the absence of any provisions to the contrary, the resolu-
tions, in order to be valid, shall require the assent of the simple
majority of the present, countable votes and at least one-tenth of
all votes must be represented, insofar as the judge, upon petition
by the administration, does not, for important reasons, allow an
exception in extrajudicial proceedings.
Where the law does not determine to the contrary, as in the
case of multiple voting rights or proportional representation, each
member shall have one vote.
Bond holders or lenders, with or without a claim to convert
their right of creditor’s title into a right of membership, may be
conceded in the articles a more closely defined right to vote, for
which the provisions relating to the exercising of the rights of
members to vote shall be supplementally applicable whereby,
however, the entirety of such voting rights may comprise at the
most half of all the votes, but the assent of at least three quarters
of all the votes shall be required in the event that more than one-
third of all the voting rights are conceded.
b. Chairing and
keeping of
minutes
c. Required
majority
aa. In
general

– 58 –
Should the membership be combined with a security, the ma-
jority, where doubt exists, shall be computed according to the
number of shares; where doubt exists at delegate meetings, how-
ever, each delegate shall be accorded one vote.
The articles may also determine that individual groups of
members or shares shall have different voting rights; in such cases,
however, each member must have at least one vote.
Where the law or the articles prescribe that a minimum of
votes shall be present for the passing of a resolution and where an
insufficient number of votes is represented at a first meeting, this
resolution, concerning the same subjects, may be passed, regula-
tions to the contrary reserved, with a simple majority at a second
meeting to be convened within an appropriate period, which shall
be at least eight days, regardless of that minimum number, if
nothing to the contrary is determined.
In the event of parity of votes, the chairman shall have the
casting vote.
In particular, the foregoing paragraph shall be applied an-
alogously if resolutions may be adopted by circular letter.
Art. 173
Where in a legal entity there exist members or shares having
different rights or obligations as, for example, preference shares,
ordinary shares or restricted and unrestricted liability or liability
to effect further contributions, those who are equally entitled or
equally liable form a party between themselves in litigious pro-
ceedings and special groups (categories) when voting takes place,
insofar as their rights or obligations are influenced dissimilarly by
the resolution to be passed and for such a resolution to be validly
passed it is necessary to have the assent of all groups required for
an amendment of the articles unless, with the approval of the
Register Authority, it is regulated differently in the articles.
In the absence of other provisions in the articles, these special
meetings shall be called by the administration and chaired by a
participant elected by the meeting. Otherwise, the provisions
bb. Special entitle-
ments and obli-
gations

– 59 –
concerning the supreme body shall be applicable analogously.
In the absence of other directives in regulations, the provision
contained in the previous article shall be applicable to the passing
of resolutions.
Where the dissimilarity in the right to vote exists essentially in
a dissimilar number of votes, only a joint resolution shall be
passed and the dissimilarity in the right to vote shall be taken into
consideration.
Art. 174
Where the articles do not determine to the contrary, they may
be amended with the approval of three-quarters of all those pres-
ent at the meeting of the supreme body, representing at least half
of all the shares; in the event that the latter are not present, the
approval of all members shall be required.
Insofar as it is not determined to the contrary, new obligations
for the members to perform may be substantiated or increased
only with the approval of the members, otherwise a resolution
shall be valid only if it is not contested.
Amendment of the internal regulations (by-articles) shall re-
quire merely the written form, even if such provisions were
drawn up in an authenticated deed.
Amendments of the articles shall be drawn up within the same
scope as the original articles and, if necessary, authenticated and
entered in the Public Register.
The execution of the amendments which concern only the
wording may, by resolution of the supreme body, be transferred
to another body.
An amendment of the articles does not exist where, pursuant
to the law relating to firm names, a clearly distinguishable sub-
joinder is added to the firm name of a branch establishment.
Art. 175
Notwithstanding the right of participation in the meeting and
the discussion, each person entitled to vote shall be excluded from
the right to vote, in the said person’s own name or in the name of
another by virtue of the law, in the case of the passing of a reso-
cc. Article
amendment
d. Exclusion from
ri
ght to vote

– 60 –
lution concerning a transaction or litigation between the said
person, the said person’s spouse, betrothed or a person related in
the direct line on the one hand and the legal entity on the other or
the passing of a resolution concerning a transaction or litigation
between a third party and the legal entity from which a person
entitled to vote derives personal advantage or disadvantage.
Own shares in the possession of the legal entity do not confer
the right to vote and do not belong to the countable votes. The
right to vote, however, may be exercised by the legal entity ap-
pointed as the trustee.
In the case of resolutions concerning the release of the admini-
stration with regard to management and accounting, the persons
who participated in the management in any way shall not, by
virtue of the law, have voting rights.
A resolution contravening these provisions may be rescin-
ded pursuant to the provisions concerning the rescission of reso-
lutions of the supreme body.
These restrictions shall not be applicable to legal entities with
less than thirty persons entitled to vote, to members of the audit
authority, in the case of elections and removals or where, in ex-
trajudicial proceedings, the Registrar allows an exception other-
wise.
Art. 176
Where a restricted right in rem attaches to a membership right,
only the member or the trustee who is on the same footing is
entitled to vote, under reservation of representation.
Where securities relating to the membership are in existence,
the bearer of the title is bound to enable the right to vote to be
exercised with the said title insofar as the immediate restitution of
the unchanged title is ensured after the exercise of the right to
vote.
Where a right of membership is being used, only the member
has the right to vote. However, the member shall obtain the as-
sent of the usufructuary for all resolutions which constitute un-
usual acts on the part of the administration, and in the event of
infringement of this obligation the member shall be liable for
damages.
c. Right to vote in
case of usu-
fruct, pledge
and other ri
ghts

– 61 –
The voting right for the deposited securities (deposit vote)
may be asserted by the depositary only provided the said depo-
sitary has special authority to do so, granted by the depositor,
insofar as the law does not allow exceptions, as in the case of trust
deposits, for example.
In the absence of a deviating provision or agreement, the exer-
cise of other personal (territorial) rights arising from the member-
ship shall be deemed to be equal to the right to vote.
This provision shall be applied analogously to other rights to
vote.
Art. 177
Concerning the resolutions of the supreme body which relate
to the constitution, the amendment of the articles and the disso-
lution of a legal entity, an authenticated document shall be drawn
up in all cases where membership exists as a proprietary share or
such recording is otherwise required by law, unless the law itself
provides an exception as, for example, in the case of cooperative
societies, small insurance associations and establishments or in the
case of recording by circular letter.
The authenticator must be present in person when the reso-
lution is passed and, stating the place and time of the meeting, must
keep minutes which record accurately and briefly the resolutions
passed as well as the occurrences and statements which took place
or were made in the authenticator’s presence and were of signifi-
cance for the appraisal of the regularity of the proceedings.
The minutes must be signed by the chairman of the meeting
and by a person designated as the keeper of the minutes.
Insofar as the prerequisites for this exist and it is specifically
demanded, a confirmation in the minutes of the identity of the
chairman and other persons present at the meeting may also be
considered to be adequate.
If need be, the founder’s draft of the articles, the declarations
of membership, the signed subscription prospectus, the articles
approved by the members’ meeting and similar shall be appended
to the authenticated deed.
In all cases, the authenticated deed may be replaced by a decla-
ration signed by all the participants and authenticated.
f. Official recor-
ding of resolu-
tions

– 62 –
Art. 178
The administration and, insofar as it does not initiate action it-
self, the audit authority of the legal entity may contest before the
judge at the domicile by means of action, cross action, plea or
interlocutory or final decision within summary proceedings
against the legal entity resolutions of the supreme body or of
another body which contravene the provisions of the law or the
articles.
Where the subject matter of the resolution is a rule whose im-
plementation would render the members of the administration or
the audit authority liable to prosecution or render the creditors or
members of the legal entity liable, each member of the admini-
stration and the audit authority may, by virtue of the law, contest
it or refuse to implement it.
Furthermore, in the case of legal entities with members, with
reservation of the provisions concerning established rights, the
representatives of at least one-twentieth of all votes, but at least
three votes and where there are less than ten votes or members,
each vote or each member may, by virtue of the law, cause a
resolution to which they have not given their assent to be con-
tested and rescinded. Under these circumstances, the judge, with
appropriate application of the provisions of the Code of Civil
Procedure concerning the lodgment of security for the costs of an
action, may require security, and in the event of failure to observe
this requirement the claim to rescind shall no longer be admitted.
In the same way, individual persons entitled to vote may,
where, contrary to law or article, they have not been summoned
to meet or their participation in the meeting or the voting has
been made impossible in another way or rendered more difficult
in an inequitable manner and as a result of this have not partici-
pated in the meeting or the voting or, in the case of a resolution to
be adopted by circular letter, persons entitled to vote have voted
against the resolution or have been circumvented or, finally,
where unauthorised persons have taken part in the passing of a
resolution, whether an objection has been raised or not, cause a
resolution to be contested and rescinded if, at the same time, they
are able to substantiate by prima facie evidence that this defect
had an influence on the resolution passed.
5. Rescission of
resolutions
a. In
general

– 63 –
Where an irretrievable disadvantage threatening the legal en-
tity is substantiated by prima facie evidence, the court may post-
pone the contested resolution in mandatory proceedings.
Art. 179
The right of rescission of the persons entitled to vote lapses if
the said persons fail to announce their intention to bring action
within one month of the passing of the resolution or, in the event
that the articles provide for a special rescission procedure fail to
announce this to the administration immediately following the
exhaustion of the administrative channels and bring the action
before the judge within a further month at the latest of the passing
of the resolution.
In the event that the contested resolution is entered in the
Public Register, the judgment shall, upon demand of the con-
testants, be entered in the Public Register in amendment of the
earlier entry and published, if this is necessary.
The judgment declaring annulment shall be binding on all per-
sons of a legal entity entitled to vote.
The plaintiffs acting negligently by initiating the action against
the resolution of the legal entity shall be liable for all the losses
arising from unfounded contestation, pursuant to the provisions
concerning tortious acts, without restriction, jointly and severally.
The provisions concerning action for voidability shall be ap-
plicable supplementally to the action to rescind.
Otherwise, resolutions may also be rescinded ex officio by the
Registrar pursuant to the provisions as drawn up ex officio in the
case of voidability.
Art. 180
Each legal entity must have an administration, (board of di-
rectors, managers and the like) which, in the absence of provisions
to the contrary, may be comprised of one or several natural or
juridical persons or firms and be appointed by the supreme body
from members of the legal entity or third persons for a period of
three years and the members of the administration may be re-
appointed and remunerated or not.
b. Assertion of
liability for da-
ma
ges, etc.
II. Administration
1. In
general

– 64 –
Subject to the provisions concerning the participation of the
community, the articles may also concede to other third parties,
such as loan and mortgage creditors or non-profit making under-
takings, the right to appoint individual members of the ad-
ministration or its board of directors (bound administration).
Where during the course of a business year individual mem-
bers from an administration comprised of several members cease
to be members or are prevented from participating in the man-
agement, the remaining members may, insofar as the articles do
not determine to the contrary, continue to manage and represent
until the next meeting of the supreme body.
The current members of the administration or other persons
authorized to sign and the termination or an amendment of their
authority to represent shall, in the case of legal entities entered in
the Public Register, be registered without delay and the proof of
appointment as, for example, an extract from the minutes, shall be
appended, insofar as a re-appointment is not involved.
The provisions drawn up for the members of the administra-
tion are also applicable to their possible representatives when they
act, or should act, as such.
A special administration may not be appointed for a branch
establishment, but, however, a special representative as authorised
signatory.
Unless the law or the articles determine otherwise, manage-
ment shall also embrace the authority to represent.
The articles may declare applicable the provisions concerning
the board of directors in the case of companies limited by shares.
Art. 180a
1)
At least one member of the administration of a legal entity
authorised to manage and represent must be a Liechtenstein citi-
zen domiciled in the Principality of Liechtenstein and be in pos-
session of the professional licence to act as lawyer, legal agent,
trustee or auditor, or a government-recognised business qualifi-
cation.

1) Art. 180a inserted by the law dated 4 June, 1963, LGBl. 1963, No. 17 reformu-
lated by the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.

– 65 –
On the same footing are persons resident in Liechtenstein
(foreigners require permission to settle) who possess a govern-
ment-recognised certificate of qualification which corresponds to
one of the requirements laid down in para. 1, whose fixed, main
employment is with a lawyer, legal agent, trustee, auditor or a
juridical person with licence to act as trustee or auditor, or with a
bank, and pursue their activity within the intendment of para. 1,
within the framework of this employment.
Excepted from the obligations pursuant to para. 1 are:
1 Legal entities which, on the basis of the law concerning trade,
have a qualified manager,
2 Legal entities which pursue an activity in Liechtenstein which
does not fall within the scope of application of the trade law.
By means of an Executive Order the Government may assign
to a government office, for independent settlement, the issuance
of confirmations relating to the recognition of business qualifica-
tions, with reservation of recourse to the Government’s collegial
jurisdiction.
1)
Art. 181
If nothing to the contrary has been determined or the compe-
tent body has not ruled in a resolution, all members of the admi-
nistration shall be entitled to manage.
Where the administration is comprised of several members and
the articles do not determine to the contrary, no member alone
shall execute an act which appertains to management if danger
due to delay does not exist.
Where pursuant to the articles or a regulation based on these
each member of the administration is entitled to manage alone,
the execution of an act pertaining to management must be left
undone if one of the members objects to the execution of the said
act, in the case that the articles do not determine otherwise.
Actions vis-a-vis third parties, however, remain unaffected.

1) Para 4 of Art. 180a inserted by the law dated 16. December 1994, LGBl. 1995,
No. 25.
2. Management
a. In general

– 66 –
Art. 182
The administration shall have all the authority and obligations
which are not transferred to or reserved for another body as, for
example, the vesting and retraction of the power of “Procura”,
i.e., of signature rights; in particular, the administration shall also
be concerned with the preservation of the capital resources and/or
the legal entity’s own assets in the case of legal entities whose
capital resources are not required to be expressed as a sum of
money as well as with the security and success of the undertaking.
It shall conduct and promote the legal entity’s business un-
dertaking with care and shall be liable for the observance of the
principles of careful management and representation.
The administration shall receive from the founders all the
written documents relating to the formation of the legal entity.
The administration shall be under obligation to the legal entity
to observe all restrictions which are determined by law, articles,
resolutions of the competent body or in any other way.
Unless determined to the contrary, the administration of a le-
gal entity shall be entitled to the same authority and obligations as
the administration of a registered cooperative society.
Art. 183
Where the articles do not determine to the contrary, the mem-
bers of the administration of companies with legal personality
which pursue commercial objects and of other legal entities whose
status is equal to these may not, without the consent of the su-
preme body or, in the absence of a supreme body, without the
approval of the judge in extrajudicial proceedings, either effect
transactions in the line of business for their own account or for
the account of third parties or participate as a partner or member
with unlimited liability or occupy a position in the administration
or the audit authority in a company without legal personality or
in a legal entity in the same line of business.
The consent may be expressed in general terms in the articles.
Furthermore, the said consent may be assumed where, on the
occasion of the appointment as member of the administration of
the legal entity such an activity or participation was known and
its termination was nevertheless not expressly required.
b. Authority and
obli gations
c. Restraint of
com
petition

– 67 –
Members of the administration who infringe the restraint
stated in the first paragraph may be removed at any time without
obligation to compensate. Moreover, the legal entity may demand
compensation for damage or, instead of this, demand that the
business effected for the account of the member of the admini-
stration be deemed to have been concluded for its account and,
regarding the business concluded for the account of others, de-
mand the surrender of the emolument obtained for this or the
assignment of the claim for emolument.
The rights of the legal entity referred to in the foregoing lapse
three months from the day on which the other members of the
administration and, if members do not exist, the members of the
audit authority gained knowledge of the substantiating fact and in
all cases after the expiration of one year.
Other contractual arrangements, such as the agreement not to
compete, etc., are reserved.
Art. 184
The representation of legal entities ensues through the bodies
appointed for this purpose or other special representatives pursu-
ant to the regulations in the articles. The administration does not
require a special power of agency provided, for example, by law.
The performance of the legal entity’s transactions as well as
the representation of the legal entity in this business activity may,
where the administration is comprised of several members, also be
transferred to individual members or other authorised repre-
sentatives or employees of the legal entity.
Legal entities or firms may also be appointed as bodies
authorised to represent or manage, as board of directors or as
administration or as a member or other representative of such.
The authorised representatives or managing persons of the said
legal entities or firms shall then execute for them, insofar as
special delegates are not appointed for this, all the negotiations of
the bodies and the representatives.
Where the law does not otherwise determine to the contrary,
the administration has the status of a legal representative.
3. Representation
a. In general

– 68 –
The legal entities not entered in the Public Register are re-
quired, following a request from the Registrar, in order to avoid
the administrative penalty admissible in the Public Register pro-
ceedings, to make known their members of the administration (of
the board of directors) appointed to represent.
1)
Art. 185
A legal entity shall be deemed to be in bad faith if one of the
persons acting as body or representative is in bad faith or if an
authorised representative in bad faith fails to draw the competent
persons’ attention to the defect.
The provision of the foregoing paragraph shall be applied
analogously where the judgment of the knowledge, of the fault or
of loyalty and good faith of the legal entity is involved.
The members of the body entitled to represent take oaths, af-
firm to the judge, etc., on behalf of the legal entity in the same
manner as a party.
In the case of the bankruptcy of the legal entity, the members
of the administration have the same obligations to the Bankruptcy
Office as a natural person when bankrupt and the administration
shall protect their rights against the trusteeship in bankruptcy.
Art. 186
Upon the conclusion of transactions by the legal entity in
which a member of the administration is interested as, for exam-
ple, upon the conclusion of transactions with the member himself,
this person may not, by virtue of the law, participate, except in
the case of urgency.
Where as a result of this a valid resolution cannot be passed,
the transaction shall be referred to the audit authority or, in the
absence of an audit authority, to another body determined in the

1) Art. 184 last para. (= para. 5 ) inserted by the law dated 10 April, 1928, concerning
the Trust Enterprise LGBl. 1928, No. 6.
b. Position as party
c. Exclusion

– 69 –
regulations and, if such a provision is lacking, to the supreme
body, which shall entrust one or several specially authorised
agents with the representation of the legal entity or deal with the
transaction itself.
This provision shall not be applicable where deviating provi-
sions are contained in the articles, in the case of legal entities
having less than thirty members or in the event that the audit
authority approves the transaction, in which case, however, the
audit authority must report to the next meeting of the supreme
body concerning this matter.
Art. 187
The bodies as well as the other persons appointed to manage
and represent totally are authorised by virtue of the law to con-
clude on behalf of the legal entity all transcations with bona fide
third parties which may promote the purpose or object of the
undertaking.
Third parties may also be legal entities or firms in which the
legal entity participates as member.
In respect of this definition and also with regard to the mean-
ing of the restriction of their power of agency in the relationship
with the legal entity and bona fide third parties, the bodies and
the persons mentioned are subject to the provisions drawn up for
the general partnership, insofar as special provisions do not exist.
The transactions which they undertake shall be deemed to be
valid for the legal entity even if they do not ensue expressly in the
name of the said legal entity, but the circumstances pertaining to
their execution indicate that they are undertaken on behalf of the
legal entity in accordance with the intentions of the participants.
The authority to represent of persons (firms) not appointed
for total management and representation shall be in accordance
with the authority assigned to them. In case of doubt, it shall
extend to all lawful acts which are usually associated with the
execution of such transactions.
d. Power of agen-
cy of the bodies
and repre-
sentatives

– 70 –
Art. 188
The articles of all legal entities should determine the manner in
which the administration shall declare its intentions, who is
authorised to sign and, where several are authorised to sign, who
shall sign validly with sole and who with collective signature
rights.
In particular, the articles may determine that a member of the
administration comprised of several members is authorised to sign
validly only in combination with an authorised signatory; how-
ever, this circumstance must be notified to the Public Register,
entered therein and published.
Where the law or the articles do not determine to the contrary
and the administration is comprised of several members, the par-
ticipation and the signature of at least two members shall be re-
quired for the representation of the legal entity and for valid sig-
nature on behalf of the said legal entity. However, also in the case
of joint management and representation, expressions of intent as,
in particular, summonses and other processes served upon the
legal entity shall be validly served when served upon only one of
the members entitled to represent or a representative.
Art. 189
Where an entry has been made in the Public Register, certifi-
cation provided by the Register Authority signifying that the
persons designated therein are entered in the Public Register as
members of the administration is sufficient evidence of the auth-
ority of the administration as far as public authorities are con-
cerned. On the other hand, for legal entities that are not entered
in the Public Register, proof of identity is required concerning the
appointment by the competent body as, for example, minutes of
the meeting or a notarised copy or excerpt.
Where the law does not allow an exception, signing shall be
effected in such a manner that the signatories shall add their name,
by their own hand, to the name of the firm or the legal entity.
Where another legal entity or firm is entitled to sign on behalf
of a legal entity or firm, it shall be sufficient if the signature is
signed in such a manner that the representative of the former adds
e. Execution
f. Evidence of
authority and
si
gnature

– 71 –
his signature, by his own hand, to the name of the legal entity or
firm represented.
Art. 190
Where an existing legal entity temporarily lacks the required
managing bodies or the bodies authorised to represent or, in ad-
dition, a legal representative with this anthority or where the
persons forming the administration are not known or, in the indi-
vidual case, the representatives are excluded from the representa-
tion and where management and representation has not been
taken care of in another manner, the court, upon application by
the participants and at the expense of the legal entity, shall ap-
point a legal advisor in extrajudicial proceedings insofar as the
interests of the legal entity, its members or creditors or the public
demand this.
The legal advisor shall convene the body responsible for the
appointment without delay and, by virtue of the law, all the
authority exercised by the lacking bodies or representatives shall
be exercised by the said legal advisor.
The provisions concerning the creation and dissolution of legal
entities are reserved.
Art. 191
Upon application by members and at the discretion of the
judge, management and representation may, against the provision
of security for possible loss, be temporarily withdrawn from the
body of a legal entity by the appointment of a legal advisor, pro-
vided it can be substantiated by prima facie evidence that the said
body endangers the interests of the legal entity and that danger is
imminent.
Except in the case where a legal advisor is appointed solely for
individual items of business as, for example, in the case of legal
representation in court, the suspension of representation and
management as well as the appointment of a legal advisor shall, in
the case of legal entities entered in the Public Register, be noted in
the Public Register with a statement concerning the legal advisor
and his authority to represent and, at the discretion of the Regis-
ter Authority, published.
4. Appointment
of a legal advi-
sor
a. In
general
b. Withdrawal of
management and
re
presentation

– 72 –
Art. 192
The supreme authority may appoint one or several auditors as
audit authority who are not required to be members of the legal
entity and may neither belong to the administration nor be em-
ployees of the legal entity assigned to the said administration and
shall exercise their authority and obligations pursuant to the law,
articles and possible resolutions of the supreme body, for or
without reward.
A special audit authority acting on its own responsibility may
be determined in the articles also for individual lines of business,
business departments or branch business establishments.
In addition to the participation of the community, the articles
may also concede the right to appoint individual members of the
audit authority or its chairman to other third parties such as loan
or bond creditors or non-profit making undertakings (bound
audit authority).
The Government may prescribe by way of ordinance that legal
entities which have issued bearer bonds without special cover or
whose capital resourses or own assets including the borrowed,
unsecured monies amount to at least SFr. 5 million be audited by
an approved or legally qualified firm of auditors.
1)
Where the audit authority is not appointed or is not complete
pursuant to the law or the articles, the court, upon application of
a participant in the legal entity, shall, in extrajudicial proceedings,
determine a three-month period of time during which the audit
authority shall be appointed or completed and should this period
of time elapse without the said audit authority being appointed or
completed, the court itself shall designate the required audit
authority members for the period until the appointment is made.
A legal entity which undertakes commercial activities or
whose purpose or object as laid down in regulations allows the
pursuit of commercial objects must appoint an audit authority
pursuant to para.
1)

1) Art. 192 para. 4 and 6 in the version of the Law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
III. Audit
authority
1. A
ppointment

– 73 –
Art
. 193
In the case of companies with legal personality and legal enti-
ties on the same footing, the audit authority may not be ap-
pointed for longer than one year in the first instance and, later, for
not longer than three years.
If doubt exists, this latter duration shall be applicable to the
audit authority in the case of all legal entities.
Where representation before court or administrative authori-
ties is not involved or the articles do not determine otherwise, the
members of the audit authority may not transfer the exercise of
their obligations.
The provisions drawn up for the members of the audit auth-
ority shall apply analogously to their representatives where they
act or should act as such.
Insofar as exceptions are not determined, the audit authority
shall act towards third parties as a body and shall be represented
by its chairman.
Art. 194
Where an audit authority is appointed and the articles do not
determine otherwise, the said audit authority is empowered by
operation of the law to represent the legal entity with members of
the administration when transactions are concluded and, where
the members’ meeting does not appoint another authorised agent,
to conduct legal proceedings against present members of the ad-
ministration, concerning which the said members’ meeting shall
pass a resolution.
In proceedings against the members of the audit authority, the
legal entity shall be represented by special authorised agents
whom the supreme body shall appoint for the said proceedings.
In the absence of a provision in the articles to the contrary, the
audit authority shall be empowered, at its discretion in the event
of apprehended danger, temporarily to suspend from the manage-
ment and representation, or have suspended by the judge in ex-
trajudicial proceedings, members of the administration who are
not appointed by a legal entity under public law as well as
2. Position
a. In general
b. Towards the
administration
and the supre-
me bod
y

– 74 –
authorised signatories and other authorised agents until a decision
has been reached by the supreme body which must be summoned
without delay.
Art. 195
The balance sheets, inventories, profit and loss accounts and
other books of account of companies with legal personality and
other legal entities, insofar as the latter pursue commercial ob-
jects, shall, as far as possible, be examined by the appointed audit
authority with respect to regularity, accuracy and reliability and
to determine whether the financial situation and the business
result are presented correctly.
For this purpose, the audit authority may, as a body or
through individual members, demand that the books of account
and documentary material be submitted to it, that as far as possi-
ble it is called in for the inventory taking and that the administra-
tion explains certain individual items to it.
The audit authority may demand that certain subjects be han-
dled by the administration or placed on the agenda of the supreme
body for consideration and decision by resolution.
Art. 196
In the case of companies with legal personality, the audit
authority must report in writing to the supreme body concerning
the balance sheet and profit and loss account submitted to it by
the administration and, as far as possible, this report shall furnish
information concerning the following:
1. Whether, in the opinion of the audit authority, the balance
sheet and profit and loss account submitted to the supreme
body reflects the true economic position of the company,
2. whether the balance sheet and profit and loss account agree
with the books of account and the inventory,
3. whether the audit authority proposes to the supreme body that
the balance sheet and profit and loss account be approved, with
or without reservation, or be returned to the administration,
4. whether the audit authority agrees to the administration’s
proposals concerning the distribution of profits or whether it
recommends another method of distribution.
3. Duties
a. In general
b. Re
portin g

– 75 –
Where an audit authority is prescribed, the annual balance
sheet and profit and loss account may not be approved by the
supreme body before such a report has been submitted.
A minority identical to that which may demand that the su-
preme body shall be summoned has the right to draw to the no-
tice of the audit authority certain objects which require examina-
tion on the understanding that the audit authority shall report this
to the next meeting of the supreme body for the purpose of pass-
ing a resolution.
Art. 197
The audit authority shall draw to the attention of the body
immediately superior to the suspected person and, in important
cases, also to the supreme body, any irregularities or infringe-
ments of the provisions contained in the law or the articles which
come to the notice of the said audit authority in the performance
of its duties.
Outside the meeting of the supreme body, communications
from the auditors to persons other than members of the admini-
stration and the audit authority concerning the observations made
are save for other responsibility, inadmissible, pursuant to the
provisions concerning the right of privacy in particular.
Art. 198
Concerning the organisation of the audit authority, further
provisions for the expansion of the said audit authority’s powers
and obligations and in particular for the undertaking of interim
audits may be specified in the articles.
In addition to the ordinary auditors (audit authority), the su-
preme body may at any time appoint special inspectors or experts
to investigate the management or individual parts thereof.
Art. 199
In addition to the administration, the articles may also make
provision for a supervisory board which is appointed pursuant to
the provisions concerning the administration and may be assigned
c. Notification of
irregularities
and pledge of
secrec
y
4. Other provisi-
ons of the arti-
cles
5. Supervisory
board

– 76 –
the function of permanently supervising the management and
participating in the administration.
1)
The charge of responsibility may also be brought by the su-
pervisory board against the members of the administration.
The members of the supervisory board may, but are not re-
quired to be entered in the Public Register.
Art. 200
Where the law does not determine to the contrary, the articles
may also provide for other indirect or direct bodies such as man-
agement, committees and other representatives.
Where no other provision is made, the provisions concerning
the implied
2) trust and, supplementally, those concerning the
mandate or, insofar as remuneration is agreed or, depending upon
the circumstances, may be assumed, the contract of employment
shall be applicable to the relationship between the bodies and the
legal entity, insofar as the supreme body or the position of the
minorities or special categories of members is not concerned.
Art. 201
Where the law does not determine to the contrary or the arti-
cles do not entrust another body with this, the supreme body
shall be empowered at any time to remove the members of the
administration, the audit authority or other bodies as well as
other authorised agents or delegates appointed by the said su-
preme body.
The right to appoint a body, a member of such or an author-
ised agent includes the right to remove or give notice of termina-
tion to these and this shall occur by virtue of the law where
authorities make the appointment. In other cases, only insofar as
no other provision has been made.
This right to remove exists, contrary to conflicting provisions
in the articles, by virtue of the law where important reasons as,
for example, gross neglect of duty or inability to manage properly
justify such action.

1) Art. 199 para. 1 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 392) See annotation 3) to Art. 898.
IV. Other bodies
and applicable
law
V. Termination
and removal

– 77 –
The administration may also at any time remove the com-
mittees, delegates, directors and other authorised agents they have
appointed and suspend the functions of the authorised agents
appointed by the supreme body, while informing the latter of this
suspension.
Possible claims for compensation by those removed, arising
from contracts, such as contract of employment or mandate or
from tort and the temporary suspension from management and
representation by the judge, are reserved.
Where the judge removes members or bodies, he shall, at the
same time order that a new appointment be made by the com-
petent bodies and, meanwhile, take appropriate steps pursuant to
the provisions concerning the appointment of a legal advisor.
Art. 202
Companies with legal personality and other legal entities, in-
sofar as the latter are engaged in commercial activities, are subject
to the following provisions and the provisions which are other-
wise drawn up concerning the commercial clearing system.
Insofar as it is required to state the capital resources (money
capital resources), determined numerically, in money, of an un-
dertaking, this may ensue in domestic or foreign currency and,
accordingly, the clearing system may be based on the appropriate
currency or another currency.
Where important reasons exist, the Government may deter-
mine by way of Executive Order in the case of undertakings other
than domiciliary undertakings that domestic money shall be em-
ployed for the money capital resources and/or the undertaking’s
own assets and for the clearing system, or that other deviating
provisions shall be applicable.
Art. 203
Unless important reasons justify an exception, the draft balance
sheet shall be submitted to the supreme body for approval within the
first six months of the succeeding business year.
F. Clearing
system
I. In
general
II. Annual bal-
ance-sheet
regulations
1. Date of balance

– 78 –
Legal entities with capital resources and/or own assets
amounting to at least one million francs as well as all those that
have issued bearer bonds are required to prepare a balance sheet at
least once every year.
Art. 204
The annual balance sheet shall express the relationship be-
tween the firm’s own means and liabilities and between the short-
term liabilities and the permanent maintenance of liquidity from
available means.
A balance sheet showing entries which on the balance sheet
date are below the value of the assets permissible pursuant to the
law as well as the investment by the administration of other hid-
den reserves is permitted within the frame of this law and the
articles in the interest of the most uniform distribution of profits
and for the consolidation of the undertaking.
Where in the time between the end of the business year and
the passing of a resolution by the meeting of the supreme body
concerning the closing of the accounts it comes to the notice of
the administration that the financial state of the legal entity is
considerably reduced, owing to losses which have occurred or as
the result of depreciation and the reduction is presumably not
merely of a temporary nature, the profit shown in the annual
balance shall, in the absence of deviating provisions in the articles,
be excluded from the distribution to the extent of the loss of as-
sets and transferred to the account of the current business year.
The articles may determine that profit in the form of an in-
terim payment on the profit to be shown in the annual balance
sheet may be paid out during the business year on the basis of an
interim balance sheet, or that the administration or another body,
without prior resolution of the supreme body, may at certain
times during the year distribute profits from profit balances
brought forward from previous years or from special reserve
funds.
Shares of a legal entity which are in the possession of the said
legal entity as, for example, shares of the latter’s capital shall, in
2. Balance-sheet
principles
a. In
general

– 79 –
the absence of other provisions laid down in regulations, be taken
into account when profit and other performances accruing from
the membership are distributed but not, however, with respect to
liquidation certificates.
Art. 205
Formation, organisational and administrative costs shall be
fully written off in the profit and loss account. By way of excep-
tion, however, organisational costs which are provided for in the
articles or in the resolutions of the supreme body, whether for the
original setting-up, for a subsequent expansion of the business or
for operational reorganisation and, in the same manner, stamp
duties, bank commissions and the like may be distributed over a
period of five years at the most in such a manner that an item is
entered on the assets side and each year at least the corresponding
fraction is written off.
Art. 206
Where economic or other circumstances make this appear im-
perative, the Government, by way of Executive Order, may order
the following additional balance sheet regulations for undertak-
ings other than domiciliary undertakings:
1. That in the case of legal entities concerned with participation
(subsidiary companies, associated companies and similar),
where more than one-tenth of the capital resources or the legal
entity’s own assets are invested in participations, the kind and
the amount of the securities shall be entered in the balance
sheet,
2. that in the case of investment, associated, controlling or hold-
ing companies the securities which the company intends to
hold permanently (participation account), in addition, those
which it is intended to dispose of as quickly as possible (secu-
rity transfer account) and, finally, those for which the com-
pany still has to effect payment (syndicate account) shall be
entered separately in the balance sheet, according to the kind
of security and the amount.
b. Costs
c. Special regula-
tions

– 80 –
Art. 207
By virtue of the law, the annual balance sheet as well as sup-
porting documentation, the profit and loss account and the busi-
ness report shall, with notification to the members pursuant to the
articles, be available for the said members to inspect at least ten
days before the meeting of the supreme body which shall decide
concerning the approval of the balance sheet and before the pass-
ing of a resolution by circular letter and, in addition, during the
three months following the meeting.
By virtue of the law, each member of the company providing
proof of participation may demand a copy of the annual balance
sheet but not of the supporting documentation and the profit and
loss account.
By way of Executive Order the Government may put legal
entities with capital reserves divided into bearer shares which,
together with the unsecured borrowed moneys, amount to one
million Swiss francs as well as those legal entities which have is-
sued bearer bonds without particular cover under obligation to
publish in the journals intended for official notices the annual
balance sheet together with supporting documentation in addition
to the profit and loss account, possibly on the basis of official
forms, six months after the balance sheet date at the latest.
The foregoing paragraph shall not be applicable in the case of
legal entities which simply have their domicile in the Principality
of Liechtenstein and administer their assets or whose sole purpose
or object is the undertaking’s activity abroad (domiciliary compa-
nies) and in the case of companies whose shares or participations
are purely in the hands of relatives (family concerns).
Art. 208
Where in the case of a company with legal personality or of a
legal entity of equal rank to the said company with legal per-
sonality, an annual balance shows that the capital resources, but
not the own assets in the case of partnership companies and es-
tablishments and in the case of other legal entities which, in the
same way as partnership companies, may assess their assets and
calculate their profit and loss, have decreased by half and should
3. Publication
of the annual
balance sheet
4. Duty to
disclose
a. In the case of
loss of ca
pital

– 81 –
the winding-up balance, which shall thereupon be prepared, show
the same result, the administration must convene a meeting of the
supreme body without delay and inform it of the facts of the
situation.
In the event that the capital decreases by two-thirds, the legal
entity shall be liquidated if the said legal entity does not sup-
plement the no longer available capital or reduce it to the actual
amount.
In all cases the Registrar shall be informed of the resolutions
passed; publication, however, shall only take place in the event of
a previously published provision being amended.
Art. 209
As soon as the claims of the creditors of a legal entity are no
longer covered by the assets, but are covered by the inclusion of
possibly adequate liabilities to make further contributions, the
administration and, if necessary, each member of the said ad-
ministration shall have the right and the duty to inform the court
for the purpose of opening bankruptcy proceedings. If, however,
the notification is not received from all members of the admini-
stration, the others shall be consulted.
The court may, in extrajudicial proceedings, upon petition of
the administration, the audit authority, one or several creditors or
one of the representatives or trustees appointed to safeguard the
common interests of certain classes of creditors, postpone the
opening of bankruptcy proceedings and in the meantime give
orders which serve to preserve the assets relating, for example, to
stock taking, the prohibition of payments, respite, having an in-
terrupting effect on statutory limitation and forfeiture up to the
time these measures are cancelled, the collection of additional
contributions, the restriction of the authority to represent or the
appointment of a creditor’s representative as supervisory body.
In the case of all legal entities with members’ liability or liabil-
ity to make further contributions, the petition to open bank-
ruptcy proceedings shall be dropped with the judge’s approval in
extrajudicial proceedings if the supreme body passes a resolution
immediately to wind up and assert the liability to make further
b. In the case of
overindebted-
ness

– 82 –
contributions as well as the obligation of liability in place of the
creditors or the trusteeship in bankruptcy and if the creditors
have been satisfied within nine months from the time of over-
indebtedness.
In times of economic crisis, the Government may, by Execu-
tive Order, amend the provisions of the first paragraph so that a
duty to notify shall exist under more limited preconditions.
Art. 210
Where a petition to appoint a specialist auditor is refused by a
resolution of the competent body of any legal entity or where the
petition, submitted in good time, is not put to the vote, the Court
of Justice may, by virtue of the law, within two months following
the refusal or the meeting, upon petition of members who repre-
sent at least one-tenth of the capital resources or the legal entity’s
own assets or the votes, appoint one or several auditors in extra-
judicial proceedings if, at the same time, the members can sub-
stantiate by prima facie evidence that dishonesty or gross in-
fringements of the law or the articles have taken place.
Before appointing the auditors, the court shall hear the ad-
ministration and the audit authority. The court may demand secu-
rity from the petitioners, which shall be determined at the court’s
absolute discretion pursuant to the provisions of the Code of
Civil Procedure concerning the lodgment of security for costs of
action and, depending upon the circumstances, appoint one or
several auditors.
The members concerned may, in the event of their petition
being otherwise invalid and with liability for costs and losses for
the duration of the audit, transfer their membership only with the
assent of the legal entity and/or, if securities such as shares have
been issued, they shall deposit these with the court or at a place
determined by the said court.
Where a legal entity effects banking, insurance, savings bank
or actual trust transactions and if domiciliary companies are not
involved, the Government may, of its own accord, decide to or-
der, through administrative channels, that an official audit be
III. Official audit
1. Precondition
and appoint-
ment

– 83 –
undertaken, at the expense of the legal entity, without being liable
to render compensation as a result of this.
Art. 211
Before commencing their duties, the auditors shall affirm to
the judge that they shall faithfully fulfil the duties incumbent
upon them and in particular shall observe silence towards all per-
sons concerning business and operational circumstances which
may come to their notice while carrying out the audit and they
shall be responsible in the same manner as the members of an
audit authority.
The auditors shall have the right to examine the books, vouch-
ers and inventories for the purpose of determining the accuracy of
the last annual balance sheet, to demand information and expla-
nations from the members of the administration and the audit
authority and each employee of the legal entity entrusted with the
accounting and to investigate the cash in hand as well as the posi-
tion regarding other existing assets.
The persons called upon to do so must, without delay, provide
the required clarifications and information, accurately and truth-
fully, or otherwise be responsible for all losses.
The members of a possible audit authority shall be involved in
the audit. Furthermore, the court may, at its discretion, permit the
participation of one or several of the petitioners.
The auditors’ remuneration shall be determined by the court
in extrajudicial proceedings. Otherwise, they may not draw any
other emolument.
Art. 212
The written report concerning the result of the audit, which
shall state whether all the auditors’ wishes relating to the under-
taking of the audit were fulfilled and whether the last annual bal-
ance sheet provided a truthful and correct picture of the financial
situation of the legal entity, shall be communicated to the admini-
stration and the audit authority without delay.
The petitioners have the right to examine the auditors’ report
on the business premises and, in the absence of such, at another
place to be determine by the judge in extrajudicial proceedings.
2. Position of the
auditors
3. Treatment of
the auditors’
re
port

– 84 –
The administration and the audit authority are required, for
the purpose of passing a resolution, to announce the auditors’
report when the next meeting of the supreme body is convened,
to cause the said report to be read in its entirety at the meeting
and to provide an explanation concerning the result of the audit
and concerning the steps taken to remedy the illegalities or griev-
ances which may have been discovered.
It shall be incumbent upon the audit authority to report to the
meeting concerning the claims for compensation to which the
legal entity is entitled.
Should the auditors’ report reveal that a gross infraction of the
law or the articles has taken place, a meeting of the supreme body
must be convened immediately.
Art. 213
In the absence of an agreement, the court, in extrajudicial pro-
ceedings with analogous application of the provisions concerning
the costs of the action, shall decide, depending on the result of the
audit and with due appraisal of all the circumstances, whether the
costs of the audit shall be borne completely or partly by the legal
entity.
Should, according to the result of the audit, the petition for an
audit prove to be unjustified, the petitioners shall be liable to the
legal entity jointly and severally for the damages without res-
triction arising from the petition, together with possible satis-
faction, insofar as the blame for evil intent or gross negligence
rests with the petitioners.
Art. 214
Legal entities with members’ rights to shares may provide in
the articles for the issuance of working shares to employees and
workers, for which the provisions applicable to working shares
shall be applied analogously.
Inalienable working shares issued pursuant to the articles to a
named person as property of the individual or a co-operative
society on the basis of work performance may also be provided in
such a manner that a share of the capital resources or the legal
4. Costs and
compensation
for loss
G. Sociopolitical
rights to shares
and profit
I. Workin
g shares

– 85 –
entity’s own assets does not exist but, however, a claim to the
personal rights arising from the membership, to profit, sub-
scription rights and a share upon withdrawal from the terms of
employment or to the liquidation surplus, with or without prefe-
rential right, or the other capital or asset shares shall exist.
Art. 215
The articles of a legal entity may provide for funds for the for-
mation and support of welfare institutions for members, workers
and employees or similar purposes.
Such funds as welfare institutions for members, workers and
employees have, without further formality, the character of foun-
dations and their assets are set aside from the assets of the legal
entity and are no longer liable for the legal entity’s debts.
Insofar as an actual transfer of the assets of the foundation has
not taken place, the foundation shall have a preference in bank-
ruptcy proceedings equivalent to the wage.
Resolutions concerning contributions from net profit towards
the formation and support of welfare institutions for members,
employees and workers or for other welfare purposes may be
passed by the supreme body even if such provision is not made in
the articles.
The special provisions concerning trusts and autonomous de-
partments are reserved.
Art. 216
These foundations are not subordinated to the supervisory
authority but remain, however, where the articles do not deter-
mine to the contrary, under the administration of the legal entity
and their balance sheet may not be taken into that of the legal
entity.
In the absence of other provisions in the articles, the fund shall
revert to the legal entity in the event that the purpose of such a
foundation is cancelled.
Further provisions concerning the foundation may be drawn
up in the articles.
II. Welfare funds
1. Preconditions
2. Structure and
dissolution

– 86 –
Art. 217
The articles of a legal entity may, moreover, provide that its
employees and workers participate in the net profit, which parti-
cipation shall be paid to them in cash or in another way.
By resolution of the supreme body of a legal entity, the em-
ployees and workers of the said legal entity may be awarded vol-
untary benefits in cash or in a different manner even though this
may not be provided for in the articles.
Art. 218
The bodies of a company with legal personality and the legal
entities on the same footing are liable to the legal entity for the
damage they cause if the said damage is caused intentionally or by
neglect.
They shall be liable to the members for the intent and the neg-
ligence only insofar as the legal entity is not entitled to a claim for
compensation.
Where, however, the legal entity has such a claim, the mem-
bers shall have an independent claim only in the case of damage
inflicted with intent.
Third persons who have cooperated in the issuance of shares,
share certificates or bonds shall be liable to all parties only in the
case of intentional damage.
Art. 219
Whosoever is active in the formation of a company with legal
personality or a legal entity on the same footing is liable for com-
pensation for damage:
1. If he makes or circulates untrue statements in prospectuses or
circulars,
2. if with his cooperation a deposit or the takeover of parts of
assets or a beneficial interest of individual members or other
persons are stated incorrectly or incompletely or are withheld
or concealed in the articles or a founder’s report or if he has
contravened the law by approving of such an action in another
way,
III. Other profit partici pation
H. Responsibility
I. In the case of
companies with
legal pers. and
legal entities on
the same foot-
ing
1. Kind of liabilit
y
2. Cases of
liability
a. In
general

– 87 –
3. if he had knowledge of the subscribers’ inability to pay or
otherwise to perform in respect of the capital resources or the
legal entity’s own assets.
4. if the company’s entry in the Public Register was effected on
the basis of a certification or document which actually con-
tained untruthful statements to which he contributed.
This provision shall be applicable analogously where after the
formation the same acts or omissions have led to damage.
Where such a company with legal personality or legal entity
has issued shares, share certificates or bonds, either itself or
through a third party, each person who was active in this matter
shall be liable for the damage caused or circulated by the person
concerned by way of untruthful statements in prospectuses or
circulars.
Whosoever contrary to the provisions of the law has received
payments such as profits or interest on building finance from the
legal entity shall be required to return the said payments insofar
as the recipient was demonstrably in bad faith at the time of
receiving the said payments.
Where, on the other hand, contrary to the provisions of the
law, a share of the liquidation assets has been obtained by the
members or, insofar as transactions without value are involved, by
third parties, they shall be liable to the extent of their enrichment,
even though they are in good faith.
Art. 220
The persons entrusted with the administration and the audit-
ing of a company shall be responsible for the damage caused by
the non-fulfilment of the duties incumbent upon them.
Where the neglect of duty is committed as the result of the
passing or the omission of a resolution by a body comprised of a
number of members, organised on a collegiate basis, all members
of the said body who were bound to take part in the resolution
concerned shall be responsible.
The members who voted against the resolution which estab-
lished the responsibility or, where the omission of a resolution
establishing the neglect of duty is involved, the members who
b. Management
and audit
authorit
y

– 88 –
voted for the resolution which was rejected by the majority shall
be free from the liability.
Members of a collegiate body who have also taken part in the
said collegiate body’s deliberations shall be liable if the assertion
of their votes, for whose lack of assertion they were to blame,
could have prevented the neglect of duty on the part of the said
collegiate body or if in demonstrable agreement with them other
members brought about a liability establishing a neglect of duty
on the part of the collegiate body.
Where the omission of a resolution in breach of duty is in-
volved, without the collegiate body having deliberated concerning
this, each member shall be liable from the time he became aware
of the matter and did not take steps within his authority to bring
about the deliberation of the said matter by the collegiate bodies.
Where the administration or one of its members receives an in-
struction from an overriding body, such as the supreme body or
the audit authority, whose execution would violate the duties
incumbent upon the said administration or member pursuant to
paragraph 1, execution may be refused without the legal entity
being able to assert a responsibility as a consequence thereof.
The provisions concerning the responsibility of the liquidators
are reserved.
Art. 221
Where in the case of banking establishments or trust compa-
nies, a large shareholder, who although not a member of the ad-
ministration induces, indirectly or directly, the members of the
administration of such an undertaking in the course of their man-
agement to violate the due diligence of a prudent businessman,
the said shareholder shall be liable jointly and severally with such
members of the administration for the damage thereby caused to
the legal entity, under reservation of the right of recourse to the
large shareholder of the members made responsible by the legal
entity.
A large shareholder within the intendment of this law is a
shareholder who, on the basis of his own shareholding or on the
basis of another title, has at his disposal the right to vote for at
c. Liability of
large share-
holders

– 89 –
least a tenth part or certainly for a part of the capital resources or
of the legal entity’s own assets which is so large that the votes to
which he is entitled count decisively at the meetings of the su-
preme body of the company concerned, having regard to the
amount of capital resources or own assets normally represented at
such meetings.
Those shares which are transferred to another person for the
purpose of circumventing this provision shall be ascribed to the
shareholding of the large shareholder. An intention to circumvent
the law shall be presumed where the transfer ensues to the spouse
or to a relative as far as the second degree of relationship.
Where for important reasons the circumstances justify this, the
Government may, by way of ordinance, expand this liability obli-
gation to undertakings other than those mentioned in the first
paragraph.
Art. 222
Primarily, the company that has suffered damage and, in the
event of bankruptcy, the said company’s liquidation assets, shall
be entitled to claim compensation for damage.
Where the company does not have a claim, as well as in the
case of malicious injury, each individual member may demand
that he be compensated directly for the damage inflicted upon
him.
Insofar as the company renounces the lodgment of a claim or
fails to assert the said claim within three months after a member’s
request to do so, each individual member may institute an action
in favour of the company for compensation for the damage inten-
tionally inflicted upon the company, subject to a binding resolu-
tion of release.
Where the company does not assert its claim each individual
member has the right of action on grounds of intentional damage
only if the member is able to prove that he did not take part in the
resolution or voted against the said resolution or did not become
a member until after the resolution had been passed and had no
knowledge of it.
In the event that a member initiates such an action, further ac-
tions concerning this matter may be introduced within the period
3. Liability claim
a. Claim of the
company and
of the indivi-
dual members

– 90 –
of time allowed only insofar as in the first action the damage was
not asserted to the full extent. The other members who suffered
damage, however, shall be entitled to join the first action as inter-
vening parties.
This claim of the individual member shall become statute-
barred upon the expiration of six months after the said individual
member became aware of the resolution.
Art. 223
Where the company’s creditors suffer damage they may de-
mand, if the company does not have a claim, that they be com-
pensated directly for the damage inflicted upon them.
In the case of intentional damage to the company the individ-
ual creditors may demand compensation in favour of the com-
pany for the damages inflicted upon the said company if bank-
ruptcy proceedings concerning the latter have been opened and
the bankrupt’s estate waives the assertion of the claim or, in spite
of being requested to do so, does not bring the said claim within a
term of one month.
The creditors shall be entitled to claim for damages resulting
from default, in addition to the provisions drawn up to protect
the creditors.
Art. 224
Insofar as malicious damage does not exist, the supreme body
may release the persons liable to pay damages by waiving the
claim, concluding a settlement with the persons responsible or in
any other manner, as long as the company has not become bank-
rupt. The rescission of the resolution to release , however, is re-
served.
A resolution of the company to release may, in the case of in-
jury being caused to the company, be set up as a bar under all
circumstances to the member or creditor entitled to claim insofar
as the injured party fails to prove thereby that no liability whatso-
ever was imposed upon the released persons to effect compensa-
tion or, pursuant to their fault and their ability to pay, an ap-
parantly inadequate liability to effect compensation was imposed,
or that malicious injury exists.
b. Creditors’
claims
c. Release
aa. Relationship to
ri
ght of action

– 91 –
Where the resolution to release is agreed by at least three-
quarters of all the countable votes, the claim may be brought only
provided inadequate compensation and also malevolence can be
proven.
The foregoing restrictions concerning release shall not be ap-
plicable to settlement proceedings for the warding off or termina-
tion of the bankruptcy of the person responsible
The release conferred by the competent body of the admini-
stration on the basis of an audit authority report shall embrace
only those transactions of which the audit authority has know-
ledge.
Art. 225
Where the management and the representation and/or the
audit are conducted pursuant to the law and the articles and other
admissible instructions, the members of the administration and/or
the audit authority shall have a claim to release against the com-
pany through the competent body and with effect against the
company, its members and creditors.
The release may be pronounced in judicial judgment.
Art. 226
The liability of the persons responsible pursuant to the fore-
going provisions is subject to the provisions concerning liability
as determined by contract and becomes statute-barred in ten years
and where knowingly false statements or intentional infliction of
injury are not involved, in two years, calculated from the time
when the transaction to which the injury is attributed took place.
Where several persons are responsible for the injury inflicted,
they shall be jointly and severally liable for the compensation.
Liability arising from the illegal receipt of payments of the le-
gal entity becomes statute-barred for the recipient in bad faith in
ten years where the liquidation share is involved and in five years
in the other cases and for the recipient of a liquidation share in
good faith, in two years, calculated from the day of receipt.
bb. Claim to
release
4. Nature of
liabilit
y

– 92 –
Art. 227
In the event of the litigation and liability for all the injury
sustained by the company or the members of company bodies
being otherwise invalid, the plaintiff members shall not surrender
their membership rights and the plaintiff creditors may not sur-
render the demands which establish the characteristics of a credi-
tor for the duration of the litigation.
In the case of action to rescind against resolutions of the su-
preme body, relevant provisions shall be analogously applicable
to the lodging of security on grounds of damage accruing to the
company or the other defendants, to the combination of several
actions and to the liability for damage.
Art. 228
Insofar as companies with legal personality or legal entities on
the same footing are not under consideration, the principles of
liability corresponding to the underlying contractual relationship
between the bodies and the legal entity shall be applicable with
respect to the responsibility and the liability of the bodies; in
cases of doubt those regulations concerning the mandate relation-
ship shall be applicable.
The foregoing provisions are analogously applicable with re-
spect to the claim of the legal entity and the individual members,
the release and the kind of liability.
Art. 229
In its articles, a legal entity may concede a special legal posi-
tion to the community on the basis of a special agreement with
the said community; this may be with or without its inclusion in
the membership and may relate to the liability to contribute, the
right to vote, participation in the administration and the audit
authority or in their appointment, liability to the creditors, the
termination of the relationship and participation in the liquidation
result.
5. Proceedin gs
II. In the case
of other legal
entities
J. Participation of
legal entities
under public
law
I. In
general

– 93 –
Art. 230
In the case of such legal entities and also mixed economic un-
dertakings in which a legal entity under public law participates as
a member, the liability of the members, the administration and the
audit authority shall be:
1. Towards the legal entity, the members and the creditors where
in the individual case the Government does not determine
otherwise pursuant to the provisions as applicable to the
members elected by the supreme body,
2. towards the legal entity under public law pursuant to the con-
tractual relationship existing between the said legal entity un-
der public law and the member, such as a services contract, a
commission mandate and the like.
The legal entity under public law may, however, according to
regulations, assume the liability for its representatives in the bod-
ies of the legal entity performing their functions with care, with
reservation of recourse to the persons at fault.
The representatives of the legal entity under public law shall
under all circumstances remain liable for intentional violation or
neglect of the said public entity’s duties.
Otherwise, the special provisions concerning the undertakings
serving the public economic interest are reserved.
Art. 231
Where the articles lack a statement as required by law con-
cerning the form of the notification to members of the legal entity
or third parties, notification, in case of doubt, shall ensue through
the administration and in the journals provided for official an-
nouncements. In the case of societies, small cooperative societies
and small insurance associations, however, whose activity is lim-
ited to a local sphere, notification shall ensue in the manner cus-
tomary in the locality.
In the case of legal entities which simply have their domicile in
the Principality of Liechtenstein (domiciliary companies), noti-
fication displayed on the court notice board in extrajudicial pro-
ceedings shall be sufficient where doubt exists.
II. Res ponsibilit y
K. Notification

– 94 –
In the case of a lapse in a form of notification provided in the
law or the articles, the Registrar, upon the demand of the admini-
stration, shall determine a means of notification for as long as the
law or the articles fail to do so.
Public notification in journals, proclamation in the church
square, and the like shall, except in the case of domiciliary com-
panies or unless the Registrar allows an exception, ensue in the
language of the Country.
Art. 232
1)
Depending on whether a legal entity is organised according to
foreign or Liechtenstein law, i.e., its Articles declare foreign or
Liechtenstein law as applicable or it complies with foreign or
domestic filing or registration provision or, if such provisions do
not exist, has been organised according to foreign or Liechten-
stein law, it is to be regarded as a foreign or domestic law shall be
applied. It shall also have its domicile there in regard to the inter-
national relationship.
If a legal entity does not meet these conditions, it shall be
subject to the law of the state in which it has the centre of ist ad-
ministrative activity.
The provisions concerning diplomatic protection and the legal
protection of personality are reserved.
Art. 233
2)
A foreign legal entity, with the permission of the Court of
Justice and through an entry in the Public Register and the ap-
pointment of a legal representative should such be necessary, may
subordinate itself to domestic law and thus transfer its domicile to
the Principality of Liechtenstein without dissolution abroad and
re-formation in the Principality or without the transfer of its
business activities or administration.

1) Para 1 and 2 in the version of the law dated 30. October 1996, LGBl. 1997,
No. 19.
2) Art. 233 in the version of the law dated 30. October 1996, LGBl. 1997, No. 19.
I. International
law
1. Foreign or
domestic legal
entities and
a
pplicable law
II. Transfer of a
legal entity
1. Transfer of the
legal entity
from abroad to
Liechtenstein

– 95 –
This permission may only be granted when the legal entity
shows that it has complied with domestic law and that the foreign
law permits a transfer of the legal entity.
A legal entity must show before the entry in the Public Regis-
ter is executed that the registered capital declared as fully paid up
in the Articles is covered at the time of the transfer of the legal
entity.
A legal entity which by domestic law is not subject to regis-
tration becomes subject to domestic law as soon as its intention to
become subordinate to domestic law is clearly evident, has an
adequate relationship with the Principality and compliance with
domestic law has taken place.
Art. 234
The subordination of a domestic legal entity to foreign law
and thus the transfer abroad of its domicile without dissolution is
admissible only with the permission of a public office designated
by the Government by ordinance.
By way of ordinance, the Government shall specify the proce-
dures and conditions for the granting of permission for the transfer
of domicile, especially in regard to the protection of creditors.
1)
The transfer abroad of a domestic legal entity without disso-
lution is admissible only with the approval of a government office
which has been designated by the Government in an Executive
Order and provisions relevant to this in the articles shall be inva-
lid as long as the administration’s activity is centred in the Princi-
pality of Liechtenstein.
2
The Government may by way of ordinance draw up other or
further provisions concerning the transfer of domicile or forbid
this completely or partly.

1) Para 1 and 2 in the version of the law dated 30. October 1996, LGBl. 1997, No. 19.2) Para 3 in the version of the law dated 16. December 1994, LGBl. 1995, No. 25.
2. Transfer of the
legal entity
from Liechten-
stein to another
State

– 96 –
Art. 235
1
The legal capacity and the capacity to act, including the capac-
ity for tortious liability, shall be determined according to the law
applicable to the legal entity (Art. 232).
In particular, this law shall decide on the formation, amend-
ment and dissolution of a legal entity, on the organisation, rights
and obligations of the individual bodies, the legal position of a
member, the acquisition and loss of membership.
Within the Principality of Liechtenstein, however, it may not
acquire rights and assert a claim to the protection of the law to a
broader extent than is possible for domestic legal entities and a
foreign legal entity shall have at least the same capacity for tor-
tious liability as such domestic legal entities.
Legal entities may not assert in the Principality of Liechten-
stein prerogatives (privileges) acquired abroad.
When pursuant to the law applicable to the legal entity the as-
sets of a legal entity shall pass to a community, the assets located
in the Principality shall not pass to the foreign community, but
shall be treated in accordance with domestic law.
Where a foreign legal entity does not have legal capacity or the
capacity to act or the capacity for tortious liability pursuant to
this applicable law, but such does indeed apply according to do-
mestic law, the latter shall be applicable for ist activities within the
Principality.
Art. 236
1)
Liechtenstein law shall be applicable for the formation,
amendment and dissolution of a branch establishment of a foreign
legal entity in Liechtenstein.
The relationship of the branch establishment to the principal
establishment shall be determined, however, by the law in force at
the principal domicile.
A branch establishment’s authority to represent shall be de-
termined by Liechtenstein law. At least one person with repre-

1) Art. 235 and 236 in the version of the law dated 30. October 1996, LGBl. 1997,
No. 19.
III. Legal capacity
and the
capacity to act
1. General
2. Branch estab-
lishment

– 97 –
sentative authority must have his or her domicile in the Principal-
ity and be entered in the Public Register.
Where a branch establishment of a foreign legal entity is en-
tered in the domestic Public Register, the foreign legal entity shall
be considered to have legal capacity and capacity to act respecting
the obligations entered into or to be fulfilled in the Principality of
Liechtenstein even though pursuant to the law in force at the
principal domicile it does not possess such capacities.
Foreign legal entities which do not conform with Liechten-
stein law may also form branch establishments in the Principality.
Where a foreign legal entity is dissolved by a step taken in the
country of principal domicile which contravenes public order and
morality, the effects of the dissolution shall not be recognised in the
Principality of Liechtenstein. If, however, a branch establishment
exists in Liechtenstein, this shall be formed, if dissolution is not
ordered, into an independent legal entity within a period of time to
be determined by the Registrar or otherwise be officially liquidated.
Art. 237
1)
A foreign legal entity may only claim legal protection of per-
sonality in Liechtenstein pursuant to the law applicable to it, but
not exceeding the scope of Liechtenstein law.
Liechtenstein law shall be applicable to the domestic branch
establishment of a foreign legal entity with respect to legal pro-
tection of personality.
Art. 237a
1)
Should the name or style of a legal entity entered in the do-
mestic Public Register be violated, the protection of the same
shall be determined by domestic law.
If a legal entity is not registered in the domestic Public Regis-
ter, the protection of its name or style shall be determined by the
law applicable to unfair competition or to the violation of per-
sonal rights.

1) Art. 237, a, b, c and d in the version of the law dated 30. October 1996, LGBl.
1997, No. 19.
3. Protection of personalit y
4. Protection of
name and st yle

– 98 –
Art. 237b
1)
A legal entity may not refer to the restriction of the authority
to represent of a body or representative which is unknown to the
law of the state of normal domicile or to the branch establishment
of the other party unless the other party knew of this restriction
or should have known of it. This provision shall not apply to legal
business disposing of landed estate situated in another state or to a
right equated with such.
Art. 237c
1)
Should the impression be given by a legal entity which has
been formed in accordance with foreign law that it is subject to
domestic law and its business is conducted within the Principality
or from the Principality, the liability of the persons acting for it
for such business shall be subject to domestic law.
Art. 237d
1)
Claims from the public issue of equities and bonds on the basis
of brochures, circulars and similar notices may be lodged pursu-
ant to the law applicable to the legal entity or in accordance with
the law of the state in which the issue took place.
Art. 238
The acquisition within Liechtenstein by one of the legal enti-
ties regulated under this Heading of donations without valuable
consideration, such as gifts, legacies and the like in excess of five
thousand Swiss francs as well as the acquisition in Liechtenstein
of real estate, if the total ownership exceeds the size admissible for
the erection of a homestead, shall require the permission of the
Government in order to be valid.

1) Art. 237, a, b, c and d in the version of the law dated 30. October 1996, LGBl.
1997, No. 19.
5. Restriction of
the authority to
re
present
6. Liability for
foreign legal
entities
7. Claims from
the public issue
of equities and
bonds
8. Restriction of
mortmain

– 99 –
This provision shall also be applied to foreign legal entities
under public law.
In the case of family foundations and establishments or insofar
as the law or the Government order exceptions otherwise, the
provisions concerning donations without valuable consideration
shall not be applicable where real estate is not involved.
1)
Art. 239
2)
Domestic legal entities and the branch establishments of for-
eign legal entities whose managing or representing bodies, such as
the board of directors or the administration, are comprised in the
main of foreigners or foreign firms, shall appoint in Liechtenstein
a Liechtenstein citizen who is permanently resident here, either to
represent the legal entity towards the authorities as a legal repre-
sentative or, empowered as an authorised signatory (procurist), to
exercise the representation, without the co-operation of others.
Instead of this, the Landesbank or a firm may also be desig-
nated as a legal representative that shall appoint a Liechtenstein
citizen who is permanently resident in Liechtenstein as a legal
representative or at least equip the said Liechtenstein citizen with
the power of agency of a legal representative.
Notwithstanding the provision concerning the appointment of
a legal advisor, the observance of the provisions of this article may
be supervised by the Government in administrative proceedings.
The obligation to appoint may be dropped with the agreement
of the Government where important reasons exist as, for example,
where a legal entity or its branch establishment brings into the
Country work and earnings or significant public proceeds or
similar and, otherwise, in the event that the legal entity’s remain-
ing representation provides adequate warranty as a substitute for
the legal representative.

1) Art. 238 last para (= para 3) inserted by the law dated 10 April, 1928, concerning
trust enterprises, LGBl. 1928, No. 6.
2) Para. 3 of Art. 239 deleted by the law dated 21. March 1996, LGBl. 1996, No. 68.
IV. Legal repre-
sentative
1. Obligation to
a
ppoint

– 100 –
Art. 240
1)
In the event that the legal entity is not entered in the domestic
Public Register, the bodies of the legal entity entitled to represent
shall notify the legal representatives to the Public Register, en-
closing an excerpt from the registers kept abroad, or, possibly,
otherwise credible proof of identity. The following information
shall be furnished:
1. The name of the firm or the name of the legal entity,
2. the name, domicile and nationality of the legal representative.
If the legal representative does not notify the signature or sig-
nature rights in notarized form, the said legal entity shall record
these in the presence of the Registrar.
In the case of foreign insurance undertakings, the legal repre-
sentative’s entry shall be published. In the case of other under-
takings, the publication may be omitted.
Art. 241
2)
By virtue of the law, the legal representative is empowered in
respect of all court and administrative authorities, in all matters,
notwithstanding a possible obligation to compensate the legal
entity, to receive declarations and communications of all kinds
including service and the like, also to keep files in safe custody
and to keep books of account, where and insofar as the domestic
operation requires this.
Apart from representation towards authorities, the legal rep-
resentative may put a legal entity under obligation only insofar as
he has been empowered to do so by the said legal entity.
Where doubt exists, several legal representatives appointed by
one legal entity shall have joint power of agency.
Legal representatives shall sign on behalf of the legal entity by
signing their name by their own hand to the written, etc., wording
or company name or name, with a subscript which alludes to the
legal representative.

1) Para. 2 and 4 of Art. 240 deleted by the law dated 21. March 1996, LGBl. 1996,
No. 68.
2) Para. 3 of Art. 241 deleted by the law dated 21 March 1996, LGBl. 1996, No. 68.
2. Registration
in the Public
Re
gister
3. Legal power of
a
genc y

– 101 –
Otherwise, the provisions concerning signature rights in the
case of legal entities shall apply analogously to the signing ef-
fected by the legal representative.
Art. 242
The legal representative shall be liable to the legal entity for
all damage caused as a result of the said legal representative’s ac-
tivities, in the same manner as a mandatary.
Several legal representatives shall be liable jointly and severally
for all the damage caused by them as a result of their activities.
Art. 243
1)
Art. 244
Public law remains reserved for legal entities under public law,
ecclesiastical legal entities and the legal entities regulated under
this law.
The provisions under this Heading, with the exception of the
provision concerning capacity to act and capacity for tortious
liability, shall not be applicable to corporate bodies or establish-
ments (banks, associations of insurers, etc.) which are formed
under special laws and administered with the participation of
public authorities, insofar as the state accepts the subsidiary li-
ability for their obligations, even where the necessary capital is
completely or partly divided into shares or other participations
and subscribed by the participation of private persons, unless the
law were to order otherwise.
Legal entities under public law and ecclesiastical legal entities,
however, shall be deemed to have legal capacity and capacity to
act as soon as the provisions of this law have bestowed the said
capacities, insofar as the public and/or ecclesiastical law, with
reservation of ecclesiastical foundations, does not determine
otherwise.

1) Art. 243 deleted by the law dated 21. March 1996, LGBl. 1996, No. 68.
4. Res ponsibilit y
M. Reservation
and scope of
application
I. Reservation

– 102 –
The provisions concerning the capacity for the tortious liabil-
ity of the legal entities shall also be valid, however, for legal enti-
ties under public law and ecclesiastical legal entities in the sphere
of their private-law activity where the administration or a mem-
ber thereof or another representative appointed on the basis of the
legal provisions commits a tortious act or an omission within the
frame of his powers.
The special provisions concerning the liability of such legal
entities for compensation under public law on grounds of
wrongful or lawful exercise of the public authority entrusted to
their bodies, officials and employees, are reserved.
Art. 245
Furthermore, all the corporate bodies and establishments in-
cluding foundations regulated under the following Headings shall
be subject to the general provisions under this Heading, insofar as
the special provisions drawn up for them or the individual provi-
sions under this Heading do not determine a deviation.
Legal entities under private law other than those determined
under this law cannot exist.
II. Scope of
validit y

– 103 –
Fourth Title
Second Section
The Company Limited By Shares
Art. 261
The limited company is a company having its own name
(firm), whose capital, determined in advance (nominal capital,
capital invested), is divided into smaller amounts (shares). Only
the company’s assets are liable for the company’s debts.
The shareholders are only liable as far as the performances as
laid down in regulations are concerned and are not liable person-
ally for the company’s liabilities.
The deviating regulations concerning the special legal entities
pursuant to foreign law, concerning variable nominal capital,
additional benefit shares and similar are reserved.
Art. 262
Instead of being divided into certain amounts the nominal
capital, determined in advance, of a limited company may be di-
vided into portions (quotas), which may be equal or dissimilar
(shares without par value).
The non par value share is issued for a portion of the nominal
capital, without having to have a specific value.
Fixed and non par value shares may also be combined and the
regulations relating to fixed shares are also applicable to non par
value shares unless pursuant to the relevant provisions they are
inapplicable.
In addition to the quota in words, the securities issued as non
par value shares must also state the amount of nominal capital and
the reserves, if any.
Art. 263
The shares are issued to a named person or to the bearer and
may also be comprised simultaneously of both types in the pro-
portion provided for in the articles.
A. General provi-
sions
I. Definition
1. In the case of
fixed shares
2. In the case of
non par value
shares
II. Share
1. Type of
shares

– 104 –
The articles may determine that the shares issued to a named
person, i.e. the registered shares, shall or may be converted to
bearer shares, or bearer shares shall or may be converted to regis-
tered shares.
The provisions relating to special types of shares such as ordi-
nary or preference shares are reserved.
Art. 264
With reservation of the subparticipations between a share-
holder and a third party and the trust certificate, a division or
consolidation of shares or share units by a shareholder is inad-
missible.
On the other hand, by means of an amendment of the articles,
the general meeting is empowered, with the subscribed capital
remaining unchanged, to divide the shares into other shares of a
lower par value, to divide them into units of shares or, with the
assent of the shareholders, to reduce the number of shares so that
they have a higher par value.
Art. 265
It is permissible to reduce the par value of individual shares,
provided that the existing amount of nominal capital is main-
tained unchanged, by simultaneously issuing new shares equal to
the amount or the quota of the effected reduction of the share
value hitherto.
On the other hand, a reduction of the par value of individual
shares without a simultaneous issue of new shares is only permis-
sible when the regulations are observed which relate to the re-
payment and reduction of the nominal capital and its distribution
in the case of the dissolution of the company.
A reduction of the quota is subject to the regulation of the
foregoing Article.
Art. 266
An issue for an amount which is less than the nominal
amount is only permissible in the case of registered shares
which are transferable with the assent of the company and with
the approval of the Register Authority.
2. Division,
consolidation
and change of
shares or units
of shares
3. Reduction of
the nominal
value
4. The amount of
the share

– 105 –
The conversion of such registered shares into others may en-
sue by reducing the nominal capital as laid down in the articles to
the amount actually taken up or still available or if the nominal
capital as laid down in the articles is actually available through
further contributions from profits and similar.
Where shares have been issued below the par value, the par
value of all the shares which have been issued must be entered on
the liabilities side of the balance sheet.
It is admissible to issue at a higher value if such an issue is pro-
vided for in the articles or if the general meeting or a body em-
powered by the general meeting passes resolution to this effect.
The added value achieved over and above the nominal value
may not be distributed as profit, but must be used to meet ex-
pense items or for writing down or for the creation of reserves.
Art. 267
The company is obliged to issue share certificates only if the
articles do not determine otherwise.
The articles may determine in detail the form and terms of the
share certificate.
The share certificates must bear the signature of at least one
member of the board of directors or the mechanical reproduction
of a personal signature of such members.
The share document must comprise a share certificate and a
renewal coupon sheet may also be attached.
Art. 268
The share certificate records membership of a limited com-
pany, in particular, the right of participation in nominal capital,
the right to dividends and to vote.
In the case of registered shares, the share certificates must
contain the detailed regulations relating to transfer as provided in
the articles; similarly, in the case of additional benefit shares, the
details of the performance must also be included.
If in order to exercise the right to vote and similar it is neces-
sary to deposit shares, it shall be sufficient in case of doubt to
5. Share certifi-
cates
a. In
general
b. Share certificate

– 106 –
deposit the share certificate, unless the articles expressly deter-
mine otherwise, such as the presentation of the certificate with the
coupon, or permit only the bearers of the coupons relating to the
previous business year to participate in the general meeting.
Unless the articles provide otherwise, the regulations applying
to bearer or registered securities or securities that can be trans-
ferred by endorsement shall apply with regard to the declaration
of invalidation, depending on the kind of shares, and the person
who brought about the declaration of invalidation may, in the
absence of provisions to the contrary in the articles, at his own
expense, demand the issuance of a new document.
Art. 269
The talon is an authorisation to obtain new coupon sheets,
when the old coupons have been used up, lost or mislaid.
The talon may only be transferred together with the share cer-
tificate.
The procedure for the declaration of invalidation shall be in
accordance with the existing regulations for bearer papers.
As far as the company is concerned, only the bearer of shares
is entitled to obtain a talon in the absence of a special authorisa-
tion.
Art. 270
The issued coupons record the membership right to receive
dividends and, after the dividend has been determined by the
competent body, an independent right to claim which cannot be
withdrawn by the company.
As long as they remain attached to the share certificate the
coupons are part of the latter and share its legal fate; after they
have been separated or if they are issued independently, they are
nevertheless independent securities and in case of doubt are sub-
ject to the provisions concerning bearer papers, in particular with
respect to the declaration of invalidation.
With the loss of the shares as, for instance, in the case of re-
demption, collection or withdrawal or similar, the right derived
c. Talon
d. Coupon
aa. In
general

– 107 –
from the coupon is also lost, even if it is independent, if the distri-
bution of a dividend has not been decided at the time of the loss
of the share.
The coupon detached from the share with which it is associ-
ated may be declared invalid independently of the share; if it is
joined to the share, it may only be declared invalid together with
the share.
Art. 271
In respect of the right to draw dividend, the coupon of the in-
dividual share has the same status as the share itself so that the
coupon of the preference share takes precedence over the coupon
of the ordinary share and the coupon of the ordinary share takes
precedence over the dividend-right certificate or the dividend
share, if the articles do not provide otherwise.
In the absence of provisions to the contrary in the articles as,
for example, in the case of the existence of dividend-right certifi-
cates, the right to draw dividend in advance or the right to a cu-
mulative dividend and the final payment of dividend shall con-
form with the legal status of the share and, subject to other
provisions in the articles, only the shareholder has the right to
contest a resolution of the competent body relating to the decla-
ration of dividends.
In the event of the share being pledged, the coupon shall be
deemed to be pledged with the share insofar as the lien on the
coupon has been asserted in compliance with the required legal
form, unless it has been agreed otherwise.
In case of doubt, the profitability or dividend guaranteed to a
company shall be for the benefit of the bearer of the coupon.
Art. 272
Workers’ shares may be handed over to the employees and
workers of an undertaking pursuant to the detailed provisions
drawn up in the articles. Such transfer may also be effected with-
out the subscription and the taking up of at least 20% of the
capital having to be fixed at the time of issue and without entry in
the Public Register.
bb. Legal status of
the cou pon
6. Workers’
shares
a. In
general

– 108 –
Workers’ shares have the same nominal value or the same
quota as the undertaking’s other capital shares. However, they
must be entered in the balance sheet with that sum which has
been taken up.
Art. 273
Workers’ shares are issued to a named person and, as long as
the shareholder is an employee or a worker in the employ of the
company, they may not be transferred at all and later, only with
the assent of the board of directors.
This permission to transfer may not be refused if the acquirer
of the shares pays the outstanding amount at the time the share is
transferred.
Otherwise, there is an obligation to pay the call on these
shares only insofar as the owner must allow the participation in
the net profit of the undertaking and the dividend accruing to the
sum paid up on the actual shares to which the owner is entitled
pursuant to the articles to be entered to his credit until the par
value (the quota) of the workers’ share has been fully paid up.
Art. 274
As soon as 20% of the workers’ shares has been paid up, the
capital increase brought about by this payment must be entered in
the Public Register.
The shareholder’s right to vote commences from this time.
A new entry must be made in the Public Register each time a
further 20% is paid up.
After the workers’ share has been fully paid up, it is converted
to a normal capital share having the same nominal value (quota)
and the properties of the most entitled kind of share issued by the
undertaking at this time or in the future.
b. Registered
shares, transfer
and
payment
c. Registration,
voting right
and conversion

– 109 –
Art. 275
During its existence, the workers’ share shall be entitled, in
proportion to the amount paid up at the time, to the same rate of
dividend as the most entitled kind of share issued at the time by
the undertaking.
Payment of the dividend shall be by credit entry in the ac-
count of the outstanding capital payment, the outstanding
amount being that which was outstanding at the time of the last
balance sheet.
Art. 276
The articles may determine that a certain part of the annual
profit may be devoted to the creation of a fund for the purpose of
issuing shares for workers and employees who, in this case, may
form a workers’ cooperative pursuant to the regulations relating
to small cooperative societies.
In case of doubt, such cooperative society shall be the sole
owner of the shares issued.
In particular, the articles shall make provision for the repre-
sentation of the workers’ shares in the company’s governing
bodies.
Art. 277
The regulation which determines that the amount of nominal
capital of the company must be fixed in advance does not apply to
workers’ shares.
Moreover, the limited company with variable invested capital
is reserved.
Art. 278
With the assent of the workers and employees, the articles
may also settle the issuance of workers’ shares (low-priced shares)
by determining that a part of the workers’ and employees’ wages
(salaries), to be defined in detail in the articles, shall be deducted
and used to redeem each year (drawing for redemption) the other
company shares (capital shares) which shall be replaced by
workers’ shares.
d. Dividend
entitlement
e. Workers’ sha-
res in combi-
nation with a
workers’ co-
o
perative
f. Variable ca
pital
g. Creation of
workers’ shares
from wa
ges

– 110 –
Art. 279
The limited company’s articles must contain provisions relat-
ing to the following:
1. The name and domicile of the company,
2. the company’s objects,
3. the amount of nominal capital and individual shares or parts of
shares, with a statement as to whether these are registered or
bearer shares, the quantity of each type as well as the sum ac-
tually paid up,
4. the convening of the general meeting, the shareholders’ right
to vote and the passing of resolutions,
5. the governing bodies for the administration and, if necessary,
for supervision and the manner in which representation shall
be exercised,
6. the manner in which company notices to shareholders and
third parties shall ensue.
With the exception of No. 6, the provisions shall be deemed
to be essential within the intendment of the voidability pro-
ceedings.
Art. 280
Provisions which pursuant to the regulations of the law are
only valid if they are provided in the articles (by-articles) are, in
particular, the following:
1. Information concerning contributions to capital which are not
made in cash, acceptance of assets, with notification of the ac-
ceptance price, acceptance of shares or other performances in
lieu of payment , with statement of the number of shares,
stipulation of special advantages in excess of the usual bank
commission in favour of one or certain shareholders or other
persons, with the names of such persons, issuance of divi-
dend-right certificates to these as well as any other kind of
founders’ advantages whatsoever,
2. regulations relating to article amendments, business expansion,
business limitation, capital increase, capital reduction, fusion,
which deviate from the legal provisions,
III. Articles
1. Legally
required
content
2. Provisions to
be drawn up if
necessar
y

– 111 –
3. the admissibility of acquiring own shares for valuable con-
sideration for the purpose of amortisation pursuant to the
articles or repayment of the nominal capital and the conver-
sion of shares,
4. the number of shares, if any, to be deposited by members of
the board of directors,
5. building interest promise,
6. limitation of the duration of the undertaking,
7. penalties for delay in the taking up of shares,
8. release from the duty of payment on shares in excess of one-
half or a higher quota of the nominal capital,
9. the preclusion or limitation of the transfer of registered
shares,
10. issuance of founder’s share certificates, dividend-right certifi-
cates and dividend shares as well as the issuance of preference
and ordinary shares below the par value or shares with mul-
tiple voting rights, bonus shares or convertible bonds and the
taking up of convertible loans,
11. limitation of the shareholders’ right to vote and right to be
represented,
12. the matters concerning which resolutions cannot be passed by
a simple, but only by a larger majority or concerning which a
resolution can be passed when a certain number of shares are
represented or in accordance with other requirements,
13. authorisation to transfer certain powers of the administration
to individual members or third parties and the appointment of
a board of directors,
14. regulations concerning the organisation of the audit authority
and the extension of its powers and duties which go beyond
the legal provisions,
15. regulations which supplement the legal provisions concerning
the drawing up and examination of the balance sheet and the
calculation and distribution of the profit.

– 112 –
Art. 281
With reservation of simultaneous formation, the following are
required for the formation of a company limited by shares
1. The determination of the articles by the founders, who must
sign the draft of such articles,
2. the subscription to the shares forming the nominal capital,
3. the resolution of the general meeting of the subscribers ap-
proving the subscriptions and the ensuing payment for shares
and appointing the required company bodies.
Art. 282
1)
Art. 283
In order to be valid, subscriptions to shares, also subscriptions
in kind, require a written declaration referring to the draft articles
and, in the case of a public share issue, to the prospectus.
Apart from the implicit condition relating to the materiali-
sation of the limited company, they must be worded uncon-
ditionally and include the issuing price as well as the length of
time for which the subscription remains binding.
A sum amounting to at least 20% of the subscribed share capi-
tal must be paid up for each share at a paying in office mentioned
in the offer, at the time of application or, at the latest, at the con-
stitutive general meeting, such sum to be at the exclusive disposal
of the company’s future administration, unless the minimum
payment owed by the subscribers is covered by the assets in kind
to be acquired by the company.
Art. 284
After the subscription to shares has been closed, a general
meeting of the subscribers, summoned pursuant to the provisions

1) Art. 282 deleted by the law dated the 23. October, 1997, LGBl. 1997, No. 210.
B. Formation
I. Successive
formation
1. Formation
requirements in
general
Subscription
and
paying in
3. Constitutive
resolution

– 113 –
of the law and the articles, must, on the basis of the certificates to
be submitted to it, pass a resolution determining that the nominal
capital is fully subscribed and that the minimum amounts deter-
mined in the articles, but at least 20% of each share, are paid up in
cash or covered by the subscriptions in kind described in detail in
the articles.
In addition, the necessary bodies must be appointed at the
same meeting and the draft articles which provide for the sub-
scription to shares shall be considered and determined finally.
Important amendments to the draft articles may only by made
with the assent of all the subscribers represented at the general
meeting.
A vote shall be taken on the draft and a public document shall
be drawn up concerning the resolution, unless all subscribers in
favour sign the draft and the resolution.
Art. 285
Where the bringing-in of tangible articles of property or rights
is concerned, whether these are to be offset by a part of the share
capital or by cash, or where certain shareholders are to be granted
special preference rights, a promotion report must be submitted in
writing to the general meeting before a vote is passed. This report
must contain detailed information concerning the scope and con-
dition of the objects brought in and the appropriateness of the
calculated evaluation, the number of shares acquired, preference
rights which are in excess of a customary bank commission, the
issuance of dividend rights certificates and, generally, the subs-
tantiation and appropriateness of the preference rights granted to
the founders.
The original of this report or a certified duplicate must be
available for inspection by the shareholders at every subscription
receiving office, before the commencement of the subscription
period.
4. Procedure
relating to
capital invested,
aquisitions and
founders’ pref-
erence rights
a. Re
port

– 114 –
Art. 286
At the request of subscribers, who must represent at least ten
percent of the nominal capital, the passing of a resolution con-
cerning the approval of the subscriptions in kind and the found-
ers’ preference rights must be suspended until the judge, in extra-
judicial proceedings, has appointed an expert authority to report
on the valuation and condition of the subscriptions in kind and
the investments to be acquired as well as the appropriateness of
the founders’ preference rights. Such report shall be submitted at
a second general meeting. It shall also be duplicated ten days in
advance and held in readiness for the shareholders.
If the founders have given the general meeting a report of an
expert authority or if other subscribers replace those who sub-
mitted the request, the subscribers’ request pursuant to the fore-
going paragraph shall be no longer applicable and the subscribers
shall have the choice, without a new report, of participating or,
without a claim for compensation, but with restoration of any
contributions which may have been made to the nominal capital,
of withdrawing.
The provision of the first paragraph shall also be inapplicable
if the articles provide for a special category of shares for the sub-
scriptions in kind or the acquisitions in kind (non-cash shares)
which, in the case of the company being dissolved within two
years of the creation of such shares, would be satisfied from the
liquidation assets only after the shares received for cash had been
satisfied in the event of a loss occurring as the result of a proven
over-valuation at the time of contribution or acquisition.
Art. 287
The provisions in the articles concerning payments in kind,
acquisitions and founders’ preference rights require special ap-
proval from the general meeting which must be held after the
subscription to shares has been closed. The following regulations
shall apply to such approval by operation of law:
1. Only one vote shall be accorded to each person present when
the vote is taken,
b. Expert opinion
and apportio-
ned shares
c. Passing of
resolutions at
the general
meetin
g

– 115 –
2. each object shall be put to the vote separately and the share-
holder making the contribution concerned or appearing as the
transferor of a capital asset to the company or stipulating spe-
cial rights may not vote either for himself or as a proxy,
3. the approval of the contribution or the acquisition of prefer-
ential treatment must ensue with a majority of at least three
quarters of the votes present or represented,
4. a public document or a document signed by all the voters who
voted in favour shall be drawn up concerning the resolution
and shall be attached to the original report submitted by the
founder and the original report (if any) of the expert authority.
The foregoing and this article shall not be applicable where a
public share issue has not taken place.
Upon application of the subscribers, the judge in extrajudicial
proceedings may allow exceptions to the regulations contained in
the first paragraph as, for example, if all the founders’ subscrip-
tions are in kind or if the necessary majority of subscribers enti-
tled to vote and not involved in the contributions to capital, ac-
quisitions or benefits could not otherwise be achieved.
Art. 288
The formation of a limited company may ensue when all the
founders declare in a deed their intention to form a limited com-
pany. Such a deed must be signed by all the founders and the
signatures must be certified. The said founders must determine
the articles of the company, the acquisition of all the shares and
confirm in the deed, by means of substantiation from the bank or
similar, the paying in of at least 20%, also more if required, for
every share, whether in cash or by transfer of payment in kind.
Assent must also be given in the deed to any other acquisition of
assets as well as to the appointment of the company’s necessary
bodies.
The drawing up of such a deed takes the place of the con-
stitutive general meeting.
II. Simultaneous
formation
1. Formation of
the com
pany

– 116 –
Art. 289
The shares of a company formed in the manner just described
may be put up for sale after formation by their acquirers or for
the account of the same by third persons, by means of a public
share issue or by admission on the stock exchange for official
trading only if the results and balance sheets for at least the first
two business years can be submitted with the share offer.
Documents of ownership of the shares may not be issued to
the shareholders by the company during these two years, not-
withstanding membership rights and the issuance of dividend
right certificates having the character of securities.
The foregoing provisions shall not apply if the deed does not
provide either for tangible articles of property or rights to be
handed over or acquired as contributions to capital or does not
allow founders’ preference rights, furthermore, the foregoing
provisions shall not apply if the articles provide for non-cash
shares and only these are blocked.
Art. 290
Registration by the members of the board of directors entitled
to sign must be accompanied by the original or a certified copy of
the articles and the minutes of the general meeting or the deed or
a declaration containing:
1. The determination that the entire nominal capital is covered,
with signatures confirming this, with reservation of issue
below the nominal value and authorisation of the board of
directors to issue further nominal capital without a resolution
having to be passed by a general meeting,
2. the determination that at least 20%, or more if the articles
determine a higher minimum amount, has actually been paid
up for each share, or the amount is covered by payment in
kind,
3. proof that the board of directors and, if necessary, the audit
authority have been appointed, with details of the names, first
names, profession and place of residence, or the name of the
company and domicile of the members,
2. Blocking the
shares
III. Registration of
the company
1. Notification of
re
gistration

– 117 –
4. if necessary, the resolutions of the general meeting concerning
the contributions to capital, acquisitions and founders’ prefer-
ence rights as well as the related reports of the founders and
the expert authority.
Where representatives are appointed by the board of directors,
these must also be registered, possibly with a copy of the board of
directors’ minutes enclosed.
Art. 291
The following must be entered in the Public Register and pub-
lished as an extract:
1. The date of acceptance of the articles,
2. the name and domicile of the company,
3. the objects and, if required, the duration of the company,
4. the amount of nominal capital actually issued, the nominal
value or quota of the individual shares or share units and the
amount actually taken up,
5. the legal form of the shares, whether they are bearer or regis-
tered shares as well as their preferential or conversion rights (if
any),
6. the amount of payment in kind, acquisitions and founders’
preference rights,
7. the members of the board of directors and the representatives,
with names, first names, profession and place of residence or
the name of the company and the domicile,
8. the form in which the board of directors makes known its
declarations of intent and the manner in which representation
is exercised,
9. the manner in which the company’s notices to the sharehold-
ers and third parties shall ensue.
In the case of domiciliary limited companies, it will be suffi-
cient if the entry in the Public Register is published by being dis-
played on the court notice board.
2. Registration
and publication

– 118 –
Art. 292
The vested rights of a shareholder or individual shareholders
shall be deemed to be those rights, provided in the articles or the
law, pursuant to the regulations of the law or the articles, which
are independent of the resolutions of the general meeting or the
board of directors or which appear as the prerequisite of partici-
pation at the general meeting.
These include membership, the right to vote, the right of re-
scission, the right to building interest, to dividends, to a share in
the liquidation surplus, if the articles do not limit or exclude indi-
vidual rights within the scope of this law.
Art. 293
In the absence of provisions to the contrary in the articles, the
approval of three-quarters of the votes represented at a general
meeting but of at least two-thirds of the representatives of all the
shares shall be required to pass a resolution of the general meeting
in the following cases:
1. The changing of the company’s objects,
2. the conversion of the limited company into another legal
entity,
3. the removal of the requirements provided in the articles which
render more difficult the passing of resolutions by the general
meeting.
Art. 294
An expansion of the company’s sphere of business, by the
adoption of related objects, or a contraction of such objects, or a
merger, whether by transition to or association with another lim-
ited company, the changing of the name or the domicile of the
company, or the dissolution before the time determined in the
articles may, unless the articles determine otherwise, only be de-
cided by a vote taken at the general meeting at which at least two-
thirds of all the shares are represented.
C. Protection of
the nominal
capital and the
shareholders
I. Protection of
vested rights
1. Protection of
the individual
2. Requirement of
the specially
conditioned
majority of the
general meetin g
II. Business
expansion,
business con-
traction and
mer
ger

– 119 –
If two-thirds of all the shares are not represented at a first gen-
eral meeting, a second meeting must be convened at least eight
days after the first at which the resolutions mentioned in the pre-
ceding or this Article may be passed even if only one-third of all
the shares is represented.
Art. 295
Insofar as special regulations are not drawn up in the follow-
ing, an existing limited company may issue new shares as, for
example, in the case of variable capital paid in, provided only that
the regulations drawn up for the formation of the company lim-
ited by shares are observed without, however, the nominal capital
as stated in the articles having to be fully paid up.
If shares have been issued below the nominal value, new shares
of this type may be issued again only after the deficiency arising
from the issue below par has been covered from the reserves or
the profit.
It is sufficient, however, if a person authorised to represent or
sign undertakes the registration in the Public Register.
The subscription for shares shall ensue with reference to the
resolution to increase the capital.
The increase in capital may be undertaken alone or in combi-
nation with a reduction of the existing nominal capital as, for
example, in the case of capital reconstruction.
Art. 296
Where new shares are issued as a counter-performance for the
contribution of tangible articles of property or rights, the resolu-
tion to increase the capital and to approve the payment in kind
and the rights can only be passed at a general meeting at which at
least two-thirds of the share capital must be represented after that
part which is in possession of payment in kind has been deducted,
and the majority must be comprised of at least two-thirds of the
votes represented.
The shareholders participating in the contribution of articles
of property or rights shall not be counted and shall have no vot-
ing right.
III. Issuance of
new shares
1. General
prere quisites
2. As counter-
performance
for payment in
kind and ri
ghts

– 120 –
Information relating to the articles of property and rights
brought in must be provided in the articles and, as when the com-
pany is formed, a special report must be submitted by the board
of directors as well as by an expert authority (if necessary) before
the resolution is passed. Such reports must be attached to the
document required to be drawn up concerning the resolution and
a certified copy of the reports must be deposited in the Public
Register files.
The preceding paragraphs shall not apply if the issuance of new
shares as a counter-performance for payments in kind and rights
ensues pursuant to the regulation concerning the formation of the
company limited by shares by simultaneous formation.
In addition, the judge may allow exceptions in extrajudicial
proceedings.
Art. 297
The issuance of new shares, whether these are to be added to
the existing shares, or whether they are to replace them, whether
the quantity or quota, or whether the amount is to be changed or
left unchanged, may ensue without the payment of capital in cash
or the contribution of tangible articles of property:
1. If, in place of company debts, shares with or without pre-
ference are issued to assenting creditors (repayment of debts
by shares), if the articles provide for this; a right, in particular,
may be conceded to bond creditors, already at the time bonds
are issued or, in the case of a loan being taken up, to the grant-
ers of a loan, enabling their bonds or their loans to be con-
verted to preference or ordinary shares, or an obligation may
be imposed in this regard (convertible bonds and/or loans),
according to which the regulations concerning capital increase
in the case of companies with variable capital shall be applied
analogously, with the exception of those regulations which
relate to the name and the limitation to registered shares,
2. by application of the reserve fund, other reserves and withheld
profits, insofar as a minimum reserve is not required by law
(revaluation upwards),
3. Issuance
without pay-
ment in cash or
kind

– 121 –
3. by adjusting the nominal value to the actual value of the assets
as, particularly, in the case of devaluation of money and con-
version to shares of the undisclosed reserves within such assets
(revaluation upwards),
4. in the case of the reduction of the nominal capital and the
share amount (devaluation),
5. in the case of the nominal capital or a part thereof being
changed to another currency and, likewise, the nominal value
of the shares or the quota (revaluation),
6. conversion of the preference shares to fully entitled ordinary
shares and similar.
Art. 298
1)
Art. 299
Pursuant to or by amendment of the articles the general
meeting may pass resolutions to take up new nominal capital or to
modify the existing nominal capital by issuing preference shares
(priority shares) with or without the ordinary shareholders having
the preferential right to acquire preference shares.
When preference shares are issued, the right may be reserved
to convert these to different shares, in particular to ordinary
shares or bonds with or without the right to vote or participate in
profits. In the latter case, however, the regulations concerning the
reduction of capital in the case of limited companies with variable
share capital shall be applied accordingly, but not those concern-
ing the company name and the restriction on registered shares
(convertible preference shares).
If the articles do not determine otherwise, shares which should
take precedence over preference shares shall, after such preference
shares have been issued, only be issued with the approval not only
of the general meeting of all the shareholders but also of a special
general meeting of the preference shareholders.

1) Art. 298 deleted by the law dated the 23. October, 1997, LGBl. 1997, No. 210.
IV. Issue of prefe-
rence shares
1. Authority to
issue

– 122 –
The same regulation shall also be observed in the case of the
subsequent amendment of provisions in the articles which confer
special rights on the preference shares.
The articles may determine that in order to raise new funds
without implementing an increase in capital, the shareholders may
be invited to contribute voluntarily a certain sum of money above
the nominal value of the shares and those shares for which an
additional payment was made shall be converted into preference
shares.
Art. 300
The passing of resolutions concerning the issuance of prefer-
ence shares or concerning the amendment or cancellation of the
preferential rights conceded to preference shares shall
be subject to the same regulations as those drawn up for
the resolutions concerning the expansion of the sphere of busi-
ness.
A resolution of the general meeting may be replaced by a
document in which all the shareholders approve by signature the
issuance of preference shares.
Art. 301
With preference over ordinary shareholders, preference share-
holders enjoy the preferential treatment specifically conceded to
them in the original articles or in the amendment of the article
amending resolution applying to the issuance of the preference
shares; otherwise, preference shareholders rank pari passu with
the ordinary shareholders.
The preferential treatment may extend in particular to the
right to vote, to the exclusive election of certain company bodies
as, for example, the board of directors, or the passing of resolu-
tions concerning certain objects designated in the articles, to the
dividend, with or without right to a cumulative dividend, to the
share of the liquidation surplus and to the right to subscribe to
new shares if such are issued.
2. Passing of
resolutions
3. Status of
preference
shares

– 123 –
If vested rights are not involved, the preference shareholders
are bound, as far as the bringing or waiving of their claims is con-
cerned, by the resolutions which may be passed by special general
meetings of the preference shareholders.
Unless the articles determine otherwise, the resolutions men-
tioned in the last paragraph must be passed with three-quarters of
all the votes of the preference shareholders.
Unless the articles determine otherwise, the trustee in bank-
ruptcy, in the event of winding up shall in the first instance call in
all the arrears on the ordinary shares and then, if these payments
are inadequate, the arrears on the preference and other shares, one
after the other, according to their legal status.
Art. 302
Shares which are handed over to the shareholders or third
parties without counter-performance or only in return for reim-
bursement of expenses, and are paid for by the company itself,
from a fund which is available in addition to the nominal capital,
from reserves formed out of profits or similar (bonus shares) may
be issued pursuant to the original or amended articles.
Their issue may also ensue with partial upward revaluation
and similar operations, or instead of dividend subscription rights
(dividend shares) or dividend-right certificates.
With the exception of the duty to pay a call on shares, the bo-
nus shareholder has the same duties and rights as any other share-
holder, such as the right to vote, the right to dividends, the right
to subscribe to new shares, unless the articles determine other-
wise.
Also permissible is the formal distribution to the shareholders
(bonus) of reserves pursuant to the articles which have accumu-
lated in this regard and the immediate repayment or settlement of
the amount in return for the transfer of shares by the company
(false bonus shares).
V. The issuance of
bonus shares

– 124 –
Art. 303
Unless the articles provide otherwise, the existing share-
holders, including the bonus shareholders, have a reversionary
right to subscribe to new shares.
The subscription right may also be such that shareholders have
a right to subscribe to the shares of an existing company or of a
company yet to be formed, as in the case of an exchange issue, or
in another manner.
The conceding of subscription rights for shares to be issued in
the future, before the resolution is passed to increase the capital,
may be provided for in the articles with the approval of the Reg-
ister Authority in extrajudicial proceedings with the proviso that
this concession must be restricted to a certain issue and the
amount of capital increase may not be higher than the sum of the
issue vested with the subscription right.
The duty may be imposed upon registered shareholders to
subscribe to new shares to an extent determined in the articles,
pursuant to the regulations applying to additional service shares.
In the absence of other provisions, the subscription right and
the obligation to subscribe apply to the current owner of the
shares. The subscription right is a part of the share but not a
benefit; the obligation to subscribe is a burden on the registered
share.
Special transferable securities may be issued via the subs-
cription right of the shareholders.
The subscription right in the case of convertible bonds or
loans is reserved.
Art. 304
Pursuant to the original articles or by means of an amendment
of the articles, the general meeting may vote to issue dividend
right certificates having the character of securities for the benefit
of the founders or such persons who are or were associated with
the undertaking on the basis of capital participation, the owner-
ship of shares or a creditor’s claim or work or in another manner.
VI. Subscription
right and obli-
gation to sub-
scribe
VII. The issuance
of dividend
right certifi-
cates

– 125 –
The dividend right certificates do not confer company mem-
bership on the entitled persons, but solely a conditional creditor’s
claim, whether to a share of the net profit or to a share of the
liquidation surplus or also a right to subscribe to new shares or to
one as well as to the other.
Unless the articles provide otherwise, the right to subscribe to
new shares may be withdrawn by the issue of dividend-right cer-
tificates for not more than half of the new shares to be issued in
the individual case.
The passing of resolutions concerning the subsequent issue of
dividend-right certificates is subject to the same regulations as
those drawn up for resolutions concerning the conceding of
founders’ preferential rights at the time the company is formed.
The community of loan security creditors shall apply to the
holders of dividend right certificates with the proviso that reso-
lutions of the holders of dividend right certificates may be passed
with a simple majority, unless determined otherwise in the reso-
lution concerning the issuance of the dividend right certificates.
If the company is in a state of bankruptcy, the holder of divi-
dend-right certificates may, if his claim is for a definite share of
the profit, put forward such claim as a claim in bankruptcy, and, if
his claim is for a dividend, he may only put this forward if the
payment of a dividend had been non-appealably declared before
the adjudication of bankruptcy.
Art. 305
Pursuant to the law, a public document or a document signed
by all assenting voters must be drawn up for each resolution of
the general meeting whose object is to amend the provisions of
the articles.
The application for registration of the resolution must be
made either by all the members of the board of directors or by a
member with authorisation to represent and sign, and entry in the
Public Register and publication ensues on the basis of the same
disclosures as in the case of the original articles; legal effect is
acquired only after entry in the Public Register.
VIII. Documen-
tation and
registration
of article
amendments

– 126 –
If an increase in the share capital is involved, the determination
of the subscription and the necessary and actual payment on
shares shall be entered on the basis of a declaration of a person
authorised to represent and sign. Such entry shall be in addition
to the registration of the resolution relating to the amendment of
the articles. The regulations concerning the issuance of new shares
as the counter performance of contributions in kind and rights
remain reserved.
Art. 306
The company limited by shares may not acquire its own shares
for valuable consideration; moreover, it may not accept such
shares as a pledge. An exception to this prohibition ensues:
1. If the acquisition is undertaken in connection with an amorti-
sation pursuant to a provision of the law or the articles,
2. if undertaken in accord with the regulations of the law and the
articles for the partial repayment of the nominal capital,
3. if the acquisition is made to satisfy the company’s own claims
and is necessary to safeguard the company’s interests,
4. if the acquisition or the acceptance of a pledge is associated
with the operation of a branch of the business, belonging to
the undertaking, pursuant to the company’s objects as pro-
vided in the articles,
5. if it takes place together with that of an impersonal entity.
In the first and second cases, the re-acquired shares must be
immediately rendered unsuitable for all further disposal and in the
third, fourth and fifth cases they must be disposed of as quickly as
possible.
The acquisitions and disposals which take place during the
year as well as the company’s own shares as security for borrow-
ing, at hand at the end of the year, must be shown in the annual
report, and these shares may not be represented by the company
at general meetings.
IX. Acquisition of
the company’s
own shares

– 127 –
Art. 307
As long as the company exists each shareholder has a claim to
a proportional share of the net profit as determined from the an-
nual balance sheet, insofar as this is intended for distribution to
the shareholders pursuant to the law and the articles.
In the event of the company being dissolved, the shareholder
shall have the right to a proportional share of the liquidation pro-
ceeds unless the articles provide otherwise under reservation of
the vested rights.
The preferential rights provided in the articles for individual
classes of shares are reserved.
Art. 308
Unless the articles provide otherwise, the shares of the profit
and the liquidation proceeds shall be calculated in proportion to
the amounts paid in.
A shareholder shall not have the right to reclaim payments in
cash or kind either before or during the dissolution of the com-
pany.
For company notices to the public concerning dividends and
with the exception of domiciliary undertakings, these are to be
stated as per hundred of the nominal share amount if the amount
is given in percent when non par shares are not involved; other-
wise, this shall be as per hundred of the share capital plus all re-
serves.
Art. 309
Each year, by operation of the law, a sum amounting to one-
twentieth of the net profit must be allocated to a general reserve
fund until such fund amounts to one-tenth of the nominal capital.
If shares are issued below the nominal value, a sum amounting
to a further one-twentieth of the net profit must, by operation of
the law, be allocated each year to the general reserve fund until
the nominal share value has been reached.
D. Share-holders
rights and
duties
I. Shares of profit
and liquidation
proceeds
1. In
general
2. Method of
calculation
II. Reserve fund
1. Reserve fund
re
quired b y law

– 128 –
Surplus proceeds obtained from the issue of shares above their
nominal value shall be allocated to the same fund, even after the
legally required amount has been reached, unless such surplus
proceeds are required to cover the costs of issuing the shares, or
for marking down or for welfare purposes or for the profit-
sharing of staff or workers. A further allocation shall be made to
the same fund from that amount of the contributions left over
from the shares declared null and void after a possible deficit in
the proceeds from the shares issued has been covered.
This fund may only be used to cover balance-sheet losses.
Art. 310
The articles may provide for higher contributions to the re-
serve fund.
The articles may provide for further funds and determine their
application and purpose such as, in particular, a welfare fund, a
renewals fund and an amortisation fund.
Art. 311
The dividend may not be determined before the contributions
to the reserve and other funds pursuant to the law and the articles
have been deducted from the net profit for payment into the re-
serve and other funds as determined by the law and the articles.
The general meeting is also empowered, before the dividend is
determined, to pass resolutions to establish such reserve funds as
are not provided for in the law or the articles if such action ap-
pears appropriate for the safeguarding of the undertaking or
achieving a dividend which is as uniform as possible.
The regulations concerning the socio-political rights to a share
and to profit are reserved.
Art. 312
Interest on the share capital may not be paid or promised.
Dividends shall result solely from the net profit, as shown in the
annual balance sheet, with reservation of a distribution based on
an interim balance sheet, or shall be available from reserves accu-
mulated for this purpose.
2. Reserve fund
provided in the
articles
3. Relationship of
the profit share
to the reserve
assets
III. Dividends,
building inter-
est, directors’
remuneration,
etc.
1. Dividends

– 129 –
The articles may determine that the board of directors or an-
other body, without prior resolution of the general meeting, may
distribute dividends on the preference shares at fixed times during
the year, e.g. at six-monthly intervals. Such distributions, whose
scope shall be described in detail, shall be derived from the profits
(surplus) brought forward from the previous business year or
from a special reserve fund.
In the absence of other provisions in the articles, the dividends
shall be paid in cash.
If the articles make such provision, dividends may also be paid
to parties other than shareholders, such as insurance policy hold-
ers, subsidiary and associate companies, charitable undertakings.
The articles may provide for the payment of dividends by
means of coupons, but also in other ways, by cheque, for instance,
and similar.
Dividends whose payment has been approved pursuant to the
law and the articles before the initiation of the company’s bank-
ruptcy may, as well as a dividend according to para. 2, be the
subject of a claim in bankruptcy.
Art. 313
Interest at a certain rate may be stipulated for the shareholders
at the expense of the investment account for the time required to
build and prepare the undertaking up to the commencement of
full operation.
The articles must determine the latest date when the payment
of interest shall cease.
If new share are issued for the expansion of the undertaking,
the resolution to increase the capital may concede a certain pay-
ment of interest to the new shares at the charge of the investment
account for the period up to the time of going into operation.
Payments for building interest must be entered on the assets
side and the entry must be paid off from the profits as quickly as
possible.
The claim for the building interest which accrues before the
adjudication of the company’s bankruptcy may be made as a
claim in bankruptcy.
2. Building
interest

– 130 –
Art. 314
The payment of dividends to members of the board of direc-
tors, the audit authority or other bodies provided for in the arti-
cles is only admissible after the contribution has been made to the
legal reserve fund and a dividend of 5% or more if a higher per-
centage is determined in the articles has been paid to the share-
holders.
Art. 315
In addition to or in place of the claim to dividends, the share-
holders may be granted the right to use or the right to usufruct of
the company’s assets which, however, may not reduce the balance
of the company capital and shall lapse in the event of bankruptcy.
Art. 316
The claim to dividends, building interest and management fees
and, in the case of the right to use and the right of usufruct, the
claim to individual performances, shall fall under the statute of
limitations upon the expiration of three years after their due date.
The existence of the right to use and the right of usufruct is
determined by the right of membership.
Art. 317
Except in the case of additional performance shares, the share-
holder is not liable to contribute more to the objects of the com-
pany and to the fulfilment of its obligations than the amount de-
termined by the company at the time of issue for the allocation of
a share.
Except in the case of the nominal capital being reduced, the
shareholder cannot be granted either a release from or a respite
for payment of this amount, under reservation of the provisions
concerning the shareholder’s liability.
3. Management
fees
4. Other claims
IV. Statute of
limitations
V. The sharehol-
ders’ liability
1. Ob
ject

– 131 –
Art. 318
In addition to the fixed share sum, the articles may determine,
without inclusion in the share capital and without being taken
into consideration in the balance sheet, that the obligation may be
imposed on the shareholder to effect non-recurring or recurring
cash or other contributions, including defaults, or to effect further
limited contributions or to accept limited liability, although the
articles may determine joint and several liability, up to a sum
amounting to twice the nominal value of the shares, pursuant to
the relevant regulations applying to cooperative societies and in
this case the imposition of liability and the duty to make further
contributions shall ensue by allocation procedure.
Where such companies are concerned, insofar as the shares
with additional performance are involved, only registered shares
may be issued, which shall be transferable with the assent of the
company.
The obligation and the scope of the contribution must be indi-
cated on the share or the interim certificate and an amendment of
the articles reaffirming such obligations or extending existing ones
is only permissible with the assent of all the shareholders thereby
affected.
The articles must determine a penalty for the case where such
obligation towards others to effect contribution other than
monetary payments is not fulfilled or not fulfilled in due form or
where a shareholder renounces his shares even when they are fully
paid up. Otherwise, every shareholder shall have the right to re-
turn his shares after they have been fully paid up, in the same way
as a partner in a partnership limited by shares when a limited
liability does not exist.
The company may only refuse to approve the transfer of
shares for important reasons. In the case of approval being with-
held, the transfer may, under these prerequisites, be approved by
the judge in extrajudicial proceedings.
The obligation to effect individual contributions of this kind
shall fall under the statute of limitations three years after their due
date.
2. Additional
contributory-
shares
a. In
general

– 132 –
Art. 319
Periodic non-monetary contributions, for which shareholders
are liable in addition to payments for capital, may not exceed the
value which forms a creditor’s claim and may be remitted regard-
less of whether the annual balance sheet shows a net profit.
Only dividends may be paid out for periodic contributions.
The claim for remittance or reimbursement of individual con-
tributions shall fall under the statute of limitations three years
after their due date.
Art. 320
A shareholder who fails to pay at the right time the sum due
for his share shall be liable to pay interest on default payment by
operation of the law.
Moreover, the board of directors has in all cases the right to
declare forfeited the defaulting shareholder’s entitlement accruing
from the subscription to the shares and from the partial payments
already made and to issue new shares in place of those withdrawn.
The articles may also provide for the imposition of a penalty
on the shareholder for such default.
Moreover, the regulations concerning the additional perform-
ance shares, in the case of which the declaration of forfeiture may,
in the absence of articles to the contrary, ensue on grounds of
undue delay in the execution of the additional performances, also
are reserved.
Art. 321
A shareholder can only be penalised by the imposition of a
penalty and his rights accruing from the share and the subscrip-
tion be declared forfeited if the request to pay on shares has been
published at least twice in the journal used for such purpose, the
last time at least two weeks before the final date fixed for pay-
ment, or, if the request was communicated to him by registered
letter, within the same period of time.
b. Remittance
3. Consequences
of undue delay
a. Pursuant to law
and articles
b. Request to
perform

– 133 –
Where the shares are issued to a named person, a special single
communication by registered letter takes the place of the public
request in all cases. The communication is sent to the individual
shareholders entered in the share register at least four weeks be-
fore the final date fixed for payment.
Insofar as he is personally liable, the defaulting shareholder is
liable to the company for the amount which is not covered by the
issuance of the new shares.
Art. 322
Issued share documents or interim certificates are subject to
the regulations concerning securities, unless special provisions are
drawn up in the foregoing regulations concerning share docu-
ments or in the following provisions.
Up to the time such securities are issued, the legal relationship
between the subscriber and his possible successors and the com-
pany is subject to the general provisions of the Code of Obliga-
tions, in particular to the regulations concerning the assignment
of claims and the assumption of a liability.
To what extent a transfer of the legal relationship takes place
by means of the transfer of deposit slips for deposited registered
shares, blocked shares and interim certificates shall be assessed for
the individual case.
Art. 323
Bearer shares may only be issued after a sum determined in the
original articles has been paid in; such sum must amount to at
least half of the nominal value.
If such a sum is not determined in the articles, the issue of
shares to the bearer is admissible only after the full nominal value
has been paid in.
Bearer documents issued beforehand shall be null and void and
the subscribers and shareholders remain subject to the regulations
concerning shareholders in general, up to the time of the payment
stated.
Bearer shares are transferable to the bearer as securities.
VI. Legal relation-
ship of the
shareholders
1. In
general
2. In the case of
bearer shares
a. The issuance of
bearer docu-
ments

– 134 –
Art. 324
Even if he transfers his entitlement to another person and such
person accepts the liability to pay, with or without the approval
of the board of directors, the subscriber remains liable for pay-
ment, up to the amount determined by the law and the articles,
with his entire assets and legal action can be taken by the com-
pany, even if the share has been transferred to a third party if, in
spite of due demand by the board of directors, he fails to comply
with his duty to pay, and in consequence the share shall be de-
clared cancelled.
If no provision has been made for the release of the subscriber
from further payments regarding the amount determined in the
articles or by the law or if the company is wound up within one
year of being entered in the Public Register, the subscriber can
still be required to make further payments, even though he no
longer has the share.
Art. 325
After the bearer share has been issued, the bearer at the time,
who is not the subscriber, is not, in the absence of another agree-
ment, liable personally for further payments. However, only in-
sofar as a due payment is not met, his right accruing from the
share may, pursuant to the provisions concerning the conse-
quences of undue delay in the case of delayed payment, be de-
clared forfeited.
This limitation of liability, however, is not effective if within
one year of being entered in the Public Register the company is
wound up and the bearer, for his part, has not made the payment
and his right accruing from the share has therefore been declared
forfeited.
If interim certificates are issued for the registered share, which
can only be issued to a named person, they shall be subject to the
regulations concerning registered shares.
Art. 326
The subscriber who is called upon by the company to pay on a
share which has been disposed of has recourse to the present share-
holder or subsequent bearer of the share by operation of the law.
b. The subscriber’s
liabilit y
c. Liability of the
bearer
d. Recourse of the
subscriber

– 135 –
In the absence of any other agreement, however, such share-
holder or bearer is liable to the subscriber only with the share
itself.
Art. 327
Unless the articles determine otherwise, registered shares are
freely transferable, also by blank endorsement, and in case of
doubt shall be deemed to be instruments to order.
In order to transfer the registered shares, it is only necessary to
deliver the endorsed share title to the purchaser.
The preclusion of the transferability of a share shall not be
valid in the case of succession upon death, levy of execution and
writ or bankruptcy. However, the purchaser is obliged and enti-
tled to assign the share to the company in exchange for reim-
bursement amounting to the value shown in the last annual bal-
ance sheet.
Registered shares which are not fully paid up or interim certifi-
cates, which are only transferable with the assent of the company,
may only be validly transferred during bankruptcy proceedings
with the assent of the trusteeship in bankruptcy.
Art. 328
The company must record the owners of registered shares in a
share register in which names, addresses or company name and
domicile of the shareholders shall be recorded.
As soon as such a share register has been established, those
persons who are entered therein shall be considered to be share-
holders in relation to the company.
Entry shall ensue on the basis of an identification document
referring to the transfer of the share which has taken place by
succession upon death, upon notification by the heirs and/or the
probate authority and upon the dissolution of a firm or legal en-
tity on notification by the successor in title.
The completed entry shall be noted by the company on the
share document.
3. In the case
of a Registered
share
a. Transfer
b. Entry in the
share re
gister

– 136 –
Art. 329
The company may refuse to make entries in the share register
for the reasons stated in the articles.
If the articles do not contain provisions concerning this mat-
ter, entry in the share register may only be refused for important
reasons.
In the case of shares which are not fully paid up, the purchaser
shall give an undertaking to effect the further payments and the
board of directors shall examine the purchaser’s solvency and, if
necessary, demand security. If such security is not provided, entry
in the register shall be refused.
In the case of acquisition as the result of succession upon
death or by virtue of the law on matrimonial property, entry in
the Share Register may only be refused if the company limited by
shares or the shareholders declare their readiness to take over the
shares at the current price.
Art. 330
The acquirer of a registered share which is not fully paid up is
under obligation to the company to effect payment as soon as he
is recorded in the share register.
The transferor, who is not the subscriber, is thereby released
from the duty to pay, the subscriber, however, remains liable,
despite the transfer to the new acquirer, if the company is wound
up within one year of being entered in the Public Register, and
the company may take legal action against him as soon as the
successor in title fails to meet his obligation to pay, despite being
called upon in due form and in consequence, his share has been
declared invalid by the board of directors.
Art. 331
As long as shares have not been fully paid up, whether these
are bearer or registered shares, the amount actually paid in shall
be clearly stated on every document.
Furthermore, where reference is made to the share capital in
any public notices by the company (announcements, circular
letters, reports, letter headings, etc.), the amount of share capital
actually paid in shall be clearly pointed out.
c. Refusal to
record
d. Liability of the
registered
shareholder
VII. Declaration
that shares are
not fully paid
u
p

– 137 –
The Public Register shall be notified by the board of directors
concerning the sum of the further payments on the share capital
and, like the provisions of the articles, this shall be published.
Art. 332
The rights to which the shareholders are entitled relating to
the affairs of the company, particularly with regard to the con-
ducting of business, the examination of the balance sheet, the
calculation of the profit and the distribution of the profit, shall be
exercised at the general meeting of the shareholders, unless the
law provides for an exception.
Each shareholder entitled to vote shall be at liberty to repre-
sent his shares personally at the general meeting or, unless the
articles determine otherwise, to delegate a third party, who need
not be a shareholder, to represent him.
If registered shares are concerned, the representative must be
provided with written authorisation, unless the articles determine
otherwise.
All the shares owned by one shareholder must be represented
by a single person. In this case, however, the regulations con-
cerning the trust are reserved.
Art. 333
The borrowing or lending of shares for the purpose of exer-
cising the right to vote at the general meeting is inadmissible; so,
too, is any other exercise of the right to vote by anyone but the
owner if this leads to the circumvention of a voting right restric-
tion.
Each shareholder shall be entitled to object to the board of di-
rectors concerning the participation at the general meeting of a
person not entitled to vote, unless the law or the articles make
provision for an exception.
Art. 334
By virtue of the law, the right to vote commences as soon as at
least 20% has been paid in on the share.
The articles may determine that after the expiration of six
months following the formation of the company or the issuance
VIII. Personal
membership
rights
1. Participation
in the general
meeting
a. In
general
b. Unauthorised
partici pation
2. The right to
vote at the gen-
eral meeting
a. In
general

– 138 –
of new shares, only those shareholders shall be entitled to vote
who can prove a period of share ownership of at least six months.
The shareholders shall exercise their voting right at the general
meeting in proportion to the number of shares they own and the
same voting right shall be conferred upon all shares in proportion
to their nominal value or quota, unless the articles determine oth-
erwise.
Each shareholder, even if he owns only one share, shall have at
least one vote.
Art. 335
The company may reserve in its articles the right to restrict the
number of votes of the bearers of several shares or provide in the
articles that shares confer the right of several votes (plural shares)
or confer different voting rights.
In the latter case, a majority resolution is passed only if each
group of shares, for its part, approves a motion with a majority.
It may be determined in the articles that preference shares or a
category of such may be conceded a preference to the effect that
their voting right shall be increased in relationship to the other
votes with each increase in the capital or the introduction of other
voting shares or by raising the preference shares’ voting rights,
also according to a certain ratio (voting right on a sliding scale).
With the approval of the Registrar, a similar or different vot-
ing right may also be conferred upon the creditors of convertible
loans or other bearers of convertible bonds, pursuant to detailed
determination in the articles.
Art. 336
Ten days at the latest before the ordinary general meeting is
due to take place, the balance sheet and the profit and loss ac-
count together with the auditors’ report and the business report
shall be made readily available for the shareholders to examine at
the domicile of the board of directors.
If bearer shares are issued, the announcement of such issue
must ensue in those public journals intended for such announce-
ments.
b. Voting shares
and bonds with
votin
g rights
3. The share-
holders’ right
of verification
a. Right of
disclosure of
balance sheet

– 139 –
Instead of by means of public announcement, registered
shareholders whose names are recorded in the share register shall
be informed by special notification.
Where domiciliary limited companies or family limited com-
panies are concerned, the announcement, unless the articles de-
termine otherwise, shall be made by the judge in extrajudicial
proceedings, with a notice displayed on the court notice board.
Art. 337
The shareholders shall be entitled to point out doubtful entries
to the audit authority and to demand the necessary explanations
from the audit authority and the board of directors.
With the authorisation of the general meeting or with the
permission of the board of directors or by order of the court in
extrajudicial proceedings after the board of directors has been
heard, the shareholders shall be allowed to examine the books of
account and the correspondence. Business secrets must be given
the necessary consideration.
The shareholders’ rights of verification cannot be rescinded or
restricted, either by the articles or by resolution of the general
meeting. However, the regulations concerning trust certificates
are reserved.
Art. 338
The supreme authority of the limited company is the general
meeting of the shareholders which expresses the company’s in-
tentions to the shareholders and the governing bodies.
The powers of the general meeting include:
1. The appointment of the board of directors and the audit
authority,
2. the approval of the balance sheet and determination of its re-
sults and the dividends,
3. the release of the administration and the audit authority,
4. the passing of resolutions concerning the acceptance and
amendment of the articles and, insofar as the articles do not
determine otherwise, the establishment of branches,
b. Right to
supervise the
board of di-
rectors
E. Governing
bodies
I. General meet-
ing
1. Powers

– 140 –
5. the passing of resolutions concerning the matters reserved by
the law or the articles for the general meeting or submitted to
it by other bodies.
However, the articles may transfer to another body, com-
pletely or partly, the duties of the general meeting pursuant to the
law and the articles.
Art. 339
An ordinary general meeting shall take place every year within
six months of the close of the business year. Extraordinary
general meetings shall be convened as required.
The general meeting shall be called in the manner determined
in the articles and on each occasion the notice shall include an
agenda for the general meeting which shall state clearly and com-
pletely the matters to be dealt with.
Exceptions pursuant to the law or the articles are reserved.
Art. 340
If the nominal capital is reduced by one-half and the articles
make such provision, a resolution of the general meeting con-
cerning the dissolution of the company shall be valid when the
assenting majority of shareholders who have approved the disso-
lution represent one-quarter of the nominal capital.
Other cases, for which the law or the articles stipulate a special
majority or the unanimity of the votes represented at the general
meeting, are reserved.
Art. 341
The members of the board of directors shall be appointed by
the general meeting. Initially, the appointment shall be for a
maximum of three years and thereafter for a maximum period of
six years.
For the first three years, the members of the board of directors
may be designated in the articles.
For the protection of the minority of the shareholders, the ar-
ticles may include provisions concerning the method of election
2. Convenin g
3. The passing of
resolutions
II. Board of
directors
1. A
ppointment

– 141 –
and, in place of election by the general meeting, provide for elec-
tion by the shareholders with ballot box or by delegates.
If persons are elected who, in order to perform their duties,
are required to deposit shares and if, according to the articles,
only shareholders may be members, such persons may not take up
office until they have become shareholders by acquiring shares.
The provisions concerning the defined mandate for the ad-
ministration are reserved.
Art.342
Where the articles so determine, the members of the board of
directors must deposit, for the duration of their term of office, the
number of shares stated in the articles.
With the approval of the board of directors, such deposition
may also be undertaken by a third party.
The articles may determine that in every case the deposited
shares shall be issued in or transferred to the names of the indi-
vidual members.
Art. 343
For the duration of the deposition, the deposited shares are in-
alienable.
They provide the company, the shareholders and the creditors
with a pledge as security for their claims arising from the respon-
sibility of the members of the board of directors.
They may not be withdrawn before release has been granted.
Art. 344
Where the administration is entrusted to several persons or
firms, these form the board of directors, whose powers may be
defined in detail in the articles or in special regulations.
Companies limited by shares whose nominal capital amounts
to at least one million Swiss francs must have a board of directors
comprising at least three members, unless the companies con-
2. Deposition of
shares
a. Manner of
de
position
b. The effect of
this
3. Board of
directors
a. Appointment
and procedure
in
general

– 142 –
cerned are only domiciled in the Principality of Liechtenstein,
with or without an office, or only administer assets, but do not
conduct other business in Liechtenstein.
Art. 345
The board of directors shall designate a president and the
other members of its committee insofar as this is provided for in
the articles or in a regulation admitted by the articles, or is con-
sidered by it to be necessary.
Minutes shall be kept of its resolutions, which shall be signed
by the chairman.
Art. 346
The articles may determine that absent members of the board
of directors may be represented at a meeting by another member
or by a substitute whose name is recorded in the Public Register.
The relevant powers of agency must be granted for a particular
meeting and be attached to the minutes.
No member may represent more than two other members.
Art. 347
The board of directors may appoint one or several committees
comprised of members drawn from its own ranks, whose duty in
particular shall be to supervise the course of business, to prepare
the business to be submitted to the board of directors, to report to
the latter on all important matters also, in particular, concerning
the drawing up of the balance sheet, and to supervise the imple-
mentation of the resolutions of the board of directors.
Art. 348
The articles may determine that management and representa-
tion may be transferred by the general meeting or the board of
directors to one or several persons, members of the board of di-
rectors (delegates) or third parties, who need not be members of
the company, who are then also subject to the regulations con-
cerning responsibility.
b. Procedure for
business
c. Represen
tation
d. Committees of
the board of
directors
e. Transfer of
management
and repre-
sentation to
s
pecial bodies

– 143 –
If they are entrusted with the conduct of the entire business,
they shall form the management.
Persons (firms) entrusted in this manner with the conduct of
the business and representation are bodies of the company.
Art. 349
The duties of the board of directors shall be:
1. To prepare the agenda for the general meeting and to imple-
ment its resolutions,
2. to draw up the rules necessary for the orderly conduct of
business and to instruct management accordingly,
3. to supervise the persons entrusted with management and rep-
resentation, having regard to the correct execution of the latter
pursuant to the law, the articles and the regulations and,
4. with this aim in view, to be regularly informed concerning the
course and the conduct of business.
The board of directors shall also be responsible for the min-
utes of the general meeting and of the board, for the necessary
business records being properly kept and for the annual balance
sheet being drawn up in accordance with the legal regulations ,
audited and, if required, published.
Art. 350
1)
In all cases, the supreme body shall elect an audit authority.
Art. 351
In the case of the dissolution of a limited company, brought
about by the take-over of such company, with assets and liabili-
ties, by another limited company as universal successor in title,
the following provisions shall be applied, with the exception of
the regulations applying to a resolution to merge, where the
transferee company decides to increase its capital by merging with
another and the company to be taken over decides to dissolve by
merging with another:

1) Art. 350 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980 No. 39.
f. Duties of the
board of di-
rectors
III: Audit authorit
y
F. Merger
I. Take-over of
one limited
company by
another

– 144 –
1. The assets of the dissolved company shall be administered
separately until, according to judicial discretion in extrajudicial
proceedings, the company’s creditors are satisfied or safe-
guarded.
2. The legal venue of the company shall remain unchanged for
the duration of the separate assets administration; such ad-
ministration, on the other hand, shall be conducted by the
transferee company and any action or the like shall be taken
against the latter.
3. The members of the board of directors of the company taking
over shall be responsible to the creditors jointly and severally,
without limitation, for the separate administration.
4. The dissolution of the company and the take-over by the other
company must be notified by each management concerned for
registration in the Public Register.
5. After registration of the dissolution, the shares of the trans-
feree company which are to be granted by way of settlement,
shall be delivered to the shareholders of the dissolved com-
pany.
6. The public demand of the creditors of the dissolved company
may be postponed; the consolidation of the assets of the two
companies, however, is only admissible at the time when a
distribution of the assets of a dissolved company to the share-
holders may ensue.
7. In the relationship of the dissolved company to the transferee
company and its creditors, the assets taken over and whatever
may be acquired by transaction or in another way with the re-
sources of these assets, up to the expiration of the six-month
waiting period, shall be deemed to be the assets of the dis-
solved company up to the time of the admissible consolidation
of the two companies; and the creditors of the dissolved com-
pany, in the absence of an opposing provision in the resolution
concerning the decision to merge, may demand preferential
satisfaction in execution and bankruptcy proceedings, not-
withstanding their claims for payment against the transferee
company.

– 145 –
8. Subscription to shares is not required for the capital increase
needed for the take-over by the transferee company and ex-
isting subscription rights and duties shall not apply for these
new shares.
9. The transfer of the assets to the transferee company takes
place, without delay, with the registration of both parties’
resolutions. However, the items of property whose transfer
necessitates registration in Public Registers, such as the Land
Register or similar may not be at the disposal of the transferee
company until the prescribed transfer has been entered in the
Public Registers.
Art. 352
By the formation of a new limited company, several limited
companies may be taken over in such a manner that the assets of
the present companies are transferred, without liquidation , to the
assets of the company to be newly formed.
The regulations concerning take over by another limited com-
pany and, in addition, the following provisions shall be applied in
the case of such a merger:
1. In a public document or in a document signed by all the
shareholders, the several companies must conclude a merger
agreement in which they declare that the companies shall be
dissolved and that they intend to form a new company and
appoint the necessary company bodies.
2. Simultaneously, in a public document or in a document signed
by all the shareholders, they must determine the articles of the
new company, confirm the taking over of all the new com-
pany’s shares and their payment by the bringing in of the as-
sets of the present companies, and nominate the necessary
bodies of the new company.
3. The merger and formation agreement must be approved by the
general meeting of each of the previous companies.
4. The shares of the new company shall be delivered pursuant to
the merger agreement after the resolutions of approval have
been passed and the new company has been entered in the
Public Register.
II. Merging of
several limited
com
panies

– 146 –
Art. 353
Where the dissolution of a limited company ensues in conse-
quence of a take-over by a partnership limited by shares, the
partners of the latter with unlimited liability become the debtors
for the debts of the dissolved limited company.
Otherwise, the regulations concerning a take-over by a limited
company shall be applied analogously.
Art. 354
If, with reservation of the regulation concerning dissolution
without liquidation under the general regulations, the assets of a
limited company are taken over by the State or a Liechtenstein
commune with state guarantee, it may be agreed, with the ap-
proval of the general meeting, that liquidation shall not take place.
The resolution of the general meeting shall be drawn up pur-
suant to the regulations concerning dissolution and entered in the
Public Register.
The transfer of the company’s assets, including the debts, is
executed with the entry of this resolution in the Public Register
and the name of the company extinguished.
If the transfer of real estate or other rights pursuant to land
registry law is concerned, such transfer shall ensue on the basis of
the entry in the Public Register.
Art. 355
Repayment of the nominal capital to the shareholders or a re-
duction of the nominal capital may ensue only on the basis of a
provision of the articles with a resolution of the general meeting
in compliance with the requirements pursuant to the law and the
articles.
If an adequate, special cover for the payment of the existing
creditors is not available or will not be newly created within the
scope of the capital reduction or the creditors agree to the reduc-
tion, the repayment or reduction may ensue only on condition
that the provisions applicable to the distribution of the company’s
assets in the case of dissolution are observed.
III. Take-over by a
partnership
limited by
shares
G. Transfer to the
communit
y
H. Repayment and
other reduc-
tions of the
nominal capital.
I. Resolution to
repay and re-
duce, etc.

– 147 –
In the case of the nominal capital being reduced as the result of
loss, the shares issued earlier will be affected by this before those
issued at a later date if different classes of shares were issued and
at the time of issue it was not determined, for instance, which
class of shares should have preference over another class with
respect to the liquidation surplus.
In the case of a straighforward reduction, the agreement of the
creditors shall be presumed if they do not give notification of
their claims within the six-month waiting period.
If the company becomes bankrupt before expiration of the six-
month waiting period, the shareholder, unless repayment with
reservation of return payment is involved, may make his claim on
the repayment quota only in competition with the creditors who
have become creditors since the commencement of the six-month
waiting period. If, however, the company becomes bankrupt after
the expiration of that six-month waiting period, the shareholder
may make his claim in competition with all the company’s credi-
tors, insofar as the old creditors did not register their claims or
they were otherwise not shown in the books of account and con-
sequently payment or the provision of security did not ensue.
Art. 356
It may be determined in the articles that the board of directors
or another body is empowered, without a company resolution
and without observing the provision concerning the repayment of
capital to the shareholders, to repay to the shareholders a part of
the nominal capital which, however, may not fall below 20%, or
50% if bearer shares have been issued, on each share, on the ex-
press understanding that the amount shall be paid in again at a
later date on demand of the same or another company body.
Such capital repayment shall be recorded in the Public Regis-
ter; publication of the entry, however, shall be at the discretion of
the Register Authority.
II. Repayment of
capital with
reservation of
return
payment

– 148 –
Art. 357
If the legal prerequisites exist for the reduction of the nominal
capital, such reduction may be undertaken, also by way of share
consolidation, with the approval of the shareholders.
If a resolution to consolidate and reduce the number of shares is
passed with a three-quarters majority of all the votes at the gen-
eral meeting, the shares of the shareholders who did not vote in
favour shall be forfeited to the company and by way of settlement
they may be paid in cash according to the result of a winding up
balance-sheet.
Art. 358
Compulsory amortisation is only admissible if provided for in
the original articles or, in the case of new shares being issued, in
the amended articles which preceded their subscription. On the
other hand, amortisation by means of the voluntary acquisition of
the shares is admissible, even if not provided for in the articles.
If the repayment is undertaken from the nominal capital, such
repayment, if new share contributions are not created to the ex-
tent of the capital reduction, is only admissible if the provisions
drawn up for the case of the capital being reduced are observed
for the protection of the creditors.
If, on the other hand, amortisation ensues from the net profit
or from reserves, these provisions need not be observed. In this
case, however, a sum equal to the amortised shares must be en-
tered on the liability side of the balance sheet.
Art. 359
In the case of the provision of an amortisation of the share
capital out of the net profit, the articles may determine that this
may be undertaken by the board of directors or another company
body by redemption or drawing of the shares, without observing
the procedure for reducing the capital.
The acquired or repaid shares must be destroyed and the share
capital reduced accordingly.
III. Consolidation
and reduction
of the number
of shares
1. Amortisation
1. Preconditions
2. Redemption
and drawin
g

– 149 –
Art. 360
In the case of shares being drawn, the articles may determine
that transferable bonus shares (substitute shares) shall be issued
for the drawn and repaid shares. Such bonus shares shall not have
a par value, but shall embody membership rights, in particular the
right to vote, the right to a share of the net profit and of the liqui-
dation surplus.
Moreover, with the assent of the Registrar, bonus shares may
also be issued in other cases.
Art. 361
Unlike the regulations relating to a fixed capital, the articles of
a limited company which issues registered shares exclusively may
determine that the increase of the company capital may ensue by
the gradual issue of new shares to existing shareholders or third
persons and the reduction of the nominal capital by the gradual,
total or partial, repayment of the company capital by the redemp-
tion of shares without, in this regard, having to observe the pro-
cedure provided in the foregoing articles provided for the increase
or reduction of the nominal capital.
Unless specified otherwise, the remaining regulations con-
cerning the company limited by shares shall be applied to the
company limited by shares with variable nominal capital.
Art. 362
The articles of such a company must determine the maximum
sum which may be achieved in this manner by a gradual increase
of the company capital. The articles must also determine the
amount below which a gradual reduction, brought about by re-
payments to shareholders, may not take place.
The minimum amount must be at least one-tenth of the maxi-
mum capital, unless for important reasons this may be completely
disregarded with the approval of the Registrar in extrajudicial
proceedings.
3. Issue of bonus
shares by
drawin
g
J. Limited com-
panies with
variable in-
vested capital
I. In
general
II. Maximum and
minimum
nominal ca
pital

– 150 –
Art. 363
With the exception of the provision concerning capital repay-
ment, with reservation of the possibility of having to refund same,
and if the articles do not make provision for other restrictions, a
repayment to the shareholder from company capital may ensue in
each case only on the basis of a winding up balance sheet which
shows that after capital invested, which is allotted for repayment,
has been deducted, the business liabilities and the remainder of
the nominal capital, including the appropriate legal reserves in
accordance with the balance sheet, are fully covered by the avail-
able assets.
The articles shall determine the manner of establishing the part
of the capital allotted for repayment, whether by drawing, reso-
lution of the board of directors, etc.
In particular, the reduction of the par value of the not fully
paid up shares or the issuance of bonds to the shareholders to be
drawn, instead of being repaid, is put in the same category as re-
payment.
Shares acquired by the company by repayment may be kept in
safe custody for the purpose of reissue. However, they may not
be treated as membership rights.
Art. 364
If a reduction of the nominal capital causes the provisions of
the law or the articles to be violated, the members of the com-
pany’s bodies who are at fault, also the shareholder who received
benefit shall be liable without limitation, jointly and severally, for
the damages caused to the company, intentionally or by negli-
gence, pursuant to the regulations concerning responsibility.
If the company becomes bankrupt within a period of one year
after the share of a company was repaid or, instead of payment,
its nominal value was reduced, the shareholder and the redeemer
of the share shall be liable to the bankrupt’s estate for the amount
received or the remitted remainder on payment, without being
able to claim a right to settlement or items of the company’s
property.
III. Reduction
1. Preconditions
and
procedure
2. Liabilit
y

– 151 –
Art. 365
The regulations concerning the legal reserve fund shall be applied
with the deviation that each year a sum equal to at least one-tenth
of the net profit must be allocated to the reserve fund until it is
equivalent to the minimum capital and, if such capital is lacking,
to one-tenth of the maximum capital.
Art. 366
Insofar as the nominal capital is used up by gradual repayment
and bonus shares have not been issued, the articles must deter-
mine the legal form in which the undertaking shall continue to
exist, whether as an establishment, or a foundation or similar.
The conversion without liquidation of a company with vari-
able nominal capital into a limited company with fixed nominal
capital shall require an amendment of the articles, the necessary
change of company name and registration in the Public Register.
The conversion without liquidation of a limited company with
variable nominal capital into a cooperative society with shares and
without liability and obligation to make further contributions is
possible at any time on the basis of a company resolution with
amendment of the articles and registration in the Public Register.
Art. 367
Each year the company must submit to the Public Register its
annual balance sheet and, if a reduction of the capital ensued
during the financial year, its winding up balance and a statement
concerning the change in the capital invested which thereby took
place.
The names and addresses and/or the name of the company and
the domicile of the drawn shareholders must be listed in the
statement.
The documents submitted shall be filed in the Register files
and shall not be published.
IV. Mandatory
reserve fund
V. Conversion
VI. Registration
in the Public
Re
gister

– 152 –

– 153 –
Fifth Title
The Establishments and Foundations
First Section
The Establishments
Art. 534
An establishment within the intendment of this title and pur-
suant to the following regulations is a legally autonomous, or-
ganised, permanent undertaking dedicated to economic or other
objects and entered in the Public Register as the Establishment
Register, which has holdings of material and possibly personal
resources. It does not have the character of an institution under
public law and has no other form of legal entity.
Establishments under public law which serve a defined perma-
nent object and are in the hands of the public administration are
subject to public law, insofar as exceptions do not exist and,
where they are independent, to the following regulations supple-
mentally.
Ecclesiastical establishments are subject to public law and,
supplementally, canon law.
Establishments without legal personality (non-independent
establishments) and other non-independently donated assets for a
specific object are not subject to the following regulations, but to
the regulations concerning the implied
1) trust. Foundations are
reserved. … 2)
Art. 535
An establishment may be formed and operated by an indivi-
dual person, a firm, a community or by an association of com-
munes or a legal entity not otherwise entered in the Public
Register.

1) See annatation 3 Art. 898 2) Art. 534 last para. (= para. 5) inserted by the law dated the 10 April, 1928,
concerning the trust enterprise, LGBl. 1928, No. 6, repealed by the law dated 15
April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
A. Concept and
definition
B. Formation
I. Founder

– 154 –
Communes and associations of communes require Govern-
ment assent to the formation.
More than one founder is not required.
Art. 536
Written articles are necessary for the formation, signed by one
or several founders.
Moreover, the articles of an establishment must contain provi-
sions concerning the following:
1. The name and/or the name of the firm, the domicile and the
designation as “Establishment”,
2. the objects of the establishment,
3. the estimated value of the establishment capital in the event
that it is not in cash and the manner of procurement and com-
position,
4. the powers of the supreme body,
1)
5. the bodies for the administration and, if necessary, for the
auditing and the manner in which representation is imple-
mented,
6. the principles relating to the drawing up of the balance sheet
and the appropriation of the surplus,
7. the form in which the establishment’s notices ensue.
With the exception of Nos. 6 and 7
1 these provisions shall be
deemed to be essential pursuant to the regulations concerning
voidability.
Where the establishment capital exists in a form other than
cash, the endowed assets may, instead of in the articles, be entered
in detail in a special register which must be deposited with the
Register Office for safe keeping.
Like a company limited by shares, an Establishment may also
be formed with a variable capital. This circumstance must be
entered in the Public Register.

1) Art. 536 para. 2 No. 4 and para. 3 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980,
LGBl. 1980, No. 39
II. Articles

– 155 –
Art. 537
If the law does not provide otherwise, all establishments are
required to be entered in the Public Register.
A certified copy of the articles and documented proof of do-
nation of capital must be enclosed with the application to register,
which must contain:
1)
1. the formation deed (the resolution and/or declaration of for-
mation) in the event that it is not already included in the
articles,
2. the declaration that at least half the establishment capital has
been paid in or covered by payment in kind and stating how
the remainder is to be raised and/or secured,
3. a list of the members of the board of directors stating the
names of the members, their place of residence and/or the
name of the firm and domicile.
Art. 538
The following shall be entered in the Public Register and
published as an extract:
1. The formation deed, if this is not included in the articles,
2. the date of the articles,
3. the name and/or the name of the firm and the domicile of the
establishment,
4. the objects of the undertaking and, if applicable, the duration
of the establishment,
5. the amount of capital endowed to the establishment as well as
the sum paid in or the other assets contributed, with their es-
timated value,
6. if applicable, the participation rights of third parties in par-
ticular, in addition to the entitled beneficiaries,

1)Art. 537 para. 2 first sentence in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980,
LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
III. Entry in the
Establishment
Register
1. Registration in
the Re
gister
2. Entry and
publication

– 156 –
7. the name, first name and place of residence and/or the name of
the firm and domicile of the members of the board of direc-
tors, the form in which the board of directors gives notice of
its expressions of intent and the manner of representation.
8. the form in which the establishment’s announcements shall
ensue.
The establishment comes into existence and acquires legal per-
sonality only upon entry in the Public Register. Should action be
taken on behalf of the establishment before the said establishment
has acquired or without it having legal personality, the parties
acting on behalf of the establishment, in particular founders or
persons already appointed as governing bodies shall be liable pur-
suant to the general regulations concerning legal entities.
1
Art. 539
The establishment capital (endowment fund) may be endowed
either completely or up to a partial amount to be determined in
the articles in funds contributed by the founders who, however,
shall have no claim to interest at a determined level.
The fund contributions must be paid in or contributed within
the period of time determined in the articles.
Where the founders bring items of property into the estab-
lishment which are to be credited to the fund contributions, the
articles or the register shall establish individually, in detail, accu-
rately and completely the object contributed, its expert valuation
and any beneficial interests which may be tied thereto.
Should the establishment capital be paid in full or covered by
means of assets at a later date when the establishment is in opera-
tion, this fact shall be registered in the Public Register.

1) Art. 538 para. 2 inserted by the law dated 15 April, 1980 LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
IV. Establishment
fund, liabilit y

– 157 –
Art. 540
1)
Establishment shares of the establishment assets for the found-
ers or third parties shall only exist pursuant to the provisions of
the articles, even though fund contributions have been effected
and entitled beneficiaries have been designated to draw profit
from the establishment.
Shares and share certificates of an establishment shall also be
null and void as long as the admissibility of shares or share certifi-
cates is not provided for in the articles and the issuer and third
party participants shall be liable pursuant to the provisions drawn
up under the general regulations.
In case of doubt, the shares provided for the founders in the
articles shall be in proportion to the amount of their possible fund
contributions and if funds have not been contributed the founders
shall receive equal shares.
Establishment shares shall be treated as securities only when
the articles make express provision for such treatment.
Establishment certificates as securities shall be subject to the
regulations concerning registered shares unless more restrictive
regulations concerning their transferability are drawn up in the
articles.
The board of directors shall keep a register of the establish-
ment shares with appropriate application of the regulations con-
cerning the share register in the case of a limited liability com-
pany.
Art. 541
2)
The founder’s rights to which one or several persons are entitled
may be relinquished or otherwise transferred or inherited but
may not be pledged or otherwise charged.

1) Art. 540 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.2) Art. 541 and Art. 543 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
V. Establishment
shares
C. Founder’s
ri
ghts

– 158 –
Art. 542
The contestation of an establishment by the heirs or the
creditors of a founder shall ensue, if it was formed in favour of
third party beneficiaries without valuable consideration, as in the
case of a gift.
Art. 543
1)
The bearer(s) of founder’s rights form(s) the establishment’s
supreme body. The articles may also confer the powers of the
supreme body upon the board of directors.
Where the law or the articles do not determine to the contrary,
the supreme body shall be entitled to those powers which are
provided by the general provisions for the supreme body.
Where several persons have founder’s rights, resolutions shall
require the assent of all bearers of founder’s rights in order to be
valid if the articles do not determine otherwise.
A bearer of founder’s rights shall be at liberty to represent
personally the founder’s rights to which he is entitled or to in-
struct a third party, who is not required to be a bearer of foun-
der’s rights, by means of a written power of attorney to represent
the said founder’s rights.
Art. 544
The members of the board of directors may or may not be
entitled beneficiaries.
If the law or the articles do not determine otherwise, the judge
may, upon application of the participants, in extrajudicial pro-
ceedings, appoint the members of the board of directors in case of
doubt for a period of three years and remove them or individual
members at any time, without prejudice to claims for compensa-
tion.
In the absence of a deviating provision, the board of directors
shall be under obligation to the establishment also to observe all

1)Art. 541 and Art. 543 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
D. Contestation
E. Governing
bodies
I. Su
preme bod y
II. Establishment
administration
and audit
authorit
y

– 159 –
those restrictions which, upon application of the participants, are
determined by the judge in extrajudicial proceedings, relating to
the scope of their authority, the conduct of establishment busi-
ness and the representation of the establishment. However, a
restriction on representation towards bone fide third parties shall
have legal effect only insofar as the law permits this.
Where an audit authority is prescribed pursuant to the general
regulations or the articles make provision for this, the judge may,
in extrajudicial proceedings, in the absence of another provision
in the law or the articles, appoint or remove the audit authority,
in the same way as the members of the board of directors are
appointed or removed.
1)
Art. 545
The articles shall determine in detail:
1. Who shall benefit from the establishment and its possible net
profit (beneficiaries),
2. the manner in which these shall be determined specifically,
3. whether and in what way the beneficiaries shall be entitled to
participate in the organisation (supreme body, board of di-
rectors, supervision.
2)
As long as no third parties have been appointed as beneficiar-
ies (entitled beneficiaries), it shall be assumed that the bearer of
the founder’s rights is the beneficiary.
2)
Only an amount corresponding to the surplus of net assets in
excess of the establishment capital paid in pursuant to the articles
or otherwise covered may be withdrawn from the establishment
assets as available net profit, after allowance has been made for
possible reserves to be paid into the reserve fund provided for in
the articles.

1) Art. 544 para. 4 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980 No. 39.2) Art. 545 para. 1 No. 3 reworded and para. 1 to inserted by the law dated 15 April,
1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
F. Legal relation-
ship of the
founders and
the beneficiar-
ies to the es-
tablishment,
between them-
selves and to-
wards third
parties
I. In
general

– 160 –
Upon demand of the board of directors unknown beneficiaries
may be called in public citation proceedings on condition that
individual performances which have not been withdrawn shall
become forfeited in favour of the regional public assistance fund
three years after the call unless the articles determine otherwise.
Art. 546
In the case of family establishments, the founder may determine
in the articles that the establishment beneficial interest of the spe-
cifically designated third parties, acquired without valuable con-
sideration, may not be withdrawn from them by their creditors
by way of levy of execution and writ or by bankruptcy proceed-
ings initiated against them. This circumstance shall be annotated
in the Public Register at the time of registration.
Apart from the previously mentioned provision in the articles, the
income received without valuable consideration by a third party
beneficiary from an establishment formed by another may be
withdrawn from the said third party by creditors by way of levy
of execution and writ or bankruptcy proceedings only if the said
income is not required for the defrayal of the essential mainte-
nance of the beneficiary, the beneficiary’s spouse and children not
provided for.
Art. 547
Where the articles do not determine to the contrary, the book
value of the establishment assets shall be determined from the
difference between the valuation of the assets, undertaken annu-
ally, and the debts owed to third parties.
Under these circumstances, the annual balance sheet shall
show the amount by which the establishment assets have in-
creased or diminished by comparison with the previous business
year.
In this case, only the amount yielded during the course of the
year may be distributed as profit after the deduction of any re-
serves which may have to be formed.
II. Non-with-
drawabilit y
III. Determination
of assets and
profits

– 161 –
Art. 548
In all cases, only the establishment’s assets shall be liable for
the establishment’s debts.
Each founder shall only be required to meet the obligation to
transfer as specified the endowed assets including a limited liabil-
ity or liability to make further contributions as in the case of reg-
istered cooperative societies. The founder shall not be released
from these performances nor may respite be granted and this shall
apply in the event of the bankruptcy of the establishment.
Instead of or in the absence of members, third parties may also
assume the limited liability for the establishment’s obligations or a
limited liability to make further contributions.
Art. 549
The founder may at any time amend the articles and, in par-
ticular, the objects, with reservation of the creditors’ rights, e.g.,
by increasing or reducing the establishment capital, changing the
governing bodies and by making other similar amendments.
Instead of or in addition to the founder, the articles may em-
power other persons, legal entities, firms or authorities to amend
the articles and include detailed regulations concerning this.
Where the founder’s rights cannot be exercised and the articles
do not determine otherwise, they may be amended by the judge
in extrajudicial proceedings upon application by the board of
directors or one of the beneficiaries, taking into consideration the
objects of the establishment.
1)
Art. 550
To what extent the dissolution of a legal entity, a company or
a firm which is the founder or possessor of an establishment re-
sults in the dissolution of the said establishment shall be pro-
nounced by the judge in the individual case, after considering all
the circumstances.

1) Art. 549 para. 3 in the version of the law dated by the 15. April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
IV. Liability of the
establishment,
limited liability
or liability to
make further
contributions
G. Amendment of
articles
H. Dissolution,
merger and
conversion

– 162 –
Insofar as the law concerning establishments or the articles do
not indicate a deviation, the relevant regulations concerning reg-
istered cooperative societies shall be applied accordingly to the
take-over of one establishment by another and the association of
several establishments.
The regulations concerning the conversion of a company lim-
ited by shares in the case of limited liability companies shall be
applied accordingly to the conversion to an establishment of a
company limited by shares or a company with limited liability.
Art. 551
If no mandatory regulations are drawn up in this section and no
rule or no satisfactory rule is contained herein, the regulations
concerning trust enterprises with legal personality shall be ap-
plied, in addition to the general regulations concerning legal enti-
ties.
1)
For establishments without members which serve exclusively
non-profit making objects, the supplementary regulations con-
cerning the supervision, conversion and cancellation of a founda-
tion shall apply, and for family establishments without members
the regulations for family foundations, provided that a deviation
is not foreseen in this section or in the articles.

1) Art. 551 para. 1 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980 No. 39.
J. Reference

– 163 –
Second Section
The Foundations
Art. 552
For a foundation to be formed by natural persons or legal en-
tities or firms, it is necessary for assets to be endowed (foundation
property) for a certain specific purpose. Ecclesiastical, family and
non-profit making purposes may be given particular considera-
tion. Commercial activities may be undertaken by a foundation
only provided such activity serves its non-commercial purpose or
the type and scope of the participations held require the facilities
of a commercial business.
1)
Asset donations without legal personality (dependent founda-
tions) or donations tied to the condition of a special administra-
tion under a special name and of application for a special purpose
and similar conditions to already existing legal entities or natural
persons or companies are subject to special regulations such as
those applying to gifts or concerning the law of succession and,
supplementally, to the regulations concerning the implied
2) trust
relationship.
The judge shall decide in the individual case the extent to
which separately administered assets (fund) shall be entitled to
independence according to private law or to the character of trust
property.
The regulations concerning the trust enterprise with legal per-
sonality shall be applied to foundations accordingly, particularly
with regard to foundation participants (founder, foundation
council, beneficiaries), where and insofar as the following provi-
sions or the foundation articles or the regulations concerning the
obligation of trust enterprises to register do not determine to the
contrary.
3)

1) Art. 552 para. 1 in the version of the law dated 15 April 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 392) See annatation 3 to Art. 898. 3) Art. 552 last para. (= para. 4) inserted by the law dated 10 April, 1928, concerning
the trust enterprise, LGBl. 1928, No. 6.
A. Definition and
delimitation
I. In
general

– 164 –
Art. 553
Ecclesiastical foundations within the intendment of this sec-
tion are foundations formed for ecclesiastical purposes.
A family foundation is a pure family foundation where the
foundation assets are continously connected with the purpose of
defraying the expenses for the upbringing and education, outfit-
ting or support of the relatives of one or several designated fami-
lies, or with similar purposes.
It is a mixed foundation where assets so donated serve ecclesi-
astical or other purposes outside the family in addition or sup-
plementally.
1)
Art. 554
2)
To ensure observance of the obligation to register, to prevent
foundations with unlawful or immoral purposes and to avoid
circumvention of possible supervision, the foundation deed
and/or a certified copy of the testamentary disposition or the
deed of inheritance must be deposited by the foundation council
or the legal representative and/or the probate court with the
Register Office at the time a foundation is formed, insofar as an
application for entry does not ensue otherwise. Amendments of
the articles must also be deposited with the Register Office.
Art. 555
The formation of a foundation ensues in the form of a deed on
which the signatures of the founders are certified, by testamentary
disposition or by deed of inheritance.
The foundation deed or the articles must contain the name and
domicile of the foundation, its purpose or object, the designation
of the foundation council members and the method for appoint-
ing another foundation council as well as a provision concerning
the application of the assets in the event of the dissolution of the
foundation.

1) Art. 553 para. 3 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
2) Art. 554, amended by the law dated 30 April, 1938, LGBl. 1938, No. 10, and the
8. June, 1938, LGBl. 1938, No. 12, in the version of the law dated 4 June, 1963,
LGBl. 1963 No. 17.
II. Ecclesiastical
and family
foundations
III. De
position
B. Formation
I. Foundation
deed

– 165 –
Art. 556
The foundation’s application to register in the Foundation
Register must be recorded by all the members of the foundation
council personally or submitted in writing in certified form. The
application must be accompanied by a certified copy of the foun-
dation deed.
The entry and publication, which may ensue by announce-
ment on the court notice board, must contain: the name, (name of
the firm), address and purpose of the foundation, the date of the
formation deed, the names and addresses and/or the name and
domicile of the firm of the foundation council members and/or of
other representatives.
If necessary, entry and publication may also be undertaken by
order of the Government as supervising authority by virtue of of
the foundation deed, possibly by the Register Authority ex officio
upon notification by the Probate Authority or upon petition of
the Beneficiaries.
Art. 557
The foundation only comes into existence when entered in the
Public Register as Foundation Register.
Ecclesiastical foundations, pure and mixed family foundations
and foundations whose entitled beneficiaries are specifically des-
ignated or definable acquire legal personality without being en-
tered in the Public Register.
1)
Foundations which engage in commercial activities are under
the obligation to register and acquire legal personality only when
entered in the Public Register.
1)
The registration of a foundation formed by testamentary dis-
position shall ensue only after the death of the founder and, in the
case of a deed of inheritance, provided that this does not deter-
mine otherwise, only after the death of one of the founders.

1) Art. 557 para. 2 and 3 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
II. Entry in the
Foundation
Re
gister
III. Existence

– 166 –
Art. 558
When the foundation has come into existence, the founder or
the third party, upon demand of the Supervising Authority, the
representative of public law or of interested parties, is required to
transfer to the foundation the assets mentioned in the deed of
foundation.
Rights, for whose transfer a declaration of assignment is suffi-
cient, devolve by operation of the law upon the foundation on
coming into existence.
Where the foundation only becomes effective on the death of
the founder or after the termination of a firm or legal entity, the
said foundation shall be deemed to have been in existence already
before the death or termination of the founder for the donations
of the founder or third party.
The donation of assets may also be effected, in particular, by
the establishment of a contractual relationship to the founder or
third party according to which the founder or third party under-
takes to donate annually or at certain intervals a fixed or variable
sum or other assets (donation of periodical payments).
In case of doubt, the investment of assets shall ensue pursuant
to the regulations concerning trust investments.
Art. 559
Revocation of the foundation is admissible only:
1. If a foundation has not yet been entered in the Public Register,
inasmuch as existence ensues only in the event of such entry,
2. in the event that registration of the foundation is not necessary
and the foundation should become effective in law during the
founder’s lifetime, up to the time of conclusion of official cer-
tification,
3. in the case of foundations formed by testamentary disposition
or deed of inheritance, pursuant to the regulations of the laws
of succession applicable to these circumstances.
IV. Donation of
assets
V. Revocation

– 167 –
In the case of testamentary dispositions, the founder person-
ally has an unrestricted right of revocation but not, on the other
hand, the heirs after the founder’s death, not even if the founda-
tion is not yet entered in the Public Register.
Likewise, the heirs do not have a right of revocation where in
the case of the foundation inter vivos the founder certainly drew
up the deed but died before the foundation was entered in the
Public Register.
Revocation expressly reserved in the foundation deed or the
reserved amendment of the deed or of the articles is admissible at
any time.
Art. 560
The validity of a foundation may be disputed by the heirs or
the creditors in the same way as a gift.
Also after it has been registered, the founder and his heirs may
dispute the validity of the foundation on grounds of deficiency of
intention in the manner admissible pursuant to the provisions of
contract law.
Art. 561
The foundation’s governing bodies, such as the foundation
council, the audit authority and similar bodies, as well as the type
of administration and representation, etc., are determined in the
deed of foundation or in the foundation articles drawn up by the
founder in a document, a will or a deed of inheritance.
The conferment of beneficial interest in the foundation may be
entrusted to a special body (collators), independently of the foun-
dation council.
The regulations concerning the governing bodies in question
in the case of establishments shall be applied accordingly to the
powers and duties of the bodies appointed in this manner, with
reservation of the following provisions.
VI. Contestation
C. Governing
bodies
I. In
general

– 168 –
Art. 562
Where no governing bodies have been provided for or where
those provided are inadequate, the Supervising Authority shall
take the necessary steps with appropriate observance of the regu-
lations concerning the establishment’s governing bodies. If re-
quired, the Supervising Authority shall arrange for entry in the
Public Register.
In the event that such steps cannot be taken expediently if, for
instance, there are inadequate assets, the Supervising Authority,
provided the founder does not object or a provision of the foun-
dation deed or the foundation articles is not expressly opposed to
this, shall donate the assets on trust to another foundation having
as far as possible the same kind of purpose.
Art. 563
Only the foundation’s assets shall be liable for the founda-
tion’s debts to the creditors.
Except for the extensive provisions in the case of family foun-
dations, income which a person receives from a foundation with-
out valuable consideration may be withdrawn by injunction, levy
of execution and writ or bankruptcy proceedings only when the
said income is not required for the defrayal of the essential living
expenses of the beneficiary, his spouse and his children without
means.
In the case of foundations subject to supervision, unknown
beneficiaries of the foundation may be traced by the Government
or, otherwise, upon application by the judge in public citation
proceedings.
Art. 564
With the exception of ecclesiastical foundations, pure and
mixed family foundations or such foundations as those whose
entitled beneficiaries are specifically designated or definable natu-
ral or juridical persons, firms or their successors in title or those
foundations whose purpose is solely to administer the assets and
II. Order of the
Supervising
Authorit
y
D. Liability and
exclusion of
enforcement,
etc.
E. Supervision
I. In
general

– 169 –
distribute the income, participation or similar, the foundations are
subject to supervision by the Government, which shall be notified
by the Register Authority of every foundation under obligation
to register.
1)
The foundation deed may also subject other foundations to
Government supervision.
It shall be incumbent upon the Supervising Authority to en-
sure that the foundation assets are administered and applied pur-
suant to their purposes. This Supervising Authority may give the
necessary orders concerning, for example, auditing and the re-
moval of the foundations’ governing bodies.
Any person who has an interest in the administration and ap-
plication of the assets, their yield or use and the representative of
public law may lodge a complaint with the Supervisory Authority
concerning an administration and application of the assets by the
foundations’s bodies which is in conflict with the purpose of the
foundation.
The participants shall be heard before a decision is pronounced
by the Supervising Authority or the Administrative Court of
Justice.
Art. 565
After hearing the foundation’s supreme authority and those
persons whose rights are affected, the Government, upon appli-
cation of one of the participants or ex officio, may change the
foundation’s organisation by administrative action if this is re-
quired urgently in order to preserve the assets or safeguard the
foundation’s purpose and insofar as the foundation deed or the
articles has (have) not entrusted another body or a third party
with the changing of the organisation.
The Landesbank in particular may be designated as a founda-
tion governing body by the Supervising Authority.
In opposition to such amendment orders, the participants may
lodge an appeal with the Administrative court.

1) Art. 564 para. 1 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.II. Amendment
1. Concerning
governing
bodies

– 170 –
Art. 566
After hearing the foundation’s supreme authority and those
persons whose rights are affected, the Government, upon appli-
cation by participants or ex officio, may amend the foundation
deed by administrative action if its original purpose has acquired a
completely different meaning or effect and as a result of this the
foundation is obviously estranged from the intentions of the
founder.
The foundation deed or the articles may also provide for a
foundation governing body or a third party to be empowered to
effect amendment of the purpose if it is incapable of achievement,
inadmissible or unreasonable.
Charges and conditions which impair the foundation’s pur-
pose may be cancelled or amended under the same preconditions.
The last paragraph of the preceding article shall be applied
accordingly.
Art. 567
Permanent or temporary judicial supervision with respect to
the regulation of the governing bodies and the purpose of foun-
dations not subject to supervision, insofar as ecclesiastical foun-
dations are not concerned, and their conversion may, upon appli-
cation of participants, be pronounced by the judge in extrajudicial
proceedings and, if adequate reasons exist, be cancelled again. In
this case, the judge, like the Government as Supervising Author-
ity, may give the necessary instructions.
If provision has not been made for the absolute discretion of
the foundation’s governing bodies, the judge shall in all cases
decide in contentious proceedings concerning other difficulties of
a private law nature such as, for example, the question of benefi-
cial interest (entitlement or privelege), its scope, and so forth.
In the case of family foundations, the founder may determine at
the same time that the creditors of the specifically designated third-
party beneficiaries shall not withdraw from these their beneficial
interest acquired without valuable consideration by way of injunc-
tion, levy of execution and writ or bankruptcy proceedings.
Trust certificates may also be issued to the entitled beneficiaries.
2. Concerning the purpose
F. Family foun-
dations, eccle-
siastical foun-
dations and
similar

– 171 –
Art. 568
i)
The cancellation of a foundation ensues by operation of the
law as soon as the purpose cannot be achieved, particularly when
the foundation purpose can no longer be realised when, owing to
lack of adequate assets, the duties of the foundation can no longer
be fulfilled or the duration specified in the foundation deed has
expired.
Art. 569
The Supervising Authority, the representative of public law
and any interested party is entitled to take action
The cancellation shall be reported to the Registrar ex officio in
order that deregistration may ensue.
The action may be annotated in the Public Register before or
during the proceedings, up to the time of final decision, upon
application or ex officio. The governing bodies of the foundation
and other participants shall be heard before the decision is made.
Art. 570
1)
Where conversion is expressly provided for and also the neces-
sary prerequisites, such as articles or governing bodies are pro-
vided, the foundation, without being wound up, may be con-
verted by the foundation council or a third party empowered by
the foundation council into an establishment or a trust enterprise
by means of a document which must be correct with respect to
form.

i) Art. 568 and 570 in the version of the law dated the 15. April, 1980 LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
G. Cancellation
I. By operation of
law
II. Right of action
and deregistra-
tion
III. Conversion

– 172 –

– 173 –
Fifteenth Title
The Individually Owned Enterprise
with Limited Liability
Art. 834 to 896a 1)
Sixteenth Title
The Trusts
First Section 2
The Trusts in General
Art. 897 3)
A trustee within the intendment of this law is a natural person,
firm or legal entity to whom another (the settlor) transfers mov-
able or immovable property or a right (as trust property) of what-
ever kind with the obligation to administer or use such property
in his own name as an independent legal owner for the benefit of
one or several third persons (beneficiaries) with effect towards all
other persons.
Art. 898
3)
Wherever by operation of law or disposition of an official
authority or in any other way, a person, without being specifi-
cally appointed as trustee, receives property or rights of any kind
in his own name, but for the benefit of the owner hitherto or a
third party, the relationship existing between such person and the

1) Art. 834 to 896a, amended by the law dated 10 April, 1928, LGBl. 1928, No. 6,
repealed by the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
2) Title inserted by the law dated the 10. April, 1928, concerning the trust enterprise,
LGBl. 1928, No. 6.
3) Art. 897 and 898 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No.
39. By the law mentioned, the “implied trust” in Art. 898 was deleted without
being replaced.
A. Definition
I. The trust
relationshi
p
II. The implied
trust

– 174 –
third party shall, in the absence of any other provision, be treated
as an implied trust.
If the law does not make special provision for such legal rela-
tionships or nothing otherwise results from the special circum-
stances, the regulations relating to the trust relationship concern-
ing, in particular, the status of the trust property in the case of
levy of execution and writ and bankruptcy proceedings shall be
applied analogously to the legal relationship between the holder
of assets or rights and the third party.
Art. 899
1)
A trust is created by a written agreement between the settlor
and the trustee. A statement of consideration is not required.
A written declaration of acceptance by the trustee is required
for the creation of a trust where the appointment of a trustee
ensues by virtue of a unilateral declaration by the settlor.
A trust must in all cases by expressly denominated as such, in
a manner which is readily distinguished by the trustee.
The provisions relating to the formalities of transfer of tangi-
ble articles of property and other assets are reserved.
Art. 900
1)
Within twelve months of its creation, every trust created for a
period of longer than twelve months must, with reservation of the
following provisions, be recorded in the Public Register where
the trustee or at least one of several co-trustees is resident or
domiciled in the Principality of Liechtenstein.
The application for registration in the Public Register must
contain:
(a) The name of the trust,
(b) the date of formation of the trust,
(c) the duration of the trust,
(d) the surname, first name and place of residence or firm and
domicile of the trustee.
Every amendment of a registered fact must also be registered.

1) Art. 899 and 900 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980 LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
B. Creation and
termination of
the trust
I. Creation
1. Trust instru-
ment
2. Registration in
public registers
a. In
general

– 175 –
Art. 901
1)
Where property of a trust is registered in other public regis-
ters, such as the Land Register, the Patent Register or similar and
the trust itself is entered in these public registers, the Registrar
may agree to waive an additional entry of the trust in the Public
Register.
Art. 902
1)
An obligation to register a trust in the Public Register does not
exist when the original or a certified copy of the formation deed is
deposited with the Public Register within the time limit of twelve
months. In such case, an original or certified copy of every docu-
ment amending the formation deed must also be deposited with
the Public Register Office.
Art. 903
Where a trustee has not been appointed by an agreement inter
vivos, but by a unilateral trust instrument or testamentary dispo-
sition, the trustee must be informed of the appointment by the
Public Registrar or the probate authority upon application of
interested parties or ex officio if the settlor has not informed the
trustee of his appointment and the latter has accepted.
The nominated trustee must notify the Registrar or the pro-
bate authority of his acceptance of the trusteeship within the time
limit of fourteen days from the date of receipt of notification,
which period may be extended as appropriate, otherwise it shall
be presumed that he has refused the appointment.
A refusal must also be presumed if, contrary to the trust in-
strument, the acceptance is qualified, limited, subject to a condi-
tion or otherwise restricted.
In addition, the regulations concerning entry in the Public
Register shall apply where relevant.

1) Art. 901 and 902 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39
b. Exce ptions
c. De
position
3. Notification of
a
ppointment

– 176 –
Art. 904
In addition to the cases provided by law, the Princely Liech-
tenstein Court of Justice must appoint a judicial trustee in extra-
judicial proceedings if a trust as, for example, a foundation with-
out legal personality, has been created by a unilateral formation
deed inter vivos or a disposition mortis causa, but a trustee has
not been appointed by name or in any other recognisable manner
or if the trustee appointed refuses to accept office or if a trustee
nominated in any other way ceases to act for any reason and the
trust instrument does not determine the manner in which another
trustee should be appointed or how the trust property is to be
otherwise dealt with.
The Public Register or the probate authority or other judicial
and administrative authorities must inform the Princely Liechten-
stein Court of Justice of such reasons for appointment.
After consultation with the interested parties, the Princely
Liechtenstein Court of Justice shall, where appropriate, appoint a
judicial trustee, paying due attention in the first place to the pos-
sible wishes of the settlor and, in the absence of such wishes, to
the interests of the trust property.
Normally, the Liechtensteinische Landesbank should be ap-
pointed as judicial trustee and, if the Landesbank refuses to accept
the appointment and important reasons do not justify an excep-
tion, only Liechtenstein citizens should be appointed, to whom
the personal prerequisites relating to an appointment as legal rep-
resentatives of legal entities shall apply.
The Liechtensteinische Landesbank shall be considered as
public trustee and in this capacity shall fulfil those duties imposed
upon it by the law, the authority or a trust instrument.
Art. 905
1)
If persons residing abroad are appointed as trustees of a trust,
at least one person resident in the Principality of Liechtenstein or
a domestic legal entity must be appointed as co-trustee.

1) Art. 905 in the version of the law dated 15. April 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
4. Judicial and
public trustee
and legal repre-
sentative
a. Judicial and
public trustee
b. Domestic
trustees

– 177 –
Art. 906
The trust shall terminate pursuant to the provisions of the
trust instrument and, in addition, if the trust property is ex-
hausted and not replaced.
A trust may be dissolved by the Princely Liechtenstein Court
of Justice in extrajudicial proceedings, under the conditions ap-
plying to the cancellation of a foundation by the Court.
In the case of termination of a trust, where the trust instru-
ment does not determine otherwise, the trustee or his successor in
title must render account and provide information concerning the
trust property in the same manner as during the existence of the
trust.
If nothing to the contrary is contained in the trust instrument
or the foregoing regulations, the trust property must be trans-
ferred to the settlor or his successor in title and, in the absence of
such persons, to the entitled beneficiary and, in the absence of an
entitled beneficiary, to a foundation whose purpose is as similar as
possible to that of the trust.
The trustee or his successors in title are under obligation to
effect the dispositions and administrative actions necessary for the
transfer.
Should the termination of the trust endanger the interests of
the trust property, the trustee, his heir, legal representative or
other universal successor in title (in the case of firms or legal enti-
ties) shall be under obligation to continue the administration of
the trust until the settlor, his heir or representative or, upon appli-
cation, the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice has given the
necessary instructions.
Art. 907
Rescission of the trust agreement by the settlor or revocation
of a trust is admissible only if the agreement or the unilateral trust
instrument expressly reserves such right of rescission or if revo-
cation is permitted pursuant to the regulations concerning foun-
dations created by testamentary disposition or contract of inheri-
tance.
II. Termination
1. In general
2. Grounds for
termination
relating to the
settlor

– 178 –
In all other cases, the trust shall be irrevocable, with reserva-
tion of the settlor’s or a third party’s right of avoidance pursuant
to the regulations concerning contractual defects, the regulations
concerning the law of inheritance or the law concerning acts void-
able at the instance of creditors and, if the case arises, the law
concerning donations.
In the case of trusts created by testamentary disposition or by
the articles of a legal entity, rescission or revocation is also subject
to the special provisions of the legal relationship.
Provided the trust instrument or the circumstances do not de-
termine otherwise, the death of the settlor or, in the case of com-
panies, firms, legal entities and similar, their termination, as well
as inability to act and bankruptcy shall not effect the cancellation
of the trust.
Art. 908
In the absence of a provision in the the trust instrument, a
trustee who has once accepted office shall be under obligation to
hold office for a period of at least one administrative year, insofar
as he remains capable of acting during such period.
Provided the trust instrument does not determine otherwise,
the trustee shall be entitled to give notice of termination for the
end of a calendar year, with a period of three months’ advance
notice, if important reasons do not justify a shorter term of no-
tice.
In the absence of other provisions in the trust instrument or if
a settlor a co-trustee or an entitled beneficiary is no longer pres-
ent, notice of resignation shall be given to the Public Registrar.
The trustee designated in the trust instrument to succeed shall
be notified by the Public Registrar, but where a successor trustee
has not been designated or an appointed trustee refuses or is un-
able to accept the office, the Registrar shall advise the Princely
Liechtenstein Court of Justice which, as in all other cases where
trust property is left without a trustee, shall appoint a trustee.
3. Termination
relating to the
trustee
a. Notice by the
trustee

– 179 –
Art. 909
If the trust instrument does not make provision for the sub-
stitution of the initially designated trustee in the event of death or
on grounds of inability to act, each heir of a trustee and, in the
event of inability to act, his representative is under obligation to
notify the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice.
Where the trustee is a partnership, a firm or a legal entity, the
partners, or shareholders, the representatives or successors of the
firm, or the governing bodies of the legal entity, or the trusteeship
in bankruptcy must give notice of termination to the Princely
Liechtenstein Court of Justice.
In addition, every beneficiary shall be entitled to give such
notification to the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice for the
purpose of appointing another trustee.
The procedure for appointment is the same as in the case of
resignation.
In the absence of any other provision in the trust instrument,
the trustee shall not retire from the trusteeship in the event of his
bankruptcy where the trust property does not appear to be en-
dangered and the judge does not order his removal. However, the
judge, upon petition of the participants or the trusteeship in bank-
ruptcy, may appoint a co-trustee.
Art. 910
The terms of the trust instrument, such as those of the trust
agreement, the disposition mortis causa or the articles shall be
authoritative in the first place for the interpretation of the trust
relationship between settlor, trustee and beneficiaries.
Where the terms of such a document are in conflict with man-
datory regulations or the public order of the country, they shall
be interpreted so as to be in accord therewith, insofar as the law
or the document does not determine otherwise.
Where the terms and the effect of the trust relationship be-
tween the participants and third parties cannot be determined
from the trust instrument, the regulations of this chapter shall

1) Marginal note to Art. 910 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl.
1980, No. 39.
b. Death or
termination,
inability to act
and bankruptcy
of the trustee
C. Terms and
effect of the
trust relation-
ship
1. In
general 1

– 180 –
apply and in this regard the rights entered in the Land Register
shall be effective against all persons, while with respect to other
rights the trustee shall have the status of a beneficial owner (ad-
ministrative right in rem).
The regulations concerning the amendment (conversion) of a
foundation shall be applied analogously to the amendment (con-
version) of a trust by the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice
in extrajudicial proceedings.
Where nothing otherwise results from the pursuit of commer-
cial objects or entry in the Trust Register, the regulations con-
cerning the trust enterprise shall be applied supplementally.
1)
The interpretation and application of all regulations concern-
ing the trust enterprise and all other trust provisions shall ensue
pursuant to the principles of equity.
2)
Art. 911
All assets so designated by the settlor or by operation of the
law shall be trust property, as well as all assets acquired by the
administration of such property, whether it has been included in a
schedule or an inventory or not .
Property that has been included in a schedule or an inventory
shall be presumed to be part of the trust property.
The trust property shall also include property acquired on
grounds of a right accruing to the trust property as a substitute
for an object of the trust property which has been destroyed,
damaged or removed, or acquired in any other way, by the means
of the trust property or as the result of a transaction related to the
trust property.
In the absence of provisions in the law or the trust instrument
to the contrary, the regulations concerning joint ownership
(Gesamteigentum), with the exception of those relating to the
dissolution of joint ownership, shall apply to trust property as
separate property on the understanding that the trustees have
joint rights and duties and that in the case of retirement of a trus-

1) Art. 910 para. 5 and 6 inserted by the law dated 10 April, 1928, concerning the
trust enterprise, LGBl. 1928, No. 6.
2) Art. 910 para. 5 and 6 inserted by the law dated 10 April, 1928, concerning the
trust enterprise, LGBl. 1928, No. 6.
II. The trust
property
1. In
general

– 181 –
tee or the appointment of a new trustee the rights and duties shall
devolve automatically upon the new trustee, except for the duty
to appoint new trustees, insofar as the transfer is not subject to
special formalities.
1
Art. 912
Where real estate or rights registered in the Land Register are
part of the trust property, they must, in the absence of other pro-
visions in the trust instrument, be transferred to the name of the
trustee in order to be effective towards third parties, whether with
or without restraint on disposal. This may be noted or annotated
in the Land Register.
Where an undertaking is registered in the Public Register un-
der a firm name or where an asset forming part of the trust prop-
erty is registered in another register, such as the Patent Register or
similar, then, in the absence of a provision to the contrary in the
trust instrument, the said undertaking or asset shall be specifically
described as trust property in the Public Register upon applica-
tion by participants.
Where third parties have acquired from the trustee property or
rights which they knew were trust property and the trustee was
not entitled to dispose of such property or rights, the settlor, a co-
trustee or a beneficiary or, finally, a trustee appointed by the
Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice may, alone or as joint
litigant with others, claim the surrender of such assets or take
action on grounds of unjust enrichment for the benefit of the trust
assets.
A debtor shall acknowledge that a claim forms part of the trust
property only after receiving notification to this effect
Where claims are assigned by the settlor or a third party acting
on his behalf to the trustee, the debtor, in the absence of provi-
sions to the contrary in the trust instrument, cannot raise any
objections he is entitled to raise against the trustee, but all the
objections he is or was entitled to raise against the settlor.
2)

1) Art. 911 para. 4 inserted by the law dated 10 April, 1928, concerning the trust
enterprise, LGBl. 1928. No. 6.
2) Art. 912 para. 5 and Art. 913 para. 2 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980,
LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
2. Specific trust property

– 182 –
Art. 913
Unless the trust instrument determines to the contrary, the
trustee, if he is required to invest trust assets, shall deposit them
with the Liechtensteinische Landesbank and/or invest them in
securities issued by this bank or in bonds or in unbonded claims
for which Liechtenstein municipalities guarantee the payment of
interest or in loans to Liechtenstein municipalities or in mortgages
within the limits prescribed for mortgages.
The investment of trust assets in the acquisition of real estate
or the establishment of homesteads or participation in undertak-
ings is permitted only provided the trust instrument makes provi-
sion for or allows this or if the judge gives permission in extraju-
dicial proceedings and if at the same time the regulations
concerning mortmain are not circumvented.
1)
By way of an exception, also in other cases where there are
important reasons and provided the trust instrument does not
determine to the contrary, the trust property, or individual parts
thereof may, with the assent of the Princely Liechtenstein Court
of Justice in extrajudicial proceedings, also be invested in other
securities or in another manner.
These restrictions shall not apply to trusts which have prop-
erty belonging to persons or legal entities or firms domiciled
abroad (domiciliary trusts)
Art. 914
The creditors of the settlor or his successors in title may only
lodge a claim against the trust property pursuant to the provisions
of the law concerning acts voidable at the instance of creditors, or
otherwise, depending on the type of donation, pursuant to the
law concerning donations or succession.
The creditors of the beneficiary may lodge a claim against the
trust property by way of levy of execution and writ or bank-
ruptcy proceedings only insofar as the beneficiary himself has
claims against the trust property and a provision concerning the

1) Art. 912 para. 5 and Art. 913 para. 2 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980,
LGBl. 1980, No. 39
3. Authorised
trust invest-
ments
4. Execution and
bankruptcy
a. Creditors of
the settlor and
beneficiaries

– 183 –
prohibition of such withdrawal, as in the case of family founda-
tions, does not exist.
If at the same time the beneficiary is also a trustee, the fore-
going regulations shall apply analogously.
Art. 915
In injunction proceedings or in the case of levy of execution
and writ against or bankruptcy of the trustee, the trust property
shall be regarded as separate property and the trustee’s creditors
shall therefore have no right of claim against the trust property
where the trustee’s remuneration and claims for compensation are
not involved.
Where the trust property is comprised of real estate, movables
or other separable assets, it shall be separated as far as the circum-
stances permit and passed to the successor trustee, appointed in
the normal manner or judicially. The Princely Liechtenstein
Court of Justice shall issue the necessary orders concerning such
transfers, e.g., entries in Public Register ex officio.
Where the trust property is mixed with the debtor’s assets to
such an extent that an immediate official separation is not possi-
ble, the separation shall be undertaken by the Princely Liechten-
stein Court of Justice as soon as possible.
Where separation is not possible during the course of levy of
execution and writ and bankruptcy proceedings, a claim for res-
titution of the trust property shall take precedence over all other
creditors and if there is more than one settlor and/or entitled
beneficiary, they shall rank equally among themselves.
Where the trust instrument does not determine to the contrary
the settlor or his successor in title, the co-trustee or beneficiary
may claim individually or as joint litigants against the trustee or
the bankrupt’s estate for separation or compensation and they
shall be entitled to examine all the bankrupt’s books and records.
Within a period of time determined by the Court, the credi-
tors of the trustee may, for their part, contest by recourse to the
law the claims for separation and compensation insofar as these
are unjustified, in whole or in part; in particular, they may assert
b. Creditors of
the trustee

– 184 –
that a mixed trust exists and for this reason their debtor may have
a partial claim against the trust property for money, but not for
other assets.
Art. 916
The trustee is personally liable without limitation, jointly and
severally with possible co-trustees, for the debts incurred by him
on behalf of the trust insofar as they cannot be met out of the
trust property. However, unless the trust instrument determines
otherwise, the trustee shall have a right of recourse against the
settlor and, where there are grounds for avoidance or the prereq-
uisites exist for a case for unjust enrichment, against the benefici-
ary. A liability on the part of the trustee and a right of recourse
only exists, however, if it cannot be proved that the third party
was not acting in the belief that a liability went beyond the
amount of the trust property.
1)… 2)
Where a trustee participates in a firm or legal entity, the trus-
tee’s creditors may have a claim against him only to the extent
permitted by the regulations relating to the undertaking con-
cerned.
3)
The trust property may be subject to separate bankruptcy pro-
ceedings pursuant to the regulations of the law on bankruptcy, in
which case the creditors of the trust property may, if they are not
fully satisfied, claim compensation for loss from the trustee inso-
far as such claims are not excluded pursuant to the foregoing
paragraphs.
Art. 917
The settlor may transfer any parts of his assets on trust to a
trustee appointed by him by means of a trust agreement, unilat-
eral trust instrument, testament or articles and subject to the

1) Art. 916 para. 1 and 3 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
2) Art. 916 para. 2 repealed by the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.3) Art. 916 para. 1 and 3 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
c. Creditors of
the trust prop-
ert
y
III. Rights and
duties of the
settlor
1. Ri
ghts

– 185 –
mandatory provisions of the law he may define the precise terms
of the trust. In particular, he may make provision for the trust
property, under certain conditions or after a certain period of
time, to revert to him or his successors in title or to devolve upon
third parties such as foundations or establishments.
He may draw up the conditions in the instrument according to
which a trustee appointed by him may be removed and possible
future trustees may be appointed.
Furthermore, he may specify conditions according to which a
beneficiary named in the trust instrument shall be excluded and
another nominated in his place and may state the conditions on
which trust property shall pass to other beneficiaries in the event
of death or exclusion of beneficiaries or similar.
Where the disposition provides for an estate in fee-tail (fidei-
commissum), it may not contravene the mandatory provisions
relating thereto.
Art. 918
The settlor may not draw up conditions which bind the trustee
to continous instructions of the settlor.
Where such provisions are drawn up, the relationship shall be
deemed to be a normal mandate within the intendment of the
Code of Obligations, unless the circumstances indicate a different
relationship such as, in particular, an agreement for service.
When the trustee executes the trust agreement or upon his ac-
ceptance of the trusteeship on the basis of a different trust instru-
ment, the settlor shall be bound by the relevant provisions.
The trustee, however, shall not be liable to the settlor for acts
undertaken pursuant to the settlor’s instructions but in violation
of the provisions of the trust.
In the case of proceedings concerning trust property, the
settlor may only be heard as a party and not as a witness and the
objection of res judicata shall apply both for and against the
settlor and his successors in title.
1)

1) Art. 918 para. 5 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
2. Duties and
other functions

– 186 –
Art. 919
After the agreement has been concluded, the trustee may re-
quire the settlor to comply with the said agreement, unless the
trust instrument determines otherwise.
Unless the trust instrument or the special circumstances de-
termine otherwise, the trustee may, after having accepted the
trusteeship, demand that the settlor or other legally bound third
parties, such as heirs or similar, comply with the terms of the trust
agreement.
Subject to his obligations pursuant to the provisions of the
trust instrument, the trustee shall be entitled to dispose of the
trust property in the same manner as an independent holder of
rights and duties as, for instance, an owner, a creditor, a member
or governing body of a legal entity or partnership or similar entity
and he may represent the trust before the authorities in his own
name as a party to an action in any capacity including that of an
intervener participant, co-summoned person. The trustee may
also administer and exercise the pertinent rights against all third
parties pursuant to the trust instrument and, insofar as this is
necessary, convert the trust property into cash and reinvest same
unless the purpose of the trust determines otherwise.
Provided the trust instrument does not determine otherwise,
the trustee shall be empowered to advance to a beneficiary an
appropriate part of the property which will subsequently devolve
upon him.
Insofar as obligations under the trust do not require fulfilment
by the trustee personally, the trustee may delegate all acts of ad-
ministration to third parties.
If the trustee is in doubt concerning the admissibility or ap-
propriateness of an act of administration or a disposition of the
trust property or unusual acts which create obligations at the
expense of the trust or if, in the case of co-trustees, one of these
refuses to cooperate, he shall, if necessary, appeal for binding
information to the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice in ex-
trajudicial proceedings and the Court may call in suitable persons
to assist in the legal findings.
Pursuant to the regulations concerning the administration of
companies with legal personality, the trustee has a right to request
IV. Rights and
duties of the
trustee
1. Rights
a. In
general

– 187 –
discharge relating to his activity pursuant to the last two para-
graphs of the following Article.
Art. 920
The trustee is entitled to claim reimbursement for all necessary
expenses and costs incurred by him in the interest of the trust.
The trustee is also entitled to be indemnified against damage re-
sulting from the trust property, to be released from obligations
entered into on behalf of the trust or otherwise incurred and,
furthermore, to appropriate remuneration for his services, insofar
as the trust instrument or another legal relationship does not de-
termine otherwise.
The trustee may claim interest at the rate which is usual in the
country on expenses or costs, calculated from the day on which
such expenses or costs were incurred.
In the absence of any provision to the contrary contained in
the trust instrument or any conclusions to the contrary which
could be drawn from the legal relationship between the trustee
and the settlor, any claim shall be made in the first place against
the settlor and then against the beneficiary entitled to the trust
property or the income therefrom.
Alternatively, the claims may be made against the trust prop-
erty direct, against the designation pursuant to the trust deed, or
against the persons liable as mentioned in the previous para-
graph.
1)
Art. 921
Without prejudice to his right to bring a claim in contentious
proceedings, the trustee may petition the Princely Liechtenstein
Court of Justice to determine the remuneration for his services in
extrajudicial proceedings after hearing the participating parties.
He may be reimbursed from the trust property in preference
to the beneficiaries and for this he may set off the claims he may
have against the settlor or beneficiary and may assert a lien on the
assets of the trust property.

1) Art. 920 para. 4 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
b. Indemnifica-
tion, trustee
fees, etc.
aa. Claims
bb. Enforcement

– 188 –
Art. 922
The trustee shall be under obligation to comply with the pro-
visions of the trust instrument and the regulations of this law
which are not in contradiction with the said provisions of the
trust instrument, to preserve and administer the trust property
with the care of a prudent business man and where customary or
appropriate he shall insure the trust property against risk.
The trustee may not dispose of the trust property in a manner
which could affect adversely or frustrate the purpose of the trust.
In the absence of provisions to the contrary or unless an emer-
gency requires urgent measures, co-trustees must act jointly (col-
lectively).
Trustees who conduct a business of deposit banking must
strictly segregate trust property from other assets, insofar as the
trust relationship does not determine otherwise (trust deposits).
Special records must be kept by persons whose business it is to
act as trustees.
Art. 923
If an inventory has not already been prepared, the trustee must
draw up an inventory of the assets and liabilities of the trust and
the said inventory must be revised annually.
He is required to render accounts annually and to provide in-
formation at any time concerning the state of the trust affairs to
the audit authority provided for in the trust instrument or, in the
absence of such audit authority to the settlor or, if the settlor
should have died or be otherwise unavailable, to the beneficiary
who has a right of claim and in the absence of such beneficiary to
the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice, unless the circum-
stances necessitate a deviation as, for instance, in the case of
banking trusts, small trusts or similar.
Where the entitled beneficiary is a partnership or a legal entity
the accounts must be submitted and the information disclosed to
the partner representing the partnership or to the governing bod-
ies in the case of a legal entity.
Where the beneficiary (ies) is (are) not of age, legally inca-
pacitated, insane or mentally deficient, or the rendering of ac-
2. Duties of the
trustee
a. In
general
b. Inventory of
assets and lia-
bilities and
the rendering
of accounts

– 189 –
counts is impractible for any other reason, the trustee shall submit
the accounts to the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice.
The trust instrument may also provide for the submission of
accounts in another manner or it may release the trustee from
such requirement.
If the trust property is comprised of an undertaking which is
subject to the provisions of this law concerning commercial ac-
counting, the trustee shall be required to comply with such provi-
sions.
Unless the trust instrument determines otherwise, the judge in
extrajudicial proceedings may for important reasons order an
official audit upon application by an entitled participant. The
result of such audit shall be submitted to the Court as in the case
of legal entities.
Art. 924
Where the trustee is in breach of the provisions of the trust in-
strument or of those of this title otherwise relevant (breach of
trust), he shall be personally liable to the settlor with his entire
assets or, where the settlor is no longer present, to the beneficiary,
pursuant to the principles of the law of contract. The third party
acting in bad faith, however, shall be liable for damages to the
settlor and to the beneficiary pursuant to the regulations relating
to tortious acts, but only insofar as they did not themselves cause
the breach.
In the case of a breach of trust, co-trustees shall be liable
jointly and severally, without limit, if the trust instrument does
not determine otherwise, unless they can prove that they acted
with the care of a prudent businessman in the supervision of the
co-trustee and with reservation of their right of recourse against
the guilty party.
With reservation of the right of recourse or insofar as it does
not result otherwise owing to the circumstances of the particular
trust, the trustee shall be liable for the acts and omissions of a
third party to whom he has delegated the performance of transac-
tions on behalf of the trust or engaged in any other way as, for
instance, an authorised signatory, authorised agent and similar.
c. Responsibility
aa. Breach of trust,
etc.

– 190 –
Art. 925
In the absence of a provision to the contrary in the trust in-
strument and with the exception of his claims for expenses and
compensation, the trustee is not entitled to take any advantages
from the trust.
Where the trust instrument does not make provision other-
wise, the trustee is therefore only entitled to conclude transac-
tions with the trust property on his own account as, for example,
renting or leasing for himself, using money of the trust property
for his own business purposes, making loans to himself, appropri-
ating assets of the trust property for his own account or giving it
to close relatives or friends, insofar as the transactions in question
do not go beyond the scope of orderly administration.
Any other transaction which cannot be rescinded renders the
trustee liable for damages to the settlor or the beneficiary subject
to a right of claim against a third party acting in bad faith.
Where it becomes apparent that the trustee has mixed trust
property money with his own money, he must pay interest on
these monies at one and a half times the normal domestic rate and,
if he has used these moneys profitably in business transactions, he
must render account of such business and provide information
and deliver up in full the share of the profit accruing to the trust
property. Where the amount of profit cannot be determined, the
trustee must also pay interest on such monies at a higher rate,
depending on the circumstances.
Unless the trust instrument determines otherwise, the claims
referred to in the foregoing may be brought by the settlor or, if
the settlor is no longer alive or is otherwise unable to act, by the
beneficiary and, if a beneficiary does not take action, by a trustee
appointed by the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice for the
benefit of the trust.
Art. 926
The regulations of the law concerning mandates shall be ap-
plied analogously to the legal relationship between the settlor and
the trustee insofar as deviations do not result from the provisions
of this title or from the particular purpose of the trust or unless
bb. Transaction in
favour of the
trustee
3. Reference, etc.

– 191 –
the regulations of another legal relationship apply supplementally
as, for instance, in the case of a publishing contract, a service
contract, a partnership or a consignment contract.
The regulations concerning modifications to the organisation
and the purpose in the case of family foundations shall apply to
trusts analogously.
Where the trustee gives a guarantee or surety for the fulfilment
of his duties, the regulations concerning guarantees shall also
apply.
During the existence of the trust, the statute of limitation and
period of usucaption does not operate in favour of the trustee
with regard to the trust property.
Art. 927
The beneficiary is entitled to demand execution of the provi-
sions of the trust where the trust instrument does not determine
otherwise or insofar as such execution is left to the absolute dis-
cretion of the trustee with regard to certain or all of the benefici-
aries.
Each beneficiary entitled to claim who considers his rights or
interests prejudiced by a disposition or an act of administration of
the trustee may, in the absence of a provision to the contrary in
the trust instrument, petition the Princely Liechtenstein Court of
Justice to order in extrajudicial proceedings that the fault be
remedied.
Where an application to the Princely Liechtenstein Court of
Justice is unjustified, the beneficiary shall be liable to the trustee
for costs and damages pursuant to the regulation concerning tor-
tious acts.
Whether and to what extent a person is a beneficiary must be
established in contentious proceedings before the Court insofar as
the question should not be decided as a preliminary or interposed
question in other proceedings.
As in the case of establishments, the judge may, in public cita-
tion proceedings, require unknown beneficiaries to present their
claims.
V. Position of the
beneficiary
1. In
general

– 192 –
The settlor may also be one of the beneficiaries of the trust;
the trustee, however, may not be the sole beneficiary as, for ex-
ample, in the case of conditions mentioned in a will, in favour of
the testator, to be carried out after his death.
1
In the case of non-profit making or similar trusts where there
are no entitled beneficiaries and the trust instrument does not
determine otherwise, the claims conceded to the entitled benefici-
aries in the case of other trusts may be exercised by the represen-
tative of public law upon application or ex officio at the expense
of the trust property or, where there is fault, at the expense of the
party in default.
1)
Art. 928
The trust instrument may provide that trust certificates for the
trust property shall be issued to the beneficiaries as securities.
Insofar as the trust instrument does not determine to the con-
trary or it does not result otherwise from the nature of the trust
as, for instance, in the case of trust certificates which only grant
membership rights, the certificates provide the beneficiary with a
creditor’s right to the trust property, such as the right to partici-
pate in the income and the liquidation surplus.
In the absence of provisions to the contrary, the trust certi-
ficates shall be transferable in the same way as registered shares
and the trustee must keep a register similar to a register of share-
holders.
The names of the trustee and the beneficiaries shall be stated in
detail on the trust certificate which shall also refer to the trust
instrument and the law.
The law concerning the rights of bond holders shall also apply
to the rights of the owners of trust certificates, with the provision
that resolutions of the beneficiaries shall be passed with a simple
majority of all the certificates, unless at the time of issue the
wording of the certificates provides otherwise.

1) Art. 927 para. 6 and 7 inserted by the law dated 10 April, 1928, concerning the
trust enterprise, LGBl. 1928, No. 6, redrafted by the law dated 15 April, 1980,
LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
2. Trust certificate

– 193 –
The special provisions concerning trust certificates as in the
case of legal entities and partnership shall be reserved and the
foregoing provisions shall be applied supplementally.
1)
Art. 929
The supervisory authority for trusts registered in the Public
Register is the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice except in
the case of family trusts or where another office is designated in
the trust instrument or a supervisory authority is excluded or, at
the discretion of the Court, such supervision is not necessary or is
excluded by the circumstances.
1)
The Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice shall officiate in
this capacity in extrajudicial proceedings and may from time to at
its discretion exercise control over the existence and administra-
tion of the trust property and shall keep a record (Trust Register)
of the trusts subject to its supervision.
Where a trustee fails to carry out his duties, the Princely
Liechtenstein Court of Justice in extrajudicial proceedings may,
on application of a trustee or a beneficiary or ex officio, after
giving the participants an opportunity to be heard and after pre-
vious warning, or without hearing or warning where there are
important reasons in the trust relationship, itself remove the
trustee from office and order the appointment of another trustee
or itself appoint such a trustee, subject to a right of appeal against
the decision.
Claims for damages brought by the participants against the
trustee as well as those brought by the trustee against the partici-
pants and his claim against the participants on grounds of moral
damages are reserved.

1) Art. 928 para. 6, marginal note to Art. 929 and Art. 929 para. 1 in the version of
the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
D. Supervision and
other measures
concerning
trusts
1)

– 194 –
Art. 930
The law of the state which is specified in the trust deed shall
apply to the trust relationship. If no express choice of law is ap-
parent, the law of the state in which the trustee or the majority of
the trustees have their usual residence or domicile and subsidiarly
the law of the state in which the trustee functions are effectively
exercised shall be applicable to the trust relationship.
1)
Trusts which are not subject to Liechtenstein law may not
claim a better legal position than domestic trusts.
Art. 931
Trusts pursuant to foreign law may be created in Liechtenstein
provided:
1. That as far as necessary in the individual case the relationship
between the settlor, trustee and beneficiaries is subject to the
trust regulations of the foreign law which must be included in
detail in the trust instrument and that the relationship between
the trust and third parties shall be subject to Liechtenstein law,
2. that a mandatory court of arbitration shall decide in disputes
between settlor, trustee and beneficiary.
2)
Art. 932
2)
The statutory regulations relating to the conducting of a trus-
teeship business are reserved.

1) Art. 930 para. 1 in the version of the law dated 30. October 1996, LGBl. 1997,
No. 19
2) Art. 931 No. 2 and Art. 932 in the version of the law dated 15. April, 1980, LGBl.
1980, No. 39.
E. International
law and trusts
under foreign
law
I. International
law
II. Trusts under
forei
gn law
F. Professional
trustee

– 195 –
Second Section
The Trust Enterprise 1)
(The Business Trust) 1)
Art. 932a
1)
A trust enterprise (a business trust) may be formed and oper-
ated pursuant to the following regulations:
§ 1
A trust enterprise as a real business trust pursuant to the law is
an undertaking managed or further operated on the basis of the
trust articles by one or several trustees (as fiduciary owners), un-
der their own name or company name which, legally autono-
mous, pursues organised, economic or other objects and is en-
dowed with its own assets, without legal personality, whose
liability shall be pursuant to this law (trust enterprise without
legal personality). The said trust enterprise does not have either
character under public law or legal form under private law.

1) This section of the PGR (Persons and Companies Act) with its article 932a, which
comprises §§ 1 to 170 of the Law concerning the Trust Enterprise, was inserted
by:
Law dated 10 April, 1928 concerning the Trust Enterprise (and other amendments
of the Persons and Companies Act dated 19 February (corrrect: 20th January)
1926, No. 4).
The wording is as follows:
“I give my approval to the resolution based on the Articles 2, 14 and 66 para. 1 of
the constitution passed by the Diet at its meeting held on 17th February, 1928:
The following shall be inserted after the title of the sixteenth heading concerning:
“The Trust (das Salmannenrecht)”:
The insertion of the title of Art. 897 et seq. PGR is taken into consideration in the
text of the PGR.
“The following shall be inserted after Art. 932 of the Persons and Companies Act:
The supplement to the PGR is taken into consideration in the text.
The law was issued on 18 June 1928, as LGBl. 1928, No. 6.
A. In general
I. Special trust
enterprises
1. Definition
a. Trust enter-
prises without
and with legal
personalit y

– 196 –
Where with analogous application of the foregoing paragraph
an undertaking is created as a trust enterprise whose legal person-
ality is expressly stated in the trust articles (formation deed),
which are drawn up pursuant to the regulations of this law, the
provisions concerning the real business trust shall be applicable
additionally to this non-real trust enterprise, in particular, that
relating to liability (“trust enterprise with legal personality”).
§ 2
Several trust enterprises pursuant to this law, with the same or
different participants, may be combined in the same trust articles
in such a manner that each individual trust is legally independent
within itself, as a division, and the following regulations of the
law concerning trust enterprises, particularly those relating to
liability, registration or notification to the Public Register Office
and, supplementally, that concerning legal entities with divisions
shall be applied accordingly to the individual divisions (“Trust
Enterprise with Divisions”).
In addition, a trust enterprise may, pursuant to the regulations
concerning trust enterprises in general, take over as trustee other
trusts operated under a particular name or company name, with-
out the previously mentioned kinds of structure, subject to the
proviso that the trust assets of the individual trust transferred to
the trust enterprise or one of its divisions shall be solely liable for
the obligations arising from the transactions of this trust and in
legal relations the trust enterprise shall also act for these trusts
which shall be quoted under their name or the name of their
company.
In the absence of a provision to the contrary in the trust arti-
cles, the formation of a “Trust Enterprise Without Legal Person-
ality” and without divisions, referred to in the following in ab-
breviated form as trust enterprise, shall be presumed to be
incontestable.
b. With Divisions,
trust funds or
similar

– 197 –
§ 3
A trust enterprise may be formed for any defined, specific,
reasonable and possible object which is not unlawful, immoral or
dangerous to the state, in particular also for the investment of
assets, the distribution of income, the integration of undertakings
by the transfer of shares on trust or for acquisition, for family
welfare, non-profit making, charitable, other personal, non-
personal or similar objects.
In the case of the exclusion or limitation of the liability of the
participants, a fiduciary undertaking which pursues commercial
activities may be operated only as a trust enterprise, unless an-
other form of undertaking, with obligation to register, pursuant
to the regulations concerning the trusts in general or this law,
were chosen, or an exclusion of the liability or its limitation were
negotiated in each case with the third party.
1)
Trust enterprises whose object is family welfare or is non-
profit making or charitable in character may, in particular, erect
homesteads of all kinds for beneficiaries.
When a trust enterprise is formed for an object other than the
operation of a business (undertaking) in accordance with com-
mercial principles as, for example, the object of satisfying credi-
tors without the pursuit of commercial activities, the special
regulations which may be applicable and the regulations con-
cerning trusts in general shall remain reserved.
§ 4
2)
§ 5
The general regulations concerning legal entities and in par-
ticular those relating to legal personality shall be applied supple-
mentally and appropriately to the trust enterprise, without and
with legal personality, insofar as possible deviations do not result

1) § 3 para. 2 in the version of the law dated 15 April 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.2) § 4 Repealed by the law dated 15 April 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
2. Purpose or
ob ject
II. Other fiduciary
undertakin
gs
III. Reference, etc.

– 198 –
from the absence of membership, from the nature of the trust
enterprise and from the law.
The provisions concerning companies with legal personality
whose objects are trade, manufacturing or another commercial
activity shall be applied accordingly, pursuant to the foregoing
paragraph, in particular to trust enterprises which pursue com-
mercial activities.
The right and the obligation to register facts and circumstances
in the Public Register as Trust Register as well as the entry and
their announcement shall conform supplementally with the
regulations drawn up for establishments.
Insofar as deviations do not result from the provisions of the
law, the remaining regulations concerning trusts in general shall
be applicable subject to the proviso that in place of the Court of
Justice in extrajudicial proceedings, the Register Office shall act in
the same proceedings.
When the Register Office is competent and, pursuant to the
regulations, it is not required to proceed by way of the Public
Register, those regulations concerning extrajudicial proceedings
shall be applied supplementally, subject to the proviso that deci-
sions may be referred to the Court of Justice or the higher in-
stances.
In official proceedings, a trust enterprise may be designated as
a party in the same manner as a legal entity which is represented
by its administration or in such a manner that the managing trus-
tees as such are designated by their names, first names and places
of residence, or with company name and domicile, in their capac-
ity as trustees of the undertaking.
§ 6
Insofar as exceptions are not allowed for trust enterprises pur-
suant to foreign law or approved foreign trust enterprises or oth-
erwise, regulations of the law whose application is mandatory by
virtue of the law or otherwise shall take precedence over a devi-
ating trust instrument.
IV. Relationship of
law and trust
instrument

– 199 –
Other legal provisions shall be applicable only in the absence
of deviating regulation of the trust instrument.
With reservation of compensation for damages or other legal
consequences against the persons acting, the intended legal form
for a trust enterprise may be acquired by entry in the Trust Reg-
ister, even though the prerequisites for this did not exist.
Otherwise, the defectiveness of a provision which contradicts
the mandatory regulations of the law is remedied by entry only if
it is provided by law.
Where nothing else is established by the law, the expression
trust instrument shall be understood to mean the trust deed, trust
articles, regulations, internal regulations (by-articles) or the like
and the expression trust articles shall be deemed to mean also the
trust declaration or the trust formation document for a trust en-
terprise.
§ 7
1)
All trust enterprises come into existence only upon entry in
the Public Register as Trust Register.
The provisions concerning formation under the general regu-
lations concerning the legal entity shall be applied supplementally
to the formation of a trust enterprise if the law does not deter-
mine otherwise.
§ 8
Where action is taken on behalf of the trust enterprise before
its existence, the persons acting shall, insofar as the regulations
concerning trusts in general do not determine otherwise, be liable
by virtue of the law towards bona fide third persons, unrestrict-
edly, jointly and severally, subject to the right of recourse of the
persons who acted to the persons who caused them to act in this
capacity and to the claims for unjustified enrichment against the
trust enterprise coming into existence later.

1) § 7 and marginal notes to § 9 in the version of the law dated 15 April 1980, LGBl.
1980, No. 39.
B. Existence
I. Trust Register
1. Entr
y
2. The absence of
these

– 200 –
Where a person has taken over assets for the objects of a trust
enterprise before the said trust enterprise has come into existence
and it comes to light that the trust enterprise is invalid or has not
materialised, the said person shall, pursuant to the regulations
concerning trusts in general and with reservation of personal
claims, nevertheless be treated as an implied trustee with regard to
the receipt of the assets, but in particular relating to the rendering
of account and the provision of information.
The said person shall be required to effect restitution plus legal
interest or other appropriate reimbursement to the settlors or,
pursuant to the underlying legal relationship, to those persons
who placed the assets at the disposal of the said person or, insofar
as the law does not determine to the contrary, to their successors
in title or otherwise to surrender the said assets to the trust enter-
prise subsequently formed.
§ 9
The trust articles (trust declaration) may be included in the
deed itself, drawn up pursuant to the regulations concerning
trusts in general, or in a document provided or admitted by this
which, in its execution, is specifically drawn up and signed with
certified signature by the settlor and the trustee or a third person
or by one or the other.
1)
The trust articles shall state:
1. Name, domicile, duration and objects of the trust enterprise
and the express designation as “trust enterprise”, “trust foun-
dation”, “business trust”, or a similar expression.
1. The trust fund and, possibly, its procurement and the indi-
vidual assets, if necessary at a fair and reasonable estimated
value, in the articles themselves or in one of the itemised lists
accompanying the said articles, with certified signature, with
the assurance that the data are correct.
3. Number and form of appointment of the trustees as well as a
statement concerning the manner of future appointment of
trustees in cases of withdrawal for any reason whatsoever un-

1) § 9 para. 1 in the version of the law dated the 15th April, 1980, LGB1, No. 39.
3. Trust articles
a. Necessary
content

– 201 –
less, following the withdrawal of the first trustees or certain of
these, it were required that dissolution of the undertaking
should take place, finally
4. the form of notification to third persons.
If not stated otherwise in the foregoing statements, or Nos. 3
and 4 are not concerned, they shall be valid with essentially the
same effect as the provisions concerning voidability proceedings
under the general regulations concerning legal entities.
1)
§ 10
Pursuant to this law the trust articles may, moreover, contain
further statements regarding other trusts or divisions, the gov-
erning bodies, in particular the appointment of a supervisory or
audit authority, the detailed regulation of the beneficial interest or
similar, or the further ruling may be reserved for a regulation
(internal regulation, i.e. by-article) provided in the said trust
articles.
The implementing provisions contained in the trust articles or
in the regulations or the like, which have been drawn up without
the assent of the settlor, shall not contradict the trust deed or the
regulations drawn up by the latter; otherwise, subject to the
claims of the bona fide third parties, the contradicting provisions
shall be invalid, if the Register Office does not permit an excep-
tion for important reasons.
§ 11
Where in a disposition mortis causa the formation of a trust
enterprise is provided, with instructions concerning the object
and the amount of trust fund, but without other important in-
structions, or where the settlor dies after the trust deed has been
drawn up but before the trust articles have been prepared and
nobody else, as, for example, the executor or the administrator is

1§ 9 para. 4 repealed by the law dated 15 April 1980, LBGl. 1980, No. 39.
b. Further state-
ments and im-
plementing
provisions
4. Formation in
the absence of
the settlor
a. In general
aa. After the death
of the settlor

– 202 –
under obligation to draw up and implement the trust articles, it is
necessary, with reservation of the rights of the heirs and the
creditors, for the heirs, possibly the legatees, executors or admin-
istrators or, upon application of others legally interested or in the
case of non-profit making, charitable or similar objects, the repre-
sentative of public law, after hearing those who are legally inter-
ested, at the expense of the estate, to initiate the drawing up of
appropriate trust articles, the transfer of the assets to the enter-
prise, the appointment of the trustees and, if necessary, the entry
and/or notification.
Upon application of those who are legally interested, the Reg-
ister Office may, after hearing other interested parties, direct that
the trust enterprise be formed.
The formation shall be dropped in the event that the settlor or
his estate is over-indebted or insolvent and the settlor personally
has not received a corresponding contribution from others for the
trust fund to be donated.
These provisions shall also be valid accordingly if, after the
drawing up of a trust deed which directs the formation of a trust
enterprise with instructions concerning object and trust fund by
means of a transaction inter vivos, the settlors or one of the set-
tlors die or become incapable of acting before the implementation
of the trust deed, unless the living settlor or the heirs, executors or
the like were to withdraw from the trust transaction in an admis-
sible manner, insofar as a trust enterprise with a non-profit mak-
ing, charitable or similar object is not involved.
§ 12
Upon the termination of a firm or a legal entity, the liquida-
tors or possibly the Register Office shall be under obligation,
under the same preconditions and with the same measures as in
the case of a disposition mortis causa, concerning the formation of
a trust enterprise at the expense of the liquidation assets, in the
event that such an enterprise shall be formed from the said liqui-
dation assets pursuant to the company agreement, the articles or
the like of the dissolved firm or legal entity.
bb. Upon the
termination of
companies or
le
gal entities

– 203 –
§ 13
Where a trust in general exists, the trustees, after the demise of
the settlor or after the termination of the fiduciary company or
legal entity, notwithstanding the liability for the obligations to-
wards third parties up to the time of conversion, shall be empow-
ered by virtue of the law, for the purpose of excluding or limiting
their liability, to convert this trust into a trust enterprise with or
without legal personality, in conformity with the trust deed if at
all possible, and to undertake at its expense all the lawful acts
necessary for this.
Where pursuant to the trust deed a trust enterprise is formed
for the members of a family or a trust enterprise is formed other-
wise, in favour of certain third parties and these waive the forma-
tion of the trust enterprise, whether this be with or without com-
pensation, the formation shall be dropped in the absence of
disposition to the contrary.
In this instance, the regulations concerning the distribution of
assets in the case of liquidation shall be applied accordingly in the
absence of any other directive in the trust deed or by the persons
appointed as entitled beneficiaries.
§ 14
Before the formation of a trust enterprise by the Register
Office in extrajudicial proceedings, those having a legal interest in
the formation and in particular those upon whom the assets shall
devolve in the event of the trust enterprise not materialising may
be heard by the Register Office and they shall have the right of
complaint against the formation and, if the occasion arises, the
right of rescission by way of legal proceedings.
The regulations concerning the summoning of beneficiaries for
consultation shall also be supplementally applicable to the sum-
moning of those legally interested in the formation procedure
provided for here.
Where a decision concerning a formation or a trust deed is
contested, the formation shall be suspended until the relevant
decision permitting the formation becomes final and absolute.
cc. Legal power of
authorit y
b. Formation procedure

– 204 –
§ 15
1)
The application for the entry of the trust enterprise in the
Public Register as Trust Register must in all cases be undertaken
by at least one trustee or one person who participated in the for-
mation. Should the Register Office undertake the formation of
the trust enterprise entry in the Public Register shall ensue
through official channels.
The application for entry in the Public Register, the entry and
the notification shall contain:
1. Name, domicile, duration and objects of the enterprise,
2. the amount of the trust fund or a statement of its estimated
value in the event that it does not exist in cash and, if it is not
fully paid in, a statement as to when the outstanding amounts
are to be paid,
3. the names, first names, profession and place of residence or the
company name and domicile of the trustees who will exercise
the trust authority,
4. a statement concerning the form of notices to third parties.
The application shall be accompanied by an authentic copy or
a certified copy of the trust articles or possibly also a certified
excerpt of the latter, which must quote that content of the trust
articles which is required for entry.
The regulations concerning notification under the general
regulations concerning legal entities shall be applied accordingly.
§ 16
Each amendment of the facts and relationships which are noti-
fiable or subject to obligation to inform shall in each case be reg-
istered or notified to the Register Office at a later date by the
managing trustees and, if necessary, the trust articles or a certified
excerpt shall be enclosed.
In the absence of managing trustees, the Register Office may
proceed upon notification by participants or of its own accord,
pursuant to the regulations concerning the Public Register.

1) § 15 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980 LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
II. Application,
entry and noti-
fication or
advertisement
1. Obligation,
right and con-
tent
2. Amendments
and other
declarations

– 205 –
The Government may, by way of ordinance, order the regis-
tration, entry, notification or announcement of further facts and
relationships or the deposition of documents relating to the for-
mation or amendment or cancellation of the trust enterprise.
§ 17
In addition to the provisions of this law the relevant provi-
sions under the general regulation concerning the legal entities
and those concerning trusts in general shall apply analogously to
the termination.
In particular, a dissolution or cancellation takes place:
1. As the result of bankruptcy on grounds of insolvency or over-
indebtedness as well as by means of cancellation proceedings
on grounds of the objects being unlawful, immoral or consti-
tuting a danger to the state or on grounds of activity consti-
tuting a danger to the state and by means of voidability pro-
ceedings on grounds of essential defects in the trust articles
pursuant to the rules drawn up according to this law and to
the rules under the general regulations concerning legal enti-
ties,
2. where the trust deed does not determine otherwise, by the
assent of all the trustees, beneficiaries and possibly all the en-
titled reversioners to an application for dissolution and if, pur-
suant to the trust deed, the beneficial interest has been ac-
quired without valuable consideration, also with the assent of
the settlor personally or the settlor’s direct universal succes-
sors in title, which assent may, for important reasons, be
granted by the Register Office,
3. after the expiration of a maximum fixed period which may be
determined by order of the Government with analogous appli-
cation of the regulations concerning the time limit of inheri-
tance by substitution for all or individual kinds of trusts
whose objects are not non-profit making or charitable,
4. where the law or the trust instrument does not determine oth-
erwise, pursuant to the rules drawn up for the cancellation of a
foundation.
C. Termination
(dissolution
and cancella-
tion)
I. In
general

– 206 –
In the case stated under 2., the unknown or uncertain entitled
beneficiaries or reversioners shall be summoned by public citation
pursuant to the regulations concerning the determination of
beneficiaries and the Register Office, pursuant to the regulations
of the Code of Civil Procedure concerning the proceedings trus-
tee, shall appoint a special process administrator to represent
them, at the applicants’ expense, who may grant or refuse consent
for the unknown or uncertain beneficiaries.
The regulations concerning the amendment of the trust in-
strument, conversion or merging of trust enterprises and those
concerning the change of the governing bodies or the object by
virtue of the law or the like and the claims of a beneficiary whose
rights have been violated remain reserved pursuant to these provi-
sions.
§ 18
In the case of insolvent or over-indebted trust enterprises, the
managing trustees, unless they do not petition or have not already
petitioned for administration proceedings (settlement proceedure)
and the latter has not remained without success, must, by virtue
of the law, file a petition in bankruptcy, or otherwise bear respon-
sibility. At the same time they must terminate all further payment
and limit the conduct of business to an absolute minimum.
Where such a petition does not proceed from all the managing
trustees, those remaining shall be examined and if agreement con-
cerning the petition is not reached or timely examination is not
possible, bankruptcy proceedings shall be initiated only provided
the insolvency or over-indebtedness or the precondition for the
petition for administration proceedings can be substantiated by
prima facie evidence.
Trustees shall be liable without limit, jointly and severally, to
bona fide participants or third parties for losses arising from the
petition in bankruptcy not being filed or the administration pro-
ceedings not being applied for in good time pursuant to the fore-
going regulations.
II. Bankruptcy or
administration
proceedin gs

– 207 –
§ 19
Where the enterprise is dissolved for reasons other than bank-
ruptcy or administration proceedings, in particular also as the
result of a rescission for any reason, or no other proceedings are
provided by law, the regulations concerning liquidation in the
case of legal entities shall be applicable supplementally, in addi-
tion to the following.
Should undistributed assets still exist after the bankruptcy or
administration proceedings, liquidation shall not take place, un-
less other prerequisites concerning this exist, but the trust enter-
prise shall be continued and the relevant entries in the Trust Reg-
ister shall ensue upon application of the participants or, if need be,
ex officio.
In the case of trust enterprises without liability towards non-
participants the liquidation may be limited to the collection from
the participants of possibly necessary adjusting amounts, to the
defrayal of the costs and to the distribution or donation of the
assets to the allottees, without public notice to the creditors or
waiting until the end of the prescribed period, and to the possibly
necessary notice of cancellation.
In the case of the foregoing paragraph, the Register Office
may, however, demand that a distribution or donation list con-
cerning the assets be submitted.
Other regulations concerning the exclusion of liquidation also
remain reserved as, for example, in the case of the gradual distri-
bution of assets, conversion or merging.
§ 20
The managing trustees shall act as liquidators where the trust
instrument does not determine otherwise, or a supreme body
which may be formed by all the trustees does not pass a resolu-
tion to the contrary, or the Register Office, whether upon appli-
cation of the participants or ex officio, does not, for important
reasons, determine otherwise in extrajudicial proceedings, or pro-
vided the trust enterprise is not to be wound up, officially or un-
der official supervision.
III. Liquidation
1. In General
2. Liquidators,
time limit and
public notice to
creditors

– 208 –
After all the trust enterprise’s liabilities have been settled or
secured, the period of time after which the assets may be distrib-
uted or donated to the allottees may, with the agreement of the
Register Office, be reduced or, for important reasons, waived
completely.
The public notice to creditors may also be waived under the
same preconditions.
Upon application by the liquidators, the public notice to
creditors may ensue from the Register Office at the expense of the
trust enterprise, with the fixing of a time limit for registration and
with the warning and effect that the assets shall be distributed to
the creditors who have registered or are otherwise known and
other creditors shall remain unconsidered.
§ 21
Where pursuant to the trust instrument or the law certain
claims against the assets are conceded, the assets shall be distrib-
uted, if possible, that is, without conversion into cash, to the al-
lottees or their universal successors in title, otherwise, in the event
of the instrument being lacking or defective, the regulations con-
cerning beneficial interest shall be applied accordingly and, sup-
plementally, those concerning the application of assets in the case
of legal entities.
In the case of family trust enterprises with a special system of
succession, the allottees shall be stated for the event of the trust
enterprise being terminated or the family concerned or the cate-
gory of beneficiaries becoming extinct, otherwise the regulations
relating to entailment, concerning the accession of property to the
state, shall be applied accordingly.
With regard to the implementation of the termination and the
regulation concerning the accession of property to the state, the
representative of public law may, in case of doubt as to the pres-
ence of beneficiaries, apply to the Register Office for proceedings
to trace beneficiaries.
Where satisfaction is sought from the available assets remain-
ing undistributed after the trust enterprise has been terminated, an
allottee may not be opposed by the statutory three-year period of
limitation following the distribution or bestowal of assets.
3. Distribution of
assets

– 209 –
§ 22
The minimum trust fund must be SFr. 30’000.–
1) Provided the
trust instrument does not exclude this, the trust fund may be in-
creased by the endowment of successive, wholly or partly effected
contributions by the old or newly entering settlor against a writ-
ten declaration of membership, or reduced by gradual distribu-
tion.
Each year, at the end of a calendar year, if an increase in or a
reduction of the trust fund as such has taken place in this manner,
the managing trustees of the enterprises entered in the Trust Reg-
ister shall provide the registrar with a list of the trust fund
changes which have taken place during the year for the purpose of
correcting the entry concerned, without notification of this entry
being required.
In the event that all the trustees without restriction are liable
jointly and severally for all the obligations of the trust enterprise
pursuant to the regulations applicable to registered cooperative
societies, this provision may be included in the trust articles and
also in the application to the Trust Register in place of the infor-
mation concerning the trust fund.
§ 23
Where securities relating to the beneficial interest are issued
for payment to the trust fund, the trust articles must contain a
provision concerning this in order to avoid the consequences of
the irregular issuance of securities.
Should securities be issued below the nominal value or other-
wise in such a manner that their total issue price is not equivalent
to the total estimated value of the trust fund, this shall require the
assent of the Register Office; moreover, the regulations concern-
ing the issuance of shares below the nominal value shall be applied
accordingly.
Otherwise, the regulations concerning securities in the case of
trust beneficial interest shall be applied accordingly to the securi-
ties and their holders, in particular with regard to default.

1)§ 22 Para. 1 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
D. Trust fund
1. In general
II. Securities in
particular

– 210 –
§ 24
If the trust instrument does not determine to the contrary and
with the reservation of tortious acts or special agreements, several
settlors as such shall not be jointly and severally liable for the
obligations entered into by virtue of the formation of the trust
enterprise.
Where an individual takes over obligations respecting per-
formances in favour of the trust fund, combined with a beneficial
interest, and the transferors, but not the managing trustees as
such, know that at the time of the transfer the transferee is insol-
vent, the transferors as well as the transferee shall be jointly and
severally liable for the performance deficiency.
For claims in favour of the trust fund in the case of a trust en-
terprise whose objects within the country are generally charitable
or non-profit making, there exists a preference privilege in bank-
ruptcy proceedings which is equivalent to the remuneration, with
reservation of the right of rescission of the creditors or the heirs
and of the claim on grounds of the breach of duty to support or
of the need for support or other provisions.
If the settlors’ performances respecting the trust fund or other
funds are not completely fulfilled, the settlors shall be liable in the
case of default, notwithstanding the admissibility of provisions
concerning the appointed-date loss clause, the loss of all rights as
a beneficiary, or the like, in the manner of a debtor pursuant to
the Code of Obligations.
Otherwise, the provisions concerning statutory delay in per-
formance in the case of trust beneficial interest shall be applicable
supplementally.
§ 25
Provided the provisions concerning the trust enterprise do not
contain deviations, the regulations concerning the trust property
of trusts in general shall be applicable supplementally to trust
assets as separate property.
The rules valid for foundations shall be applicable supple-
mentally to the donation of assets before and after the creation of
the trust enterprise.
III. Liability and
default
E. Trust assets
I. In
general

– 211 –
Where under certain prerequisites the settlor has provided for
the reversion of the trust property to himself or his descendants
or for devolution upon a third party, this may take place, in the
event that the reverting or devolving trust property is a part of the
trust fund, only without prejudice to the regulations concerning
the liability of the enterprise for the obligations towards innocent
third parties (the right of reversion or devolution).
Otherwise, however, the right of reversion or devolution in
the case of real estate or limited rights in rem to such may, upon
application by participants, be annnotated or noted in the Land
Register insofar as entries, similar to Land Register entries, in
other public registers, are admissible for other pieces of property.
Otherwise, the regulations concerning the trust fund remain
reserved.
§ 26
If the law or the trust instrument does not determine other-
wise, the regulations concerning the determination of assets and
earnings in the case of establishments shall be applicable analo-
gously to the segregation of assets and yield.
Should pursuant to the trust instrument the net yield or part
thereof or assets be distributed annually or at shorter or longer
intervals to the beneficiaries as income, the managing trustees
shall, in the absence of other directives, determine at their equita-
ble discretion, taking as a basis the rules applying to an orderly
profitable trade and, supplementally, those concerning usufruct,
what shall be entered in the yield account (profit and loss ac-
count) as usufruct, charges, expenses and the like and what shall
be entered in the trust assets account including the accruals and, if
need be, the period of time between the distributions of the net
yield.
Where trust enterprises pursue commercial objects exclusively,
the distribution of income to the beneficiaries shall ensue, in the
absence of other directives, after the completion of each calendar
year on the basis of an annual balance sheet and, should doubt
exist, in equal shares which shall be determined by the managing
trustees.
II Segregation and
distribution of
assets and yield
1. In
general

– 212 –
Where in the case of a trust enterprise the claims of one bene-
ficiary to the income and those of another to the trust property
which is to be distributed are conceded or a system of succession
is drawn up respecting the enjoyment of the trust, yield in place
of elements of capital or, conversely, elements of capital in place
of yield may, in particular, not be paid out to the beneficiaries, as
in the case of fictitious yields, purely added value in accordance
with the account on permanent investments or similar belonging
to the trust assets.
Where in the case of a trust enterprise with definite beneficial
interest claims the yield or elements of capital to be distributed
are determined in a non-appealable manner by the trustees or
other competent bodies, the parties entitled shall acquire an un-
conditional title as creditors.
§ 27
A gradual distribution of trust assets between beneficiaries,
such as the payment of a redemption sum resulting from notice to
terminate, exclusion or similar or payment of interest or amorti-
sation or re-acquisition of beneficial interests by means of trust
assets without liquidation, may ensue, with otherwise unlimited
joint and several responsibility of the acting trustees and asset
recipients and with reservation of the obligation on the part of the
latter to make restitution to the creditors and beneficiaries or to
the trustees called upon for this, who may possibly suffer loss,
only insofar as the obligations of the trust enterprise towards
third parties and other beneficiaries are still secured by the avail-
able assets, unless an individual having knowledge of the inadmis-
sible distribution has become a creditor or a beneficiary.
Where as the result of amortisation, re-acquisition, statement
of forfeiture or for other reasons all beneficial interests accrue to
the trust enterprise which continues to exist, it shall be further
determined in the trust instrument upon whom, if need be, the
income and assets result shall devolve, otherwise the regulations
concerning the devolution of the assets to the state, under the
general regulations concerning legal entities, shall be analogously
applicable.
2. Gradual distri-
bution

– 213 –
Where the trust deed empowers an individual to dissolve the
enterprise, that person shall, provided the circumstances do not
indicate a different procedure, also be competent to dissolve it
partially by ordering the gradual distribution of the assets to the
allottees pursuant to the trust instrument or the law.
§ 28
Within the framework of the law and the trust instrument, the
trustees shall ensure the orderly administration and preservation
of the trust assets in their legal and economic volume and, in par-
ticular, take care, insofar as the nature of the business, the circum-
stances or the achievement of the objects permit this, that the
trust assets pass into the possession of the enterprise, are kept
separate from the trustees’ own assets and that insecurely invested
assets are redeemed and appropriately invested.
Moreover, there exists an obligation to preserve, improve and
insure trust assets insofar as the orderly implementation of the
objects of the enterprise requires the principles of good business
management, having regard to the circumstances, pursuant to the
law or the trust instrument, or even contrary to the trust instru-
ment, by virtue of the law.
The trustees may at their absolute discretion advance elements
of capital, against or without security, to those beneficiaries enti-
tled to a claim to the trust assets to be distributed at a later date,
and the said beneficiaries shall have the capacity of debtors up to
the time when the handing over of assets to them is due to take
place. However, when several beneficiaries exist, this shall ensue
only insofar as the claims of other beneficiaries or third parties, in
the absence of their assent, are not violated thereby.
In the case of family trust enterprises whose objects are sup-
port, education, training or similar, the Register Office may, upon
application of the participants, for important reasons, provided
the trust instrument does not determine to the contrary, order
that advances be granted appropriately. …
1)

1) § 28 para. 5 and § 29 para. 2 repealed by the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
III. Administra-
tion of assets
1. In
general

– 214 –
§ 29
Where, pursuant to the trust instrument, in the case of trust
enterprises which do not conduct business, the trust assets and the
yield are inalienable or alienable only to a limited extent, within a
certain family or category of people or may be encumbered with
these restrictions, such a restriction may be noted or annotated
“restraint on disposal”, near where the items of property are en-
tered in the Trust Register and the Land Register or in other pub-
lic registers in which the entries have the same effect as entries in
the Land Register.

1
Within the framework of the objects of the enterprise and oth-
erwise by virtue of the law, the trustees shall be authorised to
alienate or charge the trust assets including the yield: in the case
of rapidly consumed or perishable objects whose proceeds take
the place of the objects; with regard to the paying-off of the par-
ticipants’obligations, insofar as a claim may be made against the
trust property for this; in the event that enjoyment of the trust
pursuant to the trust instrument is not without valuable consid-
eration, with the consent of all the beneficiaries, including, if the
occasion arises, also the reversioners, otherwise, however, also
with the assent of the settlors or their direct universal successors
in title; or with the assent of the Register Office, for important
reasons, for instance concerning disposals which serve public
objects, or the preservation or improvement of trust property,
subject to the proviso that the rights of the creditors concerned
must take precedence over the rights accruing from the beneficial
interest pursuant to the directive of the Register Office.
Pure and mixed gifts or other similar distributions without
valuable consideration as well as the existence of an obligation,
acknowledged without legal reason, charged against the trust
enterprise or the non-existence of a claim, causing loss to the trust
enterprise may be undertaken by the trustees only insofar as the
trust instrument allows this or is customarily required, as a moral
duty or having regard to the observance of propriety.

1) § 29 para. 2 repealed by the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
2. Alienation and
char ging

– 215 –
Claims for damages and other measures allowed by law
against the trustees or other culpable persons as well as the regu-
lations concerning bona fide acquisitions for valuable considera-
tion, concerning the restriction of liability and encumbrance by
virtue of the law, remain reserved additionally.
§ 30
Where a trustee or a representative of the trust enterprise
wrongfully alienates trust property in opposition to the trust
instrument or the law, each of the other trustees or entitled bene-
ficiaries or reversioners shall have the right to trace the trust
property and after informing the managing trustees may, pursuant
to the rules of possession, reclaim the trust property on behalf and
in favour of the trust enterprise, insofar as the said trust property
has not been acquired in return for reasonable payment by a third
party who had no knowledge of the fiduciary character at the
time of acquisition.
Whosoever pursuant to the foregoing paragraph is under obli-
gation to surrender shall, in accordance with the rules of posses-
sion, in the event that the individual is no longer in a position, in
the case of the said individual’s bad faith, to surrender to the trust
enterprise all that which has taken the place of the trust property,
in return for the reimbursement of the said individual’s perform-
ance or the value. The individual acting in good faith, however,
whose acquisition is without valuable consideration, shall surren-
der only inasmuch as enrichment has ensued.
Where trust property has been wrongfully included in execu-
tion proceedings, bankruptcy or administration proceedings, each
trustee, entitled beneficiary or reversioner may demand the sur-
render of the trust property or the substitution which has taken
its place, pursuant to the foregoing and other regulations, in fa-
vour of the trust enterprise and take the admissible measures, in
particular third-party action against execution.
The preceding regulations shall be analogously applicable to
the wrongful charging of the trust property or the wrongful im-
position of an obligation on the trust enterprise; in addition, the
provisions concerning the restriction of the trust enterprise’s li-
3. Claim for
surrender and
enrichment

– 216 –
ability as well as those concerning transactions in favour of the
trust enterprise and other provisions such as those relating to
responsibility remain reserved.
In the case of unsuccessful execution proceedings (issuance of
a loss certificate) against the trust enterprise, the creditors who
suffered loss or, in the case of bankruptcy, the trusteeship in
bankruptcy, shall be empowered to assert the claim to surrender
or enrichment, insofar as the creditors concerned did not take part
in the illegal alienation.
§ 31
Provided nothing to the contrary emerges from the objects of
the trust enterprise or an express provision concerning the in-
vestment or deposition of the trust property is not included in the
trust instrument (investment clause), the trustees may pass a
resolution with a simple majority to the effect that the assets, in
particular, also available yield up to the time of its distribution,
shall be safely and profitably invested, pursuant to the regulations
concerning trusts. An asset investment which pursuant to the law
or the trust instrument is inadmissible may, provided all the enti-
tled beneficiaries or an otherwise competent body do not disap-
prove of such an investment, at any time be converted by the
trustees to an admissible investment.
Where the prerequisites for the appointment of a fiduciary le-
gal advisor or other important reasons exist, the Register Office
may, upon application of participants, possibly ex officio, order
that the trustees shall invest or deposit the trust assets or individ-
ual parts thereof with the Landesbank or another suitable institu-
tion or that debtors of the trust enterprise may validly fulfil their
obligations only by performance at the same or another institu-
tion determined by the Register Office.
Should a debtor of the trust enterprise have an important rea-
son for assuming that the trustees will commit a breach of trust
with the money to be paid by him, he may also legally effect the
payment of this debt to the Landesbank, in favour of the trust
enterprise.
4. Assets invest-
ment

– 217 –
§ 32
The costs acruing from the creation and termination of a trust
enterprise, fiduciary supervision, fiduciary surveillance and from
the activities of other persons or bodies appointed pursuant to the
law or the trust instrument for the performance of such activity
shall, in the absence of other provisions in the law or the trust
instrument, be defrayed from the yield from the trust property or,
if necessary, from the trust property itself.
Where culpable conduct on the part of a person or body is at
issue, if, in particular, an action or an omission is demanded with-
out reason by a person authorised in this regard, the costs shall, in
the absence of any other directive, be borne by the person with
whom a fault lies.
Where an authority intervenes upon application or ex officio,
pursuant to the law or the trust instrument, and no person is at
fault or something else is ordered, the costs shall be charged to the
yield account and where a yield does not exist or is inadequate, to
the account of the trust assets.
§ 33
In the absence of other directives or where nothing to the
contrary emerges from the objects of the enterprise as, for exam-
ple, in the case of liquidation trusts, the trustees shall be empow-
ered to establish appropriate reserve funds as a safeguard against
losses, devaluation or to ensure a sustained yield capacity or
similar and to provide a corresponding entry on the liability side
of the balance sheet.
Insofar as the preservation of the assets requires this, as in the
case of devaluation or similar as well as in the case of enterprises
pursuing commercial activities, they shall be under obligation to
establish appropriate reserves, unless important reasons justify an
exception.
In the case of trust enterprises which undertake commercial
activities, they shall, in the absence of other directives, allocate
annually one-tenth of the net yield to the reserve fund for the
purpose of covering balance-sheet losses until the said reserve
fund amounts to one-tenth of the trust assets.
IV. Costs
V. Reserve fund
and other re-
serves

– 218 –
Income which is due to beneficiaries who are present, but has
not been withdrawn within three years of the due date and also
income which becomes due during a period of time up to the
latest valid bestowal shall be allocated to the reserve fund for the
balance-sheet losses or, in the case of enterprises which do not
undertake commercial activities, for the accounts losses (interca-
lated beneficial interest in the trust).
Similarly, any fines or suchlike for possible non-attendance at
meetings or for late arrival at such meetings or for other reasons,
to be paid by the participants pursuant to the trust articles or,
where doubt exists, to the regulations concerning fines, etc., im-
posed under the contractual penalties also, in the absence of any
directive to the contrary, other elements of capital released by the
lapse of individual beneficiaries, shall be allocated to the reserve
fund.
Otherwise, the regulations concerning the reserve fund in the
case of companies limited by shares shall be applicable accord-
ingly with the proviso that the reserve fund for balance-sheet or
accounts losses shall, as far as possible, be invested in readily real-
isable, safe securities.
§ 34
Unless determined otherwise for a trust enterprise which en-
gages in commercial activities, managing trustees shall, from the
time of formation onward, observe the provisions of this law and
the regulations concerning the trusts in general relating to the
drawing up of inventories of property and the submission of ac-
counts and shall, insofar as they are in a position to do so, keep
accurate, regular, clear and suitable accounts, accompanied by
receipts if necessary, separate from other records, otherwise, they
shall entrust these duties to others.
Insofar as an enterprise pursues commercial objects (business)
the regulations of this law and supplementally those concerning
the system of commercial clearing, in the same manner as in the
case of an establishment which undertakes commercial activities,
shall be observed from the time of formation onward, otherwise
the managing trustees shall bear responsibility.
The regulations concerning the official audit remain reserved.
VI. Accountanc y

– 219 –
§ 35
The regulations concerning the rescission of trusts in general
shall be applicable to the rescission of the formation or amend-
ment of a trust enterprise; however, the claims of bona fide
creditors accruing up to the time of final and conclusive rescission
shall in all cases take preference over the claims of the contestants.
Where pursuant to the trust instrument the trustees are si-
multaneously the sole persons entitled to benefit from the alien-
able and transferable beneficial interest, with or without member-
ship, rescission on the part of the settlors or their creditors and/or
the trusteeship in bankruptcy or the settlement administration
after formation shall be admissible only pursuant to the provi-
sions concerning membership under the general regulations con-
cering legal entities.
Where within the last five years before the initiation of bank-
ruptcy proceedings relating to the settlor’s assets or before the
implementation of unsuccessful execution from the settlor’s assets
a trust enterprise was formed without valuable consideration in
favour of third parties or, in this manner, assets were otherwise
donated to the enterprise, the trust enterprise shall, in the event
that the creditor of the settlor or the trustee in bankruptcy is able
to prove that the settlor concerned was insolvent after setting
aside the assets donated to the trust enterprise, notwithstanding
the bona fide rights acquired for valuable consideration by par-
ticipants or third parties, be liquidated in favour of the settlor’s
creditors by order of the law enforcement authority only where
the satisfaction of the creditor, on the basis of a winding-up bal-
ance drawn up for this purpose, cannot be achieved appropriately
in another manner.
Where on the grounds of a transaction a person has become a
creditor of the trustee, although the said person had knowledge of
the insolvency at the time of the formation, rescission by the said
person or through the latter’s trusteeship in bankruptcy shall be
excluded.
The settlor’s spouse or issue may, within a period of time de-
termined by the Register Office and, if need be, in a manner de-
termined by the latter, assert the right of redemption against the
creditors or the trusteeship in bankruptcy after payment of the
F. Rescission and
right of re-
dem
ption

– 220 –
claim concerned; however, at the most, a fair and reasonable
amount shall be paid, determined on the basis of a winding up
balance.
Where insolvency exists in the case of one or the other of several
settlors, this regulation concerning the right of redemption shall be
applied accordingly, with the proviso that after the spouse and/or
the issue the beneficiaries shall also be entitled to the right of re-
demption within a period of time to be determined by the Register
Office and, if necessary, in the manner directed by the latter.
Where a settlor forms a trust enterprise in his capacity as
trustee of another trust or in fulfilment of another obligation
towards a third party who, without valuable consideration, has
placed assets for this purpose at the disposal of the said settlor, the
foregoing regulations concerning the creditors or the trusteeship
in bankruptcy and/or concerning the right of redemption shall be
applied accordingly to the settlor of the other trust enterprise or
the third party concerned (indirect settlorship) and/or to their
spouses or issue.
Otherwise, the provisions concerning the revocation of the
beneficial interest and concerning the violation of the duty to
support shall also remain reserved.
§ 36
If the law does not determine to the contrary, only the trust
fund stated in the articles and the other possible further assets of
the trust enterprise shall be liable for the obligations of the trust
enterprise towards third parties and a personal liability on the part
of the participants shall not exist, unless the obligations of the
trust enterprise are, at the same time, the obligations of all the
participants or of individual participants.
Where in the exercise of their fiduciary authority trustees
cause loss to bona fide third parties by intentional deception on
the pretext that contrary to the trust instrument there exists a
liability or a liability to make further contributions which extends
beyond the trust property or is greater than the actual trust assets,
or the like, the acting trustees shall be liable without restriction,
jointly and severally, for the loss suffered in this connection by
G. Liability for the
obligations of
the trust enter-
prise
I. By operation of
the law

– 221 –
the third party, under reservation of their right of recourse to the
trust enterprise or other persons, insofar as it has (they have) be-
come enriched thereby or has (have) derived other benefit.
Moreover, in the case of a trust enterprise which pursues
commercial objects, the managing trustees shall, in the absence of
any other directive, be liable jointly and severally for a period of
six months after the date when the salaries and wages of the em-
ployees and workers are due for the amount no longer retrievable
from the trust enterprise after this period of time.
Trustees who in the exercise of their fiduciary authority or a
body or other representative appointed pursuant to the trust arti-
cles perform a tortious act or neglect duty in the exercise of their
representational activity shall, in addition to the trust enterprise,
otherwise with appropriate application of the relevant regulations
concerning legal entities, be responsible without restriction,
jointly and severally.
Insofar as the provisions concerning trust enterprises do not
contain deviations, the regulations concerning trusts in general
shall be applied accordingly for the legal position of the creditors
of the trust enterprise in attachment, execution, bankruptcy and
administration proceedings.
In the case of trust enterprises with special divisions or with
trust funds specially set aside, each division or each fund shall, in
the absence of any other directive in the law and insofar as mutual
claims do not require something different, occupy a special posi-
tion in such a procedure, similar to that of an independent trust
enterprise.
§ 37
It may be determined in the trust instrument that also the
other trust assets, not contained in the enterprise as a trust fund or
otherwise from a trust, to which the enterprise itself belongs, shall
be liable for its obligations.
Where as trust property for the enterprise assets are trans-
ferred with which obligations towards third parties are associated
as, for example, in the case of shares which are not fully paid up,
the trust instrument or the relevant declaration of membership
II. By operation of
the trust in-
strument and
other transac-
tion
1. Extension of
liabilit
y

– 222 –
may provide, where it does not emerge otherwise from the legal
relationship with the third party, that the transferors remain per-
sonally liable, in addition to the enterprise, or alone.
Furthermore, the trust articles may direct, without the sub-
stantiation of a membership being thereby possible or permissi-
ble, insofar as exceptions are not admissible, that individual or all
participants or third parties, with analogous application of the
regulations in the case of registered cooperative societies, shall be
restrictedly liable or restrictedly liable to effect further contribu-
tions for the obligations of the enterprise towards third parties,
for the adjusting amounts between those who are liable or liable
to effect further contributions and for the defrayal of costs or that
individual or all trustees in the case of enterprises which under-
take commercial activities shall be liable or liable to effect further
contributions without restriction, jointly and severally.
The regulations concerning the assertion of liability or of the
liability to effect further contributions in contribution proceed-
ings may, in the trust articles, also be declared to be applicable
outside the cases determined by law.
In the case of an enterprise which undertakes commercial ac-
tivities, the provisions concerning liability or liability to effect
further contributions as well as each amendment thereof must be
registered in the form of an excerpt in the Trust Register, entered
there and published, otherwise annulment shall be declared.
The regulations concerning the register of cooperative society
members with liability or liability to effect further contributions
and those concerning the register of members in the case of regis-
tered cooperative societies shall, if the case arises, be applied ac-
cordingly in the case of trust enterprises which pursue commer-
cial objects, to the register of participants, which may be
associated with the register of beneficiaries, and to the list of par-
ticipants according to the meaning stated here.
§ 38
In the case of a trust enterprise which does not pursue com-
mercial objects and does not undertake any other business, the
trust articles may include the provision, to be notified to the Trust
2. Restriction of
liabilit y

– 223 –
Register for the purpose of entry, that after formation private
obligations which are valid for the enterprise, apart from claims
arising from tortious acts, may be incurred only with the assent of
a special body or of the next reversioners or third parties, or that a
private creditor may seek satisfaction only from assets which do
not form part of the trust fund or only from the income or neither
from the trust property nor from the yield, as long as the trust
enterprise has not been terminated.
In the case of items of property belonging to the trust which
are entered in the Land Register or in another public register
whose entries have the same effect as Land Register entries, such a
restriction may be entered as an annotation or a priority notice or
a borrowing limit or a real-estate mortgage with a restriction on
the yield from the trust property concerned may be entered in the
Land Register.
Where neither the trust property nor the yield may be charged
or no valid obligations may be incurred by the managing trustees,
other bodies or persons, at the expense of the enterprise, the
trustees exercising fiduciary authority or other representatives of
the trust enterprise shall be unrestrictedly liable, jointly and sev-
erally if they fail to draw the attention of the bona fide third par-
ties with whom they deal expressly to these restrictions, with
reservation of the claim against the trust enterprise on grounds of
possible enrichment.
Where, apart from the possible assertion of their claims against
participants or third parties, the creditors of the enterprise have
access only to the yield, sequestration may, upon application of
the competing creditors, take the place of bankruptcy and these
may join the sequestration, pursuant analogously to the relevant
regulations concerning the accession of creditors in the case of the
compulsory sale of the individually owned enterprise with limited
liability.
1)

1) The provisions concerning the individually owned enterprise with limited
liability (Art. 834-896a) was repealed by the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl.
1980, No. 39.

– 224 –
§ 39
In the absence of other provisions of law or trust instrument,
the settlors, trustees and beneficiaries, including the reversioners,
shall be deemed to be participants, irrespective of sex and, where
the law or the trust instrument does not determine to the con-
trary, the participants occupying the legal position in each case, or
individual kinds of these, singly or plurally.
Insofar as within the intendment of individual regulations per-
sons other than settlors, trustees or beneficiaries are members of
offices or bodies or such persons are entitled to rights and obliga-
tions, in particular a liability or a liability to make further contri-
butions for the obligations of the trust enterprise, they shall, in
this regard, also be deemed to be participants (irregular partici-
pants).
The trust deed or the trust articles may provide the regulation
of the legal relationship of the participants to the trust enterprise,
between themselves and between third parties, within the frame-
work of the law, in a special regulation (internal regulation)
signed by the managing trustees or other competent offices,
which insofar as it contains facts or circumstances which require
registration, shall be submitted to the Trust Register, either in the
form of a notarised excerpt, or the original.
If a participant is entitled to a right and, in particular, to an ex-
pectancy, each participant shall be permitted to inspect the trust
instrument provided and inasmuch as the documents concerned
are not deposited with the Public Register Office as Trust Regis-
ter Office and he may at his own expense make copies of the
documents (articles, regulations and similar) or, if they are dupli-
cated, demand, with appropriate reimbursement of the cost, that
copies be supplied.
§ 40
Within the scope of the law, the provisions of the trust in-
strument shall be applied to their rights and duties towards the
trust enterprise, between themselves and towards third parties.
These are followed in priority by the provisions concerning trusts
in general and, in addition, supplementally, provided it is not
H. Participants
I. Common
provisions
1. Kinds and
regulation of
the legal posi-
tion
2. Rights and
duties in par-
ticular

– 225 –
determined otherwise as the result of the absence of members, the
nature of the trust and the position of the participants, by those
concerning membership under the general regulations concerning
legal entities.
Where a person occupies the position of a trustee (co-trustee)
and a beneficiary (co-beneficiary) simultaneously, the duties of a
trustee shall take precedence.
Where, apart from possible contributions to the trust fund or
liability or liability to make further contributions, one or several
participants commit themselves in writing, in the trust instrument
or otherwise, to recurring cash or other payments (acts or omis-
sions) also, in particular, to payments relating to cartels or com-
bines, the relevant regulations of the private company with lim-
ited liability shall hereupon be applicable accordingly.
Insofar as the prerequisites for this exist, documents enforce-
able by execution may also be drawn up concerning the obliga-
tions of the participants or third parties towards the trust enter-
prise, such as contributions to the trust fund or similar or
concerning the obligations of the trust enterprise towards partici-
pants, under reservation of the creditors’ rights.
Should the timely exercise of a right by a participant be en-
dangered, the competent authority may also, upon demand of the
participant, proceed by taking safeguarding measures.
Where pursuant to the law or the trust instrument rights are
conceded to or duties are imposed upon a participant vis-a-vis
another participant, this other participant shall, in the absence of a
deviating regulation, have corresponding duties and/or rights vis-
a-vis the first participant.
§ 41
The trust instrument may regulate more specifically the legal
relationship between the participants or between the individual
groups of participants as, for example, between the trustees and
the beneficiaries, by creating a governing body, and set out the
rights and duties of these organised participants, such as the mu-
tual assertion of rights vis-a-vis the trust enterprise or other par-
ticipants or similar.
3. Governing
bodies
a. In
general

– 226 –
Where such a governing body is provided without more ex-
plicit implementation or unsatisfactorily, the provisions concern-
ing the supreme body under the general regulations concerning
legal entities, above all, supplementally, the provisions concerning
minority rights shall be applicable where doubt exists, insofar as a
deviation does not result from the nature of the trust or the ab-
sence of membership.
Even where the trust instrument does not make provisions for
a governing body, groups of participants who are in the same
legal position may create such a body by means of internal regu-
lations or the like which they shall sign or under a legal form
provided otherwise in the law. However, provisions drawn up in
this manner may not contravene mandatory laws, the settlor’s
directives, the articles or public order or morals, otherwise nullity
shall be declared.
Insofar as resolutions of bodies may, pursuant to the applica-
ble regulations, be rescinded or cancelled ex officio, the imple-
mentation of the proceedings shall be expedited.
§ 42
Where pursuant to the law or the trust instrument the partici-
pants or third parties have the right to elect or to vote, or both,
and it is not determined to the contrary, each person entitled to
vote shall have one vote and, if securities are issued, one vote for
each security when voting takes place and resolutions are passed.
Otherwise, the regulations concerning the right to vote and the
resolutions under the general regulations concerning legal entities
shall be applied supplementally.
Where a certain number of participants announce their inten-
tion to participate in the passing of a resolution of the supreme
body or in this manner and for this purpose deposit voting right
securities, but owing to an unforeseen or unavoidable circum-
stance are prevented from taking part and as a result a different
resolution is passed, these participants may, within ten days after
the passing of the resolution, by casting their vote by means of a
substantiated petition to the trust enterprise and the Register
Office, demand from the latter, at their own expense, the pro-
b. Resolutions
and member-
shi
p

– 227 –
posed amendment of the resolution (subsequent amendment of a
resolution) in extrajudicial proceedings, after hearing the trust
enterprise, the supreme body concerned or the like.
Meanwhile, however, legally significant acts pursuant to the
earlier resolution undertaken by the competent party relating to
bona fide third parties shall remain valid in law, notwithstanding
the possible claims of those who had been hindered, arising from
the responsibility or from the taking of other admissible meas-
ures.
In the case of a body with the right to vote, which passes its
resolutions with a majority, the majority of the participants con-
cerned may not, in their position as implied trustees vis-a-vis the
minority, violate the interests of the trust enterprise to the detri-
ment of the minority or public morals.
Pursuant to the regulations concerning the supreme body in
the case of legal entities, adverse resolutions may be overruled and
the participants concurring with the majority shall be liable as
joint and several debtors to the trust enterprise and/or the partici-
pants belonging to the minority who suffered damage, pursuant
to the regulations concerning tortious acts, for all the damages
accruing to the trust enterprise and/or the individual participants.
A membership, as in the case of legal entities with members,
may be conceded to the participants only with the assent of the
Register Office.
§ 43
1)
Insofar as this is prescribed in the general regulations con-
cerning legal entities or particular provision is made in the trust
instrument, an audit authority shall be appointed to whom the
regulations concerning the audit authority whose possible mem-
bers may not at the same time be managing trustees, under the
general regulations concerning legal entities shall, in the absence
of a deviating provision, be applied accordingly.
By furnishing their names, first names, information concerning
profession and place of residence or company name and domicile

1) § 43 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39.
c. Supervisory
trust bod y

– 228 –
of the trustees or other bodies or persons competent by virtue of
the trust instrument, the members of the audit authority may be
registered for the purpose of entry in the Trust Register.
However, provision may also be made in the trust instrument
for a board of trustees as supervisory trust body, comprised of
one or several participants or third parties. Insofar as the general
provisions concerning legal entities prescribe a mandatory audit
authority, such a board of trustees may be provided additionally,
beside the audit authority.
If the law itself does not determine to the contrary, the provi-
sion concerning the audit authority’s responsbility, under the
general regulations concerning legal entities, shall also be applica-
ble accordingly to the members of the supervisory trust body.
The ordering of an official trust supervisory body and an offi-
cial audit shall remain reserved.
§ 44
Insofar as the law does not determine to the contrary or the
law as a whole is not concerned, individual claims of the trust
enterprise against participants who are not trustees or are no
longer trustees shall become statute-barred three years after their
due date.
Individual claims of the participants as such against the trust
enterprise shall become statute barred three years after their due
date in favour of the trust enterprise, if the law as a whole is not
concerned or if it is not determined otherwise.
Insofar as these are not against active trustees and with reser-
vation of the provisions concerning responsibility, claims of the
participants between themselves arising from the trust relation-
ship shall become statute barred in the same period of time after
the due date.
Shorter statutory periods of limitation, the possibly longer
statutory period of limitation in the case of a punishable act and
special regulations of this law remain reserved.
The regulations concerning statutory limitation shall be ap-
plied accordingly to the irregular participants as such.
4. Statutory
limitation

– 229 –
§ 45
The regulations concerning domicile and legal venue under the
general regulations concerning legal entities shall be applied ac-
cordingly to the legal and administration venue relating to the
participants as such.
Insofar as the law has not drawn up mandatory regulations,
the trust instrument may provide for an impartial court of arbi-
tration or a conciliation board of this kind for all participants’
disputes between one another and vis-a-vis the trust enterprise or
for the one or the other, analogous to domestic or foreign law,
regardless of whether the participants concerned have signed the
trust instrument or not.
The final and conclusive decisions of such a court of arbitra-
tion shall be enforceable by execution in the same manner as the
judgment of a domestic court, insofar as the said decisions do not
violate public order and morals.
§ 46
In legal and administrative matters including administrative
cases of the trust enterprise as well as of all or groups (categories)
of participants as such, every other legally interested participant
as such, including the entitled reversionaries may, at their own
expense, in the absence of a wider directive, appear as intervener,
or in the same capacity, jointly with one of the parties. Moreover,
in the absence of entitled beneficiaries and reversioners the repre-
sentative of public law may appear, at the expense of the trust
enterprise, as intervener, or in the same capacity, jointly with one
of the parties. Where, however, the law admits participant mi-
norities as a party in the same way as member minorities in the
case of legal entities, the participants belonging to this minority
may, at their own expense, appear on one side or the other.
Where in official proceedings all or individual participants are
to be taken into consideration, whose existence or place of resi-
dence or name is unknown or in doubt, the Public Register Office
may, in order to safeguard the interests of the participants con-
cerned, following public citation or without the latter, upon ap-
plication of participants or legally interested third parties or ex
5. Legal venue,
court of arbi-
tration and
procedural po-
sition of par-
ticipants
a. In
general
b. Procedural
position of
participants
aa. In
general

– 230 –
officio, nominate a procedural trustee who may appear or be held
responsible, alone or jointly with other participants.
In the event of the lapse of a participant, the remaining par-
ticipants or the procedural trustee appointed by the Public Reg-
ister Office pursuant to the foregoing paragraph may, as a rule,
continue the already commenced proceedings or other official
proceedings, usually without interruption.
Insofar as adjudication issued against the trust enterprise or
against all or groups of participants is also binding for or against
one participant, the said participant or the opponent concerned
shall be entitled to enter a plea of res judicata against later pro-
ceedings or against a later adjudication concerning the same mat-
ter, provided the law does not determine otherwise.
Where upon application of participants, third parties or ex of-
ficio the Public Register Office is required to intervene, it shall,
unless important reasons exist, such as danger of default and
similar, if possible, hear the trustees engaged in the conduct of
business and other legally interested participants or, possibly, a
trustee or representative officially appointed for this, before the
issuance of an order or the pronouncement of a decision.
§ 47
Moreover, one or several participants may with the assent of
the authority concerned, initiate an official procedure for other,
for some reason unknown or uncertain participants with a com-
mon, legal interest or appear on one side or the other in such a
procedure, where the unknown or uncertain participants are nu-
merous.
These last mentioned participants may cite the issued final and
conclusive adjudication insofar as no detrimental intention or
disadvantageous understanding whatsoever exists between the
participants taking part in the procedure and the opposing party
or the interests of the acting party were not in conflict with those
of the others, who may deduce rights from the adjudication.
bb. Virtual repre-
sentation

– 231 –
§ 48
Where the regulations concerning the supreme body do not
determine differently with respect to all or groups of participants
or the trust instrument or the provisions concerning virtual repre-
sentation or other regulations of the law do not determine differ-
ently with respect to the assertion pursuant to the law of rights of
the trust enterprise or of all or groups of participants and where
such a right has not been asserted by all the participants and not
to the full extent, for the trust enterprise or for all of them or it
was not desired or not possible to realise or fully realise the right
embodied in the procedure, derived from a person (company or
legal entity) who appeared as claimant in the procedure, e.g. as the
result of acknowledgement, waiver, default of appearance, settle-
ment or similar, or where the right itself has not been dismissed
with respect to all these persons, the trust enterprise or its entitled
persons who appeared as claimants cannot assert its (their) rights
completely or within the scope of what remains of the said rights
independently and separate from previous proceedings, insofar as
they, as the intervening party or similar in another proceeding,
have not acknowledged the claim for themselves or waived the
said claim.
Where the same rights are asserted, completely or partly, by
different claimants in the same proceedings which, however, are
separate with respect to time, the said proceedings may, upon
application of one party or ex officio, at the discretion of the
competent government office, be combined.
A right which is not asserted by all entitled persons as well as
the date for a possible hearing may, upon the application of a
party, be announced pursuant to the trust articles or, if this is not
possible, in the manner determined for official announcements or
as directed at the discretion of the competent government office.
If only individual entitled persons take action, the answerable
person may, moreover, at the claimant’s expense, make an appli-
cation with warning and effect, for a public citation pursuant to
the regulations concerning the determination of beneficiaries,
which shall state that the other entitled persons may only advance
a further claim if the answerable person, as a result of his inten-
tionally detrimental conduct, fails to comply to the full extent
6. Position of the
sued party

– 232 –
with the asserted right. Similarly, the answerable person may also
make application for the appointment of an official trustee for the
remaining entitled persons for the retrieval and supplementation
of the right not asserted or not fully asserted by the claimant.
§ 49
In case of doubt, the settlor shall be deemed to be the person
who supplies or undertakes to supply the trust fund with assets.
Notwithstanding their other and simultaneous position as
trustee or beneficiary, the trust instrument may, within the frame
of the law, only concede rights to the settlors (trustors) as such or
their universal successors in title against the trust enterprise or the
other participants as such provided they do not exist as a continu-
ous and exclusive influencing control on the organisation or trust
management of the trust enterprise. An exception to this shall
exist in the right to supervise in the case of non-profit making or
similar trust enterprises.
Insofar as the settlors who, without valuable consideration,
donated the trust fund and on the basis of this donation created,
without valuable consideration, the beneficial interest of others
are not also entitled to the legal position of trustee, they may
demand, pursuant to the law, within the same scope as entitled
beneficiaries, that other participants or third parties observe the
trust instrument.
If the regulations concerning the trust fund do not determine
otherwise, the provisions relating to default in the case of the
beneficial interest shall be applied accordingly to the settlor’s
default in the case of other obligations.
The regulations concerning the other rights and duties of the
settlor pursuant to the law or the trust instrument, particularly
those concerning the settlor’s creditors, remain reserved.
II. Settlor

– 233 –
§ 50
The trust instrument shall regulate appointment and substitu-
tion in the event of the lapse of a trustee for any reason such as
death, inability to act, removal, notice or similar reason, if no
other provision is made.
Where only certain persons entitled to enjoyment of the trust
are present, they may, if need be, with the consultancy of a trustee
appointed by the Register Office for the unknown or uncertain
entitled beneficiaries, appoint or remove, etc. trustees by a
unanimous resolution passed at a meeting or by means of a circu-
lar letter. Such actions shall be at the expense of the enterprise.
Pursuant to the trust instrument, the right to appoint or re-
move or to propose (right of proposal) may be left to all or indi-
vidual trustees, all or individual participants or third parties or the
Register Office may be appointed to perform this duty, without it
being under obligation to execute such a directive.
§ 51
Where a trust enterprise is comprised of several divisions or if
someone is appointed as trustee where there are several trusts
within the same trust enterprise or for only one branch establish-
ment, it shall be stated precisely in each case, in the absence of any
other directive, for which division, other trust or branch estab-
lishment an appointment or proposal shall be made or a removal
effected.
In case of doubt, a person may accept or decline the post of
trustee only with respect to all divisions, special trusts or similar,
insofar as the said person was appointed trustee pursuant to the
same directive throughout.
§ 52
In the absence of any other directive, the right to appoint
trustees shall be exercised by the person having a right to remove
trustees under reservation of the appointment of a Register Office
or public trustee pursuant to the regulations concerning trusts in
general and the provisions otherwise drawn up.
II. Trustee
1. Appointment,
removal, no-
tice, etc.
a. In general
aa. In the case of
trust enter-
prises without
divisions
bb. With divisions
and in the case
of several
trusts, etc.
b. Appointment
aa. Right to
a
ppoint

– 234 –
Where less than three trustees are appointed pursuant to the
trust instrument, the trustees may, at the expense of the trust
enterprise, appoint new trustees in addition to those already ap-
pointed (supplementary trustees) or substitute trustees, for the
event of inability to act, etc., with the same rights and duties as
they themselves have.
The Register Office may, for important reasons, upon appli-
cation of participants or ex officio, appoint or remove trustees,
supplementary trustees or similar, with or without observance of
the trust instrument, for the entire trust enterprise, for a part of
the trust assets to be set aside or already set aside, a fund, a branch
establishment or, in the event that the preconditions exist, for the
appointment of a judicial trustee pursuant to the regulations con-
cerning the trust in general, pursuant to these provisions.
§ 53
Following the lapse of a trustee, that person having the right
or the duty to appoint trustees may also appoint himself as trus-
tee, provided he has not been removed as trustee and provided
there are no other important reasons which would preclude his
appointment.
Whenever trustees are appointed subsequently, every possible
attention should be paid to the commercial, financial, technical,
etc., proficiency of the trustee and to the said trustee’s personal
relationships to the other participants, having regard to the ob-
jects of the trust enterprise.
As soon as the attributes of the trustee and the reason for the
appointment of a trustee for the person represented or lapsed or
for the adjudicated bankrupt are known to legal representatives,
universal successors in title, legatees, administrators, liquidators,
trustees in bankruptcy or of an estate, etc., they shall be under
obligation at the expense of the enterprise, to announce this to the
persons authorised or under obligation to appoint, possibly to the
Register Office and provisionally to carry on the transactions of
the trust up to the time of the appointment of the substitute and,
bb. Choice and
dut y to disclose

– 235 –
pursuant to the regulations concerning tortious acts, shall be –
liable for losses accruing to the trust enterprise or other partici-
pants as the result of grossly negligent or intentional violation of
this duty.
§ 54
In case of doubt, the right to remove shall not also embrace
the right to withdraw from the person removed the authority to
appoint or to propose other suitable trustees, the enjoyment of
the trust and other rights to which he is entitled without being a
trustee.
A trustee may, for important reasons such as, for example,
conflict of interest, unsuitability or incompetence for the position
of trustee, etc., be removed, with immediate effect by the re-
maining trustees, possibly upon application by participants and in
urgent cases ex officio by the Register Office, without prejudice
to possible claims of the person removed against the applicants
where the Registrar is not concerned or against the applying par-
ticipants, arising from contract, tortious act or on grounds of
violation of personal relationships and with reservation of the
right to take further the decision to remove.
Trustees appointed by the Register Office or other authorities
may be removed only with the assent of the authority concerned.
The provisional withdrawal (termination) of a trustee’s right
to conduct business may ensue at the discretion of the Register
Office upon application by participants and also with the corre-
sponding application of the regulations concerning the with-
drawal of the authority to represent in the case of the general
partnership, with reservation, however, of claims pursuant to the
second paragraph.
§ 55
Where in fulfilment of the duties of a trustee pursuant to the
law or other directive a person has provided the trust enterprise
or all participants with security or has otherwise provided a guar-
antee, the said person shall be entitled, in the event of the security
c. Removal
aa. In general
bb. In the case of
security deposit
b
y third parties

– 236 –
or guarantee provided being endangered as the result of the be-
haviour of the trustee, to demand from the authority empowered
to remove, possibly at the Register Office, the removal of the
trustee endangering the said persons’s security or to demand
other measures for his protection.
Should his demand not be complied with, he may, in the ab-
sence of further agreement, terminate his relationship with imme-
diate effect, in such a manner that his security may not be used for
future obligations; in addition, he may, provided claims do not
already exist, demand the return or cancellation of the security
provided and, if necessary in case of doubt, compensation pursu-
ant to the principles of the law of contract.
The other powers to which third parties are entitled, existing
as the result of a suretyship or other legal relationship, shall re-
main unaffected.
§ 56
A trustee may at any time and at his own expense give notice
of termination to the other trustees and, possibly, to the Register
Office. The said trustee shall, however, continue to perform his
duty until an appointment by substitution has been made, pursu-
ant to the trust instrument and at the expense of the trust prop-
erty.
For important reasons, a trustee may resign from his post with
immediate effect. Such resignation shall be announced to the
other trustees or to the competent bodies, to the Register Office if
necessary.
Should only specifically designated entitled beneficiaries be
present, a trustee may, with their assent, resign his post at any
time, even if the trust instrument determines otherwise. The same
shall apply in all cases with the assent of the Register Office.
§ 57
Where a person is a trustee with several trusts which are con-
nected or with several divisions or branches of a trust enterprise
the notice to terminate shall, in the absence of another trust di-
rective, be valid with respect to all trusts, divisions or branches,
d. Termination
aa. In general
bb. Meanin
g

– 237 –
provided all the entitled beneficiaries do not determine otherwise
or important reasons do not justify an exception with the assent
of the Register Office.
Where, independently of his position as such, a trustee is con-
ceded the right to appoint, propose or remove trustees with the
same trust enterprise or with other trusts connected with this, it
shall be assumed that the notice of termination shall not also ex-
tend to this right.
§ 58
Each appointment, removal or notice of termination or each
proposal shall be issued in writing by those empowered or under
obligation to do so or otherwise be invalid and, in the absence of
other legal regulations, be announced to the trust enterprise,
where necessary to the Register Office.
Appointments shall be made with the written assent of the
person to be appointed. By way of substitution, appointments
may also ensue by the person to be appointed submitting his sig-
nature in due form to the Register Office.
In the case of trust enterprises registered in the Trust Register,
these procedures shall be registered and the facts and circum-
stances to be registered shall be provided.
§ 59
Trustees shall fulfil their duties up to the time a successor is
duly appointed and, if necessary, registered with the Register
Office, unless the law, the trust instrument, all those entitled to
enjoyment of the trust or the Register Office were to determine
otherwise or circumstances cause a change.
Trustees who are appointed by substitution or, otherwise,
subsequently or who are remaining shall, in the absence of a devi-
ating directive as, for example, where a special form is provided
for the transfer of rights and duties or concerning signing or a
regulation exists concerning the protection of the bona fide third
party, enter at once into the same legal position as their predeces-
sor, but not into the same legal relationships originating from
responsibility, from personal liability or liability to make further
e. Form
f. Effect
aa. For those
appointed, re-
moved, giving
notice of ter-
mination, etc.

– 238 –
contributions or other purely personal legal relationships as their
predecessors or co-trustees.
The obligations entered into by the trustees or originating
from the engagement itself shall remain unaffected by removal,
notice of termination or similar procedures.
Where trustees are mentioned in the law or in the trust in-
strument, it shall be understood, where doubt exists, that addi-
tional or substitute or similar trustees are also included.
§ 60
Where only one person is entitled or under obligation to ap-
point or remove or propose and fails to exercise this right or fulfil
the accepted duty or fails to do so in due time, appointment, re-
moval or proposal may, in the absence of any other directive, also
be effected by the bearers of beneficial interest, jointly if need be
with the next living entitled reversioners, pursuant to the regula-
tions concerning the organisation of the beneficiaries.
In the case of other trust enterprises and in other cases, the ap-
pointment, removal or the utilisation of the proposal, where a
person is appointed to undertake this alone, but fails, is unable or
unwilling to exercise the right or the duty, shall, in the absence of
any other directive, be undertaken by the Register Office upon
application by participants.
Should several persons be appointed to cooperate in the exer-
cise of the same rights and duties and some of those appointed
cannot or will not cooperate in the exercise of the right or duty,
the remainder shall be entitled or under obligation to exercise the
said right or duty and if all those appointed for this purpose can-
not or will not cooperate, the foregoing regulations shall be ap-
plied accordingly.
Upon application by participants, the Register Office may, for
important reasons, temporarily or completely suspend or cancel
the right or the duty to appoint, remove or propose, or entrust
another person with the right hereto, with reservation of possible
claims by the persons affected against the culpable applicant,
arising from an agreement, a tortious act or on grounds of viola-
tion of personal relationships.
bb. In the case of
default or non-
exercise of the
right or the ob-
ligation to ap-
point, remove,
propose or
similar

– 239 –
Where a person culpably fails to fulfil or to fulfil in due time
the accepted obligation to appoint, to remove or to propose, the
said person shall be liable pursuant to the rules of the law of con-
tract to the trust enterprise and to all others who have suffered
loss thereby, without restriction in the latter case and, if the case
arises, jointly and severally.
§ 61
In the absence of any other provision and with appropriate
application of the regulations concerning the board of directors in
the case of companies limited by shares, co-trustees appointed
pursuant to the trust instrument form a board of trustees (trustee
board of management, a trust committee, a committee of trustees,
or a similar body) which may elect and remove a chairman, a
treasurer, a keeper of the minutes (registrar), etc., from among its
members and determine the powers and duties.
In case of doubt, the chairman, cashier, keeper of the minutes,
etc., shall be entitled to those powers and obligations which per-
sons occupying similar positions in the case of legal entities in
similar kinds of business are normally entitled to.
Within the frame of the law concerning the legal relationship
between co-trustees and the trust enterprise, between co-trustees
among themselves and between co-trustees and other participants,
the trust instrument may provide a detailed arrangement con-
cerning, in particular, the formation of the trustees as a body
which, within the frame of the trust instrument, has an advisory
capacity and the power to pass resolutions in a manner similar to
that of the supreme body under the general regulations concern-
ing the legal entity, and these resolutions shall be executed by the
board of managing trustees, in the same manner as such resolu-
tions are executed by the board of directors of a legal entity.
§ 62
Provided the trust instrument or the law does not determine
otherwise, the trustees shall be entitled to manage jointly and they
shall be under obligation to act and to decide jointly in good faith.
2. Or ganisation
3. Trust manage-
ment
a. In
general

– 240 –
In the case of non-profit making or similar trusts, however, a
resolution of the majority shall, in the absence of any other direc-
tive, also be binding upon the minority of the trustees.
It may not be determined in the trust instrument that all trus-
tees shall be excluded from the management, otherwise the rule
from the previous paragraph shall apply.
Insofar as nothing otherwise emerges from the trust instru-
ment, from the nature of the trust and the law, the relevant provi-
sions concerning administration under the general regulations
concerning legal entities shall be applied to the trust management
accordingly.
Within the frame of the trust instrument and the law the trus-
tees shall be empowered to undertake all business transactions in
the execution of the purpose of the trust or the objects of the
enterprise and shall be under obligation to take all possible care.
§ 63
Where in addition to trustees who are entrusted with the con-
duct of business and the exercise of trust authority, there are oth-
ers, these shall be entitled by way of substitution to the same
rights and obligations insofar as trust authority, as in the case of
representation by the board of directors of a legal entity, is not
involved or the law or the trust instrument does not determine
otherwise.
Within the frame of the trust instrument, trustees who are not
involved in the conduct of business shall, by operation of law,
have the right and, depending upon the circumstances, also the
duty individually or collectively or in consultation with impartial
and disinterested specialists to satisfy themselves at the expense of
the trust enterprise concerning the course of business, to examine
the books of account and the papers, to demand information from
those conducting the business and, at appropriate intervals, to
demand the submission of accounts at any time, provided impor-
tant reasons justify such action.
They may in good faith object to the undertaking of business
transactions not executed, with the effect that these shall be
dropped, otherwise the acting trustee shall be responsible to the
enterprise and, if the case arises, also to the other participants.
b. Position of
trustees not en-
gaged in the
conduct of
business

– 241 –
§ 64
Within the frame of the law and the trust instrument, the
trustees may delegate the conduct of business to individual trus-
tees or third parties or, insofar as they lack specialised knowledge
or it is customary, enlist persons who are able to give assistance
and draw up regulations concerning the conduct of business, with
the proviso that individual trustees or third parties may also be
entrusted with the conduct of individual branches of the enter-
prise or with individual trust transactions, with or without remu-
neration, on the responsibility of all trustees for the choice they
make and under their supervision.
Where co-trustees conduct business at their absolute discre-
tion, jointly, they may not delegate the conduct of this business to
one trustee alone.
A delegation of the conduct of business may, by virtue of the
law, be revoked at any time by the trustees engaged in the con-
duct of business or, if danger exists in undue delay, by each trus-
tee, with reservation of the obligations of the trust enterprise or of
the trustees at fault by virtue of the contract, tortious act or on
grounds of violation of personal relationships vis à vis the other
party.
§ 65
Within the frame of the law and the trust instrument, the du-
ties to be loyal conform with the regulations concerning the du-
ties to be loyal in the case of trusts in general.
In the conduct of business, trustees and representatives shall
perform their duties with the care of an orderly business man and
with the same attention as they devote to their own affairs and
shall be liable for every culpable violation of their duties.
Trustees shall acquaint themselves thoroughly with the trust
instrument and may not excuse themselves on grounds of igno-
rance of its provisions.
Unless the law or the trust instrument indicates otherwise, the
trustees shall comply with the written instructions drawn up by
all the beneficiaries including possible entitled reversioners pur-
suant to the regulations concerning the organisation of the benefi-
ciaries.
c. Regulations
(internal regu-
lations) and
transfer of
mana
gement
d. Duty to be
loyal
aa. In
general

– 242 –
Where without being at fault a person is appointed invalidly as
trustee and acts in this capacity, the person concerned shall nev-
ertheless be treated as a trustee in a relationship of good faith and
shall be responsible from the day of his appointment, even though
the appointment has not been entered in the Trust Register.
A restraint of competition exists for the trustees insofar as this
is determined in the trust instrument or is required for reasons of
equity.
§ 66
Each trustee shall be under obligation to avoid a conflict of his
interests with those of the trust enterprise or the participants as
such and, if a conflict has already arisen, to eliminate this.
Where contrary to the law or the trust instrument a trustee de-
rives personal advantage from the trust enterprise, from resolu-
tions and instructions of competent bodies if the occasion arises
or in connection with the conduct of business, and customary,
occasional gifts are not involved, the trustee concerned, as a con-
structive trustee, shall be under obligation to submit accounts,
provide information and surrender the advantages or any substi-
tute advantage in the same manner as an implied trustee.
The regulations concerning transactions in which personal in-
terest is involved, applicable to trusts in general, shall otherwise
be applied accordingly and in this regard the injuriously affected
enterprise shall be entitled to the claims in the first place, followed
by the injuriously affected creditors in the case of unsuccessful
levy of execution or in the bankruptcy or administration pro-
ceedings of the trusteeship in bankruptcy or of the settlement
administration and, lastly, the participants, if the creditors or
participants concerned have themselves not co-operated in this
connection.
Where a trustee is at the same time the sole entitled beneficiary
he may, in the absence of any other directive, conclude transac-
tions with himself or as a representative or body of others under
the same prerequisites as in the case of a one-man legal entity.
bb. Personal
interest
aaa. In
general

– 243 –
§ 67
Within the intendment of the foregoing regulations and in the
absence of any other directive, the trustees may acquire, hire,
lease, etc. trust property from themselves, from a co-trustee or the
trust enterprise only in the fullest openness of the acquiring trans-
action at public auction or with the assent of other beneficiaries or
bodies authorised to give assent or the Register Office, unless the
acquisition involved freely transferable beneficiary rights or rights
such as those which are disposed of at the instigation of third
parties, or unless something different might result from the busi-
ness transaction.
The circumvention of this regulation as, in particular, the al-
ienation of trust property to a third person for the purpose of re-
acquiring this trust property before the transaction involving
alienation is complete, is inadmissible.
Where trustees acquire, hire or lease from beneficiaries rights
which ar not embodied in freely transferable securities, they shall,
if the beneficiary so demands, provide the said beneficiary, in
good faith, to the best of their ability, with information concern-
ing all the facts and circumstances influencing the alienation price,
otherwise liability for the transferor’s damages shall be incurred
pursuant to the rules of the law of contract for a statutory period
of limitation of three years from the date of alienation.
The foregoing regulations shall be applied accordingly where
trustees alienate, hire or lease, etc. to beneficiaries trust property
or beneficial interests or individual claims therefrom.
In addition, the regulations concerning surrender and the
claim on account of unjust enrichment in the case of unjustified
alienation or charging of trust property remains reserved.
§ 68
If nothing otherwise is indicated by the law or the trust in-
strument or the circumstances, trustees, upon demand, shall eq-
uitably provide each entitled beneficiary and each entitled rever-
sioner, insofar as their rights are concerned, with information
relating to all facts and circumstances and in particular to the
bbb. Acquisition
of trust
property and
beneficiary
ri
ghts
cc. Obligation to
disclose
aaa. To benefi-
ciaries

– 244 –
status and the investment of the trust assets, report at appropriate
intervals and submit accounts and also explain why they have not
actually maintained or achieved the assets including yield which,
according to the usual course of events or according to other cir-
cumstances, they should have maintained or achieved or been able
to maintain or achieve.
In the absence of other provisions in the law or the trust in-
strument, trustees shall be under obligation to allow the entitled
beneficiaries, including the entitled reversioners, insofar as their
rights are concerned, at their expense, to examine, personally or
through a representative, all the books of account and papers and
to copy these and to inspect and examine all facts and circum-
stances and in particular, the accounting.
Should the foregoing rights not be asserted jointly by all the
entitled beneficiaries including all the entitled reversioners, the
assertion, in the absence of another directive, may ensue only
insofar as it is not demanded with dishonest intent, in a wrongful
manner or in a way which conflicts with the interests of the trust
enterprise or other entitled beneficiaries or reversioners or insofar
as it is demanded in good faith.
§ 69
Trustees shall provide each other with information in the same
way as they provide entitled beneficiaries with information, i.e.,
not only relating to individual transactions concluded by them-
selves but also relating to other facts and circumstances.
Trustees or their universal successors in title who lapse for any
reason shall, to the best of their ability, provide succeeding trus-
tees with unrestricted information concerning all facts and cir-
cumstances and hand over all the books of account, papers or
assets concerning the trust enterprise insofar as they are not enti-
tled to a right of offset or retention relating to the latter.
Succeeding trustees shall examine the business conducted by
lapsed trustees according to the requirements of the circumstances
and assert possible claims of the trust enterprise against them or
their successors in title.
bbb. To co-trus-
tees, etc.

– 245 –
§ 70
Within the frame of the law and the trust instrument, the
powers of the trustees are determined in case of doubt, by the
regulations concerning trusts in general, and possibly by the in-
structions of the Register Office.
Where at the discretion of the trustees engaged in the conduct
of business it appears necessary and the trust instrument does not
make any other provision, these may conclude arbitration and
conciliation agreements on behalf of the trust enterprise and es-
tablish branches, possibly with special trustees.
Where branches are established by registered enterprises, they
and the trustees or representatives concerned must be registered
in the Trust Register for the purpose of entry and publication and
the facts and circumstances required to be registered must be
declared.
§ 71
Within the frame of the law and the trust instrument, trustees
as creditors may demand settlement of their claims (reimburse-
ment of expenses and applications on behalf of the trust enterprise
and of the losses they incur which accrue from the enterprise,
furthermore, release from the obligations entered into at their
expense in the interests of the enterprise or otherwise as well as
for trustee fees and the reimbursement of the interest customary
in the country) only insofar as they are not to blame for their
accrual and the claims appear to be justified by the circumstances.
Where a trustee fee is not or not adequately provided for in
the trust instrument and nothing otherwise is indicated by the
legal relationship between the participants, the Register Office
may, under reservation of other admissible directives, validly
determine a trustee fee which is commensurate with the circum-
stances, after hearing the participants.
Where claims of the trustees as such have been satisfied by an-
other party which, in addition to the trust enterprise, was under
obligation to do so, the right to satisfaction from the trust enter-
prise passes, in the absence of any other agreement, insofar as the
claims were well founded and the right to compensation pursuant
e. Trust powers
aa. In general
bb. Claims for
compensation
and trustee
fees
aaa. In
general

– 246 –
to the underlying legal relationship is not excluded, by operation
of law to the other party.
The claims of the trustees as such take precedence over the
claims against the trust enterprise arising from the beneficial in-
terest if the law or the trust instrument does not determine oth-
erwise.
§ 72
The claims of the trustees arising from the conduct of business
are directed, with reservation of the law of settlement and reten-
tion, against the trust enterprise in the first instance and with this
end in view claims are to be made first against the yield and then
against the trust property itself. In the second instance, the claims
are directed, in the absence of any other order, against those
beneficiaries who, in the individual case, are enriched or who have
derived benefit without valuable consideration from the trust
enterprise or from the acts of management.
Where several beneficiaries have enriched themselves or have
derived benefit without valuable consideration, the claim for
compensation shall be made in proportion to their beneficial in-
terest, as they derived benefit or enriched themselves.
Where claims can be made against the trustees for obligations
of the trust enterprise, the trustees may, provided the enterprise
does not, for instance, have a right to claim compensation from
them, or nothing else is indicated, also surrender trust property in
lieu of performance.
A trustee shall forfeit his claims up to the extent of the dam-
ages caused by a breach of trust, with reservation of further pos-
sible claims by the enterprise and other injured parties.
§ 73
Within the frame of this law and the trust instrument, the pro-
visions concerning representation by the board of trustees under
the general provisions concerning legal entities shall be applicable
with respect to scope, duration, effect, exercise, etc., then, sup-
plementally, those concerning the trust power under the trusts in
general and those concerning the conduct of trust business.
bbb. Assertion
4. Trust powers
a. In
general

– 247 –
Those trustees appointed to exercise the trust power as well as
others with signature rights and the right to terminate or amend
the trust power or the authority to represent shall, in the case of
enterprises entered in the Trust Register, be registered without
delay, with the addition of the proof of their appointment and the
relevant facts and circumstances capable of registration shall be
declared, insofar as a re-appointment is not involved.
A transfer of the trust power as a whole or in individual parts
is admissible within the frame of the trust instrument pursuant, if
necessary, to the law or the regulations concerning the transfer of
the conduct of trust business.
Art 74
In the event of danger resulting from undue delay or if other
important reasons exist, the Register Office may, regardless of the
admissibility of appointing legal advisors, upon application of
participants or ex officio and after hearing or without hearing
participants, also appoint and likewise remove authorised signato-
ries or other representatives for the trust enterprise, or a divison
or a special trust or, finally, a branch office.
The removal, however, may only take place, notwithstanding
the possible claims of those removed against the suspected par-
ticipants, by virtue of the agreement, owing to tortious act or on
grounds of violation of personal relationships.
§ 75
Trustees who conduct business and other bodies or represen-
tatives of the trust enterprise shall be appropriately entitled by
operation of law to at least those powers and be subject to those
obligations which are provided under the general regulations
concerning legal entities for representation in the case of the
board of trustees, with reservation of deviating provisions of the
law.
Where it is not determined to the contrary and, possibly, is
also registered in the Trust Register, or a priority is not involved,
trustees who conduct business shall exercise their trust authority
jointly.
b. Appointment
of represen-
tatives by the
Re
gister Office
c. Minimum trust
authority and
minimum rep-
resentative
authority by
operation of
law

– 248 –
Where the co-trustees have not acted collectively, such an
act, in the absence of any other directive, shall require the
approval of the remainder in order to be effective with respect
to the trust enterprise, without prejudice to possible claims of
the injured party and bona fide third parties against the party
who acted.
However, a statement or an announcement may be validly
handed in to the trust enterprise and also to one of the trustees
engaged in the conduct of business, or to a representative, in the
same manner as to a member of the board of directors of a legal
entity.
§ 76
The trustees appointed to exercise trust authority as well as
others authorised to sign shall, in the case of trust enterprises with
obligation to register or of those which register voluntarily, when
registration first takes place, sign their signature before the Reg-
istrar or submit it in a certified form as in the case of the board of
directors as a body of a company with legal personality or their
representatives. The same act of signing before or the submission
of a certified signature to the Registrar shall be performed by
those appointed subsequently if, at a later date, there is a change
in the composition of these trustees or authorised signatories or in
the trust authority or authority to represent.
In the absence of any other trust directive and, possibly, entry
in the Trust Register, signing on behalf of the trust enterprise in
dealings with third parties shall, in the case of co-trustees, be un-
dertaken by all the trustees in the same manner as by members of
the board of directors of a legal entity in order to be valid with
respect to the enterprise and third parties, and a seal or suchlike
may also be used for the printed company name.
Should signing not ensue in the prescribed manner, those who
act shall be liable jointly and severally to the trust enterprise and
bona fide third parties in the event that the trust enterprise repu-
diates the validity of the transaction.
Where transactions are undertaken on behalf of the trust en-
terprise verbally or in a similar manner, without signature, this
d. Si gnature ri ghts

– 249 –
shall be made recognisable to third parties and, if necessary, shall
ensue jointly, in order to avoid the previously mentioned conse-
quences.
§ 77
The relevant regulations relating to legal entities shall be ap-
plied accordingly to the evidence of authority to deal with
authorities and individuals, on the understanding that the author-
ity appointing a trustee or a competent third party may also issue
a document which provides evidence of authority.
Where a document is issued providing evidence of the trustee’s
authority, the trustee shall be under obligation to return the
document to or deposit it with the Register Office after the ter-
mination of his trust authority, for the trust enterprise to dispose
of freely.
Should the trustee not be held to this by the trust enterprise
or, possibly, by the universal successor of the trust enterprise, the
trust enterprise or the said universal successor in title shall be
responsible, with the right of recourse to the trustee, to the bona
fide third party, unless the third party has knowledge from else-
where of the termination of trust authority.
§ 78
Where the law does not determine to the contrary, beneficiar-
ies and the like shall be deemed to be those who pursuant to the
trust instrument draw benefit from the trust enterprise, either at
the present time or at some time in the future, either as a share in
the yield or the trust assets, or both, regardless of whether the
beneficiary has a claim thereto or not, or whether security docu-
ments have been issued concerning the beneficial interest or a
non-profit making or similar trust enterprise is involved and with
reservation of the beneficiary’s simultaneous claims otherwise due
as a participant or third party.
Provided the beneficial interest of persons is not excluded, re-
cipients of beneficial interest (holders of beneficial interest) shall
be deemed to be those persons who, pursuant to the trust instru-
e. Evidence of
authorit y
IV. Trust benefici-
aries
1. Beneficial
interest
in general
a. Kinds

– 250 –
ment or the law are actually entitled in a prescribed manner to a
specifically designated benefit and should they also have a legal
claim thereto shall be deemed to be entitled beneficiaries (entitled
to enjoyment of the trust).
Where the right of beneficial interest in general is limited to a
strictly defined circle of persons (firms or legal entities) and after
the lapse of the holders of beneficial interest others, on the basis
of the trust instrument, are designated as beneficiaries, pursuant
to a certain arrangement, by virtue of a legal claim, to succeed as
holders of beneficial interest, the latter shall have reversionary
rights (entitled reversioners).
Where it is not determined to the contrary, the expression
beneficiary or trust beneficiary or enjoyment of the trust shall
also embrace the reversioner with and without claim, in particular
also the allottee and the beneficial interest also the reversion.
§ 79
Beneficial interest may be qualified, limited, tied to a condition
or the like or also be dedicated for impersonal purposes.
Within the frame of the law, the right of the holders of benefi-
cial interest, which rests upon the trust instrument, is restricted
solely by this and by the possibly existing reversionary right of
others.
Where the trust instrument allows beneficial interest and re-
versionary rights, such rights shall be treated solely as restricted
creditor rights which, utilised pursuant to the law and the trust
instrument, may be applied and transferred to others.
It may be determined by way of ordinance that, in the case of
the relevant provision in the trust instrument being otherwise
invalid, the designation of the beneficiaries may not be deferred or
the yield or other advantages deriving from the trust enterprise
may not be left undistributed or, similarly, that the non-disposal
of trust property or beneficial rights may not be extended for
longer than the period allowed for the nomination of a reversion-
ary heir insofar as important reasons do not justify an exception,
as in the case of non-profit making trust enterprises or inalienable
trust property or similar property.
b. Legal nature of
the beneficial
interest, etc.

– 251 –
§ 80
The trust beneficial interest may accrue with or without valu-
able consideration, for instance by the remittance of purchase
payments, regular payments or similar means, by the settlor for
the beneficiaries or by the latter as settlors to the trust enterprise
and with or without the issuance of security documents relating
to the beneficial interest, insofar as the trust instrument does not
provide for a non-profit making trust or a trust having a similar
purpose or object with beneficiaries not appointed beforehand or
with impersonal beneficial interests, etc.
Rights and obligations arising from the beneficial interest may,
particularly pursuant to the trust instrument, also after the trust
enterprise has been formed, be constituted by original beneficiar-
ies for other participants or third parties as new beneficiaries in
the same or in a different manner or gradually (successively con-
stituted beneficial interests).
Certain bodies or offices or third parties may be conceded the
authority to grant trust beneficial interest or to withdraw same at
their absolute discretion or owing to the discontinuation of cer-
tain prerequisites or a right of provisional acquisition or redemp-
tion of the beneficial interest, effective with respect to all parties,
may be conceded against payment of a redemption sum in the
event of the said beneficial interest being alienated or the like.
Upon application of the trustees conducting business or otherwise
competent offices, the said provisional acquisition or redemption
of the beneficial interest may be annotated in the Trust Register.
The acceptance of the rights derived from the beneficial inter-
est by the beneficiaries anticipates that only advantages are associ-
ated therewith and that the circumstances do not indicate other-
wise.
The accrual and loss of beneficial interest may be regulated
also without the existence of a membership, as a deviation and
analogously, pursuant to the rules concerning the acquisition and
loss of beneficial interest drawn up in the case of registered coop-
erative societies.
c. Acquisition and
loss (existence
and loss)
aa. In
general

– 252 –
§ 81
In particular, beneficial interests may also be conceded with-
out contribution by the beneficiaries to the trust fund or other-
wise to the trust enterprise (gratuitous beneficial interests includ-
ing gratuitous reversionary interests) and sociopolitical beneficial
interests.
Where doubt exists regarding the latter kind of beneficial in-
terests, the regulations concerning sociopolitical share and profit
rights in the case of legal entities shall be applied accordingly.
The regulation concerning gradual distribution from the trust
assets remains reserved.
§ 82
Where pursuant to the trust instrument the existence or non-
existence of a certain attribute (skill) as, for example, belonging to
a certain profession or circle of people or a family, domicile in the
country or in a certain commune, etc., is required for the acquisi-
tion (the conferment) or the loss of the beneficial interest, this
attribute, in case of doubt, must or must not exist at the time of
devolution of the possession of the beneficial interest upon the
reversioner.
Where the position of beneficiary may only be occupied dur-
ing the existence of such an attribute, this attribute must, in case
of doubt, continue to exist for the period of time concerned.
§ 83
In particular, the creditors of a trust enterprise may also be
granted the right to convert their creditor rights into ordinary or
preference beneficial interests which may be combined with the
possession of a security (convertible bonds)
Conversely, the entitled beneficiaries may, in the same man-
ner, be granted the right to convert their beneficiary rights into
unconditional creditor rights (convertible beneficial interests).
The application of the regulations concerning the gradual dis-
tribution of assets to the conversion of convertible beneficial in-
terests remains reserved.
bb. Gratuitous
beneficial inter-
est and socio-
political benefi-
cial interest
cc. S
pecial skill
dd. Convertible
creditor and
beneficiary
ri
ghts

– 253 –
§ 84
The trust instrument may grant the beneficiaries a right of
termination for withdrawal from the beneficiary relationship, to
which, in the absence of a detailed directive, the regulations con-
cerning notice of termination in the case of registered cooperative
societies shall be applied supplementally.
Should the trust instrument also grant a beneficiary with a
claim to the delivery of a part of the trust fund or similar, the
right, under certain circumstances, such as notice, etc., to with-
draw from the beneficiary relationship, the withdrawal shall be
effective only provided the regulations concerning the gradual
distribution of trust assets are observed.
§ 85
The trust instrument may also determine the reasons for which
a beneficiary may be excluded from the trust relationship by the
trustees or another office.
Following notification of exclusion by the trustees or the
competent office as trustees, the beneficiary may no longer be
active, unless danger exists in undue delay, and from this time on
shall be excluded from exercising a possible right to vote or any
similar right.
The exclusion shall be null and void if the regulations con-
cerning the gradual distribution of trust assets have not been ob-
served.
The claims of the excluded party against the suspected parties
in another legal relationship, such as an agreement, a tortious act
or on grounds of violation of personal relationships, also remain
reserved.
§ 86
Where the beneficial interest from a trust enterprise is handed
over to the entitled beneficiary, pursuant to the settlor’s directive,
without valuable consideration, the settlor or the settlor’s legal
heir, provided the latter personally is not unworthy of the trust,
shall have the right to revoke possession of the beneficial or rever-
ee. Notice of
termination,
etc.
ff. Exclusion
ggg. Revocation
aaa. On grounds
of unworthi-
ness of trust

– 254 –
sionary interest on grounds of trust unworthiness, with effect
against the culpable parties:
1. If the entitled beneficiary or reversionary concerned has com-
mitted or attempted to commit a serious crime against the set-
tlor or a person closely connected with the settlor,
2. if vis-a-vis the settlor or one of his relatives the entitled benefi-
ciary or reversionary concerned has seriously violated the duty
incumbent upon him under family law, or
3. if the previously mentioned entitled parties fail in an unjustifi-
able manner to fulfil the conditions or other obligations con-
nected with the possession of the beneficial or reversionary
interest.
Where in the execution of his duty as trustee of another trust
the settlor has procured the beneficial interest without valuable
consideration, the settlor of the other trust and/or his heirs shall,
having regard to trust unworthiness, be considered as settlors
and/or heirs.
Where in the execution of another duty to a third party, for
which the said third party has effected or promised to effect a
gratuitous counter performance, a settlor has procured beneficial
interest without valuable consideration for a person, the preced-
ing regulations concerning trust unworthiness shall be applicable
to the third party or the said third party’s universal successors in
title.
Trust unworthiness shall be cancelled by condonation by the
settlor or by the third party concerned.
§ 87
The revocation of an order concerning the promise of a gra-
tuitous handing-over of the beneficial interest and the refusal of
fulfilment may also ensue from the settlor or the settlor’s heirs
who have taken over the fulfilment of the promise:
1. If, since the promise of the gratuitous handing-over of assets
to the trust enterprise for the purpose of beneficial interest
without valuable consideration, the financial circumstances of
the settlor or the settlor’s heirs concerned have changed to
bbb. For other
reasons

– 255 –
such an extent that the further fulfilment of the promise to the
trust enterprise, unless the settlor or the settlor’s heirs have the
beneficial interest, would burden him (them) exceptionally,
2. if, since the previously mentioned promise, duties to support
under family law have become incumbent upon the settlor or
the heirs concerned, which beforehand did not exist at all or
only to a far lesser degree.
Where in his capacity as trustee of another trust a settlor has
formed a trust enterprise or, on the basis of an obligation to a
third party, for which the said third party has effected or prom-
ised to effect a gratuitous counter performance, has procured
beneficial interest for another person, the prerequisites for revo-
cation must have ensued in the person of the first trustee and/or
of the third party concerned, or their heirs.
Rescission by the creditors of the settlor or the settlor’s heirs is
reserved.
§ 88
Revocation of the possession of beneficial or reversionary in-
terest shall ensue through the duly authorised parties in favour of
the settlor or the third party concerned and, should it concern
their heirs or other successors in title, in their favour, with notifi-
cation to the trust enterprise and to those parties against whom
there are grounds of revocation.
Where a reversioner has committed a serious crime endanger-
ing life or limb against his predecessor in possession of the benefi-
cial interest in order to gain this possession, revocation may be
applied against him in favour of the beneficiary succeeding him.
Revocation may ensue within a year, commencing at that time
when the party entitled to revocation gains knowledge of the
grounds of revocation.
Revocation shall be excluded if five years have already elapsed
since the occurrence of the grounds of revocation, unless the
grounds of revocation were in the form of a serious crime and the
prosecution or execution is not yet statute barred.
Regulations applicable to the statute of limitations shall be ap-
plied accordingly to the course of the time allowed and those
ccc. Application of
revocation and
reference

– 256 –
relating to the making of a gift shall be applied supplementally to
the legal relationship between the settlor and the beneficiaries
concerned and/or their heirs.
§ 89
Where as the result of a donation without valuable considera-
tion a settlor deprives himself of the possibility to defray his nec-
essary support or to fulfil his legal duty to support, the judge may
put the trust enterprise under obligation to support the parties in
need of or entitled to support, taking these performances into
account against that which the trust enterprise has to pay pursu-
ant to the trust instrument and against that application without
valuable consideration to the possible entitled beneficiary.
Where in his capacity as trustee of another trust a settlor has
formed a trust enterprise or in the execution of another duty to a
third party who has effected or promised to effect a counter per-
formance in his favour, has procured beneficial interest without
valuable consideration, the prerequisites for the need or the duty
to support must have ensued in the person of the first settlor
and/or of the third party concerned.
The preceding regulations shall be applied accordingly in the
case of mixed donations without valuable consideration.
The action by the heirs for reduction on grounds of violation
of the compulsory portion, rescission by the creditors and claims
for enrichment of the parties in need of or entitled to support
against the enriched party who is no longer a beneficiary is re-
served.
§ 90
The division of beneficial interests as a whole, the alienation or
charging of such a part and the consolidation of several independ-
ent beneficial interests or parts thereof which amount to more
than an entire beneficial interest in the hands of one party shall, in
the absence of any other trust directive or regulation of the law,
without prejudice to the rights of other beneficiaries, be admissi-
ble only with the assent of the trustees engaged in the conduct of
business.
hh. Failure to fulfil
the duty to
su
pport
ii. Division and
consolidation
aaa. In
general

– 257 –
Provided a trust enterprise with a special system of succession
is not involved, the assent may, for important reasons, upon ap-
plication of the beneficiaries, be substituted by the Register Of-
fice, after hearing the trustees engaged in the conduct of business
and, possibly, other legally interested parties.
If a register is kept of the beneficiaries or the participants in
the case of liability and liability to make further contributions
and, accordingly, a list of participants is also kept, the changes
brought about by division or consolidation also, in particular, the
joint representative, shall be entered in the register.
§ 91
If several such parts of beneficial interest are consolidated in
adequate quantity in the hands of one party, they shall, by virtue
of the law, be accorded the same rights as an undivided beneficial
interest and in the case of the consolidation of several hitherto
independet beneficial interests a corresponding increase of rights
shall ensue in the absence of any other directive.
Where beneficial interests are simultaneously combined with
obligations, the part beneficiaries shall, after the division, be liable
jointly and severally for the obligations including the outstanding
amounts only insofar as these assets embrace payments to the
trust fund or a joint and several liability or liability to make fur-
ther contributions exists and without prejudice to possible rights
of recourse.
When several independent beneficial interests are consoli-
dated, the obligations also increase accordingly. In this event, the
relevant provisions concerning several shares in the case of regis-
tered cooperative societies shall be applied with regard to liability
and liability to make further contributions.
Upon demand of the trust enterprise, such beneficiaries with
part claims shall appoint a mutual representative; otherwise, the
trust enterprise may undertake against one of them all declara-
tions of intent and other legally significant acts, with validity for
and against all, which concern them all or, upon application of the
trustees who conduct business, the Register Office may appoint
such a representative, at the expense of the beneficiaries involved.
bbb. Effect

– 258 –
§ 92
A statutory limitation of the reversionary interest or the pos-
session of the beneficial interest may only ensue in favour of the
reserve fund for balance sheet and/or accounting losses, with
reservation of the regulations concerning the devolution of the
assets to the state, etc.
A statutory limitation of the reversionary interest as such only
commences to run from the time when the rights associated with
the beneficial interest could have been exercised by virtue of
devolution upon the reversioner concerned but were not exer-
cised.
The possession of beneficial interest as a whole is subject,
moreover, to the ordinary statute of limitations unless the law
permits an exception.
§ 93
Where in the case of trust enterprises which do not pursue
commercial activities a beneficiary is entitled to the payment of a
redemption sum as the result of notice of termination, exclusion
and similar and security documents have not been issued, the
claim, in case of doubt, shall be comprised of that amount in cash
with which, according to the value of the trust enterprise’s pay-
ment, a corresponding pension could be acquired from a sound
annuity institution.
In the case of trust enterprises with commercial activities or
with security documents, the redemption sum shall, in case of
doubt, be determined on the basis of a winding up balance, with-
out liquidation having to take place because of this.
If important reasons exist, however, the judge may determine
the settlement in a different manner.
§ 94
In general, rights and obligations of the beneficiaries are de-
termined pursuant to the law or the trust instrument, if the case
arises, pursuant to the terms of the security documents issued in
relation to the beneficial interest and, supplementally, pursuant to
the regulations concerning trusts in general.
kk. Statute of
limitations
II. Redemption
sum
d. Rights and
obligations
arising from
the beneficial
interest
aa. In
general

– 259 –
In the case of identical prerequisites and identical perform-
ances of the beneficiaries, their rights and obligations may, in the
absence of any other directive, without their assent, only be
treated in the same manner, in particular, with respect to amend-
ment, restrictions or rescission and individual beneficiaries may
not be favoured to the detriment of others.
In the absence of any other directive, beneficiaries shall have
no right to dissolve the trust enterprise, to individual elements of
trust assets or to divide these.
If a beneficiary makes contributions or undertakes to make
contributions to the trust fund and the law does not indicate oth-
erwise, the said beneficiary as settlor is in this regard simultane-
ously subject to these relevant regulations.
§ 95
Where a beneficiary with a claim to payment from yield and
elements of capital is paid amounts without further information
concerning their character, it shall be assumed that they are in the
nature of yield, with reservation, nevertheless, of the obligation of
possible restitution pursuant to the principles concerning unjusti-
fiable enrichment, if necessary, pursuant to the rules concerning
the gradual distribution of trust assets.
Where a holder of beneficial interest loses the right of benefi-
cial interest during a term of administration or lapses during such
a term, following the conclusion of which the regular yield or
another beneficial interest is distributed and no security docu-
ments have been issued, the earnings from the beneficial interest
shall be distributed after the conclusion of the duration of their
period of possession during the term of administration to the
lapsed holders of beneficial interest and/or the predecessor’s uni-
versal successors in title and the successors in possession of bene-
ficial interest, pursuant to the regulations concerning withdrawal
and distribution of assets and yield. This shall also apply in par-
ticular in the case of family trust enterprises.
In the case of security documents, the yield or other payment
of assets shall, in the absence of any other directive, be paid to the
bb. Distribution of
beneficial inter-
est and substi-
tute claims

– 260 –
bearer of the securities at the due time of payment of the claim
concerned.
The amounts to be distributed to the beneficiaries may be
rounded down insofar as the result of a liquidation or redemption
is not involved or nothing otherwise has been determined.
Where in the common interest an entitled beneficiary has in-
curred expenses and as a result of this others actually enjoy bene-
fits, the said entitled beneficiary shall, with due announcement of
the said expenses to the trustees engaged in the conduct of busi-
ness, have a right in preference to other beneficiaries to commen-
surate reimbursement from the beneficial interest concerned be-
fore distribution, possibly also for that which is otherwise not
obtainable from an entitled beneficiary.
§ 96
If security documents relating to beneficial interests have not
been issued and the trust instrument does not provide otherwise,
the relevant provisions in the case of membership under the gen-
eral regulations concerning legal entities and, supplementally,
those of the Code of Obligations shall apply to the beneficiary’s
delay in performance.
The trust instrument may provide that in the case of a benefi-
ciary’s or third party’s delay in performance the beneficial interest
acquired on the basis of this obligation to perform may be de-
clared void in favour of the reserve fund for balance sheet or ac-
counting losses, without release from the beneficiary’s’ or third
party’s obligation to the trust enterprise.
Where concerning the security documents issued in connec-
tion with the beneficial interest performances are in arrears, the
trustees engaged in the conduct of business may, by operation of
law, declare the beneficiary’s entire rights accruing from the secu-
rity documents concerned to be forfeited pursuant to the regula-
tions concerning undue delay on the part of the shareholder,
without the beneficiary being released as a result of this from the
remainder of his obligation to perform, insofar as the said obliga-
tion to perform relates to the trust fund or the liability or liability
to make further contributions.
cc. Undue dela y

– 261 –
§ 97
In the absence of any other trust directive a beneficiary may
ward off the obligations arising from the beneficial interest to
make further contributions to the trust enterprise, insofar as the
said contributions are not intended for the trust fund, by leaving
his alienable beneficial interest in the hands of the trust enterprise
in a written statement in favour of the reserve fund, for balance
sheet or accounting losses, whereby his predecessors in the bene-
ficial interest are also released from the obligation to effect con-
tributions overdue from the time of their beneficial interest.
Where pursuant to a certain arrangement reversioners are pre-
sent by virtue of the right of succession, these reversioners, after
they have been informed in writing by the trustees engaged in the
conduct of business or possibly the other office authorised pursu-
ant to the trust instrument of the undue delay in performance or
of the death of a beneficiary or defaulting third party, shall have
the right, according to the sequence of their reversionary entitle-
ment, to redeem these beneficiary or reversionary entitlements in
return for the fulfilment or, where admissible, in return for ap-
propriate security for the defaulted performance (right of re-
demption).
If the right of redemption is not exercised pursuant to the
foregoing paragraph and in all other cases, the spouse or the
beneficiary’s issue may exercise the said right of redemption pur-
suant to the directive of the Register Office. If there are several
parties entitled to redeem who are unable to agree, these shall also
exercise the right of redemption pursuant to the directive of the
Register Office.
§ 98
Within the frame of their rights pursuant to the trust instru-
ment and the law, entitled beneficiaries and reversioners, indi-
vidually or in groups or all together, may demand the observance
and/or the fulfilment of their rights by the trust enterprise and the
trustees or others under obligation in this respect and, for this
purpose, also safeguarding measures.
dd. Conversion and
right of re-
dem
ption
ee. Assertion of
rights
aaa. Beneficiaries’
ri
ghts

– 262 –
Entitled beneficiaries, individually or in groups or all together
also, equally, reversioners may only assert their claim against
third parties otherwise insofar as the law makes provision for this
or the third parties themselves are under obligation to them or
have committed a tortious act.
The defendant may apply for a security deposit pursuant to
the regulations concerning voidability action in the case of legal
entities.
By means of the trust instrument trustees or third parties may
be entrusted exclusively with the protection of the rights accruing
from the possession of beneficial interest or reversionary entitle-
ment against non-beneficiaries, insofar as the assertion of the
rights of beneficiaries among one another is not considered or the
interests of the trust enterprise are not in opposition to the rights
of the beneficiaries.
§ 99
The entitled beneficiaries and reversioners, individually or in
groups or all together, may, on behalf and in favour of the trust
enterprise, demand from the trustees or other persons or offices
under obligation in this regard observance of the regulations, in
particular the fulfilment of their trust duties pursuant to the law
or the trust instrument and the cancellation of inadmissible meas-
ures, or may take direct safeguarding measures against acts or
omissions of such acts which endanger the rights of the trust en-
terprise.
Where trustees fail to assert in accordance with their duty and
the circumstances a due or not due but endangered claim of the
trust enterprise against participants or third parties as, in particu-
lar, the claim on grounds of disturbance or withdrawal of posses-
sion or ownership of trust property, individual entitled benefici-
aries and/or entitled reversioners or groups or all together may,
moreover, in the absence of any other directive, themselves call
upon the dilatory trustees to assert the claims within a reasonable
period of time to be determined or request the Register Office to
call upon them after the expiry of this period of time or, in the
bbb. Rights of
the trust
enter
prise

– 263 –
case of inadequate assertion on the part of the trustees, the enti-
tled parties concerned may assert their claim on behalf and in
favour of the enterprise.
The regulations concerning the lodging of security in the case
of voidability action shall be applied accordingly in favour of the
defendants.
§ 100
Where an organisation of the beneficiaries is provided for in
the trust instrument and is implemented or is ordered by the
Register Office, the powers of the beneficiaries may be applied
pursuant to this organisation and with reservation of possible
minority rights and such rights as those to which only the indi-
vidual is entitled, in particular established rights, such as the right
to due yield or similar income.
Insofar as they are not already entitled to this, the organisation
as well as possible minorities shall have the capacity in official
proceedings, in which they shall be represented by authorised
representatives in conformity with the articles or otherwise, to be
a party in and to conduct legal proceedings.
Resolutions passed by a meeting of entitled beneficiaries
and/or reversioners including the preferentially or similarly enti-
tled parties, summoned on the basis of such an organisation may,
pursuant to the regulations concerning the rescission of resolu-
tions of the supreme body, under the general regulations con-
cerning legal entities, be rescinded by the participants concerned
or cancelled ex officio, particularly if the said resolutions are un-
lawful, immoral or endanger the state.
Furthermore, resolutions may be rescinded in the same man-
ner if they oppose the interests of the trust enterprise, the entirety
of the beneficiaries or a special category of these as, for instance,
the preferentially entitled beneficiaries, and are only suitable for
causing loss to a minority or individuals.
The implementation of the proceedings concerned shall be ex-
pedited by the competent authority.
ccc. In the case of
an organisa-
tion

– 264 –
§ 101
The regulations concerning the assertion of rights when an or-
ganisation exists shall not be applicable if the certificate holders
act jointly by operation of law, pursuant to the regulations con-
cerning the community of creditors in the case of bonds or if, in
the case of trust enterprises with non-profit making or similar
objects, the interests of the beneficiaries are taken care of by the
representative of public law.
Where in a trust enterprise there are beneficial interests other
than for persons (firms or legal entities), everyone except the rep-
resentative of public law may, with the assent of the Register
Office, demand their fulfilment pursuant to the object of the en-
terprise (impersonal beneficial interest).
§ 102
Where beneficial interest is not combined with a bearer paper
or the designation of beneficiaries is not left to the unqualified
discretion of the trustees, other offices or third parties or a trust
enterprise with a non-profit making or similar object with un-
designated recipients of beneficial interest is not otherwise present
or impersonal beneficial interests do not exist, the trustees en-
gaged in the conduct of business, particularly in the case of family
trust enterprises, in the absence of other offices under obligation
pursuant to the trust instrument to fulfil this duty, shall set up a
register of the specifically designated entitled beneficiaries and/or
living entitled reversioners. The register shall be kept regularly
and corrected continuously.
The register shall be available for every entitled party to ex-
amine and copy in good faith at the expense of the entitled party,
either at the premises of those under obligation to keep the regis-
ter or at the Register Office during the usual hours of business if
the register is deposited there for examination.
If the register is not deposited at the Register Office for ex-
amination an entitled beneficiary may, at his own expense, de-
mand from those under obligation to keep the register a certificate
(certification of receipt of beneficial interest, certificate of rever-
sionary interest) which confirms his right accruing from the
beneficial interest or the reversionary interest.
ddd. Exceptions,
etc.
e. Register of
beneficiaries
aa. Obligation to
keep a register
and examina-
tion

– 265 –
In the event of the certified right being dropped or amended,
such a certificate shall, if the case arises, be returned to those un-
der obligation to keep the register in order that it may be cor-
rected.
§ 103
In particular, the register shall contain: Name, first name, place
of residence, also the date and place of birth if at all possible, if
security documents are not issued, and/or company name and
domicile of the holder of beneficial interest, if applicable of the
living entitled reversioners including the same information con-
cerning their possible joint representative, the date of acquisition
or loss of possession of the beneficial interest or the reversionary
interest, the kind of beneficial interest and similar information.
The entry of a transfer of the beneficial and/or the reversion-
ary interest shall ensue, in the absence of any other directive, on
the basis of an identification document relating to the transfer,
correct with respect to form, in the succession upon death, upon
announcement of the heir, legatee, executor or administrator
and/or the probate authority and, in the case of the dissolution of
a firm or legal entity, upon announcement of other universal suc-
cessors in title or of the liquidators or the trusteeship in bank-
ruptcy or the probate administration.
In the case of refusal to register, this shall ensue if there are
important reasons upon application of those entitled to apply
pursuant to the directive of the Register Office.
§ 104
As soon as such a register has been set up, only that person
shall be deemed to be entitled with respect to the exercise of the
rights and obligations accruing to the holder of beneficial interest
or to the entitled reversioner who is entered in the register.
The acquiring party must acknowledge the legally significant
acts undertaken against the said acquiring party by the trust en-
terprise before the registration of the transfer vis-a-vis the trans-
feror or, conversely, by the latter vis-a-vis the trust enterprise
with regard to the beneficiary relationship.
bb. Re gistration
cc. Effect

– 266 –
The transferor and the acquiring party shall be liable jointly
and severally for the performances outstanding from the benefici-
ary relationship at the time of registration.
Pursuant to the regulations concerning responsibility, the
trustees or others under obligation in this regard shall be liable
jointly and severally for losses caused by the register being kept
inadequately or by an unjustified refusal to register.
§ 105
In the absence of any other trust directive or if for any reason
the regulations concerning the beneficial interest cannot be suita-
bly implemented, if, in particular, the rights accruing from the
beneficial interest do not devolve upon or are not accepted by the
persons (firms or legal entities) considered in one way or the
other, it shall be assumed in the case of trust enterprises other
than non-profit making or similar trust enterprises that during his
lifetime only the settlor has the right to hold the beneficial inter-
est and if the settlor does not order otherwise by disposition inter
vivos or mortis causa concerning the succession, that only the
legal heirs shall have the right of succession pursuant to their title
to an inheritance to the beneficial interest also, in particular, to
the assets (implied ownership of beneficial interest and implied
succession).
Should the settlor have been under obligation to form a trust
enterprise on grounds of assets paid in by a third party without
valuable consideration or should the beneficial interest have been
acquired only under these conditions, it shall be assumed in the
case of lacking or inadequate directive that this third party is the
holder of beneficial interest and/or his universal successors in title
are implied successors (implied beneficial interest in the case of
indirect settlorship).
Where persons other than natural persons should be entitled
to the beneficial interest, the further designation of the benefici-
aries in the case of the termination of the firm or legal entity shall,
in the absence of any other directive, conform with the regula-
tions concerning the devolution of membership resulting from the
2. Designation
of the benefici-
aries
a. In the case of
no directive or
an inadequate
directive
aa. In
general

– 267 –
dissolution of firms or legal entities in the case of registered coop-
erative societies.
Where a quite general non-profit making or charitable or
similar object is provided for in the trust articles, without details
being stated concerning the manner in which it shall be fulfilled,
alone or in addition to other objects, the Government, upon ap-
plication of the interested parties or upon notice from other
authorities or ex officio, of its own accord, shall direct in admin-
istrative proceedings as required to implement this only generally
stated object, as far as possible within the intendment of the trust
instrument.
§ 106
The following rules for interpretation shall be applied regard-
ing beneficiaries:
1. Where children of a certain person are designated as benefici-
aries, these shall be deemed to be the issue of the said person
who are entitled to inherit and the spouse shall be deemed to
be the surviving spouse, if and as long as the said spouse has
not remarried;
2. the estate, heirs, successors in title, family, relatives, next of
kin or similar of a person shall be deemed to be the descen-
dants entitled to inherit and the surviving spouse if and as long
as the said spouse has not remarried and, in the absence of
such, those persons (firms or legal entities) who are entitled to
inherit the estate of that other person.
A reversioner who was not yet born but already procreated at
the time of devolution of the beneficial entitlement from the
holder hitherto to the next successor pursuant to the law or trust
instrument shall be deemed to have been born before the case of
succession.
The rules of interpretation of the law of succession concerning
the heirs and if necessary the legatees shall be applied supple-
mentally.
bb. Interpretation
rules, etc.
aaa. With regard to
the beneficiar-
ies

– 268 –
§ 107
In case of doubt, the following shall apply with respect to
beneficial interest shares:
1. Should the title of the beneficial interest devolve upon issue
entitled to inherit and the surviving spouse as beneficiary, the
legal succession shall also be valid. If, however, other heirs are
designated as beneficiaries, it shall devolve upon them pursu-
ant to their title to inherit.
2. Should other persons, not entitled to inherit, be designated as
beneficiaries without their share being defined, they shall be
entitled to the beneficial interest in equal parts.
3. Where a beneficial interest lapses due, for example, to the pre-
decease of the settlor, owing to refusal by the beneficiaries,
revocation of the beneficial interest or similar, this share shall
devolve upon the other beneficiaries in equal parts.
Where issue entitled to an inheritance, a spouse, parents,
grandparents, brothers and sisters are the beneficiaries, the title of
the beneficial interest shall devolve upon them, even though they
do not enter upon the settlor’s inheritance.
Where the expression of a directive concerning beneficial in-
terest is questionable, it shall be interpreted in such a manner as to
ensure that the beneficial interest may be exercised with the least
possible hindrance.
The rules of the law of succession relating to the interpretation
of shares of an inheritance or of legacies if the case arises shall be
applied supplementally.
§ 108
By means of the trust instrument or an office empowered for
this purposes, a system of succession may be provided which
deals with the holding of beneficial interest or parts thereof per-
manently with or without liability on the part of the current
holder of beneficial interest to effect compensation for the ex-
cluded, equally close or similar relatives in such a manner that
either the first-born from the older line of descent of the settlor or
another person and/or the youngest from the youngest line, or
bbb. Concerning
the beneficial
interest shares
b. Special system
of succession
in the case of
family trust
enterprises
aa. In
general

– 269 –
the next succession-eligible relative of the last holder of beneficial
interest, with preference for the eldest and/or youngest among
several equally close relatives or, irrespective of the line and the
degree of relationship to the last holder, the oldest and/or the
youngest from the whole family or another settlor or other per-
sons shall be entitled to succeed (entailed trust enterprise).
Apart from the system of succession, further special provisions
may be drawn up concerning succession eligibility; in this case,
the regulations concerning the revocation of the beneficial interest
are reserved.
The special system of succession including a possible special
succession eligibility related to the holding of beneficial interest
may be noted or annotated pursuant to the provisions concerning
the restriction of alienation of trust property.
Security documents relating to beneficial interest as a whole
may not be issued in the case of family trust enterprises with a
special system of succession including, if the case arises, a special
succession eligibility. Such security documents may, however, be
issued concerning individual claims which are already due.
§ 109
In the case of the rule of primogeniture from the older line of
relationship, the younger line, in the absence of any other direc-
tive, acquires beneficial interest only after the lapse of the older,
so that, for example, the issue of the last holder of beneficial inter-
est takes precedence over the brother or sister of the latter. This
order of succession is assumed in case of doubt.
Where in the event of the beneficial interest being intended for
a family other than that of the settlor, the trust instrument desig-
nates that party which is closest in degree of relationship either to
the settlor or the acquirer of beneficial interest or the last bearer
of beneficial interest, in case of doubt consideration shall be given
more to the higher degree of relationship to the last holder of
beneficial interest rather than to the settlor or to the first acquir-
ing party and among several having an equal degree of relation-
ship, seniority of age shall be decisive.
bb. Interpretation
rules

– 270 –
Where it is directed that the beneficial interest shall always de-
volve upon the next in the family, the person concerned in case of
doubt shall be deemed to be that person who is the next pursuant
to customary legal succession from the issue of the settlor or the
person to be considered (entailed trust enterprise) and where
there are several equally close relatives the beneficial interest shall
be divided between them, and the regulations concerning the
division of beneficial interests shall be applicable supplementally.
In the absence of any other trust directive, preferential treat-
ment of the male vis-a-vis the female shall not ensue and the
waiver of an entitlement to beneficial interest or of a reversionary
interest shall be valid only with respect to the said holder of
beneficial interest or to the said reversioner but not, however,
with respect to other persons or to his issue.
Otherwise, the rules for interpretation shall be applied ac-
cordingly in the case of no directive or an inadequate directive.
§ 110
Where special trust enterprises or other trusts have been
formed by the same or different settlors for several lines of the
same family, so that in addition to a family trust for the line of the
first-born child there exist one or several trusts for the lines of the
children born later, the holder of beneficial interest, in case of
doubt, shall acquire beneficial interest from the first trust and his
issue shall receive beneficial interest from another trust only pro-
vided no issue designated as beneficiary exists in the other lines
and the various possessions of beneficial interest remain combined
in one person only until a further two or several unprovided lines
come into being.
Where in the case of several trusts equipped in this way with a
system of succession the second line becomes extinct, the termi-
nated possession of beneficial interest, in the absence of any other
directive, shall devolve upon a designated unprovided line and in
the absence of such shall revert to the first line and shall remain
there united with the beneficiary until further lines come into
being.
cc. In the case of
several family
trusts

– 271 –
In the absence of any other directive, several lines shall come
into being only if the head of the line, who has acquired the bene-
ficial interest held by the extinct line, has died and left several
descendants eligible to succeed to the title.
§ 111
The determination of the acquisition (the conferment) or loss
of beneficial interest and the possible beneficiaries thereof may,
pursuant to the trust instrument, be entrusted to other offices of
third parties (collators) instead of to the discretion of the trustees;
if necessary, where a directive is lacking or inadequate, with ap-
propriate application of the interpretation rules. A public an-
nouncement may be made if necessary concerning application for
beneficial interest or similar.
The trust instrument may, with exclusion of participating
third parties, concede a right to or, with their assent, impose a
duty upon the trustees, other offices or third parties to propose
the persons (firms or legal entities) to be considered for the con-
ferment of beneficial interest (beneficial interest patronage).
The parties entitled to propose or those under obligation to do
so (the nominating parties) and, equally, the trustees, if other
offices have the right to confer, shall in case of doubt also have the
duty and/or the corresponding right to supervise the conferment
and to take appropriate steps regarding the correctness of the
conferment and the implementation of the beneficial interest.
§ 112
In the case of a public announcement concerning application
for beneficial interest being made in the journals which publish
announcements and, when necessary, official statements, or of
another announcement or something similar most appropriate to
the purpose being made by the trustees or other offices, it shall, in
particular, contain: the object of the beneficial interest, the obli-
gations of the beneficiaries which may be connected with the said
c. Right of nomi-
nation and
right of confer-
ment (patron-
age of benefi-
cial interest)
aa. In
general
bb. Public An-
nouncement

– 272 –
beneficial interest, the circle of parties designated pursuant to the
trust instrument, with the most accurate possible description as
well as information concerning the period of time allowed for the
valid submission of an application.
§ 113
The conferment of the beneficial interest shall have effect from
the time when the beneficiary concerned is notified.
However, the beneficial interest may not be handed over be-
fore the expiration of the unused period of one month at the earli-
est, for the judicial or otherwise admissible rescission, from the
time of conferment or after finality of the rendered decision un-
less important reasons justify an exception.
Where as the result of rescission of the conferment of benefi-
cial interest another applicant is appointed beneficiary, the trust
enterprise shall be entitled to a claim for enrichment against those
parties who may have drawn beneficial interest wrongfully. The
said claim shall be in favour of the trust reserve fund for balance
sheet or accounting losses.
Should these proposing or conferring offices or third parties
fail to exercise their authority or duty in due time, this said
authority or duty shall, upon application of the participants
and/or, in the case of trusts with non-profit making or similar
purposes, upon application of the representative of public law, in
the individual case and in the absence of any other directive, de-
volve upon the Register Office after the latter has allowed a rea-
sonable period of time. In this case, the procedure may ensue, if
necessary, pursuant to the regulation concerning the tracing of
beneficiaries (substitute proposal and substitute conferment).
Otherwise, the regulations concerning the revocation of the
right to propose in the case of designation by trustees shall be
applied accordingly to the revocation of the right or the duty to
confer beneficial interest or to propose beneficiaries as well as the
relevant provisions concerning compensation for damage.
cc. Effect

– 273 –
§ 114
Rights and duties arising from beneficial interest and of the
beneficiaries (certificate holders) may, pursuant to an express
directive, be combined with the ownership of a security docu-
ment such as an ordinary or a preferred trust certificate, benefi-
cial interest certificate, supplementary certificate, bonus certifi-
cate, interim certificate, credit note, depositing certificate or
similar types or kinds of securities to which, in the absence of
any other provision, the regulations concerning securities shall
be applied accordingly and, in addition, those concerning mem-
bership securities under the general regulations concerning legal
entities, in the event that the said securities embody member-
ship rights.
Where the trust instrument provides for the issuance of secu-
rity documents without indication as to whether they should be
issued to a named person, to the bearer or whether they should be
made out to order or where the beneficiaries are liable to effect
recurring performances or be liable or liable to make further con-
tributions, security documents should be issued only to a named
person and should be transferable only with the assent of the trust
enterprise.
The security documents may not be designated in a manner
which, owing to the lack of legal prerequisites, may lead to confu-
sion with security documents without payment of contributions
or without other obligations towards the trust enterprise, with a
different form of undertaking or with the securities such as shares,
bonus shares, bonds or similar, issued with respect to that differ-
ent undertaking, or otherwise to deception.
Security documents concerning beneficial interest may be is-
sued within the Principality of Liechtenstein by organising a pub-
lic subscription of contributions to the trust enterprise only pro-
vided the regulations concerning the obligation to issue a
prospectus in the case of bonds are observed and, in addition,
only with the assent of the Register Office.
By way of a statutory instrument, the Government may re-
strict or forbid the issuance of security documents concerning
beneficial interest pursuant to the existing regulations relating to
securities.
d. Security docu-
ments con-
cerning the
trust beneficial
interest
aa. In
general

– 274 –
§ 115
In the case of trust enterprises with obligation to register and
of those which register voluntarily, the Trust Register must be
notified of the authority to issue security documents pursuant to
the trust instrument and an excerpt from this together with a
security form shall be enclosed with the notification. The Register
shall enter data in the Trust Register in the form of excerpts and
publish them.
If necessary, it shall be stated in the application to the Trust
Register whether the security documents, made out for a certain
nominal amount and recording a contribution to the trust fund,
may be issued above or below the nominal value or, possibly,
successively.
§ 116
Where security documents have been issued contrary to the
provisions of the law, the Registrar may, within three years from
the time of issue, upon application by the interested parties, in
particular the subscribers or acquiring parties or ex officio, take
action against the issuing party with the means of compulsion
admissible in extrajudicial proceedings and, in a public an-
nouncement, designate the security documents and, if necessary,
the relevant provisions of the trust instrument as null an void.
Furthermore, the issuing party and all those who participated
in the issuance shall be liable jointly and severally to the bona fide
certificate holders for all damage.
§ 117
In the absence of any other directive, the security document
shall, as far as possible, be made out for a proportion of the rele-
vant beneficial interest as, for instance, a proportion of the yield
or the assets or both. In case of doubt, identical proportions shall
be assumed where several beneficiaries are concerned.
The security document may be issued to the bearer only when
the possession is not combined with obligations on the part of the
bearer towards the trust enterprise or the trust enterprise’s credi-
tors.
bb. Registration
in the Trust
Re
gister
cc. Consequences
of an irregular
issuance
dd. Form and
content
aaa. In
general

– 275 –
In the absence of express designation, the document issued
concerning the beneficial interest shall not be valid as a security
but only as a means of proof.
§ 118
Apart from the express designation as “security”, the security
document shall include, furthermore, the special rights derived
from the beneficial interest, possibly with a reference to the re-
lated provisions of the trust instrument, the number of securities
issued in each case and, if need be, the following additionally:
1. In the case of security documents issued to a named person,
whose transfer, pursuant to the law or the trust instrument, is
tied to the assent of participants or third parties, the adoption
of the related provisions and the necessity of such a transfer, in
accordance with the trust instrument;
2. in the event of various types of securities being issued to the
beneficiaries, the reference to the various types of ordinary or
preferred securities as well as the designation of the type to
which the security concerned belongs;
3. if the trust beneficiaries in the case of shares issued to a named
person or shares made out to order are under obligation as
settlors to effect recurring performances or the holders of cer-
tificates are liable or liable to make further contributions, the
provision concerning this obligation and the scope of the per-
formance;
4. the sum of the part performance which may have been con-
tributed to the trust fund and, if possible, the amount still out-
standing on the security not fully paid up as well as the conse-
quences of the delayed payment of the balance or of the
recurring performances;
5. in the event that the signing of the security document is made
dependent in the trust instrument upon the observance of a
certain form, the information concerning these provisions re-
lating to form and the signature of at least one of the trustees
engaged in the conduct of business or otherwise of a repre-
bbb. S pecial data

– 276 –
sentative authorised to sign, the signature being signed person-
ally or produced in the manner customary in day-to-day busi-
ness.
§ 119
Beneficiaries who are unknown or uncertain according to their
residence, existence or name may be summoned by public citation
by the Register Office upon application by the trustees engaged in
the conduct of business or other participants.
If a legal adviser or a similar legal representative has not al-
ready been appointed for individual beneficiaries, an official trus-
tee shall be appointed for the unknown or uncertain beneficiaries
at the expense of the trust property after hearing the trustees en-
gaged in the conduct of business. The appointment of the said
official trustee shall ensue pursuant to the regulations of the Code
of Civil Procedure concerning the proceedings administrator.
§ 120
The summons shall ensue by public announcement which, at
the discretion of the Register Office, may also ensue in foreign
journals or in an otherwise suitable manner, pursuant to the
regulations concerning the court proceedings relating to missing
persons and presumption of death.
The announcement shall state the relevant circumstances such
as name and domicile of the trust enterprise, the date of forma-
tion, the name, first name and residence or company name and
domicile of the settlor as well as the next appointed beneficiaries
and similar parties. The announcement shall also contain the
summons to inform the Register Office or the trust enterprise or
the officially appointed or other trustees of appointed, but un-
known or uncertain beneficiaries.
In addition, the announcement shall, if possible, also state
what shall happen to the beneficial interest after expiration of the
stated time limits if the entitled beneficiary fails to report within
one year of the announcement or within a further year following
the contestation fails to prove finally and conclusively in expe-
3. Tracing of
beneficiaries
a. In
general
b. Content of the
summons

– 277 –
dited proceedings his contested entitlement. A warning may be
issued, for instance, to the effect that until beneficiaries with
greater entitlement emerge others may be appointed to receive
beneficial interest without the obligation to reimburse, or that the
beneficial interests may be declared by the trustees engaged in the
conduct of business to be forfeited in favour of the reserve fund,
for the balance sheet or accounting losses, or that the cancellation
of the trust enterprise, the amendment of its objects or its gov-
erning bodies may ensue.
Where security documents have been issued, the relevant
summons may ensue only after the expiration of five years fol-
lowing the last withdrawal or other utilisation of the beneficial
interest accruing from the securities concerned, with the warning
that the latter may be declared to be forfeited.
§ 121
Should, following the implementation of preliminiary pro-
ceedings, beneficial interests be declared to be forfeited, this may
only ensue, notwithstanding the beneficiary’s possible obligation
to effect contributions or to accept liability or to make further
contributions up to the day of the related announcement and with
reservation of the claim on account of unjust enrichment against
the party who has been enriched as a result of the forfeiture by an
entitled beneficiary reporting subsequently, within the statutory
period of limitation of three years from the date of the declaration
of forfeiture.
The trust enterprise shall not be responsible for the obligations
which may be associated with the declared forfeiture of the bene-
ficial interests and shall reduce accordingly the possibly still out-
standing performances in favour of the trust fund, without liqui-
dation.
Where as a result of the preliminary proceedings all the benefi-
cial interests are declared forfeited, immediately or gradually, in
favour of the reserve fund for balance sheet or accounting losses
or the trust enterprise, the regulation concerning the accrual of all
beneficial interests to the trust enterprise, drawn up for the case of
the gradual distribution of assets, shall be applied accordingly.
c. Statement of
forfeiture

– 278 –
The regulations concerning the declaration of invalidity of se-
curities and special provisions of the law and the trust instrument
remain unaffected.
§ 122
If not provided otherwise in the case of family trust enter-
prises with or without a system of succession or other trust enter-
prises as, for example, in the case of the inalienability of the bene-
ficial interest or where, by transfer to another party the content of
the performance is changed, the beneficial interest as a whole as
well as individual rights and obligations arising from the posses-
sion of beneficial interest, including that from the reversionary
interest shall be alienable, transferable and inheritable and the
beneficial interest as well as individual rights therefrom may be
charged with limited rights in rem and pursuant to the regulations
concerning the beneficiaries’ creditors may be included in the levy
of execution and writ and in the bankruptcy or administration
proceedings.
Even if pursuant to the trust instrument the beneficial interest
as such is inalienable or non-transferable, individual due claims
may, with reservation of irrevocability and in the absence of any
other directive, be alienated or charged and transferred by trans-
action.
The transfer of the beneficial interest as a whole or individual
rights shall ensue, in the absence of any other provision of the law
or trust instrument or as long as no security documents have ben
issued, pursuant to the regulations concerning the assignment of
claims and, in the event that obligations are combined with the
beneficial interest, pursuant to those concerning the assumption
of debt or, if the case arises, pursuant to the regulations of the law
of matrimonial property or the law of succession or a similar law.
To be effective vis-a-vis the trust enterprise in the case of as-
signment or charging with limited rights in rem, it is necessary for
the trustees engaged in the conduct of business to be notified in
writing by the assignor or the assignee and/or by the beneficiary
to be charged or the usufructuary, pledgee or the like and in the
case of the assumption of debt the written assent of the trustees
4. Alienation,
charge and
transfer
a. In
general

– 279 –
engaged in the conduct of business shall be required in the ab-
sence of any other directive.
Where security documents have been issued concerning the
beneficial interest, the assignment or the charging shall ensue, in
the absence of a deviating directive of the law, pursuant to the
regulations valid with respect to securities.
§ 123
Other concurrence with the transfer of the rights accruing
from the beneficial interest by the trustees engaged in the conduct
of business, other offices or third parties is required otherwise
only in those cases where provided for by the law or the trust
instrument.
The assent to the transfer, provided the transfer is admissible
at all, may, for important reasons, upon application of the benefi-
ciary, the executor, administrator, the heirs of the legatee, in the
case of acquisition as the result of the right of matrimonial prop-
erty or in levy of execution and writ or bankruptcy or admini-
stration proceedings, insofar as a beneficial interest or a reversion-
ary interest is under the purview of these, be replaced by the
Register Office, with analogous application of the regulations
applicable to the transfer of a part requiring assent in the case of a
company limited by shares.
In addition to the previously mentioned cases, assent may, for
important reasons, upon application of the entitled parties, also be
granted and/or replaced by the Register Office after hearing the
trustees engaged in the conduct of business or, if necessary, other
offices and possibly other lawfully interested parties.
§ 124
An organisation exists among the entitled beneficiaries and
entitled reversioners or for individual groups (categories) such as
ordinary or preferred beneficiaries only if provided in the trust
instrument or the law.
The exercise of the rights of the beneficiaries or groups of
beneficiaries may be transferred by the trust instrument to a spe-
b. When other
assent is needed
and its substi-
tution
5. Organisational
matters
a. In
general

– 280 –
cial body such as a family council or a council of beneficiaries or a
family executor or committee whose members are subject to the
basic principles of the commission and the participants may be
bound by its resolutions or directives analogously pursuant to the
regulations concerning resolutions of the supreme body in the
case of legal entities.
Moreover, in the absence of any other directive, the regula-
tions concerning the application, in the case of bonds, of the
community of loan security creditors to the security document
holders, who are legally on the same footing as the trust enter-
prise, the creation of a special organisation by the beneficiaries for
the safeguarding their rights between themselves, the provisions
concerning family resolutions and concerning involuntary coop-
erative societies are reserved.
§ 125
Where the trustees may act at their discretion, they shall be
empowered, even if such an organisation is lacking, to summon,
pursuant to the regulations concerning the supreme body, at the
expense of the trust property, all the entitled beneficiaries and
entitled reversioners, insofar as their rights are affected in the
individual case, in order to consider the directives to be issued by
the trustees, or to call upon the Register Office to summon them
in the event that their views cannot be ascertained at a universal
general meeting or in writing by circular letter.
Upon application by the beneficiaries concerned or ex officio
the Register Office may, in public citation proceedings, summon
these to a meeting, with notification of the items of agenda, the
place and date of the meeting and under these circumstances, in
the absence of any other trust directive, may appoint, upon appli-
cation by the beneficiaries or ex officio, for the entitled parties
who may not be present at the meeting, at the expense of the trust
property, an official trustee to safeguard the rights of the un-
known or uncertain beneficiaries whose legally significant acts, in
case of doubt, shall require the approval of the Register Office
which in this case may be compared with an advisory board in
guardianship matters.
b. Consultation
aa. In general

– 281 –
§ 126
Insofar as various types of entitlements or obligations exist as,
for instance, ordinary or preferred beneficial interest, with or
without related security documents, special meetings may be held
and resolutions passed, with analogous application of the forego-
ing regulations, provided the legal relationships of the entitled
parties belonging to the categories concerned are affected.
§ 127
Meetings may also be replaced by the passing of related reso-
lutions as the opinion of the entitled beneficiaries concerned by
means of signed assent to a proposal deposited with the trustees
or elsewhere.
The related public notice or other announcement shall, in ad-
dition, contain information concerning the proposal, the place
where it is deposited, the period of time allowed for the signed
assent to be given and, after the expiration of this period of time,
the manner in which the said signed assent may be substituted for
the unknown or uncertain beneficiaries by the delegation of the
official trustee.
§ 128
Insofar as the affairs of the trust enterprise are not required to
be taken care of by the trustees or another body or other offices,
or the law or the trust instrument makes no other provision, they
may be settled by family resolutions as concurring, binding
statements of entitled beneficiaries or entitled reversioners with-
out a definite system of succession in the holding of a beneficial
interest or a relationship between the beneficiaries being required.
The following provisions must be applied when passing bind-
ing family resolutions where the trust instrument or a binding
family resolution does not determine to the contrary or in the
event that not all the entitled beneficiaries including all the enti-
tled reversioners or their representatives are in agreement with a
family resolution at a universal meeting or in a vote by circular
letter pursuant to the related regulations concerning the holding
bb. In the case of
special types of
entitlements or
obli
gations
cc. Deposited
proposals
c. Family resolu-
tions
aa. In
general

– 282 –
of consultations and, supplementally, pursuant to the provisions
concerning the passing of resolutions by the supreme body under
the general regulations concerning legal entities, separated if nec-
essary according to types of beneficial interests.
The adoption of such family resolutions, which, in the absence
of any other directive or assent of the Register Office, shall, for
important reasons, be passed unanimously, shall not be ruled out
by the fact that only a single beneficiary is present.
Within the frame of the trust instrument and the law, the
righful petitioners in the formulation of a family resolution shall
be the trustees engaged in the conduct of business or the majority
of the remaining trustees or one-fifth of all the considered entitled
voters as well as the Register Office, insofar as the latter for im-
portant reasons does not take official steps.
The amendment ex officio of the organisation or the object
pursuant to the regulations drawn up for family foundations also
remains reserved.
§ 129
Insofar as the law or the Register Office does not determine to
the contrary, the convening of the entitled participants shall ensue
with the enclosure of a copy of the draft of the family resolution.
In case of doubt, the convening notice shall be dispatched by
means of registered letter by the trustees engaged in the conduct
of business.
In the case of registered trust enterprises, a draft of the family
resolution shall be submitted to the Register Office before the
resolution is passed, together with a list of all the beneficiaries to
be convened, when the family resolution is not adopted at a uni-
versal meeting without a convening notice being issued or the
Register Office does not take official steps of its own accord.
After adoption and, if need be, approval of the resolution, the
prescribed entry shall ensue, with enclosure of an excerpt con-
cerning the amendment to the registered facts and circumstances,
inasmuch as the registered facts and circumstances relating to
registered trust enterprises have been amended as a result of the
said resolution.
bb.Convening,
Submission to
Trust Register,
etc.

– 283 –
Where in the case of non-registered trust enterprises facts and
circumstances liable to registration are amended, the Register
Office shall be notified accordingly.
§ 130
Insofar as their rights or obligations are involved, all entitled
beneficiaries or entitled reversioners and/or their representatives
authorised in writing are entitled to participate in the meeting
provided they prove their entitlement by public document or by a
document issued by the trustees engaged in the conduct of busi-
ness or by another competent office or, finally, by the entry in the
Register of entitled parties kept by the trust enterprise or by a
certification of the said entry or if all other entitled parties who
are present to pass the family resolution and the trustees ac-
knowledge them to be entitled to participate.
Where there is no reason to assume that other parties entitled
to participate exist in addition to the known and summoned par-
ties, the written assurance of the trustees engaged in the conduct
of business to the effect that there are no known beneficiaries
who should be taken into account shall be sufficient; otherwise,
the family resolution may be passed only after the entitled parties,
whose existence, residence or name is unknown or uncertain, have
been excluded with their objection by way of public citation pro-
ceedings, insofar as an official trustee has not been appointed for
them upon application of participants or ex officio.
Should, by means of a written notice to the trust enterprise, an
objection be raised against the entitlement to participate, the trust
enterprise shall request, in writing, the person against whom the
objection is raised to take action within one month of the receipt
of the request to participate against those who dispute the enti-
tlement. The purpose of the action shall be to establish expedi-
tiously the right to participate, failing which the family resolution
taken without consulting the said person shall be non-appealable
for that person.
An entitled voter may not participate in a family resolution
and may not exercise a voting right for another for the same rea-
sons as those which exclude a member from the right to vote at a
cc. Right of partici pation

– 284 –
meeting of the supreme body in the case of a legal entity. This
shall apply, moreover, if the entitled voter’s special rights and
obligations are involved.
§ 131
The tracing of unknown or uncertain entitled beneficiaries
shall ensue pursuant to the regulations concerning the tracing of
beneficiaries, insofar as the provisions provided here do not indi-
cate deviations.
In addition to the subject matter of the family resolution, the
public announcement shall also contain a statement to the effect
that the beneficiaries concerned may object in writing, at the lat-
est within a certain period of time which shall not be less than one
month from the day the announcement is made, to the trust en-
terprise concerning the passing of the family resolution or against
the entitlement to participate in the said family resolution, failing
which they shall be excluded with their objection and the family
resolution shall be legally binding upon them.
§ 132
The passing of the family resolution shall ensue in a public
document or in a document signed by all participants and/or the
official trustees.
The adoption of a family resolution in this form may ensue
only provided the foregoing regulations are observed, the relevant
time limit has expired and in the case of action concerning enti-
tlement to participate, initiated in due time, a final and conclusive
decision has been reached, insofar as in the latter case a special
trustee did not cooperate temporarily in place of those whose
right to participate is in dispute.
In the absence of any other trust directive, the family resolu-
tion shall require the assent of the Register Office where an offi-
cial trustee has assisted for unknown or uncertain entitled benefi-
ciaries or entitled reversioners or where the law prescribes
approval even for the acts of legally or otherwise officially ap-
pointed representatives.
dd. Public citation
proceedings
(official tracin
g)
ee. Passing and
approval of the
resolutions

– 285 –
§ 133
In the absence of a trust directive to the contrary the Register
Office may, where organisation is lacking or inadequate, for im-
portant reasons as, in particular, the mutual safeguarding of
rights, establish upon application and at the expense of the par-
ticipants an involuntary organisation with analogous application
of the regulations concerning small cooperative societies, for all
beneficiaries or certain groups (categories).
Before establishing the cooperative society, the applicants, the
trustees engaged in the conduct of business also the beneficiaries
concerned and/or a trustee appointed by the Register Office for the
unknown or uncertain beneficiaries shall, if possible, be heard and,
following the issuance of a public citation with information con-
cerning the purpose of summoning the beneficiaries, the trustee
appointed by the Register Office may possibly be engaged with the
warning that after the expiration of an appropriate period of time he
may act on their behalf in a legally binding manner.
Within the frame of the trust instrument, the Register Office
shall, by operation of law and with effect for and against the trust
enterprise, participants and third parties, be empowered to take all
the steps necessary for the formation of such a compulsary or-
ganisation, in particular, for drawing up the articles with determi-
nation of the obligation to effect contributions towards the costs,
for the appointment of a board of directors and other bodies
which may otherwise be necessary.
With the assent of the Register Office, such a compulsary co-
operative society may be dissolved or cancelled by a resolution
passed by an absolute majority of the members of the cooperative
society, furthermore, by operation of law, with the lapse of all the
beneficiaries or the termination of the trust enterprise and, unless
important reasons justify an exception, without liquidation.
§ 134
In the absence of any other directive, the relevant regulations
concerning the trust in general shall be applied analogously,
within the frame of the law, to the legal position of the creditors
of the participants as such in injunction, levy of execution and
writ, bankruptcy or administration proceedings.
d. Involuntary
cooperative so-
ciet
y
V. Creditors of
the participants
1. In
general

– 286 –
A trust enterprise which does not conduct commercial activi-
ties, whose objects are family welfare, usefulness in the public
interest or charity, may assert its claims against participants as
such, also in the subsequent execution in the same way as a ward,
without prejudice to the other position of the trust property in
the case of execution against the participants and in their bank-
ruptcy or administration proceedings.
The regulations of the law concerning rescission as well as
those concerning rescission order, the law concerning gifts and
the law of succession are reserved where no provision is made for
an exception.
§ 135
Where payment enforcement is applied unsuccessfully against
a settlor by a creditor other than the trust enterprise or bank-
ruptcy proceedings are initiated against the said settlor, the
promise of a gratuitous contribution by the settlor in favour of
the creditors or the trusteeship in bankruptcy or the administra-
tion of estate shall be null and void in the case of a trust enterprise
where as a result of a directive of the settlor the beneficial interest
is acquired without valuable consideration.
Where a settlor in his capacity as trustee of a trust enterprise
formed by another person or in fulfilment of an obligation en-
tered into in favour of a third party, for which the said third party
has contributed or promised to contribute assets without valuable
consideration, has secured for the said third party beneficial inter-
est without valuable consideration, then the prerequisites for the
invalidity of the promise must be present in the case of the first
settlor and/or of the third party concerned.
§ 136
The creditors of an entitled beneficiary or a reversioner enti-
tled to a succession may not withdraw from these their beneficial
interest or reversionary interest acquired on grounds of the trust
instrument without valuable consideration and/or individual
claims therefrom, by way of injunction, levy of execution and
writ, bankruptcy or administration proceedings.
2. Creditors of
the settlors
3. Creditors of
the beneficiar-
ies
a. Non-with-
drawability
(protective
trust)
aa. In
general

– 287 –
Where in the case of a beneficial interest obtained on grounds
of the trust instrument for valuable consideration, the said trust
instrument contains, in particular, the provision that this shall be
inalienable, but may, however, be transferred by way of universal
succession, or a party shall no longer be entitled to it or no longer
have a claim to it as soon as the said party is insolvent or wishes to
assign or charge the beneficial interest, or that from a certain date
the beneficial interest may or shall be bestowed by the trustees or
other bodies upon the former entitled beneficiary, the latter’s
spouse or issue or other persons or in any other way at the abso-
lute discretion of the said trustees or other bodies, or where a
similar provision exists, the beneficial interest shall likewise not
be withdrawable by the creditors of the beneficiaries or the rever-
sioners, under reservation of the regulations concerning rescission
order, the law concerning gifts and the law of succession.
The beneficial interest obtained from trust enterprises whose
objects are non-profit making or charitable shall under no cir-
cumstances be withdrawn.
§ 137
Where the reversioners have acquired their rights pursuant to
the foregoing paragraphs but not, however, their predecessors or
the present holders of beneficial interest, the rights of the latter,
notwithstanding those of the other reversioners, may be with-
drawn only insofar as they extend over the period of the related
entitlement to enjoyment.
Where beneficiary or reversionary rights acquired pursuant to
the foregoing paragraphs exist only in part, the foregoing regula-
tions shall be applied accordingly in the absence of a further trust
directive.
Where as the result of revocation owing to trust un-
worthiness or as the result of the assertion of claims on grounds
of violation of the duty to support or on grounds of the need for
support, the beneficial interest is transferred to a party other than
the settlor, the possible feature of non-with-drawability shall
nevertheless remain in existence.
bb. S pecial cases

– 288 –
§ 138
Where the prerequisites concerning non-withdrawability do
not apply, the proprietary claims accruing from the beneficial
interest and the beneficial interest itself may be withdrawn pursu-
ant to the following regulations by way of injunction, levy of
execution and writ, bankruptcy or administration proceedings,
insofar as the beneficiary has rights himself and inasmuch and as
long as the said beneficiary may dispose of these, the existence of
the rights of others is not questioned and the obligations which
may be tied to the beneficial interest are accepted by the acquiring
party in the absence of any other directive.
Insofar as the handing over to the beneficiary of an element of
capital in consequence of the beneficiary’s right to terminate,
dissolution or other similar reasons is provided for in the trust
instrument, the creditor and/or the trusteeship in bankruptcy or
the administration may exercise the right of termination in place
of the beneficiary and demand the handing over of the element of
capital with analogous application of the related regulations con-
cerning termination in the case of registered cooperative societies,
insofar as a deviation does not result in consequence from the
provision concerning the redemption sum.
Where the inalienable beneficial interest acquired on the basis
of the trust instrument for valuable consideration may be trans-
ferred to another person only by way of universal succession,
nothing shall oppose the non-withdrawability of the creditor’s
satisfaction in respect of claims arising from intentional and un-
lawful injury committed by the beneficiary concerned.
In spite of the non-withdrawability of the beneficial interest,
the injured party may seek satisfaction for claims against a benefi-
ciary arising from acts or omissions comitted with malicious in-
tent and unlawfully if the loss of the beneficial interest obtained
without valuable consideration is for some reason not provided
for or the trust instrument does not determine otherwise and by
the application of such a claim does not prejudice the rights of
others or the defrayal of reasonable maintenance (food, clothing
and accommodation) and the reasonable upbringing of the culpa-
ble beneficiary, the said beneficiary’s spouse who has not remar-
ried, minors or other issue without means.
b. Withdraw-
ability
aa. Possession of
beneficial inter-
est

– 289 –
Where it is incumbent upon the beneficiary profiting from the
non-withdrawability to fulfil an obligation under family law to
support, the entitled parties may have recourse to the beneficial
interest or to individual claims therefrom for the duration of the
obligation to support insofar as the necessary maintenance is not
withdrawn by this.
Where the settlor is at the time the sole first beneficiary or he
has acquired the beneficial interests later for valuable considera-
tion, without reversioners with right of succession being present
or, if it so happens, any other person alone having acquired for
valuable consideration all the rights accruing from the beneficial
interests, regardless of whether he is also the sole trustee (one-
man trust) or not, the regulations concerning the special creditor
in the case of the individually owned enterprise with limited li-
ability
1) shall be applied accordingly.
§ 139
Before the devolution of the beneficial interest, a reversionary
entitlement having a current net asset value may be withdrawn by
way of injunction, levy of execution and writ, bankruptcy or
administration proceedings only provided it is alienable and no
other provision is indicated in the law or the trust instrument, as
for the possession of beneficial interest, otherwise every direction
to the contrary is null and void.
Where a possession of beneficial interest and a reversionary
interest related thereto are claimed simultaneously by the credi-
tors, the creditor of the holder of the beneficial interest may only
assert his claims without prejudice to the rights of the rever-
sioner’s creditors
§ 140
Should execution and writ be levied against the right derived
from the beneficial interest as such or bankruptcy proceedings are
initiated concerning the beneficiary’s assets, a reversioner desig-

1) The provisions concerning the individually owned enterprise with limited liability
(Art. 834-896a) were cancelled by the law dated 15 April, 1980 LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
bb. Reversionary
interest
c. Ri
ght of entr y

– 290 –
nated by name or otherwise, with right of succession may, in the
absence of any other legal directive, enter the trust relationship.
This shall require the assent of the holder of the beneficial interest
and/or in the case of the reversionary interest of the entitled re-
versioner against whom payment enforcement is being exercised
or, for important reasons, instead of that, the assent of the Regis-
ter Office, against payment of the cash value of the beneficial
interest concerned to the creditor enforcing payment or the bank-
rupt’s estate in place of the beneficiaries concerned.
If no entitled successor or reversioner designated by name is
present, the spouse and the issue of the holder of the beneficial
interest shall be entitled to the same right, jointly or individually;
in case of dispute, pursuant to the directive of the Register Office.
Entry shall ensue by written announcement of the party with
right to enter to the trust enterprise and to the creditor and/or the
trusteeship in bankruptcy. This announcement may ensue only
within one month after the party with right to enter has received
advice of the commencement of levy of execution and writ or the
initiation of bankruptcy proceedings and only as long as realisa-
tion has not ensued.
The related regulations concerning bankruptcy proceedings
shall be applied to the administration proceedings accordingly.
§ 141
Where the law does not determine to the contrary, the regula-
tions concerning responsibility in the case of companies with legal
personality shall be applied accordingly to trust enterprises which
pursue commercial ojects. The other provisions concerning re-
sponsibility under the general regulations relating to legal entities
as well as to the trust enterprise, the participants and third parties
shall be applied to other trust enterprises accordingly.
Where pursuant to the foregoing paragraph the law makes ref-
erence to members of legal entities, these shall be deemed to be
the beneficiaries of the trust enterprise who are to be taken into
consideration and, where the law makes reference to major par-
ticipants, these shall be deemed to be those beneficiaries with
corresponding beneficial interest shares, instead of the said mem-
bers of legal entities.
J. Responsibility
I. In general

– 291 –
The responsible parties may not, on grounds of the obligations
arising from their responsibility, take into account those advan-
tages they have procured from the trust enterprise in another
manner for the trust enterprise or for the party that has a liability
claim arising otherwise from the responsibility (no adjustment of
advantages).
NB. Concerning the above, Dr. Klaus Biedermann in “Die
Treuhandschaft des Liechtensteinischen Rechts, dargestellt
an ihrem Vorbild, dem Trust des Common Law” writes as
follows:
It is evident that TrUG Art. 141 para. 3 is intended to adopt
the rule valid in the English-American Trust Law according
to which the profits accruing from one breach of trust may
not be taken to offset the losses arising from another breach
of trust. The wording, however, is rather ambiguous
(“… advantages they have procured from the trust enterprise
in another manner …”).
Where it is not determined to the contrary, several responsible
parties shall be liable jointly and severally to the parties entitled to
claim. The said responsible parties shall bear the loss arising from
the responsibility in equal parts. Similarly, they shall have rights
of recourse in the same proportions with appropriate allowance
being made, however, for the benefits drawn by the individual
parties, insofar as claims arising from malicious intent are not
involved.
Deviating from the provisions of this law concerning respon-
sibility, the trust instrument may declare those provisions con-
cerning responsibility under the general regulations concerning
legal entities to be solely applicable analogously.
Insofar as no other provision is indicated by the law, the trust
instrument or the relevant legal relationship, members of other
bodies or persons active pursuant to the trust instrument shall be
responsible pursuant to the regulations relating to the task.

– 292 –
§ 142
In addition to the cases which are otherwise provided for by
law, the trustees engaged in the conduct of business, insofar as
they are concerned in the individual case, shall be under obliga-
tion to the trust enterprise, other participants and third parties to
comply correctly with the law, the trust instrument, the resolu-
tions or directives of competent offices, third parties, the Court or
the Register Office and shall be responsible for the loss arising
from the culpable non-fulfilment of their duties (breach of trust)
in the same way as the members of the governing body of a com-
pany with legal personality.
The trustees not engaged in the conduct of business shall be
responsible for the loss arising from the inadequate supervision of
the trustees engaged in the conduct of business and, where they
have themselves appointed these or employees for the conduct of
business or other bodies or offices, they shall also be responsible
for the loss arising from the involvement in the appointment (se-
lection) as well as from the inadequate employment of the em-
ployees.
The responsibility of the trustees on grounds of gross negli-
gence or intent cannot be excluded in advance by the trust in-
strument or resolutions and directives of the competent offices.
§ 143
In the absence of any other directive, a co-trustee is also par-
ticularly responsible on grounds of breach of trust for the loss
occurring as the result of the acts or omissions of another trustee:
1. Where he hands over to another trustee trust property re-
ceived or permits such a trustee alone to receive the said trust
property without taking the precautions, prescribed or neces-
sary, having regard to the circumstances in the individual case,
for faithful administration and application, or fails to supervise
the trustee appropriately,
2. in the event that he gains knowledge of an attempted or com-
mitted breach of faith on the part of his co-trustee and fails to
undertake the steps necessary and appropriate under the cir-
II. Trustee respon-
sibility
1. In
general
2. Special cases of
liability
a. In the case of
co-trustees

– 293 –
cumstances for the prevention of the breach of trust and/or for
the assertion of the claims arising from this on behalf of the
trust enterprise or similar undertaking.
Where together with others a trustee has signed a confirmation
of receipt without, however, having personally received anything
and where the receiving trustee has applied that which he has
received in a wrongful manner, the co-signatory shall not be re-
sponsible, notwithstanding his obligations arising from the viola-
tion of the obligation to supervise or from a similar duty.
Where one of several trustes has alone received and wrong-
fully applied trust property or otherwise derived benefit from it
unlawfully or in the event that a breach of trust has been com-
mitted solely as the result of the advice of a co-trustee appointed
as expert for the enterprise or where, in any case, only one of the
trustees alone is to blame, this trustee alone shall, in the absence
of any other trust directive, compensate for the loss.
§ 144
A trustee appointed subsequently shall cause himself to be
guilty of a breach of trust with liability for damages if he fails to
assert, at the expense of the trust enterprise and in a manner ap-
propriate to the circumstances, the claims of the trust enterprise
for compensation known to him, arising from the breach of trust
committed by one of his predecessors.
A trustee resigning from his post shall be responsible for the
damages arising from a breach of trust if he withdraws with the
intention of thereby enabling the said breach of trust to be com-
mitted.
§ 145
Where co-beneficiaries suborn a trustee to commit a breach of
trust or, alone, in their simultaneous capacity as trustees, have
committed or assented to such a breach of trust, they alone shall
be liable to the extent of their rights to beneficial interest and, in
addition to this, jointly with other suspected persons, to the other
parties entitled to claim for the damages caused. The trust, how-
b. In the case of
succeeding and
resigning trus-
tees
III. Responsibilitiy
of the benefici-
aries

– 294 –
ever, insofar as it is entitled to claim, shall have a lien on the
beneficial interest unless this may have been declared inalienable.
In the absence of any other directive and with reservation of
the right to offset and the right of retention, this lien on the bene-
ficiaries’ right shall not extend to the claims to which the benefici-
ary is entitled from another trust, even if they are contained in the
same trust instrument.
The regulations concerning the responsibility of third parties
are reserved.
§ 146
Where a third party acts on behalf of the trust enterprise with
the fraudulent misrepresentation that as a trustee he is empowered
to do so or interferes otherwise, without authority, in the conduct
of business or in the pretended capacity of trustee or, in the
knowledge of a breach of trust committed by another, he receives
trust assets in an inadmissible manner or draws benefit from trust
property in a manner which is otherwise unlawful or in conflict
with loyalty and good faith or in other cases the third party
knowingly helps the trustees to commit a breach of trust, he shall
be liable in the same way as a trustee and, like the latter, shall be
under obligation to furnish information.
Representatives, employees, other auxiliary and similar per-
sons of a trust enterprise shall also be deemed to be third persons.
Otherwise, a third party purchaser of trust property shall not
be under obligation to ensure that his counter performance is
applied pursuant to the law and the trust instrument.
§ 147
Where in spite of committing a breach of trust a trustee proves
that he acted in good faith and under the prevailing circumstances
was no longer able to obtain the assent of the parties authorised to
give such assent, other competent offices or the instructions of the
Register Office, the Court or the official office otherwise compe-
tent may, if a claim is asserted, decide at its absolute discretion
whether liability exists to make good a loss and whether other
consequences shall ensue or not.
IV. Responsibility
of third parties
as constructive
trustees
V. Release from
responsibility
1. In
general

– 295 –
Where an entitled beneficiary causes a trustee to commit a
breach of trust, consents to or cooperates in this, there shall be no
responsibility on the part of the trustee towards the beneficiary
concerned and, where the said entitled beneficiary is the sole
beneficiary, also towards the trust enterprise, provided the latter
is not over-indebted.
The waiver of the claim arising from the responsibility where
petty blame is involved, or a possible exoneration on the part of
all parties entitled to claim or other offices so authorised is re-
served if the creditors of the trust enterprise do not suffer loss
thereby.
§ 148
In the absence of any other directive, claims arising from re-
sponsibility shall become statute barred within three years of the
time when the act or the omission which established the responsi-
bility took place and this no longer continues.
Where, however, the claim arises from a punishable act or an
omission for which criminal law provides a longer statutory pe-
riod of limitation, this shall also be valid with respect to the claim
arising from the responsibility.
As long as a trustee occupies the position, the statute of limi-
tation only commences to run in his favour if petty blame is in-
volved and he no longer has in his possession trust property or its
equivalent value from the breach of trust.
§ 149
Rights of recourse of the responsible parties between them-
selves are subject to the basic principles of that legal relationship
which is decisive in the individual case and become statute-barred
after the expiration of the above-mentioned time limits which,
however, only commence to run from the time when one of the
jointly responsible parties is made finally and conclusively re-
sponsible.
2. Statute of
limitations
a. In
general
b. In the case
of rights of
recourse

– 296 –
§ 150
In the case of well-founded doubt concerning the admissibility
of the execution or omission of a certain act to be implemented
currently or concerning the interpretation of the trust instrument
regarding, for instance, the setting aside of capital and yield, or a
similar matter, the trustees engaged in the conduct of business
may, at the expense of the trust enterprise, with or without con-
sulting other participants and with submission of the facts and
circumstances, approach the Register Office for an instruction. In
complying with this instruction, no claim arising from responsi-
bility may be asserted against the said trustees engaged in the
conduct of business (official instruction).
In urgent cases or for other important reasons, this right may
be exercised by all trustees, even where the trust instrument de-
termines otherwise.
§ 151
The trustees engaged in the conduct of business shall be em-
powered to take out, at the expense of the trust enterprise, appro-
priate liability insurance against all the obligations arising from
responsibility, insofar as these do not occur as the result of gross
negligence or intent (trustee liability insurance).
Where the law does not allow exceptions regarding instruc-
tions of the entitled beneficiaries, the trustees engaged in the con-
duct of business may refuse to implement the provisions of the
trust instrument, the resolutions or instructions of other compe-
tent participants, offices or third parties authorised in this regard
if these contravene the law or lawfully admissible provisions of
the trust instrument and their implementation would render
themselves responsible pursuant to the regulations provided here
or elsewhere (right of refusal).
§ 152
1)
Where neither an audit authority nor a special supervisory
trust or similar office is provided for and the trust instrument

1) § 152 in the version of the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl, 1980, No. 39.
VI. Securing and
preventive
measures
1. Directive of the
Re
gister Office
2. Liability
insurance and
ri
ght of refusal
3. Periodical
auditin
g

– 297 –
does not contain a provision to the contrary, the trustees, not-
withstanding the otherwise legally admitted official audit, shall be
empowered to instruct that an audit be carried out from time to
time, at the expense of the trust enterprise. Other measures pur-
suant to the law or trust instrument remain reserved.
§ 153
The trust instrument may provide for or allow or the Register
Office may, for important reasons, after hearing participants,
direct that trustees may not take up their duties or further exercise
them before they have lodged, at their expense, an appropriate
security for the faithful and conscientious exercise of their func-
tion and for possible claims for compensation. The said security
may be provided by means of a promissory note or a suretyship
or some other form of guarantee.
In the event that the security is not lodged within a reasonable
period of time or, if necessary, within a period of time determined
by the Register Office, it shall be assumed that the person ap-
pointed or already acting as trustee does not desire to accept the
office or has renounced the further exercise of duty. In this case,
instructions shall be given concerning the possibly necessary en-
try in the Trust Register and claims for compensation shall be
reserved.
Trustees engaged in the conduct of business as well as individ-
ual trustees or employees may, for important reasons, renounce
all further responsibility arising from the administration of the
trust assets by transferring the trust assets, as far as admissible, at
the expense of the trust enterprise to the Landesbank or, with the
assent of the Register Office, to another suitable authority for
appropriate administration and application.
The foregoing provisions shall be applied accordingly to
members of other bodies or offices appointed pursuant to the
trust instrument.
4. Lodging of
securit y, etc.

– 298 –
§ 154
The Register Office may, for important reasons, appoint a su-
pervisory trust office for trust enterprises which do not undertake
commercial activities. Such an appointment may be made upon
application by participants or such persons or offices that have a
right to appoint or remove or to propose trustees or have a right
of nomination for or conferment of beneficial interest, or of the
universal successors in title or the settlor’s executors, who have
provided without valuable consideration the entire trust fund for
the beneficial interest.
Otherwise, such an office may also be appointed by order of
the settlor without, however, the Register Office having to make
such an appointment in the absence of important reasons.
A supervisory office may be appointed regardless of whether
the otherwise prescribed number of trustees is present or not.
In the absence of any other directive, consideration should, if
possible, be given to the Liechtenstein Landesbank as public
trustee when appointing a supervisory office.
§ 155
After considering all the circumstances, the Register Office
may, upon application by the supervising or other trustees, partly
or completely cancel the supervisory trust office, particularly if
this is the unanimous wish of all the entitled beneficiaries of the
trust or in the event that this appears to be appropriate for other
important reasons and the trust instrument does not determine to
the contrary.
§ 156
Insofar as the law or the trust instrument does not determine
otherwise, the supervisory office shall have those rights and duties
determined by the Register Office at the time of appointment or
subsequently, but at least those which the supervisory board has
in the case of a company limited by shares and, additionally, the
members shall have the position of supplementary trustees.
K. Official super-
visory and
auditing trust
office
I. Official super-
visory trust of-
fice
1. A
ppointment
2. Cancellation
3. Rights and
duties
a. In
general

– 299 –
When exercising their rights and duties, the supervising trus-
tees shall, as far as possible, take into consideration not only the
type and the position of the other trustees but also the wishes of
beneficiaries, insofar as they are compatible with the law or the
trust instrument or the instruction of the Register Office.
Where no deviations have been drawn up otherwise for the
supervising trustees or nothing to the contrary is indicated by the
purpose of the supervisory office, the regulations concerning the
other trustees shall be applied accordingly. The supervising trus-
tees, however, shall pass resolutions with an absolute majority of
the votes.
§ 157
In the relationship with other trustees (engaged in the conduct
of business), the supervising trustees, without prejudice to the
rights and duties of other participants or third parties, shall super-
vise the entire trust enterprise, in particular the assets, any securi-
ties, documents, etc., on the understanding that the other trustees
shall at all times during the normal hours of business have access
to the assets, securities, documents, etc., and may make the neces-
sary copies at the expense of the trust enterprise.
The direct asset administration activities of the other trustees
and the exercise by the other trustees of their powers pursuant to
the law or the trust instrument or the instructions of the Register
Office are safeguarded.
The supervising trustees shall cooperate in this regard and un-
dertake whatever is necessary to enable the other trustees to exer-
cise their powers and fulfil their duties, unless the cooperation
calls for a breach of trust or could lead to a personal liability for
the supervising trustees.
§ 158
In the absence of any other directive, the right or duty of the
other trustees to appoint trustees, to propose or remove or similar
rights and duties shall be exercised jointly with the supervising
trustees.
b. Relationship to
the other trus-
tees
aa. In
general
bb. Participation in
the appoint-
ment of trus-
tees, etc.

– 300 –
Provided there is no danger in delay or not only a temporary
measure is involved, the supervising trustees shall be heard before
trustees are appointed or removed or similar measures taken by
the Register Office upon application by participants or third par-
ties or ex officio.
§ 159
Notwithstanding the other trustees’ engagement in the con-
duct of business, the supervising trustees shall take particular care
that the trust assets and their yield are appropriately administered
and applied, as though they alone were trustees.
In the absence of any other trust directive, payments from the
trust assets or the yield shall ensue through the supervising trus-
tees. Similarly, payments to the trust enterprise shall be made to
the supervising trustees.
These, however, may permit payments to the trust enterprise
to be received by other trustees or third parties, without the su-
pervising trustees being liable for the possible fault of these other
trustees or third parties, insofar as the supervision is not defective.
§ 160
The regulations concerning the responsibility of other trustees
shall be applied to supervising trustees accordingly, subject to the
proviso that they shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions
of other trustees or offices, insofar as a fault in the supervision
does not apply to them personally.
Where in the determination of beneficiaries and the payment
of beneficial interests the supervising trustees act in good faith
on the basis of written statements by the other trustees or
otherwise competent offices, no responsibility shall devolve upon
them, notwithstanding the possible responsibility of the other
trustees.
cc. Regarding trust
assets and yield
4. Res
ponsibilit y

– 301 –
§ 161
Where important reasons exist, one or several impartial third
parties may be appointed as auditors by the Register Office, upon
application by participants or the universal successors in title or
executors of the settlor who has provided the trust fund without
valuable consideration for the beneficial interest of others or the
supervisory trust office or upon application of endangered credi-
tors of the enterprise or ex officio.
These auditors shall be removed by the Register Office upon
the unanimous application of entitled beneficiaries if their ap-
pointment did not ensue ex officio or upon application by endan-
gered creditors.
For important reasons, they may be removed upon application
by participants or other persons who occasioned the appoint-
ment.
In the event of cessation before the audit has been completed,
as the result of removal, death, bankruptcy or insolvency or
where the auditors are incapable of fulfilling their duties or for
other important reasons, a successor may be appointed in the
same manner as the predecessor.
§ 162
The officially appointed auditors shall have all the rights and
duties stated in the law as well as all those rights and duties which
the Register Office orders as necessary for the fulfilment of their
tasks.
In the absence of any other directive, the auditors shall exam-
ine the entire trust enterprise, in particular the management, the
position and the investment of the assets as well as the account-
ancy.
All trustees and employees are required upon demand to pro-
vide the auditors with information concerning all the facts and
circumstances. Otherwise, they shall bear responsibility for the
loss as well as for the costs and, in the case of avoidance (failure to
provide such information) they shall be removed pursuant to the
regulations concerning the obligation to disclose.
II. Official audit
1. Appointment
and removal of
auditors
2. Rights and
duties
a. In
general

– 302 –
Other participants or third parties otherwise engaged in the
conduct of business who have trust assets or books of account or
business papers in their possession are also under obligation to
provide information. The provisional decision of the Register
Office may be invoked in the event of refusal to furnish such
information.
§ 163
In addition to a clearly arranged balance sheet or, in the case of
an enterprise which does not undertake commercial activities, in
addition to a clearly arranged statement of accounts relating to the
trust assets, the auditors must submit an auditors’ report with a
statement which indicates whether the management has acted
pursuant to the regulations, and in particular, has kept the ac-
counts correctly, has invested and administered the assets cor-
rectly or not.
The balance sheet (statement of accounts) together with the
auditors’ report must be submitted to the Register Office and, in
addition, the auditors must deliver a copy to those who applied
for an official audit and to the trustees.
Pursuant to the regulations concerning the obligation to dis-
close, each beneficiary may, at his own expense, during normal
business hours, inspect the balance sheet (statement of accounts)
and the auditors’ report, examine these and take copies or ex-
cerpts. Alternatively, the beneficiary’s representative may under-
take the inspection and take copies and/or excerpts.
§ 164
The regulations concerning the official audit under the general
regulations concerning legal entities shall otherwise be applied
accordingly also, in particular, with respect to the expenses and
remuneration of the auditors.
b. Audit re port
3. Reference

– 303 –
§ 165
The trust instrument may provide for its amendment including
its correction by one or other of the participants or by all the
participants together or by third parties.
With the assent of all the parties to be considered in each case
or pursuant to the regulations concerning the family resolution,
the trust instrument may, for important reasons, after all the cir-
cumstances have been carefully considered and with the assent of
the Register Office, be amended or corrected in every case, even if
the amendment is excluded or forbidden. However, in the absence
of any other provision of the law or the trust instrument, the trust
enterprise cannot be cancelled.
Upon application by and after hearing the participants con-
cerned, particularly the trustees engaged in the conduct of busi-
ness, the Register Office may, in the absence of any other regula-
tion, effect a straighforward correction of the trust instrument.
In the absence of known entitled beneficiaries, the amendment
may nevertheless ensue only with reservation of the later appear-
ance of such entitled beneficiaries within the period of limitation
if the rights of others may be violated and the trust instrument
does not determine otherwise.
Should the power of revocation of the trust articles be re-
served for a participant or a third party, this shall not in case of
doubt empower the said participant or third party to amend trust
articles if the Register Office for important reasons or the law
does not allow an exception.
§ 166
The trust instrument may provide for the conversion of a trust
enterprise into an undertaking (firm or legal entity) having an-
other legal form or the merger with such an undertaking or an-
other trust enterprise or another trust undertaking, without liqui-
dation of the trust enterprise, pursuant to detailed regulation with
observance of the regulations otherwise in existence for the other
legal form.
L. Amendment of
the trust in-
strument, con-
version and
merger, etc.
I. Amendment
II. Conversion and
mer
ger

– 304 –
The conversion of a trust enterprise without legal personality
into a trust enterprise with legal personality or, conversely, of a
trust enterprise of the latter type into one of the former type
without further amendment of the trust articles may, in the ab-
sence of any other directive, be undertaken at any time by opera-
tion of law by the trustees engaged in the conduct of business
without liquidation.
Supplementally, the regulations drawn up for registered co-
operative societies shall be applied accordingly to the conversion
and merging of trust enterprises whose participants or third par-
ties have liability or liability to make further contributions.
In addition, the admissible conversion or merging resulting
from a change of governing bodies or of the purpose/object pro-
vided by operation of law is reserved.
§ 167
Where the law does not make any other provision, each
amendment of the trust instrument shall be drawn up in writing
by the parties empowered to do so and registered by them in the
Trust Register through the trustees engaged in the conduct of
business and, if required, the Registrar shall enter the said
amendment and publish it. Insofar as this concerns the registered
facts and circumstances, an excerpt from the amendment docu-
ment shall be deposited with the Trust Register at the time the
amendment is registered.
Where the trust instrument amendment concerns a trust en-
terprise which is not entered in the Trust Register, each amend-
ment shall be reported to the Register Office, insofar as notifiable
facts and circumstances are concerned and the Register Office did
not take part or the files are not otherwise deposited with the
Register Office.
The foregoing regulations shall be applied accordingly in the
case of merger or conversion unless the law provides otherwise or
the relevant provisions concerning another form of undertaking
are to be applied.
III. Form

– 305 –
§ 168
The special liability of the assets of the dissolved or amended
trust enterprise engaged in commercial activities, with possible
participants and third parties, for the obligations of the trust en-
terprise accruing up to the time of the amendment, merger or
voluntary conversion shall remain in existence for one year from
that time and in the case of a merger, unless the Register Office
allows an exception or liabilities do not exist, the assets of the
dissolved trust enterprise shall be administered separately and a
separate account shall be kept accordingly.
Up to this time, in the case of a merger, the assets taken over
shall still be deemed to be the assets of the dissolved enterprise as
far as the relationship of the creditors of the dissolved trust enter-
prise to the trust enterprise taking over and to its other creditors
is concerned and execution may be levied against the trust enter-
prise taking over and special bankruptcy or special administration
proceedings may be initiated, with restriction to the assets taken
over.
The trust instrument may determine that the certificate hold-
ers are under obligation to return their security documents to the
new form of undertaking against a possible corresponding claim,
otherwise they may be deprived of their rights, with or without
compensation.
The provisions concerning the lapse of the liability of the par-
ticipants or third parties or of the liability of these to make fur-
ther contributions in the case of conversion or fusion are reserved.
§ 169
Where a trustee appointed by the Register Office has taken
part in the amendment, conversion or cancellation for unknown
or uncertain beneficiaries and the right of such a beneficiary has
been seriously violated, the said beneficiary may apply to the
Register Office in extrajudicial proceedings for the approval to be
declared withdrawn and the approved act to be declared null and
void and for the former state of affairs to be restored or, in the
event that the latter no longer appears to be possible, the ag-
IV. Effect
V. Withdrawal of
approval and
declaration of
nullit
y

– 306 –
grieved party may demand compensation from the party unjusti-
fiably enriched as a result of the course of events in question.
The withdrawal and declaration of nullity may only ensue
after the other participants have been heard and shall have no
influence on the validity of the direction concerning the trust
assets, carried out on the basis of the approval, as far as bona fide
third parties are concerned.
§ 170
In the absence of a deviating order of the law, the provisions
of international law under the general regulations concerning the
legal entity shall be applied to the trust enterprise accordingly
also, in particular, the regulations concerning the legal represen-
tative. …
1)

1) § 170 para. 2, 3 and 4 cancelled by the law dated 15 April 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
M. International
law and trust
enterprises
subject to for-
ei
gn law, etc.

– 307 –
Fifth Part
Twentieth Title
Business Accountancy
Art. 1045
Whosoever has the duty to enter his company in the Public
Register shall be required to keep an orderly inventory, draw up
balance sheets and keep books of account which show the com-
pany’s financial position and the individual debit and credit rela-
tionship associated with the business as well as the undertaking’s
economic situation.
In addition, the party required to register has the duty to re-
tain copies of dispatched business letters and to keep these copies,
as well as business letters received, in an orderly manner.
The extent to which a budget estimate, an annual rendering of
account and an audit are required, in addition to the inventory,
the balance sheets and the accounting, is determined in the law,
the articles and, in the absence of such, by commercial practice in
the appropriate branch of business or in the relevant form or type
of undertaking.
Insofar as public law so directs, community undertakings and
other legal entities under public law shall be subject to the fol-
lowing provisions.
Art. 1046
For the individual proprietor, the duty begins with the com-
mencement of business; in the case of others, such as individual
proprietors with limited liability, registered companies or legal
entities, upon coming into existence.
The duty ends with the discontinuance of the undertaking or,
when a business which came into existence upon entry in the
Public Register is no longer operated, upon deregistration in the
Public Register.
A. Observance of
accounting
regulations
I. In
general
II. Beginning and
end

– 308 –
Art. 1046A
1)
The member of the administration of a legal entity who fulfils
the prerequisites pursuant to Article 180a is required to ensure
that the books of account are available, within a reasonable period
of time, for official examination at the company’ domicile.
Art. 1047
Whosoever is under obligation to enter his company in the
Public Register shall, at the commencement of his undertaking,
draw up an opening inventory and an opening balance sheet and
then, on the dates determined by law, the deed of partnership or
the articles, an inventory (annual inventory) and a balance sheet
(annual balance sheet, a balance sheet for a going concern or a
profit and loss account).
The annual balance sheet shall show the financial state of the
undertaking having regard to its business result since the last bal-
ance sheet was drawn up. The said annual balance sheet shall be
drawn up in accordance with generally acknowledged business
principles and the special regulations laid down by law, in par-
ticular for individual undertakings with limited liability
2), general
partnerships (Kollektivgesellschaften) or limited partnerships
(Kommanditgesellschaften), companies with legal personality and
establishments.
Art. 1048
The opening inventory shall be an accurate schedule of all as-
sets and liabilities whose balance forms the company capital.
The annual inventory, on the other hand, shall be an accurate
schedule of all assets and liabilities, but in this case the assets shall
be entered as going values, taking into consideration this law, the
deed of partnership or the Articles.

1) Art. 1046 A inserted by the law dated 15 April, 1980 LGBl 1980, No. 39 2) The provisions concerning the individually owned firm with limited liability
(Art. 834–896a) were repealed by the law dated 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980,
No. 39.
B. Rules conc.
inventory and
balance sheet
I. Duty to pre-
pare inventory
and balance
sheet
1. Opening
inventory and
balance sheet,
annual inven-
tory and annual
balance sheet
2. Description of
opening in-
ventory and
annual inven-
tor
y

– 309 –
Art. 1049
Balance sheets and inventories shall be drawn up annually and
shall be complete within six months at the latest of the close of
the business year.
As a rule, the business year shall coincide with the calendar
year and, in case of doubt or if the Register does not permit oth-
erwise, may not exceed twelve months.
Should the party with the obligation have a warehouse or the
like for which, owing to the nature of the undertaking, it may not
be possible to make an inventory every year, it shall be sufficient
if an inventory of the warehouse is made every two years.
In times of economic crises and the like, the government, by
way of statutory instrument, may fix different dates.
Moreover, the Registrar may, if there are important reasons,
extend the fixed dates in individual cases, in extrajudicial pro-
ceedings.
Art. 1050
The inventory and the balance sheet must be drawn up in the
national currency. A foreign currency may also be used and this
shall be shown in a separate column, next to the national cur-
rency.
Domicilary enterprises may draw up the inventory and the
balance sheet solely in a foreign curreny.
Further exceptions, provided by law or permitted by the Reg-
istrar, are reserved.
Art. 1051
The annual balance sheet must be drawn up in accordance
with recognised business rules, completely, clearly, truthfully, and
distinctly, thus providing the most certain possible insight into
the economic situation of the party (parties) under obligation to
draw up a balance sheet. Reservation is made concerning the
commercially customary hidden reserves.
3. Fixed dates
4. Currenc
y
II. Balance sheet
principles for
the annual bal-
ance sheet
1. Completeness
of the annual
balance sheet

– 310 –
Art. 1052
Assets of permanent service to the operation of the company,
such as buildings, land, power plants, machines, vehicles, tools,
furniture, rights, concessions, patents, processes, licences, compa-
nies, trade marks and other assets may, at the most, only be en-
tered in the balance sheet at the cost of acquisition or manufac-
ture, after deduction, appropriate to the circumstances, of the
necessary depreciation.
Depreciation may also be taken into consideration by the es-
tablishment of amortisation and renewals funds.
If the installations are insured, the insurance sum should be
noted next to the balance sheet value.
Art. 1053
Raw materials, semi-finished products, goods and other real
assets intended to be sold may, at the most, only be valued at the
acquisition or manufacturing costs plus interest and expenses. If,
however, on the balance sheet date, these are higher than the gen-
erally valid market price at the place of purchase, including pur-
chase expenses, the latter value, at the most, shall be taken.
In the case of assets which do not have a market value, the
latter shall be replaced by the purchase price valid on the balance
sheet date.
Art. 1054
Quoted securities may only be valued at the acquisition price
plus interest, at the most. If, however, the average price for the
last month before the balance sheet date is lower, only the latter,
lower price may be taken.
Unquoted securities shall be entered at the original value, at
the most, taking the current yield into consideration, if necessary
(interest, dividends); a possible decrease in value shall be taken
into consideration.
The foregoing provisions shall apply by analogy to own mem-
bership shares (own shares and similar).
Deviating government regulations concerning the valuation of
securities which concern securities for pledging the covering
2. Individual
items
a. Permanent
assets
b. Stock and other
assets to be
sold
c. Securities and
own shares

– 311 –
capital funds of undertakings and concerning life insurance and
similar insurance branches requiring cover are reserved.
Art. 1055
Securities and claims in a currency other than the balance sheet
currency and redeemable within a year as well as liability com-
mitments in a foreign currency entered into by the party under
obligation to draw up a balance sheet, which are subject to notice
of termination by the creditor or are due within a year shall be
converted, at the most or at least, at the average rate which the
foreign currency has maintained during the last month within the
country, in Switzerland or in another country determined by the
Government.
Should claims or securities in a foreign currency be involved
which are redeemable in a period longer than one year, the de-
crease in value suffered by the foreign currency shall be taken into
consideration at least to the same extent as is necessary for the
adjustment of the decrease in value in the case of the uniform
distribution of the depreciation over the term still remaining up to
the occurrence of possible repayment.
An increase in the value of a foreign currency shall be taken
into consideration in an analogous manner when the liability
commitments of the party under obligation to draw up a balance
sheet are terminable or due in a period which is longer than a
year.
The Government shall be empowered to issue deviating provi-
sions insofar as special circumstances justify this.
Art. 1056
Claims acquired from third parties shall be entered in the bal-
ance sheet at the acquisition price at the most and doubtful claims
shall be assessed at their probable value, uncollectable claims,
however, shall be written off.
Claims with conditions, a time limit or instructions shall be
included at their mature value, taking such incidental provisions
into consideration.
d. Valuation of
values in a cur-
rency other
than the bal-
ance sheet cur-
renc
y
e. Claims

– 312 –
Art. 1057
The capital resources of the party (parties) under obligation to
draw up a balance sheet as well as the various funds (reserves,
amortisation, renewals and welfare funds) shall be entered with
the appropriate amounts on the debit side, insofar as an exception
respecting the capital resources is not provided or allowed, as in
the case of companies limited by shares and other undertakings.
The profit or loss resulting from the comparison of all the as-
sets and all the liabilities, including the items to be entered on the
liabilities side, must be stated in a specific item at the end of the
balance sheet and, in addition, in accordance with the circum-
stances and commercial practice, a profit and loss account relating
to this asset or liability balance shall be drawn up.
Art. 1058
Bonds (debt certificates) issued by the party under obligation
to draw up a balance sheet shall be entered on the liability side
with a sum representing the full repayment amount.
The difference between the issue price and the repayment
amount may be allocated to the assets in the case of the issue price
being below the nominal value; however, by marking down annu-
ally, it must be amortised by the due date at the latest.
Where repayment ensues by means of invariable annual
drawing, the premiums in excess of the nominal value, which
must be paid at the time of repayment, may also only be paid out
of the profit from the year in which the bonds are repaid.
Art. 1059
Silent obligations such as asset losses, probably resulting from
subsequent fulfilment, acceptance and delivery obligations as well
as suretyships and special pledging in favour of individual credi-
tors, shall be listed in an appendix to the balance sheet or, in the
case of the individual balance sheet items, in the text column in a
total sum in each case.
Silent privileges, such as long term delivery privileges, the con-
clusion of specifications and the like may also be dealt with in the
same manner.
f. Own capital,
special funds
and balance
g. Bonds issued
h. Silent obliga-
tions and
privile ges

– 313 –
Art. 1060
Where no provision is made for exceptions or exceptions do
not ensue as the result of the circumstances, the winding-up bal-
ance shall be comprised on the one hand, of the assets and, on the
other, of the debts to third parties, as liabilities; own resources,
special funds without legal personality or without fiduciary appli-
cation are excluded from these.
In the winding up balance, the realisation value at the time the
balance is struck shall be authoritative for the valuation of all
items of property, without distinction.
The equalising distribution with respect to time of organisa-
tion costs, of price losses which result when bonds are issued and
of marking down is inadmissible.
Similarly, hidden reserves may no longer be retained.
Art. 1061
The balance sheet and the inventory shall be signed by the
business proprietor or his legal representative or, if appropriate,
by all the personally liable partners or by the bodies responsible
pursuant to the articles or the law.
The parties under obligation shall be responsible for the ob-
servance of the accounting regulations, regardless of whether they
personally attend to the accounting or whether they assign this
work to others, in particular to employees.
Art. 1062
For the keeping of books or their substitute, cards, etc., and
for otherwise necessary records, the party under obligation shall
use a living language and the characters of a modern language.
However, insofar as provision is made for submission to the Pub-
lic Register or for publicity otherwise, the balance sheet must be
submitted or published in German.
Books of account may be replaced by loose-leaf systems, long-
term accounts and the like.
The original text of an entry may not be made illegible by
crossing out or by any other method, nothing may be erased and,
III. Winding up
balance
IV. Res
ponsibilit y
C. In general
I. External form

– 314 –
alterations which by their nature give reason to doubt whether
these were made at the time of the original entry or later may not
be made.
Where in this law reference is made to books of account, the
regulations relating to these shall apply analogously to the loose-
leaf system of bookkeeping or similar and to the inventory and
the balance sheet.
Art. 1063
1)
Whosoever is required to keep books of account shall preserve
these, the business papers and the accounting records for a period
of ten years.
The originals of the operating account and the balance sheets
shall be preserved; the other books of account may be preserved
as records on image recording media, business papers and ac-
counting records as records on image and data recording media,
provided the records agree with the documentation and can be
made legible at any time. The Government shall determine the
prerequisites in detail by statutory instrument.
The period of preservation, i.e., of safe keeping, shall com-
mence with the expiration of the calendar year in which the last
entries were made, the business papers were received or dis-
patched and the accounting records came into being.
Art. 1063A
2)
Juridical persons and trust enterprises entered in the Public
Register that do not undertake commercial activities and whose
articles do not permit the pursuit of such activities shall submit to
the Public Register, within six months of the close of the business
year, a declaration signed or jointly signed by the member of the
administration who fulfils the prerequisites pursuant to Article
180a, in which it is confirmed that the statement for the business
year concluded is to hand and that during that business year
commercial activities were not undertaken.

1) Art. 1063 in the version of the law of 10 November, 1976, LGBl. 1976, No. 672) Art. 1063A inserted by the law of 15 April, 1980, LGBl. 1980, No. 39
II. Obligation to preserve
II. Obligation to
declare

– 315 –
The obligation to submit the declaration mentioned in para-
graph 1 shall not apply where pursuant to other provisions an
annual account must be submitted every year to the Tax Admini-
stration.
The Public Register Office shall supervise the punctual fulfil-
ment of the duty to declare mentioned in para. 1 of this Article.
Should the declaration not be submitted within the appointed
period, the Public Register Office shall remind the defaulting
company and if default continues for at least twelve months dis-
solution and liquidation proceedings shall be initiated ex officio.
Pursuant to § 66, the imposition of an administrative penalty is
reserved.
For a period of two years, the Public Register Office shall
have the right to examine within the intendment of para. 5 and 6
the declaration submitted pursuant to para. 1. An examination
shall be waived if the declaration is confirmed by a licenced audi-
tor or a company of chartered accountants.
Should an examination establish that a statement within the
intendment of para. 1 cannot be submitted, the Public Register
Office shall determine a period of grace for the submission of the
said statement or a confirmation pursuant to para. 4 and after the
expiration of the period of grace shall initiate dissolution and
liquidation proceedings ex officio.
Should an examination of the statement show that the com-
pany has undertaken commercial activities, the Public Register
Office shall notify the Tax Administration.
Art. 1064
Whosoever is under obligation to keep books of account may,
in the event of disputes concerning the legal relationships arising
from the operation of a business, be required to produce these as
well as the business letters received, telegrams and copies, upon
petition or ex officio. Records submitted on image or data re-
cording media shall be readable without the use of aids.
1)

1) Art. 1064 para. 1 supplements pursuant to law dated 10 November, 1976, LGBl.
1976, No. 67.
III. Obligation to
submit, law of
evidence and
exclusion of
levy of execu-
tion and writ

– 316 –
The judge shall assess the probative value of the books and
business papers at his discretion.
The special regulations, in particular contentious, extrajudicial
and non-contentious proceedings concerning the submission of
documents shall remain unaffected.
Unless the undertaking as a whole were to be transferred and
they were indispensable for the continuation, the books and their
substitute may not be utilised either by way of levy of execution
and writ or in bankruptcy proceedings. A right of retention may
not be asserted.
Art. 1065
Where in official proceedings the books or the notes which
take their place are submitted, their content, insofar as this relates
to the subject matter of the case, shall be examined, possibly in
the presence of the parties and, if appropriate, an excerpt shall be
prepared.
The remaining content of the accounting records shall be dis-
closed to the court only to the extent necessary in order to verify
that they have been kept in an orderly manner.
In the case of disputes involving assets, particularly relating to
matters concerning inheritance communities, communities of
goods and company partition or where otherwise there is an obli-
gation to submit accounts or provide information, the judge may,
in extrajudicial or contentious proceedings, direct that the books
of account or their substitute be submitted in order that their
contents may be noted.
Art. 1066
1)
The domestic branch establishments of foreign companies
shall be subject to the provisions of this law concerning account-
ancy.
The probative value of the books of account and their substi-
tute within the Principality of Liechtenstein and also of foreign
books of account shall conform with Liechtenstein law.

1) Art. 1066 para. 1 amended by the law dated 30. October, 1996, LGBl. 1997,
No. 19.
IV. Duty of disclo-
sure
D. International
law

– 317 –
Where an obligation under public law, subject to penalty, is
involved, the obligation to submit books and the like shall be
adjudged pursuant to the laws applicable for the establishment of
a place of business; on the other hand, the obligation to submit
books of account to a party in contentious or extrajudicial pro-
ceedings shall be adjudged pursuant to the law of the court before
which the action is tried.
Art. 1067
1)
An appeal may be lodged with the Government within 14
days of service against decisions and orders of the competent
government office. The same period of time shall
apply in the case of transmission to the administrative court.

1) Art. 1067 inserted by the law dated 16. December, 1994, LGBl. 1995, No. 25.
Right of a ppeal

– 318 –

– 319 –
Laws embodied in this Volume
concerning further Entities:
Law
of 21 October 1992
on Banks and Finance Companies
(Banking Act – Bankengesetz)
Law
of 6 December 1995
on the Supervision of
Insurance Undertakings
(Versicherungsaufsichtsgesetz; VersAG)
Law
of 3 May 1996
on Investment Undertakings
(Gesetz über Investmentunternehmen – IUG)
Law
of 22 May 1996
on professional due diligence in
the acceptance of assets
(Due Diligence Act – Sorgfaltspflichtgesetz)
Law
of 23 October 1997
on the Provision, Control and Distribution
of the Prospectus to be published on the Occasion
of the Public Offer of Securities (Prospectus Law)

– 320 –

– 321 –
Liechtenstein Legal Gazette
1992 No. 108 published on 15 December 1992
Law
of 21 October 1992
on Banks and Finance Companies
(Banking Act)
I hereby grant My Consent to the following Resolution
adopted by the Diet:
I. Object, Definitions and Scope
Art. 1
Object and Scope
This law describes the organisation and the transactions and
has as its object the protection of the creditors of banks and
finance companies and the safeguarding of confidence in the
Liechtenstein monetary and banking sector
Art. 2
Scope
Banks, finance companies and bank groups are governed by
this Act.
Art. 3
Definitions
1) Banks are companies which conduct transactions as speci-
fied in Para. 4 as a professional activity.
2) Finance companies within the intendment of this Act are
companies which conduct transactions as specified in Para. 4 Sub-
Paras. b, d or e as a professional activity.

– 322 –
3) Bank groups consist of undertakings which according to the
degree of control and their activities or on account of a de facto
obligation to assist may be considered as a single company.
4) Banking transactions are:
a) the acceptance of deposits and other repayable funds;
b) the lending of customers’ deposits to an unspecified circle of
borrowers;
c) the security deposit business
d) all other off-balance-sheet banking transactions;
e) participations in securities’ issues and the services associated
with this.
II. Business activities of Banks and Finance Companies
Art. 4
Own Capital Resourses (Equity)
1) The own capital resources (equity) of banks and finance
companies prescribed by law must be in an appropriate ratio to
the risks associated with the balance-sheet and the off-balance-
sheet transactions. The Government shall set the minimum ratio
between the equity and the total liabilities in an Executive Order.
2) In the case of a bank group, the capital resources (equity)
prescribed must be available for each bank and finance company
governed by this law and on a consolidated basis for the entire
bank group.
3) In justified cases, the Government may grant relief or im-
pose stricter conditions.
Art. 5
Liquidity
1) Banks and finance companies shall ensure an appropriate
ratio between short-term liabilities and available funds and readily
negotiable assets. The Government shall set the minimum ratios
in an Executive Order.

– 323 –
2) An appropriate liquidity must be assured within a bank
group.
3) In justified cases, the Government may grant relief or order
stricter conditions.
Art. 6
Legal Reserve Fund
Banks and finance companies must pay deposits into a reserve
fund pursuant to the regulations of the Liechtenstein Law con-
cerning Persons and Companies (PGR).
Art. 7
Deposit Security
1) Banks must ensure adequate security of the deposits, espe-
cially on savings books and salary and current accounts.
2) The Government may permit participation in foreign secu-
rity schemes.
3) The Government shall specify the detailed regulations in an
Executive Order.
Art. 8
Spreading of Risks
1) The claims of a bank on individual persons or undertakings
and their participations in an individual undertaking or in indi-
vidual landed properties must be in an appropriate ratio to their
own capital resources (equity). The Government shall set the
maximum ratios in an Executive Order.
2) Individuals and undertakings that are associated with each
other through the participation capital in excess of 50% shall be
treated as one unit.
3) In the case of the transactions of the undertakings of a bank
group the ratio pursuant to para. 1 shall be calculated with respect
to the consolidated capital resources.
4) In justified cases, the Government may grant relief or im-
pose stricter conditions.

– 324 –
Art. 9
Transactions of Governing Bodies
Transactions of Banks with members of their bodies and
auditors, with their majority shareholders and with persons and
companies associated with these three categories must be in ac-
cord with the generally recognised principles of banking.
Art. 10
Business Report and Interim Balance Sheets
Banks and finance companies must submit the business report
(annual accounts and annual report) to the Bank Supervisory
Office and publish the same within four months of the end of the
business year.
2) In addition, bank groups must submit a consolidated busi-
ness report to the Bank Supervisory Office within six months of
the end of the business year.
3) If not determined otherwise by this Act and the Executive
Orders pertaining thereto, the annual accounts and the interim
balance sheets shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions
of the Liechtenstein Law on Persons and Companies.
4) The Government shall determine the form, content and
publication of the company reports and interim balance sheets of
banks, finance companies and bank groups by Executive Order.
5) Business reports, interim balance sheets and the information
necessary for the conduct of the monetary, credit and currency
policy and for banking statistics are to be submitted to the Bank
Supervisory Office.
Art. 11
External Audit Obligation
1) Banks and finance companies must have their business ac-
tivities audited each year by an auditor who is independent of
them and is recognised by the Government.
2) Banks and finance companies must provide the auditor with
all the information necessary for an appropriate audit;

– 325 –
3) Banks and finance companies must
a) keep available for the auditor the documents necessary for the
determination and valuation of the assets and liabilities;
b) allow the auditor to inspect their books, vouchers, business
correspondence and minutes of the Board of Directors and of
the company management;
c) submit to the auditor the internal audit reports.
Art. 12
Repledging
1) A bank wishing to repledge a pledge or to continue it must
obtain authority in a special deed from the pledgor for every indi-
vidual case.
2) The bank may only repledge the pledge or give it in con-
tinuation for the sum for which it holds the pledge.
3) The bank must have their creditor confirm in writing that
a) the pledge is exclusively for the securing of the claim associ-
ated with the repledging or the carry-over business;
b) third parties cannot be granted any rights to the pledge.
Art. 13
Promotional Activities
Banks and finance companies may not conduct misleading or
importunate promotional activities in Liechtenstein or other
countries and especially not in connection with their Liechten-
stein domicile or Liechtenstein facilities.
Art. 14
Banking Secrecy
1) The members of the bodies of banks and finance companies,
their staff and persons acting on behalf of such companies are
obliged to maintain confidentiality about facts which are en-
trusted to them or to which they have access through business
connections with customers. The obligation of secrecy is not lim-
ited in time.

– 326 –
2) Should facts which are subject to banking secrecy become
known to representatives of authorities in the course of their offi-
cial duties, they must maintain banking secrecy as an official
secret.
3) Contraventions shall be punished pursuant to Art. 63
Para. 1.
4) The legal regulations on the obligation to give evidence or
information before criminal courts are reserved.
III. Concessions
Art. 15
Obligation to obtain a Concession
Banks and finance companies must obtain a concession from
the Government before commencing their business activities. For
the concession to be valid, the agreement of the Diet is required.
Art. 16
Designations of Companies
Designations suggesting an activity as a bank or finance com-
pany may be used in the name, in the designation of the object of
the company and in business advertising only for companies
which have received from the Government a concession as a bank
or finance company.
Art. 17
General Conditions
The concession for the operation of a bank or finance com-
pany shall be granted subject to agreement by the Diet when the
conditions specified in Art. 18 to 25 are met.
Art. 18
Legal Form
Banks and finance companies may only be established in the
legal form of a company limited by shares (Aktiengesellschaft).
The Government may make an exception in justified cases

– 327 –
Art. 19
Guarantee of Satisfactory Business Conduct
The persons entrusted with the administration and business
management of a bank or finance company must at all times offer
the guarantee of satisfactory business conduct in professional and
personal respects.
Art. 20
Incompatibility
The persons entrusted with the administration and business
management of a bank or finance company may not be a member
of the Government.
Art. 21
Scope of Operations
1) The Articles of Association and Regulations must precisely
define the material and geographical scope of operations of the
bank or finance company .
2) Non-bank activities must be expressly mentioned in the
Articles of Association.
3) For their validity in law, the Articles of Association and
Regulations require the approval of the Bank Supervisory Office.
Art. 22
Organisation
1) Banks and finance companies must be organised according
to their scope of operations.
2) Banks and finance companies must have
a) a Board of Directors for senior management, supervision and
control and
b) a Business Management.

– 328 –
3) Depending on the nature and extent of their scope of opera-
tions, banks and finance companies must have
a) a Business Management consisting of several members who
shall conduct their activities in a joint manner and may not
belong at the same time to the Board of Directors and
b) an Internal Audit Department reporting to the Board of
Directors.
4) The division of responsibilities between the Board of
Directors and the Business Management must assure an appropri-
ate supervision of the conduct of business.
Art. 23
Duties of the Board of Directors
1) The Board of Directors shall be responsible for the senior
management, supervision and control of the bank or finance
company.
2) In particular, the Board of Directors shall exercise the fol-
lowing duties which are non-transferable:
a) the determination of the organisation and the issuance of the
necessary instructions;
b) the organisation of the Accounts Department, budgetary con-
trol and financial planning if this is necessitated by the nature
and extent of the business activities;
c) the appointment and dismissal of the persons entrusted with
the business management and representation;
d) the supervision of the persons entrusted with the business
management, also in regard to the observance of the provisions
of law, the Articles of Association and regulations and the fi-
nancial development of the undertaking;
e) the preparation of the business report, the approval of the
interim balance sheets, the preparation of the General Meet-
ing and the execution of its resolutions.
Art. 24
Share Capital
1) The share capital for banks must be at least ten million
francs and for finance companies at least two million francs and
must be fully paid up.

– 329 –
2) Depending on the the nature and range of the scope of op-
erations, the Government may prescribe a higher share capital.
Art. 25
Domicile
At least one member of the Board of Directors and of the
Business Management must have their domicile in Liechtenstein
and have adequate authority to represent the bank or finance
company in relations with the administrative authorities or before
the courts.
Art. 26
Obligation to Notify
1) Banks and finance companies must notify the Bank Supervi-
sory Office of the following:
a) the composition of the Board of Directors, the Business Man-
agement and the Management of the Internal Audit Depart-
ment;
b) the Articles of Association and Regulations;
c) the organisation;
d) the subsidiary companies, branches and agencies;
e) participations in companies operating in the finance area;
f) the ownership relations of the voting capital;
g) the auditor.
2) Banks and finance companies must notify the Bank Supervi-
sory Office without delay of amendments to the facts specified in
Para. 1. Such notification must ensue before any public an-
nouncement is made.
3) Amendments to the Articles of Association and Regulations
concerning the scope of operations, share capital, the organisation
or a change of auditor shall also require the approval of the Bank
Supervisory Office. In this regard, entries in the Public Register
shall be admissible only after the Bank Supervisory Office has
given ist approval.

– 330 –
Art. 27
Lapse of Concessions
Concession shall lapse:
a) when business activities do not commence within a period of
one year;
b) when business activities have ceased for at least one year;
c) when the concession is waived in writing.
Art. 28
Withdrawal of Concessions, Dissolution and Cancellation
1) Concessions shall be withdrawn and the withdrawal pub-
lished if the conditions for the granting of such are no longer
fulfilled.
2) For banks and finance companies, the withdrawal of the
concession shall cause their dissolution and deregistration in the
Public Register.
3) A company which exercises an activity within the intend-
ment of Art. 3 without a concession may be dissolved by the
Government if the object of this law so requires. In urgent cases,
this may take place without prior notice and without the setting
of a period of time.
4) The Bank Supervisory Office shall supervise the liquidator.
Art. 29
Revocation of Concessions
Concessions may be modified or revoked by the Government
when the holder of the concession has obtained the granting of
such by the submission of incorrect information or when impor-
tant circumstances were not known to the Government.
Art. 30
Fees
1) Fees shall be charged for concessions, decisions, orders and
special services.
2) The fees shall be charged according to fee regulations de-
termined by the Government.

– 331 –
IV. Supervision of Banks
Art. 31
Organisation and Implementation
The following shall be entrusted with the implementation of
this law:
a) the Government;
b) the Bank Commission;
c) the Bank Supervisory Office;
d) the Auditors;
e) the Princely Liechtenstein Court of Justice.
A. The Government
Art. 32
Scope of Duties
1) The Government shall be the supreme supervisory author-
ity.
2) It shall grant, withdraw or revoke concessions.
3) The Government shall be the penal authority for adminis-
trative offences pursuant to Art. 63 Para. 3.
B. Bank Commission
Art. 33
Duties
1) The Bank Commission is the advisory body of the Gov-
ernment for the supervision of banks, finance companies and bank
groups. It shall concern itself with all the fundamental questions
of bank supervision and shall report to the Government on the
state of the supervision as required, but at least once annually.
2) In particular, the Bank Commission is authorised:
a) To expound its views to the Government on the granting,
withdrawal or revocation of a concession;
b) to inspect the files and documents of the Bank Supervisory
Office in discharge of its duties.
3) The Bank Commission many publish its reports.

– 332 –
Art. 34
Composition
1) The Bank Commission shall be comprised of the president
and four other members. It shall be elected by the Diet for a pe-
riod of four years.
2) The Bank Supervisory Office shall be at the disposal of the
Bank Commission as its secretariat.
3) The members of the Bank Commission must be experts.
They may not be members of the Government, a court, the Board
of Directors of a Liechtenstein bank or a finance company, the
Board of Directors or company management of an auditor of
Liechtenstein banks, finance companies or investment funds or of
the internal audit department of banks, finance companies or
investment funds.
4) The members of the Bank Commission shall be subject to
the regulations concerning official secrets.
C. Bank Supervisory Office
Art. 35
Duties
1) The Bank Supervisory Office shall supervise the imple-
mentation of this law and the executive orders issued in relation
thereto and shall take the necessary steps.
2) In particular, the Bank Supervisory Office may:
a) Demand information and clarifications necessary for the im-
plementation of the law, from banks and finance companies
and their auditors;
b) order extraordinary audits or itself carry out audits of certain
statements of facts;
c) issue and, after due warning, publish legally valid decisions
and orders should the bank or finance company oppose such
decisions and orders.

– 333 –
3) In particular, the Bank Supervisory Office is responsible
for:
a) The assessment of requests for concessions and approvals
submitted to the Government;
b) the approval of the Articles of Association and regulations of
banks and finance companies and of amendments thereto;
b) the verification of audit reports.
Art. 36
Official Information
1) The communication of offical information by the Govern-
ment or the Bank Supervisory Office to foreign bank supervisory
authorities is permissible when:
a) Public order, other essential national interests and bank se-
crecy are not violated by this;
b) the information is not contrary to the object of this law;
c) it is ensured that the state requesting the information would
grant a similar Liechtenstein request;
d) it is ensured that the information obtained shall only be used
for bank supervision;
e) it is ensured that the staff of the authorities concerned and the
persons commissioned by the authorities concerned are sub-
ject to professional secrecy obligations.
2) Should this be necessary pursuant to the object of this law
the Government or the Bank Supervisory Office may at any time
obtain information about the activities of Liechtenstein banks and
finance companies in other countries and about the economic
situation of foreign banks whose activities may affect the Liech-
tenstein monetary and banking system.
3) The provisions of Paras. 1 and 2 may be applied only if
there is no provision to the contrary in inter-governmental
agreements.

– 334 –
D. Audit Companies
Art. 37
Recognition
1) Audit companies which audit banks and finance companies
must have a licence from the Government for such activity.
2) The licence shall be granted to audit companies when
a) their company management, the senior auditors and the or-
ganisation ensure that they carry out audit commissions in a
continuous and appropriate manner and
b) are organised as a company limited by shares (Aktiengesell-
schaft) and have an appropriate share capital at their disposal.
3) The audit companies shall concern themselves exclusively
with audit activities and the transactions directly associated
therewith. In particular, they may not conduct any assets man-
agement activity.
4) The audit companies must be independent of the banks and
finance companies to be audited.
5) The Government shall determine the details of the provi-
sions by Executive Order.
Art. 38
Duties
1) The audit companies shall verify whether
a) the business activities of the bank or finance company comply
with the law, the Articles of Association and the regulations;
b) the conditions for the granting of the concession are perma-
nently met and
c) the business report complies with the legal requirements.
2) In the case of banks and finance companies without an in-
ternal audit department, the auditor shall carry out interim audits
each year without prior notification.
3) The audit report shall be sent simultaneously to the Board
of Directors of the bank or finance company, to the audit author-
ity according to the provisions of the Liechtenstein Law on Per-
sons and Companies and to the Bank Supervisory Office.

– 335 –
Art. 39
Objections
1) If the audit company finds infringements of the provisions
of law or other irregularities, it shall set the bank or finance com-
pany an appropriate deadline for the restoration of a situation
which complies with the law. If the deadline expires without
result, the auditor must notify the Bank Supervisory Office.
2) The audit company must notify the Bank Supervisory
Office immediately if there appears to be no useful purpose in
setting a deadline or if it finds that criminial offences have been
committed by the company management or that other serious
irregularities exist which are contrary to the object of this law
(Art. 1).
Art. 40
Auditing Costs
1) Banks and finance companies shall bear the costs of audit-
ing. Auditing fees shall be calculated in accordance with the tariff
issued by the Government by Executive Order.
2) The arrangement of a lump-sum remuneration or of a cer-
tain expenditure of time for the audit is prohibited.
E. The Princely Court of Justice
Art. 41
Prosecutory Authority
The Princely Court of Justice is the prosecutory authority for
offences specified in Art. 63 Paras. 1 and 2.

– 336 –
V. Reorganisation and Liquidation
A. Moratorium
Art. 42
Conditions and Applications
1) A bank which is unable to meet its commitments in time
may apply to the Court of Justice for the granting of a morato-
rium.
2) At the same time, the bank must submit to the Court of
Justice a financial statement, its last annual accounts, its last in-
terim balance sheet and the last audit report.
3) Legally significant acts carried out by the bank after the
closing of its counters or after the submission of its application
and until the appointment of a provisional commissioner shall be
invalid for its creditors.
Art. 43
Approval
1) After hearing the Bank Supervisory Office, the Court of
Justice shall approve a moratorium for a period of one year pro-
vided the bank is not overindebted. In justified cases, the morato-
rium may be extended for a further year.
2) The moratorium shall be published.
Art. 44
Provisional Commissioner
1) The Princely Court of Justice shall appoint a provisional
commissioner who shall have the same powers as the ordinary
commissioners until a decision is made concerning the request or
until bankruptcy proceedings are opened.
2) The auditor as stipulated by banking legislation may be
designated as the provisional commissioner.

– 337 –
Art. 45
Commissioner
1) Should the Court of Justice approve the moratorium, it
shall appoint reliable and expert persons of good character as
commissioners of the bank. A bank or a trust company may also
be appointed as a commissioner.
2) When several commissioners are appointed, one commis-
sioner must act as the supervisor.
3) Partners and former partners who have resigned in the last
year prior to the opening of bankruptcy proceedings may not be
appointed as commissioners.
4) The commissioner shall be subject to the supervision of the
Court of Justice and for serious reasons may be dismissed by it.
Art. 46
Duties of the Commissioner
Immediately after his appointment, the commissioner together
with the auditor, must establish the financial situation of the
bank, report on this to the Princely Court of Justice and the bank
and take the steps necessary for the maintenance of operations.
Art. 47
Conduct of Business
1) During the moratorium, the bank shall continue its business
operations under the supervision of the commissioner and in ac-
cordance with his instructions.
2) The bank may not carry out any legally significant acts by
which the justified interests of the creditors are impaired or which
favour individual creditors at the expense of others.
3) The bank must allow the Court of Justice and the commis-
sioner to inspect all the books and vouchers and must give all the
explanations demanded.
4) The commissioner must be invited to attend all the discus-
sions of the bodies of the bank; he may also arrange such discus-
sions himself.

– 338 –
Art. 48
Payments to Creditors
1) Payments to creditors may only be made with the agree-
ment of the commissioner.
2) The commissioner shall be empowered to order at his dis-
cretion payments to creditors to be made from the receipts of
claims of the bank which become due. Consideration shall
thereby be given to the interests of creditors privileged by legally
valid transactions or by the law also to those of small creditors.
3) Such payments may not exceed half of those sums for which
cover is available according to the determination of the assets
carried out by the commissioner.
Art. 49
Further Measures
1) After hearing the Bank Supervisory Office, the Court of
Justice may take further steps at any time during the moratorium
as required by the situation and in the interests of the bank or the
creditors.
2) In particular, the Court of Justice may order that the con-
clusion of new transactions, the alienation of landed property, the
creation of liens or the acceptance of guarantees shall require the
approval of the commissioner in order to be valid.
3) The Princely Court of Justice must publish such orders.
Art. 50
Executions
1) During the moratorium period, executions against the
debtor may only be implemented up to attachment and valuation.
2) A petition for realisation or bankruptcy may not be
granted.
3) The periods for the submission of applications for realisa-
tion shall be prolonged by the duration of the moratorium. Simi-
larly, the liability of the real estate mortgage for the interest of the
mortgage debt (Art. 290 para. 1 subsection 3 of the law of prop-
erty) shall be prolonged by the period of the moratorium.

– 339 –
Art. 51
Extrajudicial Reorganisation
1) Should the bank seek an extrajudicial reorganisation or an
settlement agreement, the commissioner must assess the bank’s
applications for the bodies of the company, the creditors or the
Court of Justice.
2) Should it become apparent during the moratorium that an
extrajudicial reorganisation is possible for the bank, the Court of
Justice, as an exceptional measure, may prolong the moratorium
by a further six months.
Art. 52
Revocation of Moratorium
1) On the application of the commissioner or of a creditor, the
Court of Justice must revoke the moratorium if the bank:
a) Obtained the moratorium on the basis of incorrect informa-
tion;
b) is acting in contravention of the instructions of the commis-
sioner;
c) is prejudicing the justified interests of the creditors;
d) favours individual creditors at the expense of others.
2) The Court of Justice must publish the revocation of the
moratorium.
Art. 53
Lapse of Moratorium
1) On the application of the commissioner the Court of Justice
may declare the moratorium as lapsed when in the judgment of
the latter it is no longer necessary.
2) The Court of Justice must publish the lapse of the morato-
rium.

– 340 –
B. Special Provisions concerning Bankruptcy
Art. 54
Opening of Bankruptcy
1) Should the bank prove to be over-indebted during the
moratorium or be considered to be unable to meet its liabilities at
the due date after the end of the period of extension or to carry
out an extrajudicial reorganisation, the Court of Justice, after
hearing the Bank Supervisory Office, shall instruct the commis-
sioner to apply for the immediate opening of bankruptcy pro-
ceedings, unless the bank opens an administration order proce-
dure.
2) A deferment of the bankruptcy shall not be permissible.
3) The claims shown in the books of the bank shall be consid-
ered as registered.
Art. 55
Trustee in Bankruptcy
1) The Court of Justice shall appoint the trustee in bank-
ruptcy. He may be appointed from the circle of the ordinary
commissioners.
2) The trustee in bankruptcy may exercise all powers.
Art. 56
Savings Deposits
In the event that a bank should become bankrupt, the deposits
on savings books and on savings and salary accounts shall be clas-
sified in the third class over and above the deposit insurance
scheme laid down in Art. 7 up to a sum of 50,000 francs.

– 341 –
C. Special Provisions concerning
the Administration Order Procedure
Art. 57
Application; Provisional Administrator
1) Should the bank submit an application for an administration
moratorium, the Court of Justice shall appoint a provisional ad-
ministrator who shall have the same powers as the ordinary ad-
ministrator until a decision is taken on the application or until
bankruptcy proceedings are opened.
2) The auditor as stipulated by banking legislation may be
designated as the provisional administrator. If a commissioner has
already been appointed, he shall be the provisional administrator.
Art. 58
Administrator
Should the Court of Justice accede to the application for an
administration moratorium, it shall definitively appoint an ad-
ministrator if a commissioner has not already been appointed.
Art. 59
Administration Moratorium
1) The administration moratorium shall be for six months. If
necessary, it may be extended by a further six months.
2) The claims shown in the books of the bank shall be consid-
ered as registered.
3) Legally significant acts carried out by the bank after the
closing of its counters or after the submission of its application
and until the appointment of a provisional administrator shall be
invalid for its creditors.

– 342 –
Art. 60
Administration Agreement
1) The creditors shall be publicly called upon to lodge any
objections to the draft administration agreement open for their
inspection. A creditors’ meeting shall not be held.
2) The administration agreement shall be approved when the
sum offered is in a correct ratio to the remedies of the debtor and
the completion of the administration agreement and the complete
satisfaction of the recognised privileged creditors is assured and
when in addition, after the examination of all the circumstances, it
is found that the interests of the totality of the creditors are better
served by the administration agreement than by the bankruptcy
liquidation.
3) Payment of the claims covered by pledges may be deferred
in an appropriate manner in the administration agreement.
VI. Procedure and Remedies
Art. 61
Decisions and Dispositions
When infringements of the provisions of this law or of the ex-
ecutive orders issued in connection with it are found and are not
remedied despite a warning and the setting of a reasonable dead-
line, the competent authority shall take the appropriate decisions
and dispositions.
Art. 62
Remedies
1) An appeal against decisions and dispositions of the Bank
Supervisory Office may be lodged with the Government within
14 days of the service of such.
2) An appeal against decisions and dispositions of the Gov-
ernment may be lodged with the Administrative Court within 14
days of the service of such.

– 343 –
VII. Penal Provisions
Art. 63
Offences and Violations
1) Violations by the following persons shall be punished by
the Court of Justice with imprisonment of up to six months or a
fine of up to 360 daily income units:
a) Whoever as a member of a governing body and as an em-
ployee or any other person acting for a bank or finance com-
pany, as an auditor or as a member of the Bank Commission
or as an employee of the Bank Supervisory Office violates the
obligation to observe confidentiality or induces or attempts to
induce others to do this;
b) whoever exercises an activity within the intendment of Art. 3
without a concession.
The two punishments may be taken together.
2) Infringements by the following persons shall be punished
by the Court of Justice with fines up to 100 000 francs:
a) Whoever violates the conditions imposed for a concession or
permit;
b) whoever uses in a prohibited manner designations suggesting
an activity as a bank;
c) whoever fails to make the prescribed allotments to the reserve
fund;
d) whoever, contrary to the provisions of Art. 12, repledges
pledges or gives them in continuation;
e) whoever provides the Bank Supervisory Office or the auditor
with false information;
f) whoever fails to maintain the company books in a proper
manner or fails to keep company books and records;
g) whoever as an auditor grossly violates his obligations, in par-
ticular in the audit report states false facts or conceals impor-
tant facts or omits to warn the bank as prescribed or does not
provide the reports and information prescribed;

– 344 –
3) Infringements by the following persons shall be punished
by the Government with fines up to 50 000 francs:
a) Whoever fails to draw up or publish the business report or an
interim balance sheet in accordance with the regulations;
b) whoever fails to have carried out the ordinary audit or an audit
prescribed by the Bank Supervisory Office;
c) whoever fails to carry out his obligations towards the auditor;
d) whoever fails to provide the prescribed information to the
Bank Supervisory Office;
e) whoever fails to comply with a demand to establish the proper
state of affairs in conformity with the law or with another dis-
position of the Bank Supervisory Office;
f) whoever conducts misleading or importunate promotional
activities, especially in connection with a Liechtenstein domi-
cile or Liechtenstein facilities.
4) In the case of negligent perpetration, the upper limit of pen-
alties shall be reduced by half.
5) The facts of the irregularity named in Para. 1 shall fall under
the statutes of limitation after two years.
6) The general part of the Penal Code shall apply analogously
otherwise.
Art. 64
Responsibility
Should the infringements be committed in the business opera-
tions of a juridical person or of a general or limited partnership or
a single-person firm, the penal provisions shall apply to the per-
sons who have acted for these or should have acted for them, but
with the joint and several liability of the juridical person, the
company or the single-person firm for the fines and costs.
Art. 65
The Public Prosecutor’s Obligation to Notify
The Public Prosecutor shall notify the Bank Supervisory
Office by a complete copy of all judgments and discontinuation
decisions concerning members of the administration or manage-
ment of banks, finance companies and auditors.

– 345 –
VIII. Transitional Provision
Art. 66
Concessions
Concessions for the operation of a bank or finance company
which do not meet the requirements of this law and the Executive
Orders relating thereto shall be adapted to the new law within
one year after the entry into force of the enactments in question
or, if need be, shall be withdrawn or revoked.
IX. Final Provisions
Art. 67
Executive Orders
The Government shall issue the Executive Orders necessary
for the implementation of this law, in particular concerning:
a) Own capital resources (equity) (Art. 4);
b) liquidity (Art. 5);
c) the spreading of risk (Art. 8);
d) the business report and interim balance sheets (Art. 10);
e) the charging of fees (Art. 30) and the tariff concerning auditing
costs (Art. 40);
f) the requirements to be met by the auditors (Art. 37).
Art. 68
Repeal of Previous Legislation
The following shall be repealed:
a) The law of 21 December 1960 concerning banks and savings
banks, LGBl. 1961 No. 3;
b) the law of 18 November 1964 concerning the amendment of
the law concerning banks and savings banks, LGBl. 1965
No. 3;
4) the law of 10 July 1975 concerning the amendment of the law
concerning banks and savings banks, LGBl. 1975 No. 41;

– 346 –
Art. 69
Entry into Force
This law shall enter into force on 1 January 1993.
signed Hans-Adam
signed Hans Brunhart
Head of the Princely Government

– 347 –
Liechtenstein Legal Gazette
1996 No. 23 published on 22 February 1996
Law
of 6 December 1995
on the Supervision of
Insurance Undertakings
(Versicherungsaufsichtsgesetz; VersAG)
I hereby grant My Consent to the following Resolution
adopted by the Diet:
I. Object, Scope and Definitions
Art. 1
Object
This law describes the organisation and content of the supervi-
sion of insurance undertakings and, in particular, has the object of
protecting policy holders and maintaining confidence in the
Liechtenstein insurance and financial sector.
Art. 2
Scope, Principle
1) Undertakings offering direct insurance or reinsurance (in-
surance undertakings) in the Principality of Liechtenstein shall be
subject to insurance supervision as specified by this law.
2) The Supervisory Authority shall be authorised to exempt,
wholly or partly, individual undertakings from supervision if in
the individual case there is no need for supervision and the inter-
ests of the insured shall not be endangered by this.
3) Special rulings by State treaties are reserved.

– 348 –
Art. 3
Indemnity Insurance
1) The insurance of third party liability cases and against prop-
erty losses is divided into individual branches; such branches are
listed in Appendix 1.
2) For compulsory building insurance, the relevant special de-
crees continue to apply.
3) Concerning compulsory third-party motor vehicle insur-
ance, the special laws and decrees are reserved.
Art. 4
Life Insurance
1) Life insurance comprises in particular endowment insur-
ance, whole-life insurance, mixed insurances and supplementary
insurance for life insurance.
2) The limitation of life insurance and specifically those busi-
ness activities which may not be pursued in the form of life insur-
ance shall be regulated by Executive Order.
3) The classification of insurance branches is contained in Ap-
pendix 2.
Art. 5
Reinsurance
Insurance undertakings having their head office in a foreign
country and only carrying out reinsurance transactions in the
Principality of Liechtenstein shall be exempt from supervision.
Art. 6
Self-Insurance (Captive)
1) Self-insurance may be conducted as direct insurance or rein-
surance.
2) Insurance undertakings may conduct self-insurance and the
insurance of third parties at the same time.
3) Exemption from supervision may be granted in individual
cases as specified in Art. 2 Para. 2.

– 349 –
Art. 7
Insurance Holding Companies
Insurance holding companies are not subject to this law if they
do not themselves conduct direct insurance or reinsurance.
Art. 8
Health Insurance
1) For health insurance, the legislation on health insurance
whose regulations are compulsory for all health insurance con-
tracts is to be observed.
2) The provisions of this law on the taking up and exercise of
business activities by insurance undertakings are reserved.
Art. 9
Accident Insurance
1) Insurance undertakings wishing to conduct accident insur-
ance (for accidents at work, non-occupational accidents, industrial
diseases) are also subject to the legislation on compulsory accident
insurance.
2) If the legislation on compulsory accident insurance contains
provisions which deviate from this law and do not merely con-
cern voluntary accident insurance, these shall take precedence.
Art. 10
Company Pension Schemes
1) Company pension schemes for old-age, invalidity and de-
pendents do not fall under this law; these are covered by the rele-
vant special legislation.
2) The administration of international provident organisations
does not fall under this law either.
Art. 11
Definitions
1) The head office, an agency or a branch office of the insur-
ance undertaking is defined as a business establishment. An office

– 350 –
is equated with an agency or branch establishment when the said
office
a) is managed by the insurance undertaking’s own staff or
b) is managed as an agency on a permanent basis by an independ-
ent person on behalf of the insurance undertaking.
2) A state for which the Agreement on the European Eco-
nomic Area has come into force is deemed to be a signatory state
to the EEA Agreement.
3) The following is considered as the state in which the risk is
situated:
a) In the case of the insurance either of buildings or of buildings
and the objects therein if these are covered by the same insur-
ance contract, the state in which the objects are situated;
b) in the case of the insurance of vehicles of all kinds, the state in
which the vehicle is registered (state of registration);
c) in the case of a contract for the insurance of travel and holiday
risks lasting not more than four months, the state in which the
policy holder has concluded the contract (irrespective of the
insurance branch in question);
d) in all other cases, the state in which the policy holder has his
usual place of residence or, when the policy holder is a legal
entity, the state in which the business establishment of this
legal entity is situated, to which the contract refers.
4) The state in which the insurance undertaking covering the
risk is located shall be deemed to be the state of the business es-
tablishment.
5) The state in which the risk is situated, which is covered by
an insurance undertaking established in another state, shall be
deemed to be the state in which the service is performed.
6) The state in which the policy holder has his usual place of
residence or, when the policy holder is a legal entity, the state in
which the business establishment of this legal entity is situated, to
which the contract refers, shall be deemed to be the state of the
liability.
7) The state in which the head office of the insurance under-
taking covering a risk is located shall be deemed to be the home
state.

– 351 –
8) The risks named in Appendix 3 shall be deemed to be major
risks.
9) The direct or indirect holding of at least ten per cent of the
capital or of the voting rights of an undertaking or any other pos-
sibility of exercising a determining influence on the management
of an undertaking in which the holding exists shall be deemed to
be a qualified participation.
II. Assumption and Conditions of Business Activities
Art. 12
Obligation to obtain Authorisation
1) Insurance undertakings subject to supervision require from
the Government an authorisation for every individual insurance
branch for the assumption of their business activities .
2) Insurance undertakings with a head office in a signatory
state to the European Economic Area Agreement do not require
an authorisation if they meet the special conditions as specified in
Art. 28 to 30; the special legislation concerning individual
branches of compulsory insurance is reserved.
Art. 13
Application for Authorisation
1) Insurance undertakings wishing to obtain an authorisation
for business activities must submit an application, together with
the business plan, to the Supervisory Authority. This must con-
tain the following details and proofs:
a) Extract from the Public Register according to which the un-
dertaking is required to demonstrate the legal form of a com-
pany limited by shares or a co-operative;
b) object and governing bodies of the undertaking, the object
being restricted to insurance activities and to those transac-
tions which are directly connected with this;

– 352 –
c) necessary details on solvency and the submission of an activity
plan as specified in Para. 2;
d) Articles of Association;
e) balance sheet, annual accounts or, if need be, the opening bal-
ance sheet and proof of the minimum sum for the guarantee
fund;
f) details of identity of and participations held by shareholders
and members of co-operatives having a qualified participation
in the insurance undertaking;
g) proof of the professional qualifications and personal integrity
of the company officers for the management of an insurance
undertaking;
h) details necessary for the assessment of the reliability and pro-
fessional suitability of the actuary in the life insurance depart-
ment responsible for actuarial matter;
i) details of funds at the disposal of the undertaking for the per-
formance of assistance services, insofar as an application is
made for an authorisation to provide tourist assistance in the
insurance branch;
j) contracts or other agreements by which marketing, manage-
ment assistance, the processing of benefits, accounting or as-
sets administration is wholly or largely transferred to another
undertaking (functional separation), although the head office
of the insurance undertaking must remain in the Principality
of Liechtenstein;
k) declaration concerning membership of the Liechtenstein In-
surance Office and the domestic guarantee fund insofar as an
insurance undertaking intends to be active in the insurance
branch of third-party liability for self-propelled land vehicles;
l) submission of all other documents and details necessary for
due supervision as demanded by the Supervisory Authority.
2) The plan of action must contain details and proofs con-
cerning the following points:
a) Planned insurance branches and type of risks which the insur-
ance undertaking intends to cover;

– 353 –
b) planned reinsurance and, for reinsurance undertakings, a ret-
rocession plan;
c) composition of the minimum guarantee fund;
d) probable costs for establishing the administration, the agency
network and the resources available for this (organisation
fund);
e) estimates for the first three years of business relating to com-
mission expenditure and other administrative costs, probable
premium and/or contribution income, probable expenditure
for insurance cases and the probable liquidity situation;
c) statements relating to the first three years of business con-
cerning the financial resources available for covering obliga-
tions and the solvency margin.
Art. 14
Minimum Capital
1) An insurance undertaking with its head office in the Princi-
pality of Liechtenstein must have a capital of which under all
circumstances a minimum sum of 500,000 francs must be paid up.
2) The Supervisory Authority shall determine in the individual
case the necessary minimum capital which must be fully paid up
and which it shall fix in consideration of the insurance branch in
which the insurance undertaking intends to be active. It may ad-
just the minimum sum stated in Para. 1 to adapt to any possible
fluctuations in monetary value.
Art. 15
Solvency Margin and Guarantee Fund
1) Insurance undertakings must show free and unburdened
own funds amounting to at least one solvency margin. One-third
of the solvency margin shall be deemed to be the guarantee fund.

– 354 –
2) The Government shall determine the allowable own funds
and issue regulations on the amount and the calculation:
a) of the solvency margin on the basis of the total business;
b) of the guarantee fund which corresponds to a certain fraction
of the solvency margin and may not be less than the minimum
guarantee fund;
c) of the minimum guarantee fund on the basis of the capital
requirement of the particular insurance branch.
Art. 16
Actuarial Reserves
1) Insurance undertakings are obliged to form sufficient actu-
arial reserves for the entire business activities.
2) The Government shall issue regulations concerning the
types and scope of the provisions and the capital investments
relating to such.
Art. 17
Organisation Fund
1) In addition to the minimum capital, an insurance undertak-
ing must have at its disposal an organisation fund for the forma-
tion and setting-up costs or for an exceptional expansion of busi-
ness.
2) The Government shall issue supplementary provisions con-
cerning the amount, creation, maintenance period and restoration
of the organisation fund.
3) The Supervisory Authority shall fix the amount of the or-
ganisation fund in the individual case; in exceptional cases, ex-
emption may be granted from the obligation to set up the organi-
sation fund.

– 355 –
Art. 18
Granting of Authorisation
1) The authorisation shall be granted when the insurance un-
dertaking satisfies the requirements of law and the business plan
can be approved.
2) The authorisation shall be granted separately for each insur-
ance branch or collectively for several insurance branches. For
insurance undertakings with domicile in the Principality of
Liechtenstein, it shall cover the area of the signatory states to the
EEA Agreement. The authorisation may be granted subject to
conditions.
Art. 19
Refusal of Authorisation
The authorisation to assume insurance activities may be re-
fused if
a) the application for authorisation is not complete;
b) facts are known from which it follows that the officers of an
insurance undertaking do not offer the guarantee of reliability
and professional suitability; or
c) according to the business plan and the other documentation
the interests of the policy holders are not adequately met or
the obligations arising from the insurances are not shown to be
capable of fulfilment in the long term.
Art. 20
Non-Insurance Business
1) Apart from insurance business, insurance undertakings may
only pursue business which is directly connected with insurance.
Non-insurance activities are not permissible.
2) Major holdings by insurance undertakings in non-insurance
undertakings require an authorisation. The Government shall
determine the details in the Executive Order.

– 356 –
Art. 21
Separation of Insurance Branches
1) Insurance undertakings engaged in direct life insurance may
not be active in any other branches of insurance apart from sup-
plementary insurance for accidental death, sickness and invalidity,
also health and invalidity insurance.
2) An insurance undertaking which provides insurance for le-
gal costs together with other insurance branches must transfer
benefit adjustment in legal costs insurance to another undertaking
(claims adjustment undertaking). The transfer is considered as a
functional separation. The claims adjustment undertaking may
not conduct any other insurance business apart from insurance
for legal costs and may not adjust benefits in other insurance
branches.
3) Art. 19 shall apply analogously to the officers of the claims
adjustment undertaking as specified in Para. 2. Such officers may
not work at the same time for an insurance undertaking which
carries on other insurance business apart from legal costs insur-
ance.
Art. 22
Brokerage
Brokerage in favour of insurance undertakings which are sub-
ject to insurance supervision and which have no authorisation to
operate in the Principality of Liechtenstein is prohibited.
Art. 23
Board of Directors and Management
1) At least one member of both the board of directors and the
management must be resident in the Principality of Liechtenstein
and have sufficient authority to represent the insurance under-
taking vis-a-vis the administrative authorities or the courts.
2) In the case of a branch office or an agency of a non-EEA
undertaking within the intendment of Art. 31 Para. 1, it shall be
sufficient if the general representative resides in Liechtenstein and
is authorised as described in Para. 1.

– 357 –
III. Activities in Other Countries of Liechtenstein
Insurance Undertakings
Art. 24
Assumption of Business Activities
1) Insurance undertakings domiciled in the Principality of
Liechtenstein may conduct direct insurance business in another
signatory state to the EEA Agreement through a branch office or
by providing services as specified in the following provisions.
2) The insurance undertaking must notify the Supervisory
Authority of its intention to establish a branch office, stating the
name of the state concerned, which has signed the EEA Agree-
ment.
3) The notification required in Para. 2 must contain:
a) Details of which insurance branches are to be operated and
which risks of an insurance branch are to be covered, and the
insurance coverage must be stated;
b) estimates for the first three years of business with regard to
commission expenditure and other administrative costs, prob-
able premium and/or contribution yield, probable expenditure
for insurance cases and the probable liquidity situation;
c) statements relating to the first three years of business con-
cerning the financial resources available for covering obliga-
tions and the solvency margin;
d) probable costs for establishing the administration and the
agency network and the resources available for this (organisa-
tion fund);
e) details of the organisation structure of the branch office;
f) name of the proposed general representative who must have
sufficient authority;
g) name and address of the branch office;
h) the draft of a declaration stating that the undertaking has be-
come a member in the other state of the national insurance of-
fice and of the national guarantee fund insofar as it intends to
be active in the insurance branch dealing with third-party li-
ability for self-propelled land vehicles.

– 358 –
Art. 25
Procedure for Setting Up a Business Establishment
1) Within a period of three months following the receipt of the
details contained in Art. 24, the Supervisory Authority shall ver-
ify not only the sufficiency in law of the project, but also the
adequacy of the administrative structure and the financial situa-
tion of the undertaking, also the executive manager’s and the
business establishment’s competent management’s compliance
with the conditions specified in Art. 13 Para. 1 Sub-Para. g.
2) If it is quite safe, it shall forward to the Supervisory
Authority of the other state,
a) these documents;
b) a certificate which states that the insurance undertaking has at
its disposal own funds equivalent to the solvency margin; and
at the same time informs the insurance undertaking of this.
3) Amendments to the details specified in Art. 24 Para. 3 must
be communicated to the Supervisory Authority at least one
month before the intended implementation.
Art. 26
International Service Operations
by Domestic Insurance Undertakings
1) If an insurance undertaking wishes to be active in interna-
tional service operations, it must give notice of this, stating the
signatory state to the EEA Agreement concerned. At the same
time, it must be stated what insurance branches are to be operated
abroad and what risks are to be covered.
2) If health insurance is to be conducted, the details as speci-
fied in Art. 28 Para. 3 must be stated additionally.
3) It is a question of international service operations within the
intendment of this law when an insurance undertaking with its
domicile in the Principality of Liechtenstein or in another signa-
tory state to the EEA Agreement covers risks by direct insurance
from its domicile or its business establishment in a signatory state
to the EEA Agreement which are situated in another signatory

– 359 –
state to the EEA Agreement, without the undertaking making use
of a business establishment there.
Art. 27
Procedure when assuming Service Operations
1) The Supervisory Authority shall verify the sufficiency in
law of the project within one month of receipt of the details des-
ignated in Art. 26.
2) If it is quite safe, it forwards to the Supervisory Authority
of the other state, informing the insurance undertaking of this at
the same time,
a) the necessary documents;
b) a certificate stating that the insurance undertaking disposes of
the necessary solvency margin for all its activities and may
conduct business in the state in question;
c) a certificate stating the insurance branches in which the under-
taking conducts business and which risks it may cover.
IV. Domestic Activities of Foreign Insurance Undertakings
A. Insurance Undertakings with Domicile in a
Signatory State to the EEA Agreement
Art. 28
Assumption of Business Activities
1) Insurance undertakings domiciled in another state which
has signed the EEA Agreement (home state) may conduct direct
insurance business in Liechtenstein through a branch office or in
service transactions as specified in the following provisions.
2) The assumption of the business activities through a business
establishment is only permissible when the Supervisory Authority
of the home state supplies the following details and confirms to
the Liechtenstein Supervisory Authority:

– 360 –
a) That the insurance undertaking is authorised to conduct insur-
ance business in the home state and that it has a legal form
which is admissible in the country of domicile;
b) that the undertaking is entitled to operate a business estab-
lishment in the Principality of Liechtenstein;
c) a draft of an activity plan describing in particular the planned
business activities and the management of the business estab-
lishment;
d) name and address of the business establishment;
e) name of the adequately authorised executive manager of the
business establishment; in the case of Lloyd’s, proof of the ex-
ecutive manager’s authority to appear in this capacity on be-
half of the individual participating insurers before a court of
law and to enter into commitments;
f) that the insurance undertaking has at its disposal of the neces-
sary funds as specified in Art. 15;
g) a draft of a declaration stating that the insurance undertaking
has become a member of the Liechtenstein Insurance Office
and of the Liechtenstein Guarantee Fund, insofar as it intends
to be active in the insurance branch of third-party liability for
self-propelled land vehicles;
3) In the case of health insurance and compulsory insurance
being provided, the general and special conditions of insurance
are also to be submitted to the Supervisory Authority before they
are applied.
Art. 29
Procedure
1) If the competent authority of the home state raises no ob-
jections to the intended business establishment of the insurance
undertaking, it communicates the details required by Art. 28
Para. 2 to the domestic Supervisory Authority within three
months of the submission of the insurance undertaking’s applica-
tion. The Supervisory Authority then has at its disposal a period
of a further two months after receipt of this communication in
which to inform the competent authority of the home state and

– 361 –
the insurance undertaking, if applicable, of other conditions
which must be fulfilled before the branch office commences busi-
ness.
2) The branch office may start its activities in Liechtenstein as
soon as the periods of time stated in Para. 1 have expired and
provided the Supervisory Authority does not impose further
conditions.
3) Amendments to the details prescribed in Art. 28 Para. 2
must be communicated in writing to the Supervisory Authority
and to the competent authority of the home state at least one
month before they are implemented.
Art. 30
International Service Operations by
Foreign Insurance Undertakings
1) Should an insurance undertaking wish to conclude interna-
tional service transactions with reference to the inland market, the
assumption and exercise of such an activity shall be permissible
only if the Supervisory Authority of the home state has commu-
nicated the following details and confirmations to the inland
Supervisory Authority:
a) A certificate according to which the insurance undertaking has
at its disposal the necessary solvency margin for all its activities
and may conduct business outside the country of domicile
and/or the state in which the business establishment is situated;
b) a certificate concerning the insurance branches in which the
undertaking may conduct business;
c) a list describing type and nature of the risks which the under-
taking wishes to cover within the country.
2) The insurance undertaking may assume its activities from
the time when the inland Supervisory Authority is demonstrably
in possession of the documents mentioned in Para. 1.
3) In the case where health insurance and compulsory insur-
ances are be provided, the general and special conditions of insur-
ance are also to be submitted to the Supervisory Authority before
they are applied.

– 362 –
B. Insurance Undertakings Domiciled outside the States
that have signed the EEA Agreement
Art. 31
Obligation to obtain Authorisation
1) Insurance undertakings which are not domiciled in a state
that has signed the EEA Agreement (non-EEA undertakings)
require an authorisation as specified in Art. 12 and 13 in order to
assume insurance activities within the country.
2) In addition, the special provisions of Art. 32 to 34 and, in a
supplemental manner, also the other regulations of this law shall
apply to such insurance undertakings.
Art. 32
Special Conditions
1) A non-EEA undertaking may only be authorised to con-
duct insurance business in Liechtenstein when it fulfils the fol-
lowing additional conditions:
a) It must be authorised to conduct insurance activities according
the law of the country in which it is domiciled;
b) it must establish an agency or a branch office in the Principal-
ity of Liechtenstein and appoint as its head an executive man-
ager whose nomination shall require the approval of the Su-
pervisory Authority;
c) it must undertake to keep separate accounts at the domicile of
the agency or branch office of its business activities within the
country and keep all the relevant business documents available
for inspection;
d) at its head office it must have at its disposal a minimum capital
within the intendment of Art. 14 and show a solvency margin
as specified in Art. 15 which is related to the extent of business
in the Principality of Liechtenstein;
e) it must have at its disposal in the Principality of Liechtenstein
an organisation fund as specified in Art. 17 and corresponding
assets;

– 363 –
f) it must have at its disposal in the Principality of Liechtenstein
assets equivalent to at least half of the minimum guarantee
fund;
g) it must deposit as a security bond one quarter of the sum cal-
culated according to sub-para. f.
2) In the case where health insurance and compulsory insur-
ances are provided, the general and special conditions of insurance
are also to be submitted to the Supervisory Authority before they
are applied.
Art. 33
Granting and Refusal of Authorisation
The authorisation is granted when the non-EEA undertaking
satisfies the legal requirements; Art. 18 and 19 apply accordingly
and the authorisation is valid only within the country.
Art. 34
Authorisation in Several States that have signed
the EEA Agreement
1) Non-EEA undertakings which have applied for or received
authorisation to conduct insurance business in several states that
have signed the EEA Agreement may apply for the following
advantages to be granted; these may only be granted together:
a) Calculation of the solvency margin on the basis of the total
business activities in the area of the states that have signed the
EEA Agreement, only the business of the agencies and branch
offices located in this area may be taken as a basis for this cal-
culation;
b) deposition of the security bond as specified in Art. 32 para. 1
sub-para. g only in a state that has signed the EEA Agreement;
c) situs of the assets forming the subject of the guarantee fund in
any of the states that have signed the EEA Agreement, in
which the insurance activities are to be conducted.

– 364 –
2) The application for the granting of the advantages specified
in Para. 1 shall be submitted to all the competent authorities of
the signatory states to the EEA Agreement in which an authori-
sation has been sought or granted. These authorities shall agree on
the ultimately competent supervisory authority after this author-
ity has declared its readiness to assume the supervision of the
solvency for the entire business activities of the agencies and
branch offices located in signatory states to the EEA Agreement.
3) The advantages granted as specified in this Article shall be
simultaneously revoked by all these states upon the initiative of
one or more of the states concerned.
V. Supervision of the Business Activities of
Insurance Undertakings
A. Routine Supervision in General
Art. 35
Principle
1) The Supervisory Authority shall supervise the total business
activities of the insurance undertakings.
2) It shall monitor the observance of the laws, the maintenance
of the solvency of the insurance undertakings, the formation of
the necessary reserves and the adequate protection of the interests
of policy holders.
Art. 36
Observance of the Business Plan
1) The Supervisory Authority shall monitor the observance of
the authorised business plan.
2) If parts of the business plan are amended, such amendments
may not be introduced by the insurance undertaking until they
have been approved by the Supervisory Authority.

– 365 –
3) The Supervisory Authority may demand that the business
plan be modified before new insurance contracts are concluded.
Should it appear necessary for the protection of policy holders,
the Supervisory Authority may change or cancel a business plan,
with effect for existing or not yet implemented insurance relation-
ship.
Art. 37
Monitoring of Own Resources
1) If of an insurance undertaking’s own resources are less than
the solvency margin, the undertaking must, upon request, submit
to the Supervisory Authority for approval a plan for the restora-
tion of sound financial conditions (solvency plan).
2) If the own resources of an insurance undertaking are less
than the guarantee fund or are not creditable to the necessary
extent, the undertaking must, upon request, submit to the Super-
visory Authority for approval a plan for the short-term procure-
ment of the necessary own funds (funding plan).
3) If a further deterioration in the financial situation threatens,
the Supervisory Authority may, notwithstanding its other pow-
ers, restrict or prohibit the free disposal of the assets of the un-
dertaking. The same shall apply accordingly if an insurance un-
dertaking does not form sufficient actuarial reserves or does not
sufficiently cover its reserves or fails in any other way to comply
with the legal and official regulations relating to the provision and
investment of capital.
Art. 38
Supervision of Holdings
If an insurance undertaking with domicile in the Principality
of Liechtenstein has a holding in another undertaking which is
not subject to insurance supervision and if the holding by its na-
ture or extent is likely to endanger the insurance undertaking, the
Supervisory Authority may forbid the insurance undertaking to
continue the holding or may bind this to certain conditions.

– 366 –
Art. 39
Balance Sheet and Reporting
1) Insurance undertakings domiciled in the Principality of
Liechtenstein must prepare their balance sheet annually, by the 31
December. In addition, they must submit a report on the con-
cluded business year together with the balance sheet to the Super-
visory Authority by 30 April every year. The balance sheet and
the report must conform with the regulations and directives is-
sued by the Government and the Supervisory Authority.
2) For non-EEA undertakings, Para. 1 shall apply analogously
insofar as such undertakings are required to submit a report as
specified in Art. 32 Para. 1 Sub-Para. c.
3) In the case of insurance undertakings conducting reinsur-
ance business only, the period specified in Para. 1 for the submis-
sion of the balance sheet and the business report shall be extended
to 31 October if the business year coincides with the calendar
year.
4) Insurance undertakings must publish the balance sheet and
the business report.
Art. 40
External Audit Requirement
1) Insurance undertakings must have their business activities
audited every year by an auditor who is independent of them and
recognised by the Government. The insurance undertakings are
required to provide the auditor with all the information necessary
for an appropriate audit.
2) For the auditor, the insurance undertakings must, in par-
ticular:
a) Keep available for inspection those documents which are nec-
essary for the determination and assessment of the assets and
liabilities;
b) permit inspection of their books, accounting records, business
correspondence and minutes of the board of directors and of
the company management;
c) they must submit the reports of the internal audit.

– 367 –
3) In the case of non-EEA undertakings which have an agency
or a branch office in the Principality of Liechtenstein at their
disposal, the audit carried out at the domicile of the head office
shall be recognised provided it satisfies the requirements con-
tained in this law and the domestic agency or branch office is also
included in the audit. Art. 41 Para. 2 is reserved.
4) The Government shall determine by Executive Order the
more detailed provisions concerning the recognition of auditors.
Art. 41
Duties of Auditors
1) Auditors shall verify whether
a) the business activities of the insurance undertaking comply
with the legal requirements and the articles;
b) the conditions for the granting of the authorisation including
actuarial requirements are continuously met; and
c) the business report meets the legal requirements.
2) The audit report shall be sent simultaneously to the board
of directors of the insurance undertaking, to the Audit Authority
pursuant to the provisions of the Liechtenstein Law on Persons
and Companies and to the Supervisory Authority.
3) Other details shall be regulated by the issuance of Executive
Orders.
Art. 42
Duty of Disclosure and Authority to Examine
1) Insurance undertakings must disclose all the necessary in-
formation to the Supervisory Authority and submit the books of
account and business data for inspection.
2) The Supervisory Authority may at any time examine the
business management and the assets position of an insurance un-
dertaking in order to determine whether the annual accounts and
business reports coincide with the facts and whether the pre-
scribed reserves have been formed and invested and administered
as specified by the regulations.

– 368 –
3) Third parties are obliged to supply information to the Su-
pervisory Authority to the extent necessary for the supervisory
activities of the authority.
Art. 43
Duty to Report and Submit
1) Insurance undertakings must notify the Supervisory
Authority without delay of changes in the activity plan, the
nominal capital, the company management, the auditor and in the
case of qualified participations. This notification must ensue be-
fore a public announcement.
2) In addition, amendments to the articles which concern the
sphere of business, the nominal capital or the organisation also a
change of auditor require the assent of the Supervisory Authority.
In this regard, entries in the Public Register shall be admissible
only after such assent has been granted.
3) Upon demand, an insurance undertaking must submit to the
Supervisory Authority the general and special insurance condi-
tions, the tariffs applied, the forms and any other documents used.
4) In the case where health insurance and compulsory insur-
ance are to be provided, the general and special conditions of
insurance shall be submitted to the Supervisory Authority before
they are employed.
5) The Supervisory Authority may demand that communica-
tions and details concerning business activities in the Principality
of Liechtenstein be made in the German language.
Art. 44
Professional secrecy
1) The members of the governing bodies of insurance under-
takings, their staff and other persons acting on behalf of such
undertakings shall be obliged to maintain secrecy about facts not
publicly known which are communicated to them or to which
they have access due to business relations with clients. The obli-
gation to maintain secrecy is not limited in time.

– 369 –
2) Should facts subject to professional secrecy become known
to representatives of public authorities in the course of their du-
ties, they shall treat insurance secrets as official secrets.
3) The legal regulations on the duty to testify and duty of dis-
closure to court authorities are reserved. Insurance undertakings
are likewise not restricted by the obligation of secrecy in the dis-
charging of their legal and contractual responsibilities.
4) The Supervisory Authority may grant release from the obli-
gation of insurance secrecy if there is a proven interest for such,
e.g. for the ascertainment and verification of insurance risks. In
such a case, the Supervisory Authority shall consult the data pro-
tection officer.
Art. 45
Obligations to Notify Policy Holders
Before the conclusion and during the term of insurance con-
tracts, special items of information shall be communicated to
policy holders for their information and protection. The content
and scope of these obligations to notify are regulated in Appendix
4.
Art. 46
Charges
Charges are levied for the work of the Insurance Supervisory
Authority. These are determined in an Executive Order issued by
the Government.
Art. 47
Measures
1) For the performance of its control and supervisory duties,
the Supervisory Authority may decree the necessary measures.
2) In particular, the Supervisory Authority may issue orders
which are necessary and appropriate for the avoidance or elimi-
nation of irregularities.

– 370 –
3) If the interests of policy holders cannot be protected in any
other manner, the Supervisory Authority may transfer powers to
which the governing bodies of the undertaking are entitled ac-
cording to the law or the articles wholly or partly to a special
representative qualified to exercise such powers.
B. Special Provisions for International Service Transactions
Art. 48
Additional Conditions applicable to Third-Party
Motor Vehicle Insurance
1) Should an insurance undertaking engaged in international
services transactions in the Principality of Liechtenstein wish to
provide third-party motor vehicle insurance, it must:
a) appoint a representative resident in Liechtenstein with respon-
sibility for the handling of damage or loss claims;
b) become a member of the Liechtenstein Insurance Office and
the Liechtenstein Guarantee Fund and participate in the fi-
nancing of these institutions.
2) The Government shall issue the necessary implementing
provisions and, in particular, define the position, rights and duties
of the representative specified in Para. 1.
Art. 49
Obligations to Notify Policy holders
In international services transactions, special information shall
be communicated to policy holders; the content and scope of
these obligations to notify are governed in Appendix 4.
Art. 50
Obligations to Notify Supervisory Authorities
Changes concerning international services transactions must
be communicated to the responsible authorities. In this regard,
the procedures specified in Art. 27 and 30 shall be observed.

– 371 –
VI. Termination of Business Activities
Art. 51
Principle
The supervision shall embrace the liquidation of an undertak-
ing and also the winding up of existing insurances if the business
activities are prohibited or voluntarily terminated or if the
authorisation to conduct business is revoked.
Art. 52
Voluntary Transfer of Insurance Portfolio
1) Every contract through which the insurance portfolio of an
undertaking is to be transferred, wholly or partly, with rights and
obligations, to another insurance undertaking which is subject to
supervision, shall require the approval of the Supervisory
Authorities competent with respect to the participating under-
takings.
2) The insurance undertaking taking over the portfolio must
demonstrate that after the transfer it possesses own funds equiva-
lent to the solvency margin. Moreover, Art. 19 shall apply analo-
gously. The approval of the Supervisory Authority shall be re-
fused if the interests of policy holders are not assured.
3) The approval of the transfer of the portfolio shall be pub-
lished at the expense of the undertakings concerned.
Art. 53
Rights of Policy holders
1) After every portfolio transfer, policy holders shall have the
right to cancel the insurance contract within three months fol-
lowing the transfer.
2) The insurance undertaking taking over the portfolio shall be
obliged individually to inform the policy holders concerned of the
portfolio transfer.

– 372 –
Art. 54
Insurance Contracts concluded by a Foreign Business
Establishment or in Service Transactions
Should an insurance undertaking domiciled in Liechtenstein
wholly or partly transfer an insurance contract portfolio con-
cluded in a signatory state to the EEA Agreement by a business
establishment or in service transactions to an undertaking domi-
ciled in such a state, only the approval of the inland Supervisory
Authority shall be necessary. Provided grounds for refusal are not
contained in Art. 52, approval shall be granted if
a) proof is furnished by a certificate issued by the Supervisory
Authority of the head office which states that the undertaking
taking over the portfolio possesses own funds equivalent to
the solvency margin after the transfer has been effected;
b) the Supervisory Authorities of the signatory states in which
the risks exist are in agreement and
c) in the case of the transfer of the insurance portfolio of a busi-
ness establishment the Supervisory Authority of this state has
been heard.
Art. 55
Withdrawal of the Authorisation
1) The Government may revoke the authorisation for the
business activity of individual insurance branches or the entire
business activity if
a) an insurance undertaking no longer meets the conditions for
the granting of the authorisation;
b) the undertaking has infringed in a serious manner the obliga-
tions incumbent upon it pursuant to the supervisory regula-
tions or the business plan;
c) such serious irregularities have arisen that a continuation of
the business activities would endanger the interests of policy-
holders, or
d) the insurance undertaking does not make use of the authorisa-
tion to conduct business within twelve months or expressly
waives this or if it has ceased to do business for more than six
months.

– 373 –
2) The Government may revoke the authorisation for the en-
tire business operation if the undertaking is unable within a set
period of time to adopt the measures set out in the solvency plan
or the funding plan as specified in Art. 52 Para. 2.
3) If the authorisation is revoked, the Supervisory Authority
shall take all the measures appropriate for safeguarding the inter-
ests of policy holders. In particular, it may restrict or prohibit the
free disposal of the assets of the undertaking and transfer the
management of the assets to appropriate persons. The Supervisory
Authority shall also inform the competent authorities of the other
signatory states to the EEA Agreement.
4) Should facts justifying the revocation of the authorisation
become known to the Supervisory Authority, it may require in-
stead, the removal of those managers to whom the facts relate and
also prohibit such managers from exercising their function.
Art. 56
Measures relating to Insurance Undertakings domiciled
in another Signatory State to the EEA Agreement
1) If it is found that an insurance undertaking from a signatory
state to the EEA Agreement, which has a branch office or is active
in services transactions in the Principality of Liechtenstein, is not
observing Liechtenstein legal provisions, the Supervisory Author-
ity shall require the undertaking to discontinue such irregularities.
2) Should the insurance undertaking fail to take the necessary
steps, the competent authorities of the home state shall be in-
formed and requested to initiate proceedings against the under-
taking.
3) In the event that infringements of Liechtenstein legislation
continue, the Supervisory Authority may prohibit the insurance
undertaking from conducting any further business in Liechten-
stein and order the necessary action to be taken.
Art. 57
Waiving of Authorisation
1) Should an insurance undertaking waive the authorisation, it
shall be released from supervision by the Government. Bonds

– 374 –
paid shall be returned as soon as all the obligations arising from
the law on supervision have been met.
2) Should an insurance undertaking which is renouncing the
authorisation no longer satisfy the legal requirements, the Super-
visory Authority may demand that the undertaking restore the
legal state despite the waiver.
Art. 58
Publication
Should the authorisation be withdrawn from an insurance un-
dertaking or if it waives the authorisation or, in the case of a
waiver, it fails to restore the legal state, policy holders shall be
informed of this in a publication.
Art. 59
Foreign Insurance Undertakings’ Obligation to Notify
Insurance undertakings domiciled in another country and
conducting business in the Principality of Liechtenstein must
notify the Supervisory Authority without delay if in another
country their authorisation to provide insurance business is with-
drawn.
VII. Authorities, Procedures and Legal Remedies
Art. 60
Organisation and Performance of Insurance Supervision
1) The Government is the Supreme Supervisory Body. It shall
grant, withdraw and revoke authorisations.
2) Where it is not expressly stated that the Government shall
be responsible, the supervision and the power of decision shall be
exercised by the Office for National Economy or by another
office designated by the Government in an Executive Order as
the Supervisory Authority in place of the Office for National
Economy.
3) The Government may transfer by Executive Order the
powers specified in Art. 12 Para. 1 to the Supervisory Authority.

– 375 –
Art. 61
Collaboration with Foreign Supervisory Authorities
1) If need be, the Supervisory Authority may collaborate with
the competent foreign authorities in that it may in particular,
process data, information, reports and documents or itself com-
municate these to abroad.
2) The communication of official information by the Govern-
ment or the Supervisory Authority shall be admissible when:
a) Public order and professional secrecy are not infringed
thereby;
b) the information does not conflict with the object of this law;
c) it is assured that the requesting state would grant a similar
request from Liechtenstein;
d) it is assured that the information provided will be used only
for insurance supervision;
e) it is assured that the staff of the competent authorities and
persons acting on behalf of the competent authorities are
bound to observe official secrecy.
3) When this is necessary according to the object of this law,
the Government or the Supervisory Authority may at any time
obtain information on the activities of Liechtenstein insurance
undertakings in other countries and on the financial situation of
foreign insurance undertakings whose activities might affect the
Liechtenstein insurance sector.
Art. 62
Decisions and Dispositions
Should infringements of the regulations of this law or of the
Executive Orders pertaining thereto come to light, the competent
authority shall make the appropriate decisions and dispositions.

– 376 –
Art. 63
Legal Remedies
1) An appeal against decisions and dispositions of the Super-
visory Authority may be lodged with the Government within 14
days of service.
2) An appeal against decisions and dispositions of the Gov-
ernment may be lodged with the Administrative Court within 14
days of service.
VIII. Penal Provisions
Art. 64
Offences and Violations
1) The following offences shall be punished by the Court of
Justice by imprisonment for up to six months or by fines of up to
360 daily income units:
a) The violation of professional secrecy or the subornation of
another to do so or the attempt to suborn another to do so;
b) the exercise of insurance business covered by this law without
authorisation.
The two punishments may be combined.
2) For the following offences the Court of Justice shall punish
by fines of up to 100,000 francs:
a) Whoever violates the conditions linked to an authorisation;
b) whoever violates the provisions on capital resources and the
formation of reserves;
c) whoever makes false statements to the Supervisory Authority,
especially in order to obtain for an insurance undertaking the
authorisation to conduct business, the authorisation to con-
duct services transactions or the authorisation to change the
business plan or to transfer the insurance portfolio;
d) whoever communicates false information to the auditor;
e) whoever fails to keep company books of account properly or
to keep company book of account and documentary material
in safe custody;

– 377 –
f) whoever as auditor grossly neglects his duties, in particular,
makes false statements or withholds important facts in the
audit report or omits to make a prescribed request to the in-
surance undertaking or fails to submit prescribed reports and
information;
g) whoever as responsible actuary in life insurance or as special
representative grossly neglects his duties;
h) whoever as claims adjustment undertaking conducts other
insurance business or adjust benefits in other branches of in-
surance apart from the adjustment of benefits from insurance
against legal costs;
i) whoever fails to adhere to the approved business plan;
j) whoever conducts non-insurance business.
3) For the following offences the Government shall punish by
fines of up to 50,000 francs:
a) Whoever fails to prepare or publish the annual account or the
business report in accordance with the regulations;
b) Whoever fails to have the ordinary audit or an audit prescribed
by the Supervisory Authority carried out;
c) whoever fails to perform his duties towards the auditor;
d) whoever fails to provide the Supervisory Authority with the
prescribed information or to comply with the obligations to
submit;
e) whoever fails to comply with the a request to establish the
condition of the undertaking in compliance with the law or
with any other instruction of the Supervisory Authority;
f) whoever mediates or concludes insurance contracts in direct
business for an insurance undertaking not authorised to con-
duct business in Liechtenstein and is subject to insurance su-
pervision.
4) The upper limits of punishments shall be reduced by half in
the event that such offences have been committed negligently.
5) The offences listed in Para. 1 shall expire by limitation after
two years.
6) Otherwise, the general part of the Penal Code shall apply
analogously.

– 378 –
Art. 65
Public Prosecutor’s Obligation to Notify
The Public Prosecutor shall notify the Supervisory Authority
of all judgments and orders for a stay of proceedings, in their
entirety, which concern members of the administration or man-
agement of insurance undertakings and auditors.
IX. Transitional and Concluding Provisions
Art. 66
Authorisations
Authorisations for the conduct of an insurance undertaking
which do not comply with the requirements of this law and the
Executive Orders relating thereto shall be adapted to the new law
within one year of the coming into force of the relevant decrees
or, as the case may be, shall be withdrawn or revoked.
Art. 67
Executive Orders
The Government shall issue the Executive Orders necessary
for the implementation of this law.
Art. 68
Entry into Force
This law shall enter into force on 1 January 1996.
signed Hans-Adam
signed Dr. Mario Frick
Head of the Princely Government

– 379 –
Appendix 1
Division of the Risks in Loss Insurance according to
Insurance Branches as specified in Art. 3 Para. 1
1. Accidents (including accidents at work and occupational
diseases)
– non-recurring benefits
– recurring benefits
– combined benefits
– conveyance of persons
2. Sickness
– non-recurring benefits
– recurring benefits
– combined benefits
3. Comprehensive insurance for land vehicles
(without rail vehicles)
All damage to
– power-driven and/or motor vehicles
– land vehicles without self propulsion
4. Comprehensive insurance for rail vehicles
All damage to rail vehicles
5. Comprehensive insurance for aircraft
All damage to aircraft
6. Comprehensive insurance for sea, inland waterway and river
navigation
All damage to:
– vessels
– inland waterway vessels
– seagoing vessels.
7. Goods in transit (including merchandise, baggage and any
other goods)
All damage to goods in transit, irrespective of the means of
conveyance used in each case

– 380 –
8. Fire and damage caused by the forces of nature
All property damage (if it not covered by branches 3, 4, 5, 6
or 7) caused by
– fire
– explosion
– storm
– other losses caused by the forces of nature excluding storm
– nuclear energy
– subsidence and landslides
9. Other property damage
All property damage (if not covered by branches 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7)
caused by hail or frost or resulting from causes of any kind
(such as theft, for example) unless these causes are covered
under Number 8
10. Third-party liability for self-propelled land vehicles
Third-party liability of all kinds (including carrier third-party
liability) resulting from the use of self-propelled land vehicles
11. Third-party liability for aircraft
Third-party liability of all kinds (including carrier third-party
liability) resulting from the use of aircraft
12. Third-party liability for sea, inland waterway and river
navigation
Third-party liability of all kinds (including carrier third-party
liability) resulting from the use of river, inland waterway and
seagoing vessels.
13. General third-part liability
All other third-party liability cases which do not fall under
Numbers 10, 11 and 12
14. Credit
– general insolvency
– export credit
– instalment transactions
– mortgage loans
– agricultural loans
15. Security Bond
– direct security bond
– indirect security bond

– 381 –
16. Various financial losses
– occupational hazards
– insufficient income (general)
– adverse weather
– loss of profits
– current expenses of a general nature
– unforeseen business expenses
– depreciation
– loss of rent or income
– indirect commercial losses except those already mentioned
– non-commercial money losses
– other financial losses
17. Insurance for legal costs
Insurance for legal costs
18. Tourist assistance
Assistance payments in favour of persons who run into diffi-
culties on journeys or during absence from their place of resi-
dence or usual abode.
Designation of authorisation granted simultaneously for
several branches (collective designations)
If the authorisation simultaneously covers
a) the branches 1 and 2, it is granted under the designation
“Accidents and Sickness”;
b) the branches 1 (fourth dash), 3, 7 and 10, it is granted under
the designation “Motor vehicle insurance”;
c) the branches 1 (fourth dash), 4, 6, 7 and 12, it is granted under
the designation ” Sea and Transport Insurance “;
d) the branches 1 (fourth dash), 5, 7 and 11, it is granted under
the designation “Aircraft insurance “;
e) the branches 8 and 9, it is granted under the designation “Fire
and other Property Damage”;
f) the branches 10, 11, 12 and 13, it is granted under the designa-
tion “Third-Party Liability”;
g) the branches 14 and 15, it is granted under the designation
“Credit and Security Bond”.

– 382 –
Appendix 2
Division of the Risks in Life Insurance according to
Insurance Branches as specified in Art. 4 Para. 3
1. Life insurance
– pure endowment and insurance on death
– pensions insurance
– supplementary insurance for accidental death, invalidity and
sickness
2. Marriage insurance, birth insurance
3. Share or unit-linked life insurance
4. Health insurance (including insurance against invalidity)
5. Tontine insurance
6. Capitalisation transactions

– 383 –
Appendix 3
Major Risks as specified in Art. 11 Para. 8
The following are considered as major risks:
a) The risks classified under branches 4, 5, 6, 7, 11 and 12 of Ap-
pendix 1;
b) the risks classified under branches 14 and 15 of Appendix 1
when the policy holder pursues gainful employment in the in-
dustrial or trade sector or a self-employed activity and the risk
is related thereto;
c) the risks classified under branches 3, 8, 9, 10, 13 and 16 of
Appendix 1 if the policy holder exceeds the upper limits in the
case of at least two of the three following criteria
– balance sheet sum: 6.2 million ECU
– net turnover: 12.8 million ECU
– average number of employees in the course of the
business year: 250-
If the policy holder is a member of a group of companies for
which a consolidated balance sheet is prepared, the above-
mentioned criteria shall be applied to the consolidated balance
sheet.

– 384 –
Appendix 4
Obligations to Notify Policy holders
as specified in Art. 45 and 49
When a natural person is involved, insurance undertakings
must inform the policy holder of the facts and rights which are
important for the insurance relationship before the signing of the
contract and during the term of a contract as specified in the fol-
lowing provisions. For the insurance of major risks, it shall be
sufficient to state the applicable law and the competent Super-
visory Authority. Such information must be communicated in
writing.
Section I
1. Information necessary for all branches of insurance:
a) Name, address, legal form and domicile of the insurance
undertaking and of a possible business establishment
through which the contract is to be concluded;
b) the general insurance conditions applicable for the insur-
ance relationship including the tariff provisions and the law
applicable to the contract shall be stated;
c) details of the nature, scope and date of maturity of the
benefit to be paid by the insurance undertaking insofar as
general insurance conditions or tariff provisions are not
applicable;
d) information concerning the duration of the insurance rela-
tionship;
e) information concerning the premium sum, with the premi-
ums listed individually when the insurance relationship is
to cover several independent insurance contracts, and con-
cerning the mode of payment of premiums as well as in-
formation concerning any possible supplementary charges
and additional expenses, also information concerning the
total sum to be paid;

– 385 –
f) information concerning the period of time for which the
applicant is to be bound to the application;
g) instruction about the right to revoke or to withdraw;
h) the address of the competent Supervisory Authority to
which the policy holder may refer in the event of com-
plaints about the insurance undertaking.
2. Information additionally necessary for life insurances and
accident insurances with premium refund guarantee:
a) Details of the basis of calculation and of the standards valid
for determining the surplus and the surplus participation;
b) details of the surrender value;
c) details of the minimum insurance sum for a conversion to
an insurance free of premium and of the benefits from an
insurance free of premium;
d) details of the extent to which benefits according to sub-
para. b and c are guaranteed;
e) in the case of fund linked insurance, details of the fund on
which the insurance is based and the type of assets con-
tained therein;
f) general details of the tax regulations applicable to this type
of insurance.
Section II
Information to be provided by the insurance undertaking during
the term of an insurance contract:
1. Changes in the name, address, legal form and domicile of the
insurance undertaking and of any possible business establish-
ment through which the contract was concluded;
2. changes in the information provided as specified in Section 1
No. 1 sub-para. c to e and No. 2 sub-paras. a to e if these en-
sue from amendments to provisions of law;
3. annual notification concerning the state of the surplus partici-
pation in life insurance and accident insurance with premium
refund.

– 386 –

– 387 –
Liechtenstein Legal Gazette
1996 No. 89 published on 10 July 1996
Law
of 3 May 1996
on Investment Undertakings (IUG)
I hereby grant My Consent to the following Resolution
adopted by the Diet:
I. Object, Scope and Definitions
Art. 1
Object and Scope
1) This law covers the organisation and activities of investment
undertakings and has the object of protecting the investors and
safeguarding the confidence in Liechtenstein monetary and
banking system.
2) Investment undertakings which are domiciled in Liechten-
stein or sell their shares in Liechtenstein or publicly offer or dis-
tribute their shares from Liechtenstein are subject to this law.
3) Special internal assets of banks or finance companies which
correspond to the definitions as specified in Art. 2 Para. 1 are not
subject to this law if promotion is addressed to their current
clients only. In this case, the bank or finance company is required
to point out that it is not an investment undertaking within the
intendment of this law.

– 388 –
Art. 2
Definitions
1) Funds which are raised by the public following public ad-
vertising for the purpose of a collective capital investment and are
usually invested and managed for the collective account of the
unit-holders according to the principle of risk-spreading are
deemed to be an investment undertaking.
2) Any advertising, without regard to the form and provided
that it is not only addressed to a strictly defined circle of persons,
is deemed to be public advertising.
3) A closed-end investment undertaking is an investment un-
dertaking which is not obliged to re-purchase the shares.
4) Investment undertakings may be divided into segments
which are distinguished by the nature and object of the invest-
ments.
5) A distinction is drawn between the following types of in-
vestment undertakings according to the nature of the investment:
a) Investment undertakings securities;
b) Investment undertakings for other assets;
c) Investment undertakings for real estate.
Art. 3
Legal Form
1) An investment undertaking is either an investment fund or
an investment company.
2) An investment fund is an investment undertaking in the le-
gal form of the trusteeship (Art. 897 to 932 of the Law on Persons
and Companies PGR).
3) An investment company is an an investment undertaking in
the legal form of the limited company (Art. 261 to 367 PGR).
4) The Government may permit, as an exception, other legal
forms for investment undertakings provided the object of the law
is not thereby endangered.

– 389 –
II. Business Activity
A. General Provisions
Art. 4
Investment Regulation
1) The investment regulation to be issued for each investment
undertaking shall describe the obligations and rights of investors,
the investment undertaking and the custodian bank.
2) In particular, the investment regulations shall contain provi-
sions concerning:
a) The name and domicile of the investment undertaking, its
management and the custodian bank.
b) the duration of the investment undertaking and the period of
notice for the the management of the fund and the custodian
bank;
c) the guidelines of the investment policy;
d) the calculation of issue and redemption prices;
e) the suspension of the redemption of the units;
f) the use of interest earnings and capital profits;
g) the nature and calculation of all remittances charged to the
investment undertaking;
h) the unit of account of the investment undertaking;
i) the financial year;
k) the agencies issuing the prospectus, investment regulations and
the business report;
l) the official gazette for notices and their form;
m) the subdivision of the investment undertaking into segments.
3) The investment regulations shall take effect after approval
by the Bank Supervisory Office.
Art. 5
Amendment of the Investment Regulation
1) The Bank Supervisory Office shall approve amendments to
the investment regulations on application by investment under-
takings when such amendments correspond to the provisions of
this law.

– 390 –
2) Amendments are to be published in the official gazette of
the investment undertakings. The attention of investors is to be
drawn to the possibility of returning their units if so desired.
Art. 6
Duty of Allegiance
1) The management of investment undertakings, the custodian
banks and any agents thereof shall exclusively observe the inter-
ests of the investors.
2) In connection with the acquisition and alienation of prop-
erty and rights for investment undertakings, the management of
investment undertakings, the custodian banks and any agents
thereof may not accept pecuniary advantages of any kind either
for themselves or for third-parties; the remunerations provided
for in the investment regulations are excepted from this.
3) The management of investment undertakings, the custodian
banks, any agents thereof and persons acting for them and affili-
ated to them may only take over assets from the investment un-
dertaking for their own account at the market price and may only
cede to it assets from their own holdings at the market price.
Art. 7
Advertising
1) Any advertising for the acquisition of units in an investment
undertaking must refer to the existence of a brochure and desig-
nate the agencies issuing the prospectus.
2) The paying office is responsible for publications and adver-
tising of foreign investment undertakings in Liechtenstein and
from Liechtenstein outwards. Its name is to be stated in every
publication.
Art. 8
Prospectus
1) Investment undertakings must publish a prospectus and,
when important amendments are made, must keep it up to date.
2) Investment undertakings must provide the prospectus free
of charge.

– 391 –
3) The prospectus must contain the necessary information for
investors to be able to make a reasoned appraisal of the invest-
ments proposed to them. The Government shall specify in an
Executive Order the minimum content of the prospectus.
4) The prospectus shall take effect after approval by the Bank
Supervisory Office.
Art. 9
Periodic Reports
1) Investment undertakings must publish a business report
within four months of the end of a financial year and a half-yearly
report within two months of the end of the first six months of a
financial year and shall submit such reports to the Bank Supervi-
sory Office.
2) The business report and the half-yearly report must contain
all the information necessary for investors to be able to make a
reasoned appraisal of the development and the results of the in-
vestment undertaking.
3) A short report by the auditors on the most important items
in the business report is to accompany the business report.
4) Investment undertakings must report the development of
the assets managed by them to the Bank Supervisory Office every
quarter.
5) The Government shall lay down in an Executive Order the
content and arrangement of the business report and half-yearly
report, of the reports pursuant to Para. 4 and of the short report
by the auditors.
Art. 10
Confidentiality
1) The members of the bodies of investment undertakings,
their staff and any other persons acting for such companies are
bound to observe secrecy concerning facts which are communi-
cated to them or of which they acquire knowledge by reason of
the business relations with clients. This obligation of secrecy shall
not be limited in terms of time.

– 392 –
2) Should facts subject to the maintenance of secrecy pursuant
to Para. 1 become known to representatives of authorities in the
course of their duties, they shall consider such facts as official
secrets.
3) Contraventions shall be penalised pursuant to Art. 66 Para.
1 Sub-Para. a.
4) The legal regulations concerning the obligation to give tes-
timony or information before penal courts are reserved.
B. Investors
Art. 11
Acquisition and Redemption of Units
1) Through their deposits, investors acquire claims against an
investment undertaking for a share in the assets and earnings of
the investment undertaking.
2) Investors may demand the payment of their share in cash if
no provision otherwise is contained in the investment regulations.
3) With segmented investment undertakings, earnings and ex-
penditure for investors must be separately calculated for each
department.
4) In the interests of all the investors, the Government shall
determine by Executive Order in what cases the investment
regulations may provide for a delay in time for the repayment of
the units.
5) In exceptional circumstances and with due account taken of
the interests of investors, the Bank Supervisory Office may grant
a delay in time for the repayment of the units. The Government
shall determine by Executive Order the reasons for and maximum
period of a delay.
6) The right to the repayment in cash of the units shall apply
to investment undertakings for other assets only subject to Art.
29 and to investment undertakings for real estate only subject to
Art. 31. It shall not apply to closed-end investment undertakings
pursuant to Art. 2 Para. 3.

– 393 –
Art. 12
Right to Information
1) Investors have a right to information concerning important
business matters.
2) Investors may apply to the Bank Supervisory Office for the
investigation of certain facts and circumstances. The Bank Super-
visory Office may entrust a recognised auditor with the investi-
gation pursuant to Art. 54.
Art. 13
Right to Performance
1) Should the fund management, investment company or cus-
todian bank fail to perform their obligations or fail to perform
them properly, investors may sue for performance, even if the
judgment may have consequences for all investors.
2) Should the fund management, investment company or cus-
todian bank or the natural or juridical persons acting for them or
affiliated to them have illegally removed or withheld assets from
the investment undertaking or caused prejudice to it in other
ways, the action for performance shall be brought against the
investment undertaking.
Art. 14
Remuneration of Management and Custodian Bank
1) The management and custodian bank shall be entitled to the
remuneration provided for in the investment regulations, to ex-
emption from commitments which they have undertaken by
complying with the investment regulations as well as to the reim-
bursement of expenditure which they have incurred in the fulfil-
ment of such commitments.
2) These claims shall be met from the resources of the invest-
ment undertaking. A personal liability of the investors shall be
excluded.

– 394 –
C. The Management of Investment Undertakings
Art. 15
Duties
1) The management of an investment undertaking shall per-
form its activities in accordance with the directives and provisions
of the investment regulations.
2) Such activities must be limited to the management of the in-
vestment undertaking.
3) The management may delegate individual duties which it is
required to perform.
Art. 16
Calculation of the Net Assets and of the Issue
and Redemption Prices
1) The net assets shall correspond to the current market price
of the assets, less any liabilities of the investment undertaking and
any taxes which will probably be due on the liquidation of the
assets.
2) The issue price of new units shall be equivalent to the cur-
rent market price of the net assets at the time of issue divided by
the number of units in circulation. It shall be paid on purchase.
The redemption price shall be calculated analogously at the time
of redemption.
3) The issue price and the redemption price shall be published
at each purchase and sale of units, but at least twice monthly.
4) The Bank Supervisory Office may authorise exceptions, de-
pending on the nature of the assets.
Art. 17
External Auditing Obligation
1) Investment undertakings shall have their business activities
audited every year by an independent audit company which is
recognised by the Government.

– 395 –
2) The fund management and the investment company must
supply to the auditors all the information necessary for an appro-
priate audit.
3) In particular, the fund management and the investment
company:
a) Shall make available to the auditors the documents which are
necessary for the determination and evaluation of the assets
and liabilities;
b) shall allow the auditors to inspect their books, receipts, busi-
ness correspondence and the minutes of the Board of Direc-
tors and the company management.
Art. 18
Obligations to Notify
1) The following must be notified or submitted to the Bank
Supervisory Office by investment undertakings:
a) The Board of Management and its agents;
b) the investment regulation;
c) the prospectus and the periodic reports;
d) the custodian bank and the external auditors;
e) the ownership relations in the case of the capital of the fund
management and investment company carrying voting rights;
f) the creation and closure of segments which must be noted
without delay both in the prospectus and in the investment
regulations;
g) the intended public sale of units abroad.
2) Investment undertakings shall be required to inform the
Bank Supervisory Office immediately of changes in the facts
specificied in Para. 1. This report shall be made before a public
notice is published.
3) Changes in the Board of Management, the custodian bank
or the auditors shall require the approval of the Bank Supervisory
Office.

– 396 –
D. The Custodian Bank
Art. 19
Duties of the Custodian Bank
1) The custodian bank shall keep in safe custody the assets of
the investment undertaking as a deposit transaction in line with
banking practice. It may entrust third-parties with the safe cus-
tody of the assets in Liechtenstein or in other countries. The li-
ability of the custodian bank is not cancelled by this.
2) For investment undertakings for securities, the custodian
bank shall handle in particular the issue and redemption of the
units and the money transfers and shall ensure that the manage-
ment of the investment undertaking observes the law and the
investment regulations.
3) The custodian bank must carry out the instructions of the
management of the investment undertaking.
E. Special Provisions for Investment Companies
Art. 20
Units
The units of an investment company with variable capital shall
carry the name of the holder and shall not have a nominal value.
Art. 21
Changes in Share Capital
1) For investment companys in the legal form of the limited
company, it shall be possible for changes to be made in the share
capital without the restrictions provided for in Art. 362, Art. 363
Paras. 1 to 3 and Art. 367 of the Liechtenstein Persons and Com-
panies Act (PGR).
2) The subscription right of existing shareholders shall not ap-
ply for the issue of new shares.
Art. 22
Reserve Fund
Investment companies shall not need any reserve fund.

– 397 –
F. Special Provisions for Foreign Investment Undertakings
Art. 23
Concession Obligation
1) An investment undertaking domiciled in a foreign country
and wishing publicly to offer or distribute its units in Liechten-
stein or from Liechtenstein shall require a concession pursuant to
Art. 36.
2) Investment undertakings from states with which corre-
sponding treaties or reciprocal legal agreements exist shall not
need a concession, but shall only be required to notify the Bank
Supervisory Office of the intended distribution and of the paying
office pursuant to Art. 25 Para. 1.
Art. 24
Conditions
A public distribution activity shall only be permissible if:
a) It has been ensured that the investment undertaking is subject
in its country of domicile to a supervisory body equivalent to
that in Liechtenstein;
b) a Liechtenstein bank or finance company or the management
of a Liechtenstein investment undertaking or a trustee has
been appointed as the paying agent of the investment under-
taking with responsibility for the issuing and redemption of
the units;
c) the information for investors in Liechtenstein meets the re-
quirements of this law and a prospectus is available;
d) the name of the investment undertaking does not give rise to
deception or confusion.
Art. 25
Obligations of the Paying Office (Agent)
1) The paying agents of foreign investment undertakings shall
be the representatives of these in Liechtenstein in regard to the
investors and the supervisory authorities. The power of repre-
sentation may not be restricted.

– 398 –
2) The place of performance and legal venue in Liechtenstein
shall continue to exist even after the dissolution of the foreign
investment undertaking.
G. Investment Regulations
1. Investment undertakings for Securities
Art. 26
Principle
1) Investment undertakings for securities may only invest in
securities issued in large numbers and in non-documented rights
with the same function (value rights) which are traded on a stock
exchange or another regulated market open to the public.
2) The Government may permit other investments for invest-
ment undertakings for securities, namely those which pursuant to
EEA legislation are permitted for undertakings for collective in-
vestment in securities.
3) Investment undertakings may also hold deposits at banks
which are registered in Liechtenstein, Switzerland or an EEA
member-state or in another investment undertaking and also, to a
limited extent, hold other securities, value rights and reasonable
liquid resources.
Art. 27
Risk-Spreading
1) Investment undertakings for securities may:
a) Only take up loans temporarily and up to a maximum pro-
portion of the net assets;
b) invest not more than a part of the net assets with the same
issuer;
c) only acquire securities and value rights carrying voting rights
from the same issuer up to a maximum proportion;
d) invest not more than a part of the net assets or the entire assets
with another investment undertaking for securities;

– 399 –
e) lend investments from the assets only in accordance with gen-
erally recognised principles of banking practice;
f) use derivative financial instruments only within the scope of
proper asset management or for protection against investment
risks.
2) Para. 1 Sub-Para. b shall not apply for investments which
are guaranteed by a member-state of the OECD, its territorial
entities or international organisations.
3) For segmented investment undertakings, the maximum
proportions pursuant to Para. 1 Sub-Para. a to d on a consolidated
basis shall apply.
4) The Government shall determine the details pursuant to
Para. 1 in an Executive Order.
2. Investment Undertakings for Other Assets
Art. 28
Investments
1) Investment undertakings which are neither investment un-
dertakings for securities nor investment undertakings for real
estate shall be deemed to be investment undertakings for other
assets within the intendment of this section.
2) Investment undertakings for other assets may also invest in
assets which are only marketable to a limited extent, are subject to
marked price fluctuations, are characterised by limited risk-
spreading or whose valuation is difficult. In particular, invest-
ments in precious metals, commodities and derivative financial
instruments are permissible.
3) The Government may specify by Executive Order stricter
conditions according to the special features of the various types of
investments.
4) If investments of the investment undertaking for other as-
sets contain a particular risk which is not comparable to the risk
of investment undertakings for securities, special attention shall
be drawn to this.

– 400 –
Art. 29
Redemption of Units
Depending on the nature of the investments, investment un-
dertakings for other assets may provide for appropriate restric-
tions for the redemption of the units. These restrictions must be
clearly designated in the investment regulations and in the pro-
spectus.
3. Investment Undertakings for Real Estate
Art. 30
Risk-Spreading
1) Investment undertakings for real estate shall invest their re-
sources with due attention paid to the principle of risk-spreading
in real estate property.
2) Investment undertakings for real estate may not invest more
than a certain part of their net assets, calculated at the time of the
purchase, in the same investment. The Government shall deter-
mine the proportion by Executive Order.
Art. 31
Re-Purchase of Units
Investors may return their units at the end of each financial
year, with due observance of a period of notice of twelve months.
Otherwise Art. 11 Para. 5 shall be reserved.
Art. 32
Valuation of Real Estate
1) At the close of every financial year, the current market
value of the investments must be audited by an independent ex-
pert. The Government shall specify this in detail by Executive
Order.

– 401 –
2) The current market value estimated at the end of the pre-
ceding financial year shall apply in each case for the current year
unless the general economic development or the condition of a
landed property requires a new appraisal.
3) If the price at the purchase or sale of real estate should vary
substantially from the estimated value, this is to be justified in
detail in the next periodic report.
Art. 33
Loans
The sum of the loans or credits raised by an investment un-
dertaking for real estate may not exceed on average a certain part
of the current market value of all the immovable property. The
Government shall specify this in detail by Executive Order.
Art. 34
Auditing of Accounts
The business reports of investment undertakings for real estate
and the real estate companies controlled by them shall be audited
by the same auditor.
Art. 35
Additional Details in Prospectus
1) The prospectus must contain detailed information about the
calculation and charging of the remittances due to or owed by the
investment undertaking for real estate.
2) The prospectus must describe the risks associated with the
investment policy of the investment undertaking for real estate.

– 402 –
III. Concessions
A. Granting of Concessions
Art. 36
Concession obligation
Before taking up their business activities, investment under-
takings shall obtain a concession from the Government.
Art. 37
Designations
Designations suggesting an activity as an investment under-
taking may only be used in the name, the designation of the ob-
ject of the company and in business advertising for companies
which have received a concession as an investment undertaking
within the intendment of Art. 36.
Art. 38
General Conditions
The concession for the operation of an investment undertaking
is granted when the conditions pursuant to Art. 39 to 44 are met.
Art. 39
The Governing Bodies of Investment Undertakings
1) An investment undertaking shall have a board of manage-
ment and a custodian bank.
2) In the case of an investment fund, the duties of the board of
management shall be performed by the fund management.
3) The managing staff of the fund management or investment
company on the one hand and the custodian bank on the other
must be juridically separate from each other and independent in
their right to give instructions.
4) The investment undertaking must have suitable governing
bodies for the performance of its tasks.
5) If an investment undertaking is divided into segments, the
same management, the same custodian bank and the same audi-
tors must be responsible for all segments.

– 403 –
6) The principal administration of an investment undertaking
must have its domicile in Liechtenstein.
Art. 40
Custodian Bank
Only a bank registered in Liechtenstein may act as a custodian
bank.
Art. 41
Legal Form of the Fund Management
1) The fund management of an investment fund must be con-
stituted as a company limited by shares (Aktiengesellschaft) or as
an establishment (Anstalt) according to Liechtenstein law.
2) The share capital must be at least one million francs and be
fully paid up. The Government may allow relief if it is guaranteed
that the fund management has sufficient funds to perform its acti-
vities in due form as well as to meet its liabilities. The capital may
not be less than CHF 500 000.– in any case.
Art. 42
Guarantee of Satisfactory Business Conduct
The persons entrusted with the administration and business
management of an investment undertaking must offer at all times
the guarantee of satisfactory business conduct in professional and
personal respects.
Art. 43
Net Assets
1) The net assets of an investment fund or an investment com-
pany must attain a certain minimum sum not later than six
months after the granting of the concession. The Government
shall specify the minimum sum by Executive Order.
2) With segmented investment undertakings, Para. 1 shall ap-
ply to every segment.

– 404 –
Art. 44
Fees
Fees shall be charged for concessions, decisions, dispositions
and special services of the Bank Supervisory Office or of the
auditors entrusted by it with the performance of tasks. The fees
shall be fixed in the scale of fees determined by the Government.
B. Revocation, Cancellation, Withdrawal and Dissolution
Art. 45
Revocation
Concessions may be amended or revoked if the holder of the
concession has obtained the granting of such by false information
or important circumstances were not known.
Art. 46
Cancellation
Concessions shall be cancelled:
a) If six months after the granting of the concession the mini-
mum net assets pursuant to Art. 43 have not been achieved;
b) if after the redemption of all units no new units are issued for
at least one year;
c) if the holder of the concession waives it in writing and no
units are in circulation.
2) The cancellation of a concession shall be published.
Art. 47
Withdrawal, Dissolution and Deregistration
1) Concessions shall be withdrawn and the withdrawal pub-
lished if the conditions for the granting of such are no longer met
or the holder of the concession grossly violates the legal or con-
tractual duties.

– 405 –
2) With the withdrawal of the concession, the management
loses the right of disposal over the assets and rights of the invest-
ment undertaking. The withdrawal of the concession also leads to
the dissolution and deregistration of the investment undertaking
in the Public Register.
3) A company exercising an activity within the intendment of
Art. 2 without a concession may be dissolved by the Government
if such should be necessitated by the purpose of this law. In ur-
gent cases, this may ensure without prior warning and without
the fixing of a time limit.
4) The Bank Supervisory Office shall supervise the liquidator.
Art. 48
Grounds for Dissolution
1) Investment undertakings shall be dissolved if:
a) Their duration as specified in the investment regulations has
expired;
b) the concession has been cancelled or the Government with-
draws the concession;
c) the fund management or the custodian bank resigns and their
succession cannot be settled before the expiry of the period of
notice.
2) Notice of resignation and dissolution must be published.
Art. 49
Prohibition of the Issue and Redemption of Units
1) Should the fund management or the custodian bank give
notice of resignation or if an application is made for the prema-
ture dissolution of the investment undertaking or in the case of
the withdrawal or revocation of the concession for the exercise of
the business activities, no more units may be redeemed or issued.
2) The prohibition of the issue and redemption of units shall
apply until there is no longer any question of the dissolution of
the investment undertaking.

– 406 –
IV. Supervision of Investment Undertakings
A. Organisation and Enforcement
Art. 50
Principle
The following bodies shall be entrusted with the enforcement
of this law:
a) The Government;
b) the Bank Commission;
c) the Bank Supervisory Office;
d) the Audit companies;
e) the Princely Court of Justice.
1. Government
Art. 51
Scope of Duties
1) Supervision shall be in the hands of the Government. In
particular, it shall be responsible for granting, withdrawing or
revoking concessions and permits.
2) The Government shall be the penal authority for adminis-
trative infringements pursuant to Art. 66 Para. 3.
3) The Government may delegate its duties pursuant to Art. 3
Para. 4, Art. 36, Art. 41 Para. 2 and Art. 48 Para. 1 Sub-Para. b
subject to the legal process by Executive Order to the Bank Su-
pervisory Office or another public office.
2. Bank Commission
Art. 52
Duties
1) The Bank Commission shall be the advisory organ of the
Government for the supervision of the investment undertakings.
It shall concern itself with all fundamental questions relating to

– 407 –
the supervision of investment undertakings and when necessary,
but at least once annually, shall report to the Government on the
state of supervisory matters.
2) The Bank Commission shall be authorised for the perform-
ance of its duties to inspect the files and documents of the Bank
Supervisory Office.
3) The Bank Commission may publish its reports.
3. Bank Supervisory Office
Art. 53
Duties
1) The Bank Supervisory Office shall supervise the enforce-
ment of this law, the Executive Orders issued in relation to such
law and the observance of the regulations and shall take the steps
necessary.
2) In particular, the Bank Supervisory Office may:
a) Demand all the information and clarification necessary for the
enforcement of this law from the investment undertakings,
their auditors and the custodian banks;
b) order exceptional audits or itself carry out audits in relation to
certain facts;
c) issue unappealable decisions and Executive Orders and publish
such after prior warning, should the investment undertaking
resist such measures.
3) In particular, the Bank Supervisory Office is responsible for:
a) The assessment of applications for concessions and permits for
the attention of the Government;
b) the approval of the investment regulations and prospectuses of
investment undertakings and their amendments;
c) the examination of audit reports;
d) the appointment of trustees and decisions on their remunera-
tion.

– 408 –
4) If there is reason to assume that an activity subject to this
law is being exercised without a concession, the Bank Supervisory
Office may demand from the persons concerned information and
documents as though these persons were subject to this law.
4. Auditors
Art. 54
Recognition
1) Auditors auditing investment undertakings require a permit
from the Government for this activity.
2) A permit shall be granted to auditors if their management,
the senior auditors and the organisation ensures that they can
continuously and professionally perform the audit commissions.
3) The auditors must concern themselves exclusively with their
audit activities and the business directly associated therewith. In
particular, they may not carry out any asset management activi-
ties.
4) The auditors must be independent of the investment un-
dertakings to be audited.
5) The Government shall determine the detailed provisions by
Executive Order.
Art. 55
Duties
1) The auditors shall verify that
a) the business activities of the investment undertakings corre-
spond to the law, the articles and the investment regulations,
b) the conditions for the granting of the concession are continu-
ously observed and
c) the business report corresponds to the requirements of law.
2) The auditors of the investment undertaking must collabo-
rate with the audit department of the custodian bank.

– 409 –
3) The audit report shall be sent simultaneously to the board
of directors of the fund or investment company and of the custo-
dian bank, to the audit authority pursuant to the provisions of the
Liechtenstein Law on Persons and Companies (PGR) and to the
Bank Supervisory Office.
Art. 56
Irregularities
1) Should the auditor identify infringements of legal regula-
tions, or other irregularities, the said auditor shall give the in-
vestment undertaking a reasonable period of time in which to
correct these so as to conform with the law. If corrections are not
made within this period of time, the auditor shall notify the Bank
Supervisory Office.
2) The auditor must immediately advise the Bank Supervisory
Office if setting such a period of time appears pointless or if it is
found that punishable actions have been committed by the busi-
ness management or that other serious irregularities exist which
conflict with the purpose of this law.
Art. 57
Audit Charges
1) The investment undertaking shall bear the audit charges.
Audit charges shall be determined according to the tariff issued
by the Government by Executive Order.
2) The agreement of a lump-sum remuneration or the spend-
ing of a certain period of time for the auditing is prohibited.
5. Princely Court of Justice
Art. 58
Penal Authority
The Princely Court of Justice is the penal authority for of-
fences and infringements pursuant to Art. 66 Para. 1 and 2.

– 410 –
B. Supervisory Measures
Art. 59
Official Information
1) The communication of official information by the Govern-
ment or the Bank Supervisory Office to foreign supervisory
authorities is permissible when cumulatively:
a) Public order, other important national interests and bank se-
crecy are not violated by this;
b) the information is not contrary to the object of this law;
c) it is ensured that the state requesting such information would
meet a Liechtenstein request of the same nature;
d) it is ensured that the information received will only be used
for the supervision of investment undertakings;
e) it is ensured that the staff of the competent authorities and
persons acting on the instructions of the competent authorities
are required to observe official and professional secrecy.
2) The Government or the Bank Supervisory Office may at
any time obtain information about the activities of Liechtenstein
investment undertakings abroad and about the financial situation
of foreign investment undertakings whose activities could affect
the Liechtenstein monetary and banking system, if this is neces-
sary according to the purpose of this law.
3) The provisions of Para. 1 and 2 may only be used when no
provision otherwise is contained in international agreements.
Art. 60
Appointment of a Trustee
1) The Bank Supervisory Office shall appoint a trustee for an
investment undertaking which is incompetent to act.
2) The appointment of a trustee must be communicated to in-
vestors by the fund management or the investment company.
3) Within one year, the trustee shall request the approval of
the Bank Supervisory Office for a new fund management or in-

– 411 –
vestment company management or for the dissolution of the in-
vestment undertaking.
4) The Bank Supervisory Office shall decide the remuneration
of the trustee.
V. Liability
Art. 61
Principle
1) Whoever, as the management of an investment undertaking,
custodian bank, paying office, auditor, assessor, liquidator or
trustee of an investment undertaking, commits a breach of his
obligations shall be liable to the investors for the prejudice which
results.
2) He is also liable for his assistants and persons acting on his
instructions.
3) A limitation of this liability is excluded.
Art. 62
Joint and Several Liability and Recourse
1) If more than one person is liable to pay damages for a
prejudice, each of them shall be jointly and severally liable with
the other(s) to the extent that the prejudice is personally attribut-
able to each of them by reason of his or her own negligence and
the circumstances.
2) In due consideration of all the circumstances, the judge shall
determine the recourse between the parties concerned.
Art. 63
Statutory Limitation
Claims to damages shall expire by limitation after a period of
ten years from the occurrence of the prejudice, but at the latest
one year after the redemption of a unit.

– 412 –
VI. Procedure and Remedies
Art. 64
Decisions and Dispositions
Should infringements of the regulations of this law or of the
Executive Orders issued in connection with it be found and
should such infringements not be corrected despite a warning and
the setting of a period of time for such corrections to be carried
out, the competent authority shall take the appropriate decisions
and issue the corresponding dispositions.
Art. 65
Remedies
1) Appeals against decisions and dispositions of the Bank Su-
pervisory Office may be lodged with the Government within 14
days of the service of such.
2) Appeals against decisions and dispositions of the Govern-
ment may be lodged with the Administrative Court within 14
days of the service of such.
VII. Penalty Provisions
Art. 66
Violations and Infringements
1) Violations by the following persons shall be punished by
the Princely Court of Justice with imprisonment of up to six
months or a fine of up to 360 daily income units:
a) Whoever as a member of a governing body and employee and
any other person acting for an investment undertaking or a
custodian bank, as an auditor or as a member of the Bank
Commission or as an employee of the Bank Supervisory
Office violates the obligation to observe confidentiality or in-
duces or attempts to induce others to do this;
b) whoever exercises an activity within the intendment of Art. 2
without a concession.

– 413 –
The two punishments may be taken together.
2) Infringements by the following persons shall be punished
by the Court of Justice with fines up to 100 000 francs:
a) Whoever violates the conditions associated with a concession
or permit;
b) whoever uses in a prohibited manner designations suggesting
an activity as an investment fund or investment company;
c) whoever provides the Government, the Bank Supervisory
Office or the auditor with false information;
d) whoever fails to keep the company books in a proper manner
or does not keep company books and records in safe custody;
e) whoever as auditor grossly violates his obligations, in particu-
lar in the audit report states false facts or conceals important
facts or omits to warn the investment undertaking as pre-
scribed or does not make the reports and notifications pre-
scribed;
f) whoever in the periodic reports, the prospectus or other in-
formation quotes false facts or conceals important facts;
g) whoever as a fund manager pursues business other than fund
business.
3) Infringements by the following persons shall be punished by
the Government with fines up to 50 000 francs:
a) Whoever fails to draw up or publish the periodic reports in
accordance with the regulations;
b) whoever does not have the ordinary audit or an audit pre-
scribed by the Bank Supervisory Office carried out;
c) whoever does not carry out his/her obligations towards the
auditor;
d) whoever does not make the prescribed notifications to the
Bank Supervisory Office;
e) whoever does not comply with a demand to establish the
proper state of affairs in conformity with the law or with an-
other disposition of the Bank Supervisory Office;
f) whoever makes improper, false or misleading statements in
advertising for an investment undertaking.

– 414 –
4) In the case of negligent commission, the upper limit of pen-
alties shall be reduced by half.
5) The facts of the irregularity specified in para. 1 shall fall un-
der the statutes of limitation after two years.
6) The general part of the Penal Code shall apply analogously
otherwise.
Art. 67
The Public Prosecutor’s Obligation to Notify
The Public Prosecutor shall notify the Bank Supervisory Of-
fice by a complete copy of all judgments and discontinuation
decisions which concern members of the administration or man-
agement of funds, investment companies and auditors.
VIII. Transitional and Final Provisions
Art. 68
Transitional Provisions
Concessions and permits pursuant to the law up to now which
do not meet the requirements of this law and the Executive Or-
ders relating thereto shall be adapted to the new law or, if need
be, withdrawn or revoked within one year of the coming into
force of the corresponding decrees.
Art. 69
Execution Orders
The Government shall issue the necessary orders for the im-
plementation of this law, especially concerning:
a) the content of the prospectus (Art. 8 Para. 3);
b) The content and layout of the business report, half-yearly
report (Art. 9 Para. 2), the short report of the auditors (Art. 9
Para. 3) and of the report on the development of the assets
managed (Art. 9 Para. 4);
c) the reasons and the maximum duration of a delay in the
redemption of the units (Art. 11 Para. 4 and 5);

– 415 –
d) the proportions for various investments (Art. 27 Para. 4);
e) the conditions for certain investments (Art. 28 Para. 3);
f) the proportion of the placement in the same investment (Art.
30 Para. 3);
g) the requirements to be met by the experts (Art. 32 Para. 1);
h) the proportions for loans or credits taken up (Art. 33);
i) the minimum sum of the net assets (Art. 43 Para. 1);
k) the fees (Art. 44);
l) the delegation of duties (Art. 51 Para. 3);
m) the detailed permit conditions for auditors (Art. 54 Para. 5);
n) the tariff for audit costs (Art. 57 Para. 1).
Art. 70
Cancellation of Previous Laws
The following shall be cancelled:
a) Law of 21 December 1960 on capital investment companies,
investment-trust and investment funds, LGBl. 1961 No. 1;
b) Law of 12 November 1986 concerning the prolongation of the
term of validity of the law on captial investment companies,
investment trusts and investment funds, LGBl. 1986 Nr. 84.
Art. 71
Entry into Force
This law shall come into force on the day of announceement.
signed Hans-Adam
signed Dr. Mario Frick
Head of the Princely Government

– 416 –

– 417 –
Liechtenstein Legal Gazette
1996 No. 116 published on 22 August 1996
Law
of 22 May 1996
on professional due diligence in
the acceptance of assets
(Due Diligence Act – Sorgfaltspflichtgesetz)
I hereby grant My Consent to the following Resolution
adopted by the Diet:
I. General Provisions
Art. 1
Object
The object of the law is the professional duty of due diligence
of the natural and juridical persons subject to this law concerning
the acceptance of assets for passing on, safe custody, management
and investment.
Art. 2
Scope
1) The following are subject to this law:
a) Banks and finance companies with a concession as specified in
the Law on Banks and Finance Companies (Bank Act);
b) attorneys-at-law who are registered in the Lawyers’ List as
specified in the Law concerning Advocates;
c) natural and juridical persons with an authorisation as specified
in the Trustees Act and members of the business management
or responsible representatives of a fiduciary company holding
an authorisation as specified in Art. 180a PGR;

– 418 –
d) investment companies with an authorisation as specified in the
Law on Investment Companies;
e) insurance undertakings holding a concession as specified in the
Law on the Supervision of Insurance Undertakings which
conduct direct life insurance.
2) The Government shall maintain lists of the persons subject
to Para. 1 of this law.
Art. 3
Post and Telecommunications Undertakings
The post and telecommunications undertakings which are
subject to special provisions in relation to duties of due diligence
are exempted from the provisions of this law.
II. Identification of the Contract Customer
and Determination of the Financial Beneficiary
Art. 4
Identification of the Contract Customer
1) The persons subject to this law are obliged to identify their
contract customer from an evidential document on establishing a
business relationship within the intendment of Art. 1. Such duty
of identification shall not apply when the contract customer is
known personally.
2) The identification of the contract customer may be waived
when:
a) A cash transaction is carried out in which a maximum value of
25 000 francs is not exceeded, irrespective of whether the
transactions is carried out in a single operation or in several
operations between which there obviously appears to be a
connection;
b) the sum of a periodic insurance premium is less than the sum
of 1500 francs annually;
c) a non-recurring insurance premium is less than 4000 francs or
less than 4000 francs are paid into a premium deposit;

– 419 –
d) it is a question of pension insurance contracts which are con-
cluded by reason of an employment contract or of the profes-
sional activity of the policy holder insofar as the contracts do
not contain a surrender clause or may not serve as security for
a loan;
3) The persons subject to this law in the case of juridical per-
sons and trusts are also obliged to identify the persons who bring
in assets when a business relationship within the intendment of
Art. 1 is established
a) with foreign banks, accountants, audit companies, fiduciary
companies or lawyers not belonging to a recognised profes-
sional organisation or not listed in any corresponding public
register or
b) with persons who do not belong to the circle of persons speci-
fied in Art. 2.
The Government shall regulate by Executive Order the further
details concerning the recognition of professional organisations
and public registers within the intendment of this law. The iden-
tification of these persons is to be carried out from an evidential
document. In the case of personal acquaintance, the noting of the
name shall suffice.
4) Persons contributing assets as specified in Para. 3 are
equated with contract customers within the intendment of this
law.
5) Passports and identity cards and other documents desig-
nated in Executive Orders by the Government shall be recognised
as evidential documents.
Art. 5
Determination of the Financial Beneficiary
1) The persons subject to this law are obliged to identify the
financial beneficiary and to note the name and address in their
files on establishing a business relationship within the intendment
of Art. 1 when:
a) There are doubts as to whether the contract customer is the
financial beneficiary; or

– 420 –
b) a cash or insurance transaction is carried out in which a maxi-
mum value as specified in Art. 4 Para. 2 is exceeded; or
c) the business relationship with a natural person is opened by
correspondence ; or
d) it is a question of a juridical person or trust which does not
conduct any trading or manufacturing enterprise or other
trade in a commercial manner in the country of domicile.
2) In the case of collective accounts or collective deposits, the
contract customer must give a complete address list of the finan-
cial beneficiaries and report every change promptly.
3) Those persons who are beneficiaries of the assets in ques-
tion are considered as financial beneficiaries within the intend-
ment of this law.
Art. 6
Exceptions from the Duty of Determination
1) The duty to determine the financial beneficiary shall not
apply:
a) When the financial beneficiary is already sufficiently well
known to the person with the duty of determination;
b) when the financial beneficiary is a juridical person whose eq-
uities are quoted on a stock exchange or belongs to a group of
companies with at least one company whose equities are
quoted on a stock exchange;
c) in business transactions between banks subject to the directive
91/308/EEC or to an equivalent ruling;
d) in business transactions between business partners subject to
Art. 2 of this law;
e) in business transactions of natural and juridical persons
who/which are subject to this law as specified in Art. 2 with a
contract customer who/which is not a juridical person subject
to this law insofar the latter is represented contractually or as a
company executive by a natural or juridical person subject to
the law.

– 421 –
2) There is no obligation to determine the financial beneficiary
in connection with accounts or deposits which are kept in the
name of lawyers registered in Liechtenstein on behalf of clients if
the lawyers are acting as trustees in bankruptcy, liquidators or in
any other forensic capacity.
Art. 7
Repetition of Identification and Determination
If in the course of the business relations doubts arise as to the
identity of the contract customer or about the financial benefici-
ary, the identification of the contract customer or the determina-
tion of the financial beneficiary must be repeated.
Art. 8
Deception
1) If there is strong suspicion that they were deceived in the
identification of the contract customer or in the details about the
financial beneficiary, the persons subject to this law
a) may end the business relations if this is possible without en-
dangering the assets;
b) may continue the business relations if the necessary correct
information is supplied without delay.
2) If the business relations are ended, the withdrawal of the as-
sets must be adequately documented.
Art. 9
Suspicion of Money Laundering
1) If from the nature and circumstances of a transaction it
must be assumed that it is connected with money laundering
within the intendment of the Penal Code, the financial back-
ground, the purpose of the transaction and the origin of the assets
must be clarified.
2) When, after the special clarifications as specified in Para. 1
have been undertaken, the strong suspicion that the transaction is

– 422 –
connected with money laundering still remains, the persons sub-
ject to this law must notify the Bank Supervisory Office without
delay. At the same time, they may also inform the Public Prose-
cutor.
3) In the case of Para. 2, the Bank Supervisory Office shall or-
der special measures, usually within five weekdays but at the most
within eight weekdays, such as the blocking of accounts for not
more than four weeks or notification of the Public Prosecutor.
The persons subject to this law have the right to block and hold
back the assets in question until the necessary dispositions of the
Bank Supervisory Office are received or until the period of eight
weekdays has expired without action having been taken.
4) The persons subject to this law may not advise the contract
customer or third parties that they have notified the Bank Super-
visory Office or the Public Prosecutor or that investigations are
being carried out by these until a disposition of the Bank Supervi-
sory Office is received or until the period of eight weekdays has
expired without action having been taken.
III. Documentation, Control and Supervision
by the Bank Supervisory Office
Art. 10
Duty of Documentation
1) The persons subject to this law must prepare documents
and records concerning the customer relations within the intend-
ment of Art. 1, the identification of the contract customer pursu-
ant to Art. 4, the determination of the financial beneficiary pursu-
ant to Art. 5 and the special obligations pursuant to Art. 7, 8 and
9 which enable expert third parties to form a reliable judgment on
the observance of the provisions of this law.
2) The documents and records are to be prepared and kept in
such a manner that any dispositions in regard to information and
confiscation issued by a court of law may be obeyed within a
reasonable time.

– 423 –
3) After the ending of the business relationship or after the
completion of the transaction, the documents and records are to
be kept for ten years. Further provisions concerning the obliga-
tion to keep the business books are reserved.
4) In those cases in which pursuant to Art. 4 Para. 2 no identi-
fication of the contract customer is to be carried out or pursuant
to Art. 6 the obligation to determine the financial beneficiary does
not apply, the name of the contract customer and the reason for
the non-determination of the financial beneficiary are to be
documented. This shall not apply to cash transactions of less than
25 000 francs or to interbank transactions.
Art. 11
Organisational Measures
The persons subject to this law must take the necessary or-
ganisational measures and arrange for suitable internal control and
supervisory measures and appropriate instruction of the staff.
Art. 12
Control
1) The banks and finance companies shall instruct their audi-
tors as prescribed under banking law, investment companies their
auditors as prescribed under investment law and insurance un-
dertakings their auditors as prescribed under supervisory insur-
ance law to spot check the observance of the provisions of this
law on the occasion of the ordinary audit.
2) All other persons subject to this law shall be spot checked
by government-authorised, admitted, auditors or audit companies
instructed by the Bank Supervisory Office, respecting the obser-
vance of this law. The juridical and natural persons mentioned
may deposit with the Bank Supervisory Office two proposals for
admitted auditors or audit companies which undertake the check
on the instruction of the Bank Supervisory Office.

– 424 –
3) The admitted auditors and audit companies shall verify
whether all the data and documents prescribed by law concerning
the identification of the contract customer and the determination
of the financial beneficiary are available in full.
4) The admitted auditors or audit companies charged with this
may not have any connection with the persons to be checked.
5) The costs for the control activities by the admitted auditors
or audit companies and the administrative costs associated with
this shall be borne by the natural and juridical persons checked.
Art. 13
Reporting
1) The admitted auditors or audit companies charged with the
control are obliged to submit their report in an anonymous form.
Any violations found are to be reported immediately to the Bank
Supervisory Office.
2) The admitted auditors or audit companies charged with the
audit are enjoined to secrecy concerning the findings made in the
course of their control activities. Art. 13 Para. 1 and Art. 14 are
reserved.
Art. 14
Supervision
1) The Bank Supervisory Office supervises the enforcement of
this law and the Executive Orders issued in connection with it
and shall take the necessary measures. In particular, it may:
a) Order audits within the intendment of Art. 12;
b) order a more comprehensive and repeated verification in re-
gard to the quality of the identification of the contract cus-
tomer and of the determination of the financial beneficiary
when there are doubts as to the observance of the obligations
under this law;
c) in the case of repeated and serious violations of individual
provisions of this law and for the avoidance of further viola-
tions, prohibit the taking up of new business relations for a
certain time;

– 425 –
d) apply to the competent authority for the appropriate discipli-
nary steps to be taken; the Bank Supervisory Office is to be
informed periodically of the state of the proceedings in prog-
ress.
2) It may demand all the information and documents needed
for the performance of the supervisory function from the persons
subject to this law and from the admitted auditors or audit com-
panies charged with the audit pursuant to Art. 12.
3) Information communicated in accordance with this law may
only be used for combatting money laundering.
4) The Bank Supervisory Office shall report violations of this
law to the authorities pursuant to Art. 15 and 16.
5) The Bank Supervisory Office shall submit an annual report
to the Government.
IV. Penal Provisions and Administrative Measures
A. Penal Provisions
Art. 15
Court of Justice
1) For offences, the Court of Justice shall punish with impris-
onment for up to six months or fines of up to 360 daily income
units any person who deliberately:
a) Does not identify the contract customer as specified in Art. 4;
b) does not determine the financial beneficiary as specified in
Art. 5;
c) does not repeat the identification of the contract customer and
the determination of the financial beneficiary as specified in
Art. 7;
d) does not carry out the special clarification as specified in Art. 9
Para. 1;
e) omits to notify the Bank Supervisory Office as specified in
Art. 9 Para. 2;
f) does not prepare and keep the documentation as specified in
Art. 10;

– 426 –
g) does not have the control carried out by accountants or audit
companies as specified in Art. 12;
h) as an admitted auditor or audit company as specified in Art. 12
commits a gross breach of his/its obligations, especially in the
audit reports states untrue facts or conceals important facts or
does not make the reports prescribed to the Bank Supervisory
Office.
2) The Court of Justice shall punish with imprisonment for up
to six months or fines of up to 360 daily income units any person
who as an admitted auditor or an auditor of an audit company
commits a breach of the obligation of secrecy as specified in
Art. 13.
Art. 16
Government
The Government shall punish with fines of up to 100 000
francs any person who:
a) Refuses information to, states false facts to or conceals impor-
tant facts from the Bank Supervisory Office or an admitted
auditor or an audit company;
b) does not comply with the demand to establish the state which
complies with the law or with another disposition of the Bank
Supervisory Office.
Art. 17
Applicability of other Penal Codes
The penal liability by reason of other penal codes is reserved.
Art. 18
Responsibility
If the contraventions are committed in the business operations
of a juridical person or of a trust, the penal provisions shall apply
to the persons who acted or should have acted for them, but with
the joint and several liability of the juridical person or trust prop-
erty for fines, penalties and costs.

– 427 –
B. Administrative Measures
Art. 19
Reservation of Further Measures
1) Measures as specified in the Bank Act, the Law on Invest-
ment Undertakings, the Supervisory Insurance Law, the Law on
Trustees, the Law concerning Advocates and the Liechtenstein
Persons and Companies Act are reserved.
2) Measures against the audit departments of banks and fi-
nance companies, investment companies and insurance undertak-
ings and against admitted auditors and audit companies are also
reserved as specified in the relevant special laws.
C. Notifications by the Public Prosecutor
Art. 20
The Public Prosecutor’s Obligation to Notify
The Public Prosecutor shall notify the Bank Supervisory
Office of all decisions to drop proceedings or of judgments pro-
nounced by reason of proceedings as specified in Art. 15.
V. Concluding Provisions
Art. 21
Implementation
1) The Government shall issue the Executive Orders necessary
for the implementation of this law, especially on:
a) The recognition of documents and identity papers for the
identification of the contract customer (Art. 4);
b) the conditions for the recognition of professional organisa-
tions and public registers (Art. 4 Para. 3);
c) the procedure for the determination of the financial benefici-
ary (Art. 5);
d) the procedure for the repetition of identification and determi-
nation (Art. 7).

– 428 –
Art. 22
Transitional Provision
Art. 7, 8 and 9 also apply to customer relations which already
existed when this law came into force.
Art. 23
Entry into Force
This law shall come into force on 1 January 1997.
signed Hans-Adam
signed Dr. Mario Frick
Head of the Princely Government

– 429 –
Liechtenstein Legal Gazette
1997 No. 210 published on 19 December 1997
Law
of 23 October 1997
on the Provision, Control and Distribution
of the Prospectus to be published on the Occasion of
the Public Offer of Securities (Prospectus Law)
I hereby Grant My Consent to the following Resolution
adopted by the Diet:
Art. 1
Object
This law regulates the conditions for the provision, control
and distribution of the prospectus to be published on the occasion
of the initial public offer of securities.
Art. 2
Definitions
1) A public offer is declaration of intent, not addressed to
certain persons, to dispose of securities.
2) Securities within the intendment of this law shall be shares,
participation certificates, dividend-right certificates, bonds, mort-
gage bonds, medium-term notes (Kassaobligationen, Kassa-
scheine) and other securities if these are exchangeable, also non-
documented rights having the same function (value rights).
3) Issuers are companies, other juridical persons and all un-
dertakings whose securities are the subject of a public offer.

– 430 –
4) Euro securities are securities.
a) which are securely taken over and sold by a consortium, two
members of which, at least, are domiciled in different states
b) of which at least 30 % of the issue are issued in one or more
than one state which is not the state of the issuer and
c) which may be subscribed or initially acquired through only
one bank or finance company.
Art. 3
Obligation to Provide a Prospectus
1) An initial public offer of securities in Liechtenstein may en-
sue only if the person making the offer has published a prospectus
which has been prepared and controlled in accordance with the
provisions of this law.
2) The prospectus must be published or be available to the
public at the time the offer is opened, at the latest.
3) If the public offer relates to only a part of an issue, a new
prospectus need not be published if the remaining part of the
securities is to be the subject matter of a later public offer.
4) Should one of these prospectuses pursuant to the law have
been published less than twelve months previously, it shall suffice
in the case of an offer, for which a prospectus is prescribed, in-
volving the acquisition of other securities from the same issuer, if
the amendments made since the last publication, which may influ-
ence the assessments of these securities, are published in accor-
dance with the same terms of procedure as in the original pro-
spectus. This prospectus may only be submitted together with the
complete prospectus to which it refers, or with a reference to this.
5) Every new occurrence or every inaccuracy of the prospec-
tus must, if these could have a decisive influence on the evaluation
of the securities and take place or are determined in the time be-
tween the publication of the prospectus and when the offer is
finally closed, be mentioned or reported in a supplement to the
prospectus, in accordance with the same terms of procedure as
those in the original prospectus.

– 431 –
6) Before its publication, the prospectus must be submitted to
the competent offices in every member state of the European
Economic Area in which the securities are offered publicly for the
first time.
7) Announcements, notices, placards and documents in which
the public offer is announced and those from the person who
submitted the public offer, distributed or kept it available for the
public, must also be submitted to these offices beforehand, in case
the latter undertake a preliminary check. The supporting docu-
ments must state that a prospectus is provided and where this
prospecuts was published.
Art. 4
Exemptions from the Obligation to Provide a Prospectus
The obligation to provide a prospectus pursuant to Art. 3 shall
not apply in the case of:
a) Securities of the State or the Communes;
b) securities of a state or one of its territorial entities or an inter-
national organisation under public law which belongs to at
least to one member state of the European Economic Area;
c) securities which are only offered to a restricted category of
people, known to the offerer individually;
d) securities which are offered to persons within the framework
of their professional or trade activities,
e) securities in the case of which the selling price of the entire
issue does not exceed 40,000 ECU or the corresponding
equivalent sum;
f) securities which, subdivided, are offered at 40,000 ECU at
least, or the corresponding equivalent sum or securities which
cannot be acquired below this value by an individual investor;
g) bonds or medium-term notes which are issued continuously or
repeatedly by Liechtenstein banks, by banking institutions
admitted to a member state of the European Economic Area
or banks subject to a regulation of equal value;
h) bonds whose term does not exceed one year;

– 432 –
i) participation certificates which are offered by investment un-
dertakings other than the closed-end type. In the case of these
participations the obligations to provide a prospectus shall be
in accordance with the law on investment undertakings;
k) securities which are offered in the case of a public conversion
offer or in the case of a fusion of corporations,
l) shares which are allocated to a bearer of shares without valu-
able consideration;
m) shares or securities on an equal footing with shares which are
offered in place of shares of the same company, without the
offer of these new securities effecting on overall increase in the
company capital;
n) securities which an employee or an associated undertaking
offers to his (its) present or former employees or in their fa-
vour;
o) securities which originate from the conversion of convertible
bonds or from the exercise of rights from subscription war-
rants, or shares which are issued in exchange for interchange-
able bonds, insofar as a prospectus is issued for the public of-
fer or the admission to the stock exchange with respect to
these convertible or interchangeable bonds or these subscrip-
tion warrants;
p) Euro securities which are not publicly advertised and are not
canvassed.
Art. 5
Content of the Prospectus
1) The prospectus must be written in the German language
and must contain all the information necessary to enable the in-
vestor to form a sound judgment concerning the assets, financial
and earnings situation of the issuer and his prospects of develop-
ment, also concerning the rights associated with the securities.
2) The prospectus must bear the date of issue and must be
signed by the issuer.

– 433 –
3) The prospectus must be drawn up in accordance with the
provisions in the appendix in a manner which renders the pro-
spectus readily understandable and simplifies its evaluation.
4) The Bank Supervisory Office may determine that certain
items of information need not be included in the prospectus if:
a) These data are of minor importance and are not likely to influ-
ence the assessment of the issuer’s asset, financial and income
situation and the prospect of his development;
b) the distribution of these items of information are not in the
public interest or would cauce the issuer considerable harm,
insofar as in the latter case the non-publication does not mis-
lead the public concerning the facts and circumstances essen-
tial for the assessment of the securities.
Art. 6
Approval of the Prospectus
1) The prospectus and possible amendments pursuant to Art.
3 para. 4 and 5 must be approved by the Bank Supervisory Office
before being published.
2) The Bank Supervisory Office must reach a decision con-
cerning approval within eight weeks of the prospectus being sub-
mitted.
Art. 7
Publication of the Prospectus
1) The Prospectus shall be published:
a) By means of a full reproduction in the Liechtenstein newspa-
per; or
b) by being held in readiness, free of charge, at the domicile of
the issuer and at the paying offices mentioned in the prospec-
tus.
2) In addition, a notice shall be printed in the Liechtenstein
newspapers stating where the prospectus is published and where
it is available to the public.

– 434 –
3) When individual conditions relating to the offer, such as
the selling price or the interest rate, are not determined until
shortly before the offer is published, the prospectus may be pub-
lished without this information when this circumstance is pointed
out in the prospectus and the lacking information will be pub-
lished in the same way as the prospectus itself. As soon as these
items of information have been determined, they must be signed,
checked and published in the same way as the prospecuts.
Art. 8
Recognition of Prospectus Admitted to the Stock Exchange
and Others
1) The person who submits the public offer may also provide
a prospectus whose content is determined with regard to the par-
ticularities of public offers pursuant to the guideline 80/390/EEC.
Such a prospectus, drawn up in the German language or trans-
lated into the German language, shall be deemed to be adequate
within the intendment of Art. 5 para. 1.
2) If at the time of the public offer, at the latest, the issuer has
submitted an application for the admission of the securities in-
cluded in the public offer for official quotation on a stock (securi-
ties) exchange in one of the other member states of the European
Economic Area, a prospectus which is drawn up in the German
language or translated into the German language, and whose
content as well as the conditions of its control and distribution
take into account the particularities of public offers pursuant to
the guideline 80/390/EEC shall be deemed to be adequate within
the intendment of Art. 5 para. 1.
3) A prospectus of an issuer from a third country outside the
European Economic Area, which fulfils the requirements of this
law, is drawn up in German language or has been translated into
the German language and has been approved by the competent
office shall be deemed to be adequate withing the intendment of
Art. 5 para. 1.
4) The prospectus shall include additional information which
relates specifically to the Liechtenstein market pursuant to Art. 10
para. 5.

– 435 –
Art. 9
Competance
1) The Bank Supervisory Office shall supervise the imple-
mentation of this law and to this end shall take then necessary
measures.
2) In particular, the Bank Supervisory Office shall be respon-
sible for the checking and approval of the prospectus.
3) The Bank Supervisory Office shall cooperate with the cor-
responding offices of the member states of the European Eco-
nomic Area within the framework of its duties and authority and
shall exchange the information necessary for this, insofar as offi-
cial secrecy is assured.
Art. 10
Cooperation within the European Economic Area
1) If public offers for the same securities are made simultane-
ously or almost simultaneously in several member states of the
European Economic Area, the Bank Supervisory Office shall be
responsible for the approval of the prospectus when the issuer is
domiciled in Liechtenstein and Liechtenstein is affected by the
public offer.
2) If the securities of an issuer whose domicile is in a member
state of the European Economic Area other than Liechtenstein
form the subject matter of an offer which must be accompanied
by a prospectus and if this offer is issued simultaneously or al-
most simultaneously in Liechtenstein and in another member
state of the European Economic Area, a prospectus within the
intendment of Art. 5 para. 1 shall be deemed to be adequate,
a) if it has been drawn up in the German language or translated
into the German language, and
b) has been approved by the office competent in the state in
which the issuer is domiciled, and
c) this state provides a prospectus control which is equal in qual-
ity to the provisions of this law,

– 436 –
d) an application for official quotation of the securities has been
submitted in this state or a public offer has ensued.
3) If the state of domicile does not provide prospectus control
within the intendment of para. 2 or the official quotation of the
securities on a stock (securities) exchange domiciled there cannot
be applied for, or no public offer ensues, the prospectus may also
be approved by the competent offices of any other member state
of the European Economic Area, insofar as this state provides a
prospectus control which is equal in quality to the provisions of
this law and admission for official quotation of the securities was
applied for or a public offer ensued.
4) The confirmation of approval of the competent office shall
be sent to the Bank Supervisory Office together with the pro-
spectus so as to be to hand on the day of publication, at the latest.
5) The prospectus shall include additional information which
relates specifically to the Liechtenstein market concerning, in
particular, the fiscal treatment of the yield, the banks operating in
Liechtenstein as paying agents also the manner in which the an-
nouncements concerning securities are published.
6) Should a public offer of securities ensuing in Liechtenstein
establish, by way of a subscription right, access to the capital of
an undertaking domiciled in another member state of the Euro-
pean Economic Area and if the participation papers of this issuer
are already admitted for official quotation in this member state,
the Bank Supervisory Office shall consult the competent offices
of this member state before approving the prospectus.
Art. 11
Official Information
1) The provision of official information by the Bank Supervi-
sory Office shall be admissible when:
a) The public order, other essential state interests and banking
secrecy are not violated thereby;
b) the information does not oppose the object of this law;

– 437 –
c) it is assured that the state seeking information would comply
with Liechtenstein’s similar request for information;
d) it is assured that the information would only be used for the
purposes of foreign laws which are comparable with this law;
e) it is assured that the employees of the competent authorities
also the persons instructed by the competent authorities are
subject to professional secrecy.
2) If, according to the object of this law, this should be neces-
sary, the Government or the Bank Supervisory Office may at any
time call for information concerning the activities of Liechtenstein
companies abroad and the financial relations of foreign compa-
nies.
3) The provisions of para. 1 and 2 shall be applied only pro-
vided interstate agreements do not determine to the contrary.
Art. 12
Maintenance of Secrecy
1) If, during the course of their official activities representa-
tives of authorities gain knowledge of facts which are subject to
the maintenance of secrecy, they shall treat these secrets as official
secrets.
2) Non-compliance shall be punished in accordance with
Art. 4.
3) The legal provisions concerning the duty to testify or dis-
close before penal courts are reserved.
Art. 13
Liability
If information in a prospective to be provided pursuant to this
law is incorrect or incomplete or if a prospectus in accordance
with these provisions was not provided, the persons who pro-
vided the prospectus or should have provided it shall be jointly
and severally liable to all the investors for the damage resulting
from this.

– 438 –
Art. 14
Penal Provisions
1) Violations by the following persons shall be punished by
the Court of Justice with imprisonment of up to six months or a
fine of up to 360 daily income units.
a) Whoever as an employee of the Bank Supervisory Office vio-
lates the obligation to observe confidentiality or induces oth-
ers to do this;
b) whoever in connection with a public offer of securities for
which, pursuant to this law, a prospectus must be provided,
furnishes incorrect information in the published prospectus or
withholds disadvantageous facts with respect to important cir-
cumstances relevant to the decision concerning acquisition.
2) The court of Justice shall punish on grounds of infringe-
ment, with a fine of up to 100,000 francs whoever, in connection
with a public offer of securities for which, pursuant to this law, a
prospectus must be provided, offers securities without publishing
in due time a controlled prospectus in the prescribed form.
Art. 15
Repeal of Provisions in the Law on Persons and Companies
Art. 282 and 298 also § 80 and § 80a Concluding Section of the
Law on Persons and Companies shall be repealed.
Art. 16
Entry into Force
This law shall enter in to force on the 1 January 1998
signed Hans-Adam
signed Dr. Mario Frick
Head of the Princely Government

– 439 –
Appendix
Minimum Content of the Prospectus Pursuant to Art. 5
In addition to the legally required content the prospectus must
contain at the least the following:
A. General Requirements
1. Information concerning the persons assuming responsi-
bility for the prospectus
1.1 Name and position of these persons, in the case of juridical
persons, company name, legal form and domicile;
1.2 declaration that to their knowledge the information con-
tained in the prospectus is correct and no facts that could
change the statements in the prospectus have been withheld.
2. Information concerning the Public Offer and the securi-
ties offered
2.1 The kind of securities offered;
2.2 the amount and the purpose of the issue;
2.3 the numer of securities issued;
2.4 the rights associated with the securities;
2.5 the tax deducted at source on the yield;
2.6 period of time fixed for the subscription;
2.7 commencement of the dividend entitlement;
2.8 persons who have firmly acquired the offer or have guaran-
teed to do so;
2.9 restriction of the negotiability of the securities offered;
2.10 markets where the securities may be traded;
2.11 facilities which function as paying and depositing offices;
2.12 the price at which the securities will be offered, if this is
known;
2.13 terms of procedure and time scale for the determination of
the price if this is not known at the time the prospectus is
drawn up;

– 440 –
2.14 terms of payment;
2.15 manner of exercising the subscription rights;
2.16 terms of procedure and time limits for the delivery of the
securities.
3. Information concerning the Issuer and his Capital
3.1 Name of the company;
3.2 domicile;
3.3 date of formation;
3.4 legal form and valid legal system;
3.5 Purpose (object) of business;
3.6 information concerning Register and Register entry number;
3.7 amount of capital subscribed;
3.8 number and main features of the shares which represent this
capital;
3.9 amount of subscribed capital not paid in;
3.10 the amount of the convertible bonds, exchangeable bonds or
option loans with information concerning the conversion,
exchange or subscription conditions;
3.11 details of the concern to which the issuer belongs;
3.12 all the shares not representing the capital;
3.13 the amount of approved capital and the duration of the
authorisation;
3.14 details of the shareholders who exercise or may exercise,
directly or indirectly, a dominating role in the management
of the issuer.
4. Information concerning the Issuer’s Main Spheres of
Activity
4.1 Description of the main activities;
4.2 details of extraordinary occurrences which influenced the
activity;
4.3 dependence upon patents, licences or agreements, if these
factors are of important significance;
4.4 information concerning current investments of considerable
extent;
4.5 details of court proceedings which have a considerable influ-
ence on the issuer’s financial situation.

– 441 –
5. Information concerning the Issuer’s Asset, Financial and
Income Position
5.1 Annual accounts and, where appropriate, consolidated fi-
nancial statement;
if the issuer only prepares a consolidated annual account, he
shall include this in the prospectus. If the issuer prepares not
only a non-consolidated, but also a consolidated annual ac-
count, he shall include both in the prospectus. However, he
need only include one of these if the annual account not in-
cluded does not contain any essential additional statements;
5.2 interim survey in the event that one has been published since
the conclusion of the previous business year;
5.3 name and address of the persons entrusted with the audit;
5.4 if the auditors made reservations or declined to certify the
account, this fact and reasons for it must be stated.
6. Details of the members of the board of directors, the
management and the supervisory bodies of the issuer
6.1 Name;
6.2 address;
6.3 position;
6.4 in the case of a public offer of shares of a corporation reim-
bursement (salaries, profit sharing, reimbursement of expen-
diture, commission, performance of additional services, etc.)
of the members of the administrative bodies and/or the
management and supervisory bodies.
7. Details of the most recent course of business and the
prospects of business of the issuer, insofar as this informa-
tion is of essential significance for a possible assessment of
the issuer
7.1 The most important and most recent tendencies with respect
to the course of the issuer’s business since the conclusion of
the previous business year;
7.2 details of the prospects of the issuer, at least for the current
year;

– 442 –
B. Further Provisions
1. If the public offer relates to bonds which are guaranteed by
one or several juridical persons, the information provided
for under the sub-items A. 3. to 7. must also apply to the
guarantor(s).
2. If the public offer relates to convertible bonds, exchangeable
bonds, option loans or subscription warrants additional in-
formation must be provided concerning the kind of shares
or bonds to which the right of subscriptions applies, also
concerning the conditions and terms of procedure of the
conversion, the exchange or the subscription. If the issuer of
the shares or the bond is not the same issuer as the issuer of
the bonds or the subscription warrants, the information
provided for under the sub-items A. 3. to 7 must also apply
to the issuer of the shares or the bonds.
3. If the time during which an issuer has been active is shorter
than the periods of time stated under the sub-item A, the
information must be furnished only for the time during
which the issuer has been active.
4. Insofar as the information required under sub-item A con-
cerning the activity or the juridical form of the issuer, or
concerning the kind of securities offered proves to be inap-
propriate, a prospectus must be prepared containing infor-
mation of equal value.

– 443 –
GLOSSARIUM GLOSSARY
A
Angabe statement, declaration,
specification
Abteilung division
allenfalls at all events, if need be, at most,
at best, possibly, perhaps
Amtsbefehlsverfahren injunction proceedings
Amtsstelle government office
Androhung und Wirkung warning and effect
Anfall devolution
Anfallberechtigten allottees
anfechten challenge
Anfechtung rescission
Anfechtungsklage action to rescind action for
avoidance
Anfechtungsordnung voidance order, e.g. of creditors
anmelden register, apply
Ansprecher claimant
Anteilinhaber unit holder (law on investment
undertakings)
Anteilsgesellschaft unusual form of legal entity, with
members holding shares of no par
value, members may also have
membership dues similar to an as-
sociation (see Art.375 German
text- not translated)
Antrag petition, application
Anwärter reversioner
Anzeige announcement
Anzeiger informer
Aufgebot application for a public citation
Aufgebotsverfahren public citation proceedings sum-
moned by public citation
Aufhebung cancellation

– 444 –
Aufhebungsverfahren cancellation proceedings
Auflagen conditions (tied to a condition)
Aufsichtsrat supervisory board
Ausführungsbestimmung implementing provision
Ausgestaltung structure
Auslösung redemption
Auslösungssumme redemption sum
Ausscheidung setting aside, withdrawal
Ausschliessung exclusion
B
Bestimmung provision
bedingt, befristed qualified, limited
beendete Verbandsperson terminated legal entity
begründend establishing
Begünstigung beneficial interest
bei sonstiger Exekution otherwise distraint shall be levied
Beistand legal adviser
Beistatuten by-articles, by-statute, by-laws
(binding non-public dispositions)
Beizug in consultation with
Belastung charge
Berechtigung entitlement right
Beschlagnahme seizure
Buchprüfer/Wirtschaftsprüfer auditor/duly admitted auditor
(Please note this distinction was
effected by the law dated
9.12.1992 and applies to all laws
and regulations since then)

– 445 –
C
cessio legis assignment by operation of the
law
conditio sine qua non (absolute) condition (precedent)
culpa in contrahendo faulty happening prior to conclu-
sion of contract
D
Dauer duration
Dauerdelikt continuing offence
Depotgeschäft security deposit business
dinglich real, in rem
E
Ermächtigung power of authority
Eigenkapital capital resources
Eigenvermögen own assets
Einlösungsrecht right of redemption
Einschränkung limitation
Entscheid rule, adjudication by means of
adjudication
Ergänzung (Law) amendment
Erledigung eines Verfahrens the case is finally disposed of
Erlös proceeds
Errichtungsurkunde formation deed
Ersatztreuhänder substitute trustee
Erstgeborenenrecht rule of primogeniture
Ertrag yield
Erträgnis income
etwas anderes bestimmt unless determined otherwise
EWR EEA (European Economie Area)

– 446 –
F
Firma firm’s name, firm
die Fehlbaren the suspected persons or culpable
parties
freihändig by private contract
Fürstl. Landrichter Princely Judge
G
Gemeinschaft der Gläubiger
bei Anleihenobligationen community of loan security
creditors; the law relating to the
rights of bondholders
gegen jedermann seffective with respect to all
parties
Gegner opposing party
Geldleistung monetary payments
Gemeinschuldner common debtor
gemischte Genossenschaft mixed co-op soc.
geregelt ordered
Gerichtsstand legal venue or court of
jurisdiction
Gesamtrechtsnachfolger universal successor(s) in title
Gewerbe business
Gewinn profit, gain, earnings
ggf. in that case, if need be, if neces-
sary, if the case arises, if it so
happens
Gläubigerausschuss creditors committee
Gläubigerschaft creditors, community of creditors
Grundbuch Land Register
Gutgläubiger Besitzer bona fide owner

– 447 –
H
Habe belongings, possessions
Habe/bewegliche personal estate, movables
Haftanordnung remand order, order for arrest
haftbar liable
Haftentschädigung compensation payment for
deprivation of liberty
Haftgrund reason for arrest
Haftprüfungsrichter remand judge
heilen cure
Herkunftsstaat home state
bei sonstiger Hinfälligkeit being otherwise invalid
Hinterleger bailor, depositor
hinterlegt deposited
Hinterlegung depositing
I
Inhalt terms, content
Immaterialgüter intangibles, intangible assets
Inanspruchnahme utilisation, availment
Inanspruchnahme der Quote drawings on the quota
Inanspruchnahme
einer Garantie implementation of a guarantee
Inhaber der Gründerrechte bearer of the founder’s rights
Inhaberaktie bearer share
Inhaberanteilschein investment certificate made out to
bearer
Inkasso cash against documents
Inpfandnahme accepting a pledge
Inverzugsetzung giving notice of default

– 448 –
J
Jahreserhebung annual assessment
Junktim-Klausel reciprocal clause or joint per-
formance clause
K
Kollegialorgan body forming a board
Kollektivgesellschaft general partnership
Konkursverwaltung trusteeship in bankruptcy admini-
stration of a bankrupt’s estate
Kontrollstelle audit authority
L
Fürstl. Landgericht Princely Court of Justice,
Court of Justice
Liquidationsmasse liquidation assets
Liquidationsstelle liquidation body
M
Massgabe instruction, directive
mit der Massgabe on the understanding that, on the
condition that, subject to
N
Nachholung retrieval
nach Massgabe pursuant to, etc.
Nachbarstellung vicinal position
Nachlassverfahren administration proceedings,
probate proceedings

– 449 –
Nachlassverfahren als
Ausgleichsverfahren administration proceedings as
settlement procedure
Niederlassung business establishment
Nutzung use, utilization, emoluments
O
Obligationsrecht Code of Obligations
öffentliche Urkunde authenticated deed or publicly
notarised deed
ohne Geschäftsbetrieb inactive or dormant company
Ordnung provisions
Organe bodies
P
Personenkreis category of beneficiaries
Persönlichkeit (legal personality)
Prozesskurator proceedings administrator
Prozesskurator proceedings trustee
R
Rechtsschutz protection of the law
Rechtsfürsorgerverfahren extra-judiciall proceedings
rechtskräftig finally and conclusively
Rechtsöffnungverfahren summary proceedings
Regelung ruling
Registerführer Registrar
Retentionsrecht right of retention
richten, sich richten nach shall conform with, shall be in
harmony with

– 450 –
S
stillschweigend implicit (tacit)
Satzung Articles
Sicherheitsleistung security deposit
Sicherungsbot interim injunction, interlocutory
injunction
Sitz domicile (head office)
Stiftungsrat foundation council
T
Treuhandbrief unilateral trust instrument
Treuanordnung trust instrument
Treuepflicht duty to be loyal, allegiance
treugeberisch mandatory
Treugeschäft trust transaction
Treugut trust property
das stillschweigende
Treuhandverhältnis the implied trust relationship
das vermutete
Treuhandverhältnis the presumed trust relationship
treuhänderisches
Treuhänderschaft trust
Unternehmen fiduciary undertaking
Treuhänderrat board of trustees
Treuhandstelle trust body
Treuhandurkunde trust deed
Treusatzung trust articles
Treustiftung trust foundation
Treuurkunde trust instrument
Trödelvertrag consignment contract

– 451 –
U
Umlageverfahren contribution proceedings
unanfechtbar non-appealable, incontestable
(ins)
V
Verbandsperson legal entity
bei sonstiger
Verantwortlichkeit or otherwise bear responsibility
veräussern alienate, dispose of
Verbindlichkeit indebtedness
Verjährung statutory limitation
Verletzung der Treuepflicht breach of trust
Vermittleramt mediator office
Vermögensanfall accession of property
Vermögensteile elements of capital
Vernichtbarkeitsverfahren voidability proceedings
Vernichtung (also) voidability
Verordnung executive order, by way of
statutory instrument
Verordnungsweg by way of statutory instrument
Verrechnungswesen clearing system
Vertragspartner contract customer
(duty of due diligence act)
Verwalter administrator
Verwaltung board of administration
Verwaltungsklage Administrative Court action
Verwaltungsrat board of directors
Verwaltungszwangsverfahren the applic. of admin. compulsion
bei sonstiger Verwirkung
dieses Rechts otherwise this right shall be for-
feited, save for this right being
otherwise forfeited
Vinkulation restriction of transferability
Vinkulierung von Aktien restriction on transfer of shares

– 452 –
Vollmacht power of agency, power of
attorney
Vollstreckbarkeitserklärung writ of execution
vorhanden present
Vorschrift regulation
W
wesentlich essential
wiederkehrende Vergütungen periodic payments
Willensvollstrecker Executor
Wirtschaftlich
berechtigte Person financial beneficiary
Wirtschaftsprüfer/Buchprüfer duly admitted auditor/auditor
(Please note this distinction was
effected by the Law dated
9.12.1992 and applies to all Laws
and Regulations since then)
wohlerworbene Rechte vested rights
Z
Zustiftung foundation without legal
personality
zusätzl. Treuhänder additional trustee
Zusicherung undertaking
Zwangsverwalter sequestrator
zwingend obligatory

Bryan Jeeves OBE, FinstD
Bryan Jeeves, born 1940 in Croydon, was employed at first in Lon-
don, thereafter in Germany and France, and came to Liechtenstein
during 1962.
Since 1966 he has been active as interpreter and translator in Liech-
tenstein to the Princely House, the Princely Government, the judi-
ciary and private companies. For over 20 years he has served on the
bench of the Princely Court of Justice as adviser for litigation held
in the English language.
An indepent businessman since 1965, he is the Chairman of the
Jeeves Group of Companies, Vaduz, Liechtenstein and St. Vincent
& the Grenadines, with subsidiaries and partnerships in many
other countries. As Group chairman, he acts as Partner of Lex-
admin Trust, reg., Vaduz and other various consultancy and com-
mercial firms, as well as being on the board of many other domestic
and foreign companies.
He was elected during 1994 as Vice President of COBCOE, which
is the Council of British Chambers of Commerce in Continental
Europe, representing Chambers in 22 European countries, and is
their current President since October 1995.– 453–

He is the principal of the group translation firm in Vaduz and was
the first to be officially admitted by the Princely Liechtenstein Go-
vernment during 1979. In the Spring of 1992 he published the only
existing English version of Liechtenstein Company Law, also avail-
able on CD-ROM, and now 1999 the second up-dated edition.
During 1992 he was appointed as Honorary British Consul to the
Principality of Liechtenstein, which was the first time the UK had a
resident representative in Liechtenstein. He is Secretary General to
the Liechtenstein Consular Association.– 454–

In HM Queen Elizabeth II’s Birthday Honours List of June 1993,
he was appointed as an Officer of the Most Excellent Order of the
British Empire (OBE) in acknowledgement of services rendered.
The St. Vincent Government appointed Bryan Jeeves to their
Board of the St. Vincent Trust Authority in Kingstown. Under the
new legislation a new Offshore Finance Authority has been created
to replace the Trust Authority.
He has been a member of the British Swiss Chamber of Commerce
since 1964, he is their longest serving Councillor and was Vice Pre-
sident from 1988 to 1991 and President of this Chamber from 1991
to 1993.
Through his hobby tennis, he became President of the Liechten-
stein Junior Tennis Committee. After sucessfully building up junior
competitive tennis over a period of 10 years, he was elected during
1991 as first honorary member of the Liechtenstein Tennis Associa-
tion. He has been President of the British Club in Liechtenstein
since its formation in 1970, as well as founding member and Chair-
man of the Conference of Foreign Associations in Liechtenstein
(KAFL). As a founder member of the Kiwanis Club Liechtenstein
he was their President 1979/80. He is a Chairman for the British
Alpbach Committee, has been a Fellow of the Institute of Directors
since 1968 and is a member of the Carlton Club, London.
Married since 1965 to Hanni Jeeves-Ritter from Liechtenstein he
resides in Schaan, Liechtenstein. His son Alexander B. Jeeves, who
is the Honorary Consul for St. Vincent & the Grenadines, is Gene-
ral Manager of the Jeeves Group of Companies.– 455–

Bryan Jeeves OBE, FinstD
Bryan Jeeves, geboren 1940 in Croydon, arbeitete zuerst in Lon-
don, danach in Deutschland und Frankreich und kam 1962 nach
Liechtenstein.
In Liechtenstein ist er seit 1966 als Dolmetscher und Übersetzer für
das Fürstenhaus, die Regierung, für Anwalts- und private Firmen
tätig. Seit über 20 Jahren fungiert er am Fürstlichen Landgericht
als Sachverständiger bei Verhandlungen in englischer Sprache .
Als selbständiger Kaufmann seit 1965 ist er der Vorsitzende der
Jeeves Group of Companies, Vaduz, Liechtenstein und St. Vincent
& the Grenadines, sowie Tochtergesellschaften und Firmenbeteili-
gungen in anderen Ländern. Als Vorsitzender ist er Partner des
Lexadmin Trust, reg., Vaduz, und diverser Beratungsfirmen, sowie
Verwaltungsrat vieler anderer inländischer und ausländischer Ge-
sellschaften.
Er wurde 1994 zum Vizepräsidenten von COBCOE (Rat der Bri-
tischen Handelskammern in Kontinentaleuropa) gewählt, der diese
Handelskammern in 22 europäischen Ländern vertritt, und ist seit
Oktober 1995 ihr Präsident.
Er ist Gründer eines Übersetzungsbüros in Vaduz, das 1979 von
der Fürstlich Liechtensteinischen Regierung als erstes amtlich zuge-
lassen wurde. Im Frühjahr 1992 veröffentlichte er die erste engli-
sche Fassung des Liechtensteinischen Gesellschaftsrechts, auch auf
CD-ROM, und jetzt 1999 die zweite, aktualisierte Auflage.
1992 wurde er zum Britischen Honorarkonsul des Fürstentums be-
stellt. Es war das erste Mal, dass Grossbritannien einen in Liechten-
stein ansässigen Repräsentanten hatte. Er ist Generalsekretär der
liechtensteinischen Konsularvereinigung.
In der Liste für Ordensverleihungen vom Juni 1993 anlässlich des
Geburtstages Ihrer königlichen Hoheit, der Königin Elizabeth II.,
wurde er in Anerkennung seiner Dienste zum Officer of the Most
Excellent Order of the British Empire (OBE) ernannt.
Die Regierung von St. Vincent bestellte Bryan Jeeves in den Vor-
stand der St. Vincent Trust Authority in Kingstown. Unter der neu-
en Gesetzgebung wurde als Nachfolgerin der Trust Authority eine
neue Offshore Finance Authority geschaffen. – 456–

Seit 1964 ist er Mitglied der BritischSchweizerischen Handelskam-
mer. Er ist ihr dienstältestes Ratsmitglied und amtierte von 1988
bis 1991 als Vizepräsident und von 1991 bis 1993 als Präsident die-
ser Organisation.
Durch sein Hobby Tennis würde er Präsident der Juniorenkom-
mission des Liechtensteinischen Tennisverbandes. Über einen Zeit-
raum von 10 Jahren baute er das Juniorentennis erfolgreich auf
und wurde 1991 zum ersten Ehrenmitglied des Liechtensteinischen
Tennisverbandes ernannt. Seit der Gründung im Jahre 1970 ist er
Präsident des British Club in Liechtenstein sowie Gründungsmit-
glied und Vorsitzender der Konferenz der Auslandsvereinigungen
in Liechtenstein. Als Gründungsmitglied des Kiwanis Club Liech-
tenstein würde er 1979/80 sein Präsident. Er ist Vorsitzender des
britischen Alpbach-Komitees, seit 1968 Fellow of the Institute of
Directors und Mitglied des Carlton Club, London.
Bryan Jeeves ist seit 1965 mit der Liechtensteinerin Hanni Jeeves-
Ritter verheiratet und wohnt in Schaan, Liechtenstein. Sein Sohn
Alexander B. Jeeves ist General Manager der Jeeves Group sowie
Honorar Konsul von St. Vincent & the Grenadines. – 457–